990-1012-001, Rev. B Release 6.0.

T7000 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE MANUAL

www.taqua.com

Taqua
740 East Campbell Road, Suite 200 Richardson, TX 75081 Main Phone: (972) 692-1800 TAC Support: 1-866-792-0198 For software licensing information, e-mail Taqua Marketing at simplify@taqua.com. 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Taqua All rights reserved. T7000, dryIse, ISE, ISEHouse, OpenManager, and OM Server are trademarks of Taqua. All products, names and services are trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Disclaimer of Taqua: Material contained in this document is subject to change without notice. The material herein is solely for information purposes and does not represent a commitment by Taqua, or its representatives. Taqua has prepared the information contained in this document solely for use by its employees, agents, and customers. Dissemination of this information and/or concepts to other parties is prohibited without the prior written consent of Taqua. In no event will Taqua be liable for any incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material. Taqua reserves the right to revise this publication in accordance with formal change control procedures defined by Taqua.

990-1012-001

Table of Contents

Using CLI
CLI Commands Modified in Release 6.0.1 ...............................................1 CLI Commands Retired in Release 6.0.1 ..................................................2 Using CLI through the OM .........................................................................5 Using Generic CLI Commands ..................................................................6
CLI Examples ..................................................................................................... 13

Command Syntax ..................................................................................... 26 Using CLI Security .................................................................................... 27 Using CLI Remote Card Access ..............................................................28 Application Entities .................................................................................. 29
Application Domain Object .................................................................................. 29 OID ...................................................................................................................... 30

Using Scripts ............................................................................................ 31

Viewing Scripts .................................................................................................... 31 Loading Scripts.................................................................................................... 31 Loading a Script on the Switch ............................................................................ 32

Using dryISE ............................................................................................. 33

dryISE Commands .............................................................................................. 35

Using ISE ................................................................................................... 46

ISE Commands ................................................................................................... 46

Alarms
Acknowledging Alarms ............................................................................51 Provisioning Alarms ................................................................................. 53 Querying Alarms ....................................................................................... 54

Events
Managing Events ...................................................................................... 57 Logging Events ......................................................................................... 58 Querying Events ....................................................................................... 60

Table of Contents

Queries
Generic CLI Queries ................................................................................. 63 General Switch Queries ........................................................................... 65 Database Queries ..................................................................................... 83 CDRs .......................................................................................................... 89 Substitution ............................................................................................... 92 Central Office ............................................................................................ 94 Protocols ................................................................................................... 96
MGCP.................................................................................................................. 96 SIP....................................................................................................................... 98 SS7.................................................................................................................... 105 GR-303/PRI ....................................................................................................... 113

FTRS ........................................................................................................ 120 Routing .................................................................................................... 122 In-Service Upgrades ............................................................................... 124 CALEA ..................................................................................................... 127

Provisioning
911 ............................................................................................................ 136 AIN ........................................................................................................... 138
Before Provisioning AIN .................................................................................... 138 Provisioning AIN ................................................................................................ 139

Account Codes ....................................................................................... 154

Account Code Overview .................................................................................... 154 Provisioning Account Codes ............................................................................. 155

BearerGroup ........................................................................................... 163 CardConfiguration .................................................................................. 165 CALEA ..................................................................................................... 174

Order of Provisioning......................................................................................... 175

Carriers .................................................................................................... 196 Change Number Announcement ........................................................... 211 Equipment Provisioning ........................................................................ 213 FTRS ........................................................................................................ 223 Trunk Groups .......................................................................................... 233

ii

Table of Contents

CAS Trunk Groups ............................................................................................ 235 Clear Channel Trunk Groups ............................................................................ 252 Interface Groups................................................................................................ 258 Hunt Groups ...................................................................................................... 273 PRI Trunk Groups ............................................................................................. 286 IP Trunk Groups ................................................................................................ 307 SS7 Trunk Groups............................................................................................. 324

Outgoing Signaling Customization ....................................................... 345

Customization Provisioning Process ................................................................. 350

GR-303 ..................................................................................................... 351 MGCP ....................................................................................................... 358

MGCP Trunk Group .......................................................................................... 359 MediaGatewayProfile ........................................................................................ 364 MediaGateway .................................................................................................. 371 MGTerminationProfile ....................................................................................... 374 MGTermination.................................................................................................. 376 Digit Maps ......................................................................................................... 378

OfficeParams .......................................................................................... 382

OutPulseProfile ................................................................................................. 397

Prefixes .................................................................................................... 403

7-Digit Dialing Across NPA Boundaries ............................................................ 408

Rate Centers ........................................................................................... 410 Screen Lists ............................................................................................ 415 SIP ............................................................................................................ 418
Setting up an IP Network Interface.................................................................... 419 Setting up a Subscriber Access SIP Endpoint .................................................. 420 Setting up a Network Gateway SIP Endpoint .................................................... 421 Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names ......................................................... 465

Shelf ......................................................................................................... 467 SS7 ........................................................................................................... 470

General SS7 Order of Provisioning and Removing ........................................... 473 SS7 Order of Provisioning for an Adjacent Node .............................................. 474

Tandem ANI Subscribers ....................................................................... 511 Route Lists .............................................................................................. 514 Subscribers ............................................................................................. 530
RcfInfo ............................................................................................................... 570

Substitution ............................................................................................. 577 Voice Mail ................................................................................................ 586

Table of Contents

iii

Maintenance
General Maintenance ............................................................................. 597 Call Processing Maintenance ................................................................ 610 Substitution Maintenance ...................................................................... 626 Trunk Group Maintenance ..................................................................... 627 Device Maintenance ............................................................................... 628 SS7 Maintenance .................................................................................... 638 ISUP Maintenance .................................................................................. 643 GR-303 Maintenance .............................................................................. 649 AIN Maintenance ..................................................................................... 654 Test Panel Maintenance ......................................................................... 656 In Service Upgrades ............................................................................... 658 Test Tone Maintenance ..........................................................................663 Automatic Number Announcement ...................................................... 665 SIP/MGCP/VoIP Maintenance ................................................................ 666

Performance Monitoring
Active Call Measurements ..................................................................... 669
DS1 Monitoring.................................................................................................. 671 Performance Monitoring Maintenance .............................................................. 672

DS3 Monitoring ....................................................................................... 689

Performance Monitoring Maintenance .............................................................. 691

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals ........................................................... 708

Using Counters.................................................................................................. 708 Well Known Peg and Usage Counter Process IDs ........................................... 709 MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters ............................................................. 709 MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters ............................................................. 710 MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters ............................................................. 711 SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters ............................................................ 712 Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters ........................................................ 713

Clock Cards
CC2 .......................................................................................................... 721

iv

Table of Contents

Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering

Span and Trunk Numbering (Decimal) ................................................. 739 Span and Trunk Numbering (Hexadecimal) ......................................... 740 Using Hexadecimal .................................................................................741

Appendix B: Protocols
Trunk Protocols ................................................................................................. 745 Other Protocols ................................................................................................. 748

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch ......................... 750
ISEHouse BOOTP Table................................................................................... 750 OM Client Switch Properties ............................................................................. 751

Terra Term Professional ........................................................................ 752

Local Access ..................................................................................................... 752 Remote Access ................................................................................................. 757

Procomm Plus ........................................................................................760

Local Access ..................................................................................................... 760 Remote Access ................................................................................................. 763

Open Manager Telnet ............................................................................ 767

Remote Access ................................................................................................. 767

HyperTerminal ........................................................................................768
Local Access ..................................................................................................... 768

Table of Contents

vi

Table of Contents

Using CLI
Tip
Print out pages in this chapter to use as cheat sheets/ memory aids.

You can use the commands in this guide by connecting to a T7000 using Telnet through the OM or ProComm. See Appendix C: Accessing the Switch on page 749, and Appendix D: Using Hyper-Terminal on page 815.

CLI Commands Modified in Release 6.0.1

The following 6.0.1 commands have changed, relative to their 6.0 counterparts. In most cases, new mandatory parameters have been added to the command, which will break any scripts using them.

WARNING
Before running an existing script on a switch running a 6.0.1 load, the script should be inspected for the presence of these CLI commands and/or objects. If a modified command and/or object is found, be sure to edit the script and test any changes made.

NOTE: If you are upgrading from Release 5.0 or earlier, the CardConfiguration object must be the 1st object created in your script. See CardConfiguration on page 165 for details.

create MediaGateway now requires a bearerGrpKey parameter, see MediaGateway on page 371. SipEsgwEndpoint now requires a bearerGrpKey parameter, see SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint on page 449. SipNgwEndpoint now requires a bearerGrpKey parameter, see SIP Network Gateway Endpoint on page 459. RcfInfo now requires a remoteDN parameter, see RcfInfo on page 570.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

CLI Commands Retired in Release 6.0.1

CLI Commands Retired in Release 6.0.1

The following 6.0 commands are no longer supported. In most cases, the objects affected by these commands have moved into Generic CLI (see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6.).

WARNING
Before running an existing 6.0 script on a 6.0.1 switch, the script should be inspected for the presence of the following CLI commands. Please delete any command found in the following list and replace it with its Release 6.0.1 equivalent before running the script.

Deleted CLI Commands in Release 6.0.1 If you used this command in 6.0
addRDTSpan addScreenList addToScreenList changeAuditList createCodecProfileList createProfile createRDT createSCCPNode createSCCPSubsys createTCAPService deleteProfile deleteCodecProfileList deleteRDT deleteSCCPNode deleteSCCPSubsys deleteTCAPService disableAudits dispSCCPNode dispSCCPSubsys dispTCAPService enableAudits insertCodecProfileToList

Use this command in 6.0.1

insertInto InterfaceGroup create ScreenList insertInto ScreenList insertInto Shelf deleteFrom Shelf create CodecProfileList create FTRSProfile create InterfaceGroup create SCCPNode insertInto SCCPNode create TCAP ServiceGTT create TCAPServicePCSSN destroy FTRSProfile destroy CodecProfileList destroy InterfaceGroup destroy SCCPNode deleteFrom SCCPNode destroy TCAP ServiceGTT destroy TCAPServicePCSSN modify Shelf query SCCPNode query SCCPNode query TCAPServiceGTT query TCAPServicePCSSN modify Shelf insertInto CodecProfileList

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CLI Commands Retired in Release 6.0.1

Deleted CLI Commands in Release 6.0.1 If you used this command in 6.0
insertInto MediaGateway modifyProfile nailUp queryCfbInfo queryCfdInfo queryCffInfo queryCfvInfo queryDbMgrs queryIGMiscOptions queryIGs queryOfcMiscOptions queryProfile queryRDTObject querySCFInfo queryScreenList querySdInfo queryShelfInfo querySCCPNode querySCCPSubsys queryTrkGrpMiscOptions

Use this command in 6.0.1

insertInto BearerGroup modify FTRSProfile create NailedUpCircuit query CFBInfo query CFDInfo query CFFInfo query CFVInfo queryDb query InterfaceGroup query InterfaceGroup query OfficeParms query FTRSProfile query InterfaceGroup query SCFInfo query ScreenList query SdInfo query Shelf query SCCPNode query SCCPNode query query query query query query query CASTrunkGroup CLRTrunkGroup HuntGroup IPTrunkGroup MGCPTrunkGroup PRITrunkGroup SS7TrunkGroup

remAllFromScreenList remFromScreenList removeCodecProfileFromList removeRDTSpan setAuditPeriod setCommFailureShelfIds setCmtsMiscOption setEOCFlowThru setIGHdlcOption setIGMiscOption setInterfaceGroupTimer setNetRef setNextRDTSpan setOfcMiscOption setTCAPServiceTimer

deleteFrom Screen List deleteFrom Screen List deleteFrom CodecProfileList deleteFrom InterfaceGroup modify Shelf no replacement setMisc PacketCableCmts modify InterfaceGroup modify InterfaceGroup setMisc InterfaceGroup modify InterfaceGroup modify Shelf netref1OID modify Shelf netref2OID setNextRDTRoute setMisc OfficeParms modify TCAPServiceGTT modify TCAPServicePCSSN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

CLI Commands Retired in Release 6.0.1

Deleted CLI Commands in Release 6.0.1 If you used this command in 6.0
setTdmSpeed setTrunkGroupMiscOptions

Use this command in 6.0.1

modify Shelf tdmSpeed setMisc setMisc setMisc setMisc setMisc setMisc setMisc CASTrunkGroup CLRTrunkGroup HuntGroup IPTrunkGroup MGCPTrunkGroup PRITrunkGroup SS7TrunkGroup

unnail

destroy NailedUpCircuit

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI through the OM

Using CLI through the OM

The T7000 OpenManager (OM) accesses the command line interface for the system using Telnet. Use Telnet to enter commands that perform advanced maintenance functions on a card on the T7000.
Step
1 2

Action From the Network View of the OM click Network View. Right-click a T7000 graphic to which you want to connect. A pop-up menu appears.

Select Telnet. The Telnet client program appears. Telnet defaults to the last card with which it had a session. To connect to a new card: Select Connect > Remote System. In the Host Name field, enter the IP address of the new card to which to connect or select it from the drop-list.

Click Connect.

For other ways of establishing a remote CLI connection, see Appendix C: Accessing the Switch on page 749, and Appendix D: Using Hyper-Terminal on page 815.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

Using Generic CLI Commands

Using Generic CLI Commands

Generic CLI commands work with a set of database objects. Generic CLI commands have the general form:

command <dbObject> <key> [optional parameters]

To view:

a list of the Generic CLI commands, enter helpCLI a list of the database objects that a Generic CLI command operates on, as well as the general syntax for that command, enter the command name a commands parameters, enter the command and the dbObject help on a specific parameter, enter a question mark (?)in place of that parameter

command

action

usage

create destroy modify

creates an object destroys an object

create <dbObject> <key> <required parms> [optional parms] destroy <dbObject> <key>

modifies an attribute of modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <value> an object modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <bitName> <value> sets a miscellaneous setMisc <objectType> <key> <miscOptionAttr> option for an object. <value> Use this command to set options added by In Service Upgrades (ISUs) displays an object query <dbObject> <key> [attribute]

setMisc

query

insertInto inserts an object into insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> another objects nested <subKey> <subVal> collection insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subObjType> <requiredParms>

Tip
Use a subkey of 1 to insert an object at the start of a collection. Use a subkey of -1 to insert an object at the end of a collection.

deleteFrom deletes an object from deleteFrom <dbObject> <key> <attribute> another objects nested <subKey> collection

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Generic CLI Commands

command

action

usage

lock

places an object (device) in an out-ofservice administrative state.

lock <dbObject> <key>

Tip
Lock a Trunk Group before destroying it, and lock a Trunk Group facility before deleting it from a Trunk Group.

unlock

places an object unlock <dbObject> <key> (device) in an in-service administrative state places an object (device) in an administrative state where it does not accept new service requests, but keeps performing current activities until done shutdown <dbObject> <key>

shutdown

status

displays current activity status <dbObject> <key> on that object

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

Using Generic CLI Commands

Entering String Values

When the attribute definition calls for a string, a single word can be simply entered, as the following example demonstrates:
create Carrier Sprint 0033 <done>

However, when a string consists of two or more words, you must enclose the words in double quotes:
create Carrier "Sprint Canada" 6677 <done>

There are also times when you do not want to assign a string to an attribute. This is different from assigning an empty string (e.g., ) to the attribute. To show that you do not want a string assigned to the attribute, enter a period ., as the following example demonstrates:
create Subscriber You did not provide enough parameters to complete the command Usage: create Subscriber <key> <lastName> <firstName> [restrict] [subscribedServices] [interLATACarrier] [intraLATACarrier] [rateCenter] [facility] facility: [TDMFacility] [facilityOID] [GR303Facility] [RDTName] [crv] [MGCPFacility] [MGTermination] [SIPFacility] [IPTrunkGroup] [username] [password] create Subscriber 8176809148 Rufus Leaking 0 0 . . rc1 TDMFacility line-23 <done>

In the previous example, we did not assign an interLATACarrier or an intraLATACarrier to the subscriber.

Entering Numeric Values

Generic CLI inspects the attribute definition of each attribute in order to determine if the value entered for a particular attribute is legal. For example, consider the Carrier object. Each Carrier has a code associated with it that must be 4 digits long. The following example fails because the Carrier code is entered not long enough:
create Carrier "Stickdog Telecom" 613 ************************ERROR*********************************** ****************************************************************** ClassName+AttrName: Carriercode Value: 613 String length must be between 4 and 4. ****************************************************************** ****************************************************************

The command succeeds with a Carrier code of the correct length:

create Carrier "Stickdog Telecom" 5613 <done>

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Generic CLI Commands

Optional Parameters
Starting in Release 6.0, the create command supports optional parameters. If, after entering the last required parameter for an object, the remaining parameters are all optional, you can simply press the Enter key to complete the command. You may also enter one or more optional parameters, then press the Enter key to skip the remaining optional parameters. You can not, however, skip over one or more optional parameters. You can quickly identify the optional parameters of any object by entering

create object
where object is the name of the object to be created. The required parameters are enclosed in angle brackets, e.g., <requiredParameter>, and the optional parameters are enclosed in square brackets, e.g., [optionalParameter]. For example, to see which parameters are optional in the Subscriber object, enter the following command:
create Subscriber You did not provide enough parameters to complete the command Usage: create Subscriber <key> <lastName> <firstName> [restrict] [subscribedServices] [interLATACarrier] [intraLATACarrier] [rateCenter] [facility] facility: [TDMFacility] [facilityOID] [GR303Facility] [RDTName] [crv] [MGCPFacility] [MGTermination] [SIPFacility] [IPTrunkGroup] [username] [password]

Note that restrict, subscribedServices, interLATACarrier, intraLATACarrier, rateCenter and facility are all optional parameters. The following command creates a new Subscriber, and does not enter any of the optional parameters:

create Subscriber 9726921800 Support Taqua

Assume in this version of the command that we want to assign a rateCenter to the subscriber, but not the optional facility:

create Subscriber 9726921800 Support Taqua 0 0 . . rc1

Note that we had to enter a value for restrict, subscribed services, interLATACarrier, and intraLATACarrier, even though those attributes are optional.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

Using Generic CLI Commands

Limitiations
Generic CLI is unable to modify nested bitfields. A bitfield is an attribute where each binary digit (bit) is a separate attribute in its own right. A nested bitfield is a bitfield contained in one object that is itself contained in another object. The following examples illustrates the problem, but may make more sense after reading the Modify Example on page 14. The Carrier Object (seeCarriers on page 196) has a restrictions attribute that is a bitfield. The restrictions attribute is not nested, so it can be manipulated directly by Generic CLI. The following example:

queries the restrictions attribute. The NO_DA bit is set modifies the restrictions attribute, turning the NO_DA bit off modifies the restrictions attribute, turning the NO_PRE_SUB bit on query the restrictions attribute. The NO_PRE_SUB bit is set.

query Carrier WorldComm restrictions <52e4a34> restrictions........(BITFIELD) -> 40 .NO_DA modify Carrier WorldComm restrictions NO_DA 0 modify Carrier WorldComm restrictions NO_PRE_SUB 1 query Carrier WorldComm restrictions <52e4a34> restrictions........(BITFIELD) -> 8 .NO_PRE_SUB

Note that in the foregoing example, the modify command was able to refer to the attribute in the bitfield directly by name. Now consider the IP Trunk Group object (see IP Trunk Groups on page 307). The IP Trunk Group object contains an options attribute, which itself is a SipNgwEndpointOptions object. The options object contains a supportEarlyCutThrough attribute, which is a bitfield.
query IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options <52e57cc> options....................<52d3180> <52d3180> SIPOptions plusOnePrepend....................FALSE doCallingNameDip..................FALSE screenDNChoice....................SCREEN_DN routeAdvance......................FALSE supportEarlyCutThrough............(BITFIELD) -> 0 sendCPN...........................CPN_DEFAULTDN sendUserForNoANI..................SEND_ANONYMOUS sendCarrierId.....................OFF routeOnRcvdCarrier................OUTBCRRIER_INBCARRIER callingPartyPresentationDisplay...SEND_ANONYMOUS revertToPrimaryFE.................TRUE bypassVmNotifyDeliveryCheck.......OFF

10

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Generic CLI Commands

Because the supportEarlyCutThrough bitfield is contained in the options object, which is contained in the IP Trunk Group object, it is a nested bitfield. Generic CLI is unable to modify nested bitfield attributes by name, as the following example shows. First we use the modify command to tell us the names of the bitfield attributes:
modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThrough You did not provide enough parameters to complete the command <supportEarlyCutThrough> : Type is Bitfield. These options can be turned on or off Possible values: 1(1) = SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru 2(2) = SIPtoTDM_EarlyCutThru

Next we attempt to modify supportEarlyCutThrough attribute

modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThrough SIPtoSS7Ear lyCutThru SIPtoSS7EarlyCutThru is not a proper hex value for this nested bitfield

We can not refer to the attribute by name, as the previous example just demonstrated. We can, however, refer to it by value: From the 1st modify example, the value of SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru is 1 Generic CLI will accept that value, as the following two commands demonstrates:
modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThrough 1 query IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options <52e57cc> options....................<52d3180> <52d3180> SIPOptions plusOnePrepend....................FALSE doCallingNameDip..................FALSE screenDNChoice....................SCREEN_DN routeAdvance......................FALSE supportEarlyCutThrough............(BITFIELD) -> 1 .SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru sendCPN...........................CPN_DEFAULTDN sendUserForNoANI..................SEND_ANONYMOUS sendCarrierId.....................OFF routeOnRcvdCarrier................OUTBCRRIER_INBCARRIER callingPartyPresentationDisplay...SEND_ANONYMOUS revertToPrimaryFE.................TRUE bypassVmNotifyDeliveryCheck.......OFF

Note, however, when we modify a bitfield in this manner, we update the value of all of the bitfield attributes. The following example sets the SIPtoTDM_EarlyCutThru bit, but it also clears the SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru bit

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

11

Using Generic CLI Commands

modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThrough 2 query IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options <52e57cc> options....................<52d3180> <52d3180> SIPOptions plusOnePrepend....................FALSE doCallingNameDip..................FALSE screenDNChoice....................SCREEN_DN routeAdvance......................FALSE supportEarlyCutThrough............(BITFIELD) -> 2 .SIPtoTDM_EarlyCutThru sendCPN...........................CPN_DEFAULTDN sendUserForNoANI..................SEND_ANONYMOUS sendCarrierId.....................OFF routeOnRcvdCarrier................OUTBCRRIER_INBCARRIER callingPartyPresentationDisplay...SEND_ANONYMOUS revertToPrimaryFE.................TRUE bypassVmNotifyDeliveryCheck.......OFF

In order to set both bits, we have to add the values (1 + 2) together, and set the result:
modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThrough 3 query IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options <52e57cc> options....................<52d3180> <52d3180> SIPOptions plusOnePrepend....................FALSE doCallingNameDip..................FALSE screenDNChoice....................SCREEN_DN routeAdvance......................FALSE supportEarlyCutThrough............(BITFIELD) -> 3 .SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru .SIPtoTDM_EarlyCutThru sendCPN...........................CPN_DEFAULTDN sendUserForNoANI..................SEND_ANONYMOUS sendCarrierId.....................OFF routeOnRcvdCarrier................OUTBCRRIER_INBCARRIER callingPartyPresentationDisplay...SEND_ANONYMOUS revertToPrimaryFE.................TRUE bypassVmNotifyDeliveryCheck.......OFF

12

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Generic CLI Commands

CLI Examples
Most of the CLI commands are self-explanatory, but the syntax for some of them can be a little complicated. Lets take a look at a few example commands to see how they work:

Create Example
Suppose we want to add a MediaGateway object. The first thing we can do is query the system to see what other MediaGateway objects already exist.
835> create MediaGateway Existing keys: mg1 mg2

If we continue the current naming convention, we will create mg3. We do not know at this point what the required parameters are, but Generic CLI knows, and will prompt us as we go along. Lets get started:
836> create MediaGateway mg3 You did not provide enough parameters to complete the command Usage: create MediaGateway <key> <profileName> <domain> <nearEndNiOid> <profileName> : Available keys in tMGCPProfileDbMgr: mgp

Lets try the command again, this time adding the key (mg3) and the profileName. Note that Generic CLI helpfully provided us with a list of all existing profileName keys:
839> create MediaGateway mg3 mgp You did not provide enough parameters to complete the command Usage: create MediaGateway <key> <profileName> <domain> <nearEndNiOid> <domain> : Type is String with length 1 to 64

Assume, for this example, that we know the domain (which will be dm5), but dont know the format of the nearEndOid parameter. Adding a question mark after the domain provides additional information about this variable:
842> create MediaGateway mg3 mgp dm5 ? Usage: create MediaGateway <key> <profileName> <domain> <nearEndNiOid> <nearEndNiOid> : Type is Valid OID

Now that we know the type of the newEndNiOid parameter, we can finish the command:
843> create MediaGateway mg3 mgp dm5 fe-0 <done>

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

13

Using Generic CLI Commands

Modify Example
For this example, we want to modify one of our MediaGatewayProfiles. We start by querying the system to see which profiles have already been created:
160> query MediaGatewayProfile ? <key> Existing keys: ac mgp

We see the mgp profile key from the create example, so lets work with that one.
161> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp You did not provide enough parameters to complete the command Usage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <value> Usage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <bitName> <value> <attrName> : Available parameters: terminationPrefix requestedInfo quarantineHandling supportedPackages signalSupport DLCXOptions encodeDigitMap THIST retransmitTime keepAliveTime MAX1 MAX2 TMAX minRTOThresh maxRTOThresh responseAckParam enablePiggyback piggybackTime transLowWaterMark transHighWaterMark provRespTime responseRetransEnabled

Generic CLI returns a list of modifiable attributes. Lets assume we want to modify the DLCXOptions attribute. First, we would like to see the current value:
163> query MediaGatewayProfile mgp <2d2f488> MediaGatewayProfile key......................"mgp" terminationPrefix........"BWgw" requestedInfo............(BITFIELD) -> 400 .EVENT_STATES quarantineHandling.......LOOP supportedPackages........(BITFIELD) -> 7 .LINE .GENERIC .DTMF signalSupport............(BITFIELD) -> 0 DLCXOptions..............PREFIX_TERM_ID encodeDigitMap...........LOWERCASE THIST....................7530 (30000) retransmitTime...........c8 (200) keepAliveTime............ea60 (60000)

14

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Generic CLI Commands

MAX1.....................7 (7) MAX2.....................b (11) TMAX.....................4e20 (20000) minRTOThresh.............3e8 (1000) 164> maxRTOThresh.............fa0 (4000) responseAckParam.........INCLUDE responseAckNum...........a (10) enablePiggyback..........DISABLE piggybackTime............c8 (200) transLowWaterMark........19 (25) transHighWaterMark.......32 (50) provRespTime.............c8 (200) responseRetransEnabled...YES

Generic CLI can tell us what other values the DLCXOption attribute can assume:
166> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOptions 167> Usage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <value> <DLCXOptions> : Type is Integer Possible values: 0 = NO_DLCX 1 = PREFIX_TERM_ID 2 = PREFIX_STAR 3 = STAR_ONLY

We can change an Integer attribute by either value or by name. First, modify the attribute by value:
167> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOptions 2 <done>

Note that, as in the next command, we can query a particular attribute directly:
168> query MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOPtions <2d2f488> MediaGatewayProfile key......................"mgp" DLCXOptions..............PREFIX_STAR

Next, lets modify the attribute by name:

169> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOptions STAR_ONLY <done> 170> query MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOPtions <2d2f488> MediaGatewayProfile key......................"mgp" DLCXOptions..............STAR_ONLY

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

15

Using Generic CLI Commands

Generic CLI knows the permissible values for each attribute, and will not allow an invalid value to be entered, as the following examples illustrate:
171> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOptions 5 *******************ERROR****************************** ****************************************************** ClassName+AttrName: MediaGatewayProfileDLCXOptions Value 5 Attribute not in value list. ******************************************************* ******************************************************* 172> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOptions STAR_ONE Usage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <value> <DLCXOptions> : Type is Integer Possible values: 0 = NO_DLCX 1 = PREFIX_TERM_ID 2 = PREFIX_STAR 3 = STAR_ONLY

The preceding commands worked with integer attributes, but not all attributes are integers. Some attributes are bitfields. A bitfield is a collection of up to 32 flags. Since a flag is either on or off, a bitfield is a way to store a lot of information in the switch without taking up a lot of memory. You can set or reset the value of one flag in a bitfield without disturbing the values of the other flags. Lets see how that works with our MediaGatewayProfile object. Recall that the requestedInfo attribute of the MediaGatewayProfile object is a bitfield:
63> query MediaGatewayProfile mgp <2d2f488> MediaGatewayProfile key......................"mgp" terminationPrefix........"BWgw" requestedInfo............(BITFIELD) -> 400 .EVENT_STATES

The current status of the requestedInfo bitfield is that one flag (the EVENT_STATUS flag) is on. The other flags in the bitfield are off.

16

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Generic CLI Commands

Lets see what the other flags in the requestedInfo attribute are:
175> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp requestedInfo Usage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <bitName> <value> <requestedInfo> : Type is Bitfield. These options can be turned on or off Possible values: 1 = REQUESTED_EVENTS 2 = DIGIT_MAP 4 = SIGNAL_REQUESTS 8 = REQUEST_IDENTIFIER 16 = NOTIFIED_ENTITY 32 = CONNECTION_IDENTIFIER 64 = DETECT_EVENTS 128 = OBSERVED_EVENTS 256 = VERSION_SUPPORTED 512 = REASON_CODE 1024 = EVENT_STATES 2048 = MAX_MGCP_DATAGRAM 4096 = CAPABILITIES

Since at this point we dont know the valid values to turn a bitmap attribute on or off, we can ask Generic CLI:
186> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp requestedInfo DIGIT_MAP 4096 Valid values for bitfield specifiers are 0 and 1 Usage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <bitName> <value>

We can only modify a bitfield attribute by name:

188> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp requestedInfo DIGIT_MAP 1 <done>

189> query MediaGatewayProfile mgp <2d2f488> MediaGatewayProfile key......................"mgp" terminationPrefix........"BWgw" requestedInfo............(BITFIELD) -> 402 .DIGIT_MAP .EVENT_STATES quarantineHandling.......LOOP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

17

Using Generic CLI Commands

insertInto Example
The insertInto command is used to add an object or a value into a collection (such as a list object) that is part of another object. Consider the OfficeParms object. When it is created, it contains an list of countryCodes, as the following command shows:

query OfficeParms 123 countryCodes <69cd7fc> countryCodes..................<69d8e98> <69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1) 2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39) [output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 101 (257) 58 (88): 102 (258) 59 (89): 103 (259) 5a (90): 104 (260) 5b (91): 105 (261) [rest of output snipped to conserve space]

18

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Generic CLI Commands

Suppose we want to add the country code for Uganda (256) to the countryCodes list, but we are unsure how to go about it. Generic CLI knows the parameters, and will prompt us if we ask:
insertInto OfficeParms You did not provide enough parameters to complete the command Usage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subVal> Usage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subObjType> <requiredPams> Existing keys: 123

There is only one OfficeParms object in our switch, and its name is 123, so lets add that to our command:
insertInto OfficeParms 123 Usage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subVal> Usage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subObjType> <requiredPams> <attrName> : Available parameters: OSSInfoDigits countryCodes

OfficeParms has two collections, but we are dealing with countryCodes, so lets add that to our command:
insertInto OfficeParms 123 countryCodes Usage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subK Usage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <ms> <subKey> : Type is Integer <69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1) 2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39) [output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 101 (257) 58 (88): 102 (258) 59 (89): 103 (259) 5a (90): 104 (260) 5b (91): 105 (261) [rest of output snipped to conserve space]

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

19

Using Generic CLI Commands

We need two additional parameters, subKey and subObjType. The first required parameter is subKey, and it is an integer. A list is keyed by the index of the item that is being added. We can add our item to the start of the list with a subKey of 1, or to the end of the list with a subkey of -1, or anywhere in the middle of the list with the appropriate value1. In this case, the countryCodes are already sorted, so maintenance will be easier if we insert the country code for Uganda (256) with a subkey of 87.

insertInto OfficeParms 123 countryCodes 87 256

Now, lets check our work:

query OfficeParms 123 countryCodes <69cd7fc> countryCodes..................<69d8e98> <69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1) 2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39) [output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 100 (256) 58 (88): 101 (257) 59 (89): 102 (258) 5a (90): 103 (259) 5b (91): 104 (260) [rest of output snipped to conserve space]
Note that the CountryCodeList now has a new entry at index 87, which corresponds to country code for Uganda that we added.
1.The subKey for a list is the index where you want to add the subValue. If you add a subValue to the middle of a list, the existing subValue at that index is not replaced, but simply moved back one position in the list.

20

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Generic CLI Commands

deleteFrom example
This example continues from the previous example. Lets say want to delete country code 259:

query OfficeParms 123 countryCodes <69cd7fc> countryCodes..................<69d8e98> <69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1) 2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39) [output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 100 (256) 58 (88): 101 (257) 59 (89): 102 (258) 5a (90): 103 (259) 5b (91): 104 (260) [rest of output snipped to conserve space]
Lets start with the basic command:

deleteFrom OfficeParms 123 Usage: deleteFrom <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <attrName> : Available parameters: OSSInfoDigits countryCodes
It should come as no surprise that we will be deleting from the countryCodes list, so lets add that to our command:

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

21

Using Generic CLI Commands

deleteFrom OfficeParms 123 countryCodes Usage: deleteFrom <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subKey> : Type is Integer <69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1) 2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39) [output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 100 (256) 58 (88): 101 (257) 59 (89): 102 (258) 5a (90): 103 (259) 5b (91): 104 (260) [rest of output snipped to conserve space]
Note that Generic CLI shows us the entries in the countryCodes list. Since we are dealing with a list, the subKey is the index of the item to be deleted. We want to delete country code 259, which is at index position 90 in the list, so the subKey is 90.

deleteFrom OfficeParms 123 countryCodes 103

Lets check our work:

query OfficeParms 123 countryCodes <69cd7fc> countryCodes..................<69d8e98> <69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1)

22

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Generic CLI Commands

2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39) [output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 100 (256) 58 (88): 101 (257) 59 (89): 102 (258) 5a (90): 104 (260) 5b (91): 105 (261) [rest of output snipped to conserve space]
Note that deleting the item at index 90 in the list resulted in the remaining entries in the list moving up one position.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

23

Using Generic CLI Commands

query example
This example illustrates how to query a particular attribute of an object. This can be useful when you are only interested in viewing a small part of a large object. Consider, for example, the OfficeParms object. Because it has a large CountryCodeList, a simple query will result in hundreds of lines of information. But if you were only interested in the ServiceCodes attribute, you could instruct Generic CLI to display only that portion of the of the OfficeParms object:

query OfficeParms taquaTexas serviceCodes <4fc7808> serviceCodes..................<4fc8c00> <4fc8c00> ServiceCodes Cfwd_On............."*72" Cfwd_Off............"*73" CfBusy_On..........."*90" CfBusy_Off.........."*91" CfNoAns_On.........."*92" CfNoAns_Off........."*93" Creject_On.........."*77" Creject_Off........."*87" Cblock_On..........."*60" Cblock_Off.........."*80" Caccept_On.........."*64" Caccept_Off........."*84" Ctrace.............."*57" CidBlock............"*67" CancelCw............"*70" CidUnBlock.........."*82" Creturn_On.........."*69" MsgRetrieve........."*83" Cffixed_On.........."*94" Cffixed_Off........."*95" PriorityCall_On....."*61" PriorityCall_Off...."*81" SpeedDial8.........."*74" SpeedDial30........."*75" SpeedDial8Review...."*78" SpeedDial30Review..."*79" SCFwd_On............"*63" SCFwd_Off..........."*85" Cback_On............"*66" Creturn_Off........."*89" Cback_Off..........."*86"

24

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Generic CLI Commands

setMisc example
Previous to Release 6.0.1, different objects had individual commands to perform this function. However, all objects that support miscellaneous parameters have been enhanced to use this CLI command. Invoke this command without any parameters to get a usage string and a list of object that support the command:
setMisc Usage: setmisc <dbObject> <key> <miscOption> <value> This action can be performed on the following: CASTrunkGroup CLRTrunkGroup InterfaceGroup IPTrunkGroup MGCPTrunkGroup OfficeParms PacketCableCmts PCMMCmts PRITrunkGroup SS7TrunkGroup

The following example shows how to use the setMisc command for the OfficeParms object to discover what miscOption(s) can be set, and the permissible values for the option.
setMisc OfficeParms You did not provide enough parameters to complete the command Usage: setmisc <dbObject> <key> <miscOption> <value> Existing keys: taquaTexas setMisc OfficeParms taquaTexas You did not provide enough parameters to complete the command Usage: setmisc <dbObject> <key> <miscOption> <value> Available miscOptions: TestAttribute setMisc OfficeParms taquaTexas TestAttribute Usage: setmisc <dbObject> <key> <miscOption> <value> <TestAttribute> : Type is Integer Possible values: 0 = NO 1 = YES setMisc OfficeParms taquaTexas TestAttribute YES <done>

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

25

Command Syntax

Command Syntax

Syntax

Commands are case-sensitive. Do not use symbols. For example, do not enter AT&T as a carrier name. Instead, enter ATT.
Description required parameter, must be entered at the command line optional parameter, may be entered at the command line text string parameters that include spaces. For example, to enter a trunk group that is named Trunk Group 1, enter Trunk Group 1 in the command line comments made by the script writer. The T7000 does not process any text following # Typically, each command creates, runs, and terminates as a separate process. When %c appears at the end of a command, the command is called as a function in the same process as the shell.

< > [ ]

# %c

NOTE: %c is not recommended for Generic CLI commands. See Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6.

prompt

prompting text printed by the system when you need to enter additional information to complete a command

26

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI Security

Using CLI Security

Tip
When the T7000 returns SYSERR for a command that should complete successfully, the user account does not have permission to perform that task.

Use levels to define permission for T7000 users.

Level Level 0 Name Super user Description This level is the highest permission level. There is only one super user account in the system. This user can perform any task on the switch and create and remove the other levels of users. This is the only user who can remove files from flash memory. Reserve this user for adding and removing other users. Level 1 Administrator Accounts with this permission level can perform any system task other than creating Super user account, or accessing files created by the Super user. Taqua recommends this level for switch engineers. Level 2 User Accounts with this permission level can only invoke CLI commands. A user account cannot invoke low-level system functions. Taqua recommends this level for crafts people.

Login Process
Switch files have the permissions level of the user that created them. To modify a file you must have the same or higher permission level as the files creator.
Step
1 2 3 4 5

Action Modify the super user password. See passwd on page 47. Create level 1 administrator(s). See adduser on page 48. Create level 2 user(s). See adduser on page 48. Log off from the super user account. See <Ctrl> + D on page 46. Log in again as an Administrator. See _login on page 46.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

27

Using CLI Remote Card Access

Using CLI Remote Card Access

Use CLI remote card access to run the command line console for a particular card from any other card within a T7000. For example, you could be physically connected to card 5, issue the remote access command and access card 3 without moving the connection. This feature allows diagnosis of crashed or malfunctioning cards and can be run from any type of connection (CRAFT port or Telnet). The target card does not have to be fully booted to connect; you can connect to cards running the ThinISE boot monitor. The remote diagnostic device starts a shell on the target card. The standard input and output for the target card are rerouted to the host card. All communications between the cards is through the message bus. All output from the target card will be displayed on the host card.
Command Description Reset the host card. Use this command to force a disconnect when <Ctrl> + <D> does not work. forces disconnect from a remote access session

<Ctrl> + <X> <Ctrl> + <D>

NOTE: a second <Ctrl> + <D> will log you out of the session on the local card!

A Telnet session in ThinISE automatically reconnects if the card is reset. The session does not re-establish if power is removed from the card. To start a remote card access session:
Step
1 2

Action Connect to the T7000 host card. At the T7000 CLI prompt, type rsh <cardID> (cardID needs to be in hexadecimal format) to connect to the target card. Complete any diagnostics. Enter <Ctrl> + <D> to exit remote card access.

3 4

28

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Application Entities

Application Entities
The T7000 application software makes heavy use of Application Domain Objects and Object Identifiers, both of which are explained in the following sections.

Application Domain Object

A query interface is provided so that Application Domain Object (ADO) data from any card is accessible to both the user interface, and to other programs from any other card. Example ADOs are:

Line subscriber line interface circuit (SLIC), only available on LTCs Span T1 terminated to a Dallas Semiconductor DS2152 framer Trunk individual DS0 timeslot (1 of 24) on a T1 span DSP Digital Signal Processor Card T7000 front card TDM Time Division Multiplexed switch HDLC High-level Data Link Control, the OM186 communications controller or transwitch DS3 28 T1s, only available on BICs

Each ADO type has configurable attributes that are unique to that particular device type. If no prior configuration has taken place when a card is initially powered up, an ADO is created with a set of reasonable default values for each configurable device. Once modifications have been made to the default values, the new values reside in flash memory and subsequent power-up cycles do not require reconfiguration.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

29

Application Entities

OID
An object identifier (OID) is an encoded 32-bit value that uniquely identifies each ADO in a T7000 network.

Tip
View the actual value of an OID using dispOID.

The CLI uses readable forms of the OID, specified by the dash-separated string "Device-Instance-Card-Shelf" where:

Device Card, Line, Trunk, Span, DSP, TDM, HDLC, DS3, FE Instance 0-based instance number of the device. For trunks instance is the timeslot. Card card number on which the device resides. Card numbers are 1based (1-20). Shelf T7000 number (1-255)

If you leave out OID fields, the T7000 uses a local default. If you do not enter a card OID, the default is the local card; unless the command is a card OID, the default is the instance value and the shelf defaults to local.
card LTC device line trunk span TIC TIC2 BIC PIC PIC2 trunk span trunk span DS3 FE FE values 0-31 0-47 0-1 0-383 0-15 0-479 0-19 0-2 0-1 0-2 example/explanation Line-2-1-22 is the 3rd line on card 1 shelf 22 24 timeslots x 2 DS1s, Trunk-33-2-1 is the 33rd trunk on the 2nd card in shelf 1 Span-0-1-4 is the 1st span on card 1 shelf 4 24 timeslots x 16 DS1s Span-2-1-8 is the 3rd span on card 1 shelf 8 24 timeslots x 20 DS1s Span-19-6-1 is the 20th span on card 6 shelf 1 ds3-0-15-12 is the first DS3 on card 15 shelf 12 fe-1-7-9 is the second Fast Ethernet Interface (FE) on card 7 shelf 9 fe-2-7-9 is the third Fast Ethernet Interface (FE) on card 7 shelf 9

30

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Scripts

Using Scripts
Scripts are groups of related commands, put in order according to command dependencies.

CAUTION
To minimize provisioning and configuration errors Taqua recommends the following: 1.Use provisioning scripts instead of entering individual provisioning commands. 2. Test scripts using dryISE. dryISE simulates the operations of a real T7000, so you can test your scripts without affecting the call traffic on a T7000. 3. Test scripts using a non-production T7000 with the same software image, and preferably the same configuration.

Viewing Scripts
To view scripts in the software release, from Windows Explorer select the applicable hard drive, then Program Files > Taqua > OpenManager x.x.x > ocxapp > scripts (where x.x.x is the version of the OM). To view a scripts full text, double-click it.

Loading Scripts
To load a script from its location on the hard drive of the OM, enter its name from dryISE.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

31

Using Scripts

Loading a Script on the Switch

A configuration script is:

a text file a list of commands executed at the command prompt when run by a shell process used to provision a switch

Complete the following steps for the DB Master card to run a configuration script on the switch.
Step
1

Action Enter queryDbMaster to determine which card on the switch is assigned the role of Database Master. Do the following on the DB Master card: Enter tftp to start tftp on the DB Master card. Enter device 6 to assign the local ramdisk device (6) for download storage. Enter get <filename> where <filename> is the script in the current working directory of the card used by ISEhouse. Enter quit to exit tftp. Enter ls 6 to display the contents of the ramdisk device and verify the script downloaded. Enter sh -e < 6/<filename> where <filename> is the name of the script to execute.

If the switch is not in an in-service state after executing the script, restore each card with restore card-<number> where <number> is the cards slot number. After each card has been restored, enter dbFlash ALL This saves the current switch configuration to a database file in flash memory.

32

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using dryISE

Using dryISE
dryISE (Imbedded System Engine) simulates operational switch situations and lets you to test your scripts before using them on a real T7000. The basis for dryISE is the T7000 operating system, ISE. dryISE provides the core functionality for process control (creating ISE tasks).
NOTE: The T7000 supports a subset of commands for its dryISE switch simulator.

This functionality includes the following:

Memory management Flash memory management IPC message services Timer services Object services Circular buffer services Global Map Command line shell

The dryISE environment has the following components:

Command Line Interface (CLI) Call Simulator

dryISEs CLI ISEs CLI x-commands program symbols use $ command modifiers use % environment variables executes C functions

x-commands program symbols use $ command modifiers use % environment variables If the command interpreter cannot find a matching xcommand, it looks for a script in the working directory. The default file extension for scripts is .ocx.

Tip
If the script file uses .ocx, omit .ocx when specifying.

up and down arrow keys recall commands commands can be edited once recalled F1 re-displays the current line ESC clears the current line rrun on page 44 executes script files or shell commands on other cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

33

Using dryISE

dryISEs CLI %Rx executes script files or shell commands on other cards, use on any shell command line (x = another cards number).

ISEs CLI

34

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using dryISE

dryISE Commands
The following are simulation commands specific to dryISE:

Address Address <hexAddr>

This command returns the memory address of an object in dryISE, in both decimal and hexadecimal format. If a non-object address is entered, it is simply echoed back Syntax Description The hexadecimal address of an object in memory.

<hexAddr>

Address 80001234 (37280)<91a0> Address 1234 (4660)<1234> auditTimers

auditTimers
This command displays a list of active timers.

auditTimers Current Time 91088763 Timer expiration time 91088903 (in 140 mSec) <2894a70> executeMemoryAudit (smrouting)0: 40000 1: 2945d48 2: 9dfeb0 3: 1388 Timer expiration time 91089091 (in 141 mSec) <2d82d90> executeUtime (smrouting)0: 40000 1: 2945d4c 2: 9dfeb0 3: 3e8 Timer expiration time 91089341 (in 391 mSec) <2d76570> updateLEDStatus (smrouting)0: 50000 (dispLEDStatus)1: 0 (broadcast)2: 0 3: 0 4: 7d0 3 Timer(s) active

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

35

Using dryISE

CALL CALL <fileName>

This command executes a script in the current instance.
Syntax Description
name of the file to run in dryISE, typically located on the hard drive of the OM, in Program Files > Taqua > OpenManager x.x.x

<fileName>

(where x.x.x is the version of the OM) > ocxapp > scripts.

CALL LTC1.ocx
NOTE: This command can only be executed from within a script.

NOTE: Do not confuse this command with the call command. The call command works on both dryISE and the switch, and should only be used by Taqua support.

cmdfileEchoOff cmdfileEchoOff
This command turns off command line echo of script files.

cmdfileEchoOn cmdfileEchoOn
This command turns on command line echo of script files.

36

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using dryISE

ConvertAddr ConvertAddr <objptrOrReal>

This command computes the actual address of an object pointer in the PC simulator memory. Due to space constraints, object pointers are handled differently in the simulator and on the switch.
Syntax Description An object pointer, or a real number. If an object pointer is input, the function returns the corresponding address. If a real address is input, the function returns the corresponding object pointer.

<objptrOrReal>

ConvertAddr 441d2e8 Real 441d2e8 is objPtr 80883a5d ConvertAddr 80883a5d ObjPtr 80883a5d is real 441d2e8 cs_config cs_config <line> [ORIG|TERM] [digits]
This command configures a line for call simulation as originator or terminator. The digits are required only for origination.
Syntax Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. ORIG call originator TERM call terminator dialed digits, required only if you enter ORIG

<line> [ORIG|TERM] [digits]

cs_config Line-1-1-1 ORIG 9724800000

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

37

Using dryISE

cs_dispstats cs_dispstats [line]

This commands displays the statistics for a line or all lines on the card.
Syntax Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. Skip this parameter to set the value for all lines on the card.

[line]

cs_dispstats Line-1-1-1 cs_finish cs_finish [line|ORIG|TERM]

This command stops the call simulator on a line or for all originators or terminators on a card. If no parameter is specified all call simulators on the card are stopped. The difference between cs_finish and cs_stop is that the current call in progress is finished prior to stopping.
Syntax Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. ORIG call originator TERM call terminator

[line|ORIG|TERM]

cs_finish Line-1-1-1 cs_reset cs_reset [line|ORIG|TERM]

This command resets the statistics for a call simulator state machine for a line or for all originators or terminators on a card. If no parameter is specified all call simulators statistics on the card are reset.
Syntax Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. ORIG call originator TERM call terminator

[line|ORIG|TERM]

cs_reset Line-1-1-1

38

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using dryISE

cs_settimer cs_settimer <TimerId> <msec> [line]

This command sets the value of a timer for a line or all lines on a card.
Syntax Description TimerId values are as follows: DialTone originator timer, waiting for dial tone after off hook. StartDigit originator timer, how long to wait after dial tone before sending first digit. RingBack originator timer, waiting for ring back after dialing. Ring terminator timer, waiting for ring at start of call. OrigVoice originator timer, waiting for voice after ring back. TermVoice terminator timer, waiting for voice after sending voice. TermOffHook terminator timer, how long to wait after off hook before sending voice. EndCall originator timer, how long to wait after sending voice before ending call. InterCall originator timer, how long to wait after ending call to start a new call.

<TimerId>

<msec> [line]

value (in millieseconds) to assign the timer Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. Skip this parameter to set the value for all lines on the card.

cs_setTimer DialTone 1000 Line-1-1-1 cs_start cs_start [line|ORIG|TERM] [digits]

This command starts the call simulator on a line or for all originators or terminators on a card. If no parameter is specified all call simulators on the card are started.
Syntax Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. ORIG call originator TERM call terminator

[line|ORIG|TERM]

[digits]

dialed digits, required only if you enter ORIG

cs_start ORIG 9724800000

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

39

Using dryISE

cs_stop cs_stop [line]

This command stops the call simulator on a line. If no parameter is specified all call simulators on the card are stopped.
Syntax Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.

[line]

cs_stop Line-1-1-1 dial dial <line> <digits>

This command dials digits on a line or trunk.
Syntax Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. Digits to be dialed. Digits can be the numbers 0 through 9, pound (#), asterisk (*), or comma (,). A comma causes the command to pause for 1 second before the next digit is processed.

<line>

<digits>

dial Line-0-1-22 9724800000 dispLocTS dispLocTS <OID>

This command converts an ASCII object ID to a local timeslot (port).
Syntax Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.

OID

dispLocTS Line-2-1-22 Local timeslot for Line-2-1-22 is 202

40

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using dryISE

dispMidTS dispMidTS <OID>

This command converts an ASCII object ID to a midplane timeslot (port).
Syntax Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.

<OID>

dispMidTS Line-2-1-22 Midplane Timeslot for Line-2-1-22 is 10000032 dumpTDM dumpTDM

This command displays the current TDM connections in the TDM connection database.
NOTE: The example for this command assumes a call is in progress on an LTC between the subscriber on facility 0 and the subscriber on facility 1.

dumpTDM Line - 0x200 connections: Line - 0x201, Line - 0x201 connections: Line - 0x200, env

Tip
env should be the 1st command in any dryISE session.

env <cardnum> [shelfnum] [cardtype] [hostdport]

This command sets up an instance of dryISE with a card number, shelf number, card type, and the hostd port.
Syntax Description The number of the card that this instance of dryISE represents in the OM, from 1 - 20. The shelf number of the T7000 in which the card resides. This number must be unique for each T7000 that you set up. The type of card you want the dryISE instance to represent, ltc, tic, etic, bic, pic, clk, ltcsub, ticsub, eticsub, bicsub, or picsub.

<cardnum> [shelfnum]

[cardtype]

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

41

Using dryISE

Syntax

Description The port number of the channel of the IP address (16-bit number from 0-65535). The default port number is 3333. Also called the primaryPort.

[hostdport]

The following command sets up a TIC on card 1, shelf 10, with a port number 3333:

env 1 10 TIC 3333 hu hu <line/trunk>

This command signals on-hook on a line or trunk.
Syntax Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.

<line/trunk>

hu Line-1-1-1
NOTE: See oh on page 43, and also see pcall on page 43.

linkSpan linkSpan <span> <farCard> <farSpan>

This command creates a simulated T1 connection from a span on the local card to a span on the far card, respectively. Use the linkSpan command to link spans between to dryISE sessions. Link the spans while the spans are out of service.
Syntax Description The Object Identifier of the span on the local card (unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.) number of card (1-20) The Object Identifier of the far span (unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.)

<span>

<farCard> <farSpan>

linkSpan span-0-2-3 5 span-1-5-1

42

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using dryISE

querySpans
This command is a debug tool for use in dryISE. It identifies which spans (if any) have been configured on the local card, and shows the remote cards and spans to which they connect.

querySpans Configured spans: Span 0 is configured for remote card 2, span 0 Span 1 is configured for remote card 2, span 1

oh oh <lineOID>
This command signals off-hook on a line or trunk.
Syntax Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.

<lineOID> oh Line-1-1-1

NOTE: Also See oh on page 43, and also see pcall on page 43.

pcall pcall <lineOID> <digits>

This command places a call on a line or trunk going off-hook and then dialing digits.
Syntax Description line the line number on an LTC from 0-31. trunk the trunk number on a card t0 - t2015 dialed digits

<lineOID>
<digits>

pcall 1 9724800000 pcall t35 9724801234

NOTE: See oh on page 43, and also see hu on page 42.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

43

Using dryISE

pingT1 pingT1 <span>

This command returns information on the specified span.
Syntax Description Object Identifier-a unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.

<span>

pingT1 span-0-2-3 rrun rrun <fileName> <cardAddr>

This command executes a script on a different card. The remote run command takes as input a script file name and a card number. It sends a tCommand message containing the input file name to the input card number.
Syntax Description
name of the file to run in dryISE, typically located on the hard drive of the OM, in Program Files > Taqua > OpenManager x.x.x

<fileName>

(where x.x.x is the version of the OM) > ocxapp > scripts.

<cardAddr> rrun LTC1.ocx 3 run run <fileName>

number of card (1-20)

This command executes a script in a separate thread.

Syntax Description
name of the file to run in dryISE, typically located on the hard drive of the OM, in Program Files > Taqua > OpenManager x.x.x

<fileName>

(where x.x.x is the version of the OM) > ocxapp > scripts.

run LTC1.ocx

44

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using dryISE

sleep

Tip
This command is useful in scripts, to insure a delay between commands.

sleep <msec>
This command temporarily suspends execution.
Syntax Description

<msec> sleep 1000 slicd slicd

number of milliseconds to suspend execution

This command starts the simulated SLIC driver.

tdmd tdmd
This command starts the TDM controller.

release921
release921 <inst>
This command releases GR-303 EOC or TMC link connections on links using Link Access Protocol-D (LAPD).
Syntax inst Description the instance of the link. Range: 1 - maximum number. The maximum number varies by card type: BIC 338 ETIC 32 LTC 32 TIC 32 PIC 0

release921 1
To reconnect the link connections, see resync921 on page 651.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

45

Using ISE

Using ISE
The T7000 Operating System is called ISE (Imbedded System Engine). ISE has a command shell, similar to UNIX, that processes system level commands. If the command shell does not recognize a command, it passes it on to the applications system.

ISE Commands
The following are simulation commands specific to dryISE:

_login _login: <name>

This command logs into the shell to access the T7000. Enter the user name, press <Enter>, and the password prompt appears. Enter the password and press <Enter> to log on to the switch.
NOTE: The switch automatically creates three accounts: the superuser account is named root. This account is for use by Taqua TAC support the supervisor account is named admin. This account has a default password of admin the craft user account is named user. This account has a default password of user.

Syntax

Description user name

<name>

_login: admin password: ***** <Ctrl> + D

The key sequence <Ctrl> + D logs the user out of the T7000. To continue, you must login to the switch again.

46

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using ISE

passwd passwd
This command changes the password of the active user. Type the old password, press <Enter>, and the new password prompt appears. Type the new password, press <Enter>, and the repeat password prompt appears. Re-type the new password, and press <Enter> to change the password.
NOTE: The password is only changed on the local card. Be sure to repeat this command on each card of the shelf!

Syntax

Description Type the current password of the user and press <Enter>. Type the new password for the user and press <Enter>. Type the new password a second time and press <Enter> to confirm the change.

Enter old password: Enter password: Enter it again:

passwd Enter old password: ***** Enter password: ***** Enter it again: *****

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

47

Using ISE

adduser adduser <name> [permission] [passwd] [shell]

This command adds a user to the T7000. You can only add users with the same or a lower permission level
NOTE: The user is only added on the local card. Be sure to repeat this command on each card of the shelf!.

Syntax

Description unique user name, without spaces

<name>

[permission] permission level of the user:

0 Superuser, this level is the highest permission level. This user can perform any task on the switch and create and remove other levels of users. 1 Administrator, this level can perform any task that does not require access to level 0 files. This level is recommend for use by service engineers. 2 User, this level can only invoke CLI commands. Level 2 is recommend for use by craft technicians. This is an optional parameter. If left blank, the default value is 2 / User. user password If left blank, adduser prompts for the account password. internal value, leave this field blank

[passwd] [shell]

adduser kdugas 1 kd423 whoami whoami

This command shows the user name for the active user. The data returned is the user name of the active user.

whoami admin

48

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using ISE

users users
This command shows a list of users on the T7000. To use this command, you must be logged in as a level 1 or level 0 user. Enter users and press <Enter>. The data returned is the user name and permission level of all users defined on the T7000.

users username root admin user

perm 0 1 2

shell xsh "-proot:%d.%d> " xsh xsh

rmuser rmuser <name>

This command removes a user from the user list. This command can only be performed by a level 0 superuser.
NOTE: The user is only removed on the local card. Be sure to repeat this command on each card of the shelf!

Syntax

Description enter the user name

<name>

rmuser kdugas

dl dl <address> <count>
This command displays T7000 memory, one 32 bit word at a time The left most number is the starting address in memory. The next four sets of numbers are four 32 bit words of memory. To the right, enclosed in curly braces, is the ASCII representation of memory.
Syntax Description starting address to display. the number of bytes to display.

<address> <count>

dl 8b0320 20 008b0320: 29232840 632f3a76 6c2f7376 662f6374 008b0330: 662f6d73 682e6d73 3120762c 3220362e (9110336)<8b0340>

{@(#)v:/cvs/ltc/f} {sm/fsm.h,v 1.6 2}

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using CLI

49

Using ISE

db db <address> <count>
This command displays T7000 memory, one 8 bit byte at a time. The left most number is the starting address in memory. The next sixteen sets of numbers are sixteen 8 bit bytes of memory. To the right is the ASCII representation of memory.
Syntax Description starting address to display. the number of bytes to display.

<address> <count>

db 8b0320 20 008b0320: 40 28 23 29 76 3a 2f 63 76 73 2f 6c 74 63 2f 66 @(#)v:/cvs/ltc/f 008b0330: 73 6d 2f 66 73 6d 2e 68 2c 76 20 31 2e 36 20 32 sm/fsm.h,v 1.6 2 (9110336)<8b0340>

now now
This command displays the current system date and time.

now Tuesday, 30 September 2008 14:35:26.315 [-360, STD]

50

Using CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Alarms

2
Alarms tell you if there is a software or hardware problem on the T7000. Alarm definitions apply to all of the cards on the shelf. Each alarm trigger is a subset of all the T7000 events that can occur on the switch. For a full list of events, see the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide. The following commands do not resolve the problem causing the alarm, but do acknowledge the alarm. For information on how to resolve alarms, see the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide.

Acknowledging Alarms

ackAlarm
ackAlarm <Alarm Type> <CauseObjectID> <login> (card)
This command acknowledges an alarm. The command turns off the sound of audible alarms. Acknowledge an alarm to indicate that you know the alarm exists.
Syntax <Alarm Type> <CauseObjectID> Description The name of the activated alarm. See the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide. The object ID of the equipment causing the alarm. Object Identifierunique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. The user name to be associated with acknowledging the alarm. optional The card number that has the alarm condition.

<login> (card)

ackAlarm CardTypeFrontInvalid Trunk-2-1-0 Username 2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Alarms

51

Acknowledging Alarms

decommission
decommission <card>
This command indicates the card is out of service in the slot it is currently in and will not become active again unless rebooted or replaced. This command removes all outstanding alarms with an OID specifying that slot and removes the cardStatus alarm from the db master who is maintaining the list of system alarms.
Syntax <card> Description card number (1-20)

decommission 3

manualClear
manualClear <alarmType> <OID>
This command clears the specified alarm on the specified object. Syntax <alarmType> Description The type of alarm to clear The Object ID that currently has the alarm.

<OID>

manualClear NoHostIDForCDRCollection Card-1-1-1

52

Alarms

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning Alarms

Provisioning Alarms
changeAlarmDefAttr
changeAlarmDefAttr <TriggeringEvent> <attrIndex> <newValue>
This command modifies alarms on the T7000.
Syntax <TriggeringEvent> <attrIndex> Description The alarm category or type. See the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide. The attribute value that you want to change, including: 2Alarm text 3Severity 4LED 5Audible Alarm <newValue> Use the corresponding value for the attrIndex selected, including: For attrIndex 2 use any text string that describes the alarm For attrIndex 3 use: INFORMATIONAL_ALARM, MINOR_ALARM, MAJOR_ALARM, or CRITICAL_ALARM) For attrIndex 4 use: LED_OFF, LED_RED, LED_YELLOW, LED_GREEN) For attrIndex 4 use: 0 for No audible alarm or 1 for Yes audible alarm

changeAlarmDefAttr SpanLOS 4 LED_RED

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Alarms

53

Querying Alarms

Querying Alarms
alarmHistory
alarmHistory [[-v] <size> (card)]
If the OM is disconnected from the T7000, this command shows the alarms in the alarm history list on the T7000. When the OM is connected to the T7000, this list is empty because the alarm history is sent directly to the OM.
Syntax [-v] <size> (card)
alarmHistory

Description optional verbose flag, displays detailed alarm information if present number of alarm records to show optional card to query

C S l y Alarm Type r s ------------------------------------------------------------------------04.15-10:17:43 Card-7-7-24 - AuditCorrection 04.15-10:14:36 Span-19-7-24 - SpanAIS 04.15-10:14:36 Span-18-7-24 - SpanAIS 04.15-10:14:36 Span-17-7-24 - SpanAIS 04.15-10:14:36 Span-16-7-24 - SpanAIS 04.15-10:14:36 Span-15-7-24 - SpanAIS Timestamp ObjectID

54

Alarms

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Querying Alarms

queryAlarmDef
queryAlarmDef <TriggeringEvent/ALL>
This command shows information pertaining to the specified alarm or all of the alarms.
Syntax <TriggeringEvent/ALL> Description
The name of any alarm trigger or ALL to show all of the alarm definitions. See the T7000

Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide. queryAlarmDef CardStatus

******* Alarm Definition ******* TriggeringEvent = CardStatus Alarm Text = Card is offline Severity = MAJOR_ALARM LED = CARD_LED Turns on audible alarm This is a system-wide alarm

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Alarms

55

Querying Alarms

queryAlarms
queryAlarms [[-v] [QueryType] [QueryItem] [card]]
This command queries current alarm status. If you only enter queryAlarms the T7000 shows all currently active alarms for the card that originated the CLI command.
Syntax [-v] [QueryType] Description optional verbose flag, displays detailed alarm information if present optional parameter, only processed if -v flag is entered ALARM SEVERITY [QueryItem] optional parameter, only processed if -v flag is entered If the first parameter is ALARM, this parameter is any valid alarm or alarm category name. See the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide. If the first parameter is SEVERITY, this parameter is INFORMATIONAL_ALARM, MINOR_ALARM, MAJOR_ALARM, or CRITICAL_ALARM. [card] optional parameter, only processed if -v flag is entered Indicates the card number (1-20) on which the alarm resides.
queryAlarms SEVERITY MINOR_ALARM 19 S A A S Timestamp ObjectID e u c y Alarm Type v d k s --------------------------------------------------------03.30-11:18:28 ClkCard-0-0-1 CR * - * TDM_No_Valid_Ref 03.30-11:18:28 ClkCard-0-0-1 MJ * - * PowerA_Undervolt 03.30-11:26:40 SS7Link-0-2-1 MJ * - * SS7LinkStatus 03.30-11:27:02 SS7Link-1-3-1 MJ * - * SS7LinkStatus 04.04-12:08:11 Shelf-0-0-1 MJ * - * OMDiskThreshold 04.04-13:25:02 Card-17-17-1 MJ * - * CardStatus 04.05-09:56:10 Card-2-2-1 MN * - * AuditsManuallyDisabled 04.13-10:22:25 FE-1-11-1 IN * - * FEIfPaused

NOTE: Sev is the severity (MN=minor, MJ=major, CT=critical, IN=informational) Aud is whether or not the alarms is audible alarm (*=yes, -=no) Ack is whether or not the alarm been acknowledged (*=yes, -=no) Sys is whether or not this is a system-wide alarm (*=yes, -=no) Clr is whether or not the alarm been cleared (M=manually cleared, A=automatically cleared, -=not cleared)

56

Alarms

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Events

3
As actions take place on the T7000 they produce events. For a complete list of events, see the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide.

Managing Events
enableEvent
enableEvent <eventType>
This command allows disabled events to be processed by the system. By default, all events are enabled and processed
NOTE: The event is only enabled on the card where the enableEvent command was entered.

Syntax

Description name of any valid event type

<eventType>

enableEvent AdoAttributeChanged ****** Event Notification ****** (eventName): EventEnabled (senderID): <718d120> (objectID): 0 (timestamp): 3b3a4 5bf (enabledEVID): 20606f

getMaxEventTransmit
getMaxEventTransmit [card]
This command displays the maximum number of events that are sent to a host by a

card. If card is omitted, the number of events sent by all cards is displayed.
Syntax Description Card number to get value from. Range is 1 20. Default is all cards

[card]

getMaxEventTransmit Card - 1: MaxEventTransmitPerInterval=80

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Events

57

Logging Events

Logging Events
eventLogSize
eventLogSize <size>
NOTE: The initial size of the event log is 100.

This command limits the number of events buffered in the event log to size.
Syntax Description number of events to record

<size>

eventLogSize 150

postEvent
postEvent <eventType> <oid> <parm1 <parm2 <...>>> cardNumber
This command generates an event on a specific oid on a specific card.
Syntax Description name of any valid event type Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. Note: oid may be zero. the text that describes the event (If there are spaces, use double quotes.) number of card (1-20)

<eventType> <oid>

<parm1 <parm2 <...>>> <cardNumber>

postEvent Warning trunk-1-5-1 Exceeded number 5

purgeEventLog
purgeEventLog
This command cleans the Event Log of all event records.

58

Events

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Logging Events

stopEventLog
stopEventLog <eventName> [<shelf, card, pid, cat, inst>]
This command stops the logging of a specific event or of all events.
Syntax Description optional--skip this parameter to log all events name of specific event to log

<eventName> (<shelf, card, pid, cat, inst>) stopEventLog Warning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Events

59

Querying Events

Querying Events
queryEventLog
queryEventLog <numEvents>
This command queries the most recent events
Syntax Description The number of events to display from the event log

<numEvents>
queryEventLog 2

**************************** ******** Event report ********* ******************************* Event #(1) ****** Event Notification ****** (eventName): Warning (senderID): <1431890> (objectID): "ohDelay" (timestamp): 8695 (refdate): 7d710c (reftime): 111208 (rawreftime): 82e2 (reserved): 0 (text): "Local SCCP PC/SSN does not exist. Cannot configure TCAP Service"

Event #(2) ****** Event Notification ****** (eventName): Warning (senderID): <1120b30> (objectID): "ohDelay" (timestamp): 8756 (refdate): 7d710c (reftime): 111208 (rawreftime): 82e2 (reserved): 0 (text): "Local SCCP PC/SSN does not exist. Cannot configure TCAP Service"

60

Events

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Querying Events

queryEventRegs
queryEventRegs <eventName> or <eventNumber> or <shelf=x>
This command returns a list of processes that have registered to be notified upon the occurrence of the specified event. Syntax Description The name of the event that one or more processes have registered for. All events registered on shelf x. Note: shelf= must be typed in exactly as it appears.
queryEventRegs Fuse_Failure

<eventName> <eventNumber> <shelf=x>

************************************** ******** Event Registrations ********* **************************************

EventRegistration #(0x1) This registration is for: Fuse_Failure Destination ID = shelf (0x5) card (0xa), pid (0x35), category (0x0), instance (0x0) Sender #0 = shelf (0x5) card (0xa), pid (0x7fffffff), category (0x7fffffff), instance (0x7fffffff) Stop FLag Set = FALSE

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Events

61

Querying Events

62

Events

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries
Generic CLI Queries

4
Use the query command to query a Generic CLI object. When entered without a dbObject, the query command returns a list of Generic CLI objects that can be queried.

query To query facilities, use 'queryFacility' Usage: query <dbObject> <key> [attribute] This action can be performed on the following: AccountCodeProfile AcctCodePatternProfile AniSubscriber BearerGroup CalltypeProfile CardConfiguration CardProperties Carrier CarrierRouteList CASTrunkGroup CFBInfo CFDInfo CFFInfo CFVInfo CLRTrunkGroup CodecProfile CodecProfileList DigitMap DS3Properties EscapeCodePatternProfile FEIProperties FTRSProfile HostIPAddrPair HuntGroup InterfaceGroup IPTrunkGroup LineProperties LNPRouteList MediaGateway MediaGatewayProfile OffHookDelayProfile OffHookImmediateProfile OfficeParms OutPulseProfile PacketCableCmts PCMMCmts PFCPatternProfile Prefix PRITrunkGroup PublicFeatureCodeProfile RateCenter RcfInfo SCCPNode SCFInfo ScreenList SdInfo SDSPatternProfile ServiceProfile Shelf SipAgwEndpoint SipAgwEndpointProfile SipEsgwEndpoint SipEsgwEndpointProfile SipNgwEndpoint SipNgwEndpointProfile sipVMS SMDIParms SpanProperties SpecificDigitStrProfile SS7TrunkGroup Subscriber

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

63

Generic CLI Queries

MediaParam MGCPTrunkGroup MGTermination MGTerminationProfile N11PatternProfile N11Profile NailedUpCircuit NANPRouteList

SubstitutionGroup TandemAniRouteList TandemCarrierRouteList TandemTGRouteList TcapMwiParms TCAPService TermAttemptProfile TrunkProperties

Some Generic CLI object queries have been documented in this manual, see:

query AniSubscriber on page 513 query Card on page 167 query Carrier on page 208 query CFVInfo on page 553 query SCFInfo on page 553 query CFBInfo on page 554 query CFDInfo on page 554 query CFFInfo on page 555 query OfficeParms on page 388 query Prefix on page 407 Querying a RateCenter on page 414 query SdInfo on page 556 query SCCPNode on page 486 query sipVMS on page 594 query SMDIParms on page 590 query Subscriber on page 552 TcapMwiParms on page 497

Any object not explicitly documented follows the Generic CLI Create Example on page 13.

64

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Switch Queries

General Switch Queries

Active call measurements determine call traffic patterns on the switch. This statistical data supports configuration decisions regarding facility assignment. The active call measurements feature:

View a snapshot of all active calls on an switch at a point in time. Log calls for a specific period. View the call log.

You can determine the interval in seconds to log calls on the switch. View active calls or a recorded call log on the following:

A card A trunk group A span All of the cards in a switch All of the spans in a switch All of the trunk groups on a switch

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

65

General Switch Queries

queryActiveCalls queryActiveCalls <spanOID | feifOID | cardOID | TrunkGroupName> queryActiveCalls <perSpan | perFeif | perTrunkGroup> queryActiveCalls <perCard [lines | trunks]>
This command displays a current active call snapshot.
Syntax <spanOID | feifOID | cardOID | TrunkGroupName> Description spanOID display for a single span feifOID display for a single Fast Ethernet Interface (FEIF), valid for PICs only cardOID display for a single card TrunkGroupName display for a single trunk group <perSpan | perFeif | perTrunkGroup> perSpan display for all spans perFeif display for all FEIFs perTrunkGroup display for all trunk groups

<perCard [lines | trunks]

perCard display for all cards, both lines and trunks perCard lines display for all cards, lines only perCard trunks display for all cards, spans only

queryActiveCalls Span-1-12-2 queryActiveCalls perSpan

Output:

Active Channels per span: Span-0-2-11: 3 Span-1-2-11: 2 Span-2-2-11: 18 Span-3-2-11: 0 Span-4-2-11: 12 Span-5-2-11: 16 Span-6-2-11: 2 Span-7-2-11: 3 Span-8-2-11: 20 Span-9-2-11: 19

66

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Switch Queries

queryCallHist queryCallHist <spanOID | feifOID | cardOID | TrunkGroupName> queryCallHist <perSpan | perFeif | perTrunkGroup> queryCallHist <perCard [lines | trunks]>
This command displays the history of active call log.s
Syntax <spanOID | feifOID | cardOID | TrunkGroupName> Description spanOID display for a single span feifOID display for a single Fast Ethernet Interface (FEIF), valid for PICs only cardOID display for a single card TrunkGroupName display for a single trunk group <perSpan | perFeif | perTrunkGroup> perSpan display for all spans perFeif display for all FEIFs perTrunkGroup display for all trunk groups

<perCard [lines | trunks ]

perCard display for all cards, both lines and trunks perCard lines display for all cards, lines only perCard trunks display for all cards, spans only

queryCallHist Span-1-12-2 queryCallHist perSpan

Output:

Active Channels per span: Span-0-2-11: 304 Span-1-2-11: 225 Span-2-2-11: 180 Span-3-2-11: 10 Span-4-2-11: 128 Span-5-2-11: 169 Span-6-2-11: 208 Span-7-2-11: 388 Span-8-2-11: 203 Span-9-2-11: 197

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

67

General Switch Queries

availableFacility availableFacility <oid> [bySpan]

This command shows which facilities on the switch are not:

assigned to a trunk group assigned to a GR-303 interface group acting as an SS7 link acting as a nailed up circuit assigned to a subscriber (for lines)

NOTE: This command does not return information for PIC facilities. PIC facilities are dynamically assigned.)

Syntax <oid> [bySpan]

Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. returns span-specific facilities

availableFacility Card-1 bySpan Span-0-1-1: 24 trunks available

68

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Switch Queries

queryFacility queryFacility <oid>

This command show information about a facility
NOTE: This command does not return information for PIC facilities. PIC facilities are dynamically assigned.)

Syntax <oid>

Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.

queryFacility Line-0 (OID: 4a18000) <3f409a0> Line key.........................<> objectID....................Line-0-1-10 dependentOIDs...............<> containerOID................Card-1-1-10 operationalState............BUSY administrativeState.........UNLOCKED masterOperationalState......ACTIVE masterAdministrativeState...UNLOCKED currentActivityCount........1 (1) maximumActivityCount........1 (1) inTest......................NO cpState.....................ACTIVE sReservedKey................<> protocol....................FXO signalingType...............LOOPSTART_A suspended...................NOT_SUSPENDED timers......................<3f41350> <3f41350> SubscriberFacilityTimers GuardTime...................4b0 (1200) ChargeDelay.................0 (0) TimedDisconnectTime.........1388 (5000) ForwardDisconnectTime.......c8 (200) RingCadenceOnTime...........7d0 (2000) RingCadenceOffTime..........fa0 (4000) MinFlashHookTime............12c (300) FlashInterval...............384 (900) MinWinkDuration.............64 (100) MaxWinkDuration.............15e (350) WinkDuration................c8 (200) DebounceTime................1e (30) FlashDuration...............384 (900) OffHookDigMax...............46 (70) OffHookDigMin...............0 (0) OnHookDigMax................46 (70) OnHookDigMin................0 (0) TerminatorDisconnectDelay...7d0 (2000) LCFO_Duration...............2bc (700) DialtoneDelay...............96 (150) channel.....................30 (48) activeService...............0 (0) subscriberKey..............."9724800000" conferenceInfo..............0 (0)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

69

General Switch Queries

origChannelList.............0 (0) restrictedDigitPattern......0 (0) ropDigits...................0 - No Attribute Definition ropResultInfo...............0 - No Attribute Definition ropResultFlag...............0 - No Attribute Definition ringingType.................0 (0) activeCCBKey................"00a1600H4y0jq02" passiveCCBKey...............0 - No Attribute Definition activeCCBlock...............<3f40a78> <3f40a78> CCBlock key.................................0 objectID............................0 dependentOIDs.......................0 - No Attribute Definition origOID.............................Line-0-1-10 contextKey.........................."00a1600H4y0jq02" role................................ORIGINATOR ani................................."9724800000" destinationAddress.................."9724800001" termOID.............................Line-1-1-10 patternMatched......................3 (3) callingPartyNumPres.................1 (1) callingPartyName...................."Crutcher Mark" callingPartyNamePres................1 (1) callingPartyNameAvail...............0 (0) portedToLRN.........................0 (0) translatedIndicator.................0 (0) useLnpRoute.........................0 (0) carrier.............................0 (0) carrierSelectionInfo................0 (0) facilityInfoElem....................0 (0) infoDigits..........................0 (0) chargeNumber........................"" callType............................0 (0) originalAddress.....................0 (0) serviceIndicator....................0 (0) hopCounter..........................7f (127) redirectionCount....................0 (0) redirectionReason...................0 (0) redirectingNumber...................0 (0) networkServices.....................0 (0) msgType.............................1 (1) backwardProgressDescription.........1 (1) causeCode...........................10 (16) lata................................"123" dialToneType........................0 (0) forwardProgressDescription..........3 (3) changeBackwardProgressDescription...1 (1) changeForwardProgressDescription....0 (0) transferCapability..................0 (0) callingPartySubaddress..............0 (0) calledPartySubaddress...............0 (0) tandemRoutingCode...................0 (0) jurisdictionInfo...................."972480" routeFailedReason...................0 (0) restrictInfoAnalTrigger.............0 (0) restrictInfoCollTrigger.............0 (0) circuitCode.........................0 (0) uniqueNatureOfAddress...............1 (1) termChannelList.....................0 (0) dialedDigits........................"9724800001" genericInfoForEmergency.............<> locationIDNumber....................<> redirectSession.....................0 (0) redirectSessionType.................0 (0) currentSession......................0 (0) carrierUsed.........................0 (0) disposition.........................64 (100) dispositionTime....................."20071018001929000" offHkTime..........................."20071018001926000" onHkTime............................0 (0) termTrunkGroup......................""

70

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Switch Queries

carrierConnectTime.................."" carrierDisconnectTime..............."" tcapReqd............................0 (0) origRateCenter......................"rc1" termRateCenter......................"rc1" billingFlag.........................1 (1) partialCdrHandle....................0 (0) longDurationCdrHandle...............<419aa78> <419aa78> cmSendLongDurationCdr smrouting...10030 - No Attribute Definition key........."00a1600H4y0jq02" replacementDigits..................."" replacementMode.....................0 - No Attribute Definition PCAC................................"" prefixMatchedLen....................6 - No Attribute Definition SCPDipForAINDone....................0 - No Attribute Definition replacementAni......................"" replacementInfoDigits...............0 - No Attribute Definition remoteOperations....................0 (0) ainResourceType.....................0 - No Attribute Definition strParamBlock.......................0 - No Attribute Definition matchedPtnStr.......................0 - No Attribute Definition destName............................0 - No Attribute Definition accessCode..........................0 - No Attribute Definition countryCode.........................0 - No Attribute Definition InterOperAssiCode...................0 - No Attribute Definition tandemRouteDigit....................0 - No Attribute Definition featureInteraction..................0 - No Attribute Definition ftrsUseLnp..........................0 - No Attribute Definition ftrsPCAC............................0 - No Attribute Definition ftrsFwdingProfile...................0 - No Attribute Definition origDialedDigits...................."" origOutBoundCarrier................."" incCarrierId........................0 - No Attribute Definition replacementCSI......................100 - No Attribute Definition session.............................2 (2) NXCode..............................0 - No Attribute Definition regionCode..........................7fffffff - No Attribute Definition billingCalledParty..................0 (0) abridgedCDR.........................0 (0) origDestDigits......................"9724800001" origBearerOID.......................Line-0-1-10 termBearerOID.......................Line-1-1-10 originalAddressNOA..................fe (254) redirectingNumberNOA................fe (254) callingPartyNOA.....................0 (0) tandemBciInterworking...............0 (0) answerInd...........................0 (0) userNetworkInteraction..............0 (0) authStatus..........................0 (0) tandemFciInterworking...............0 (0) billingOrigOID......................Line-0-1-10 billingTermOID......................0 origInfoDigits......................0 (0) origChargeNumber....................0 (0) ccbspare1...........................0 (0) ccbspare2...........................0 (0) ccbspare3...........................0 (0) cfNumberFromLocalSipPhone...........0 (0) serviceActivationParm...............0 (0) escapeFtrsProfile...................0 (0) cadenceProfile......................0 (0) calledPtyStaType....................0 (0) voiceMailIndicator..................0 - No Attribute Definition callingPartyCategory................7fffffff - No Attribute Definition infoCollectedPattern................13 - No Attribute Definition ccbBitField.........................0 (0) origNumberPres......................3 (3) redNumberPres.......................3 (3) routeAttempts.......................0 (0)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

71

General Switch Queries

cidBuffer...........................0 termMGTermination...................0 origIpCallid........................0 esaIpTg.............................0 esaReason...........................0 origTGName..........................0 secondaryDNInfo.....................0

(0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0)

callContextBlocks...........Dictionary (0 items) -> cblock......................<3f41158> <3f41158> CommonCCBlock key.....................<> objectID................Line-0-1-10 dependentOIDs...........<> trunkGroupName..........<> crv.....................0 (0) serviceFlag.............0 (0) onDemandServices........(BITFIELD) -> 0 serviceInProgress.......0 (0) reservedCodecTypeList...<> IPTrunkReserved.........0 (0) mediaGateway............<>

72

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Switch Queries

queryGrp
queryGrp [name] [<attributeName> [LOCAL] [TRACE]]
This command shows information about any trunk or hunt group. To convert hexadecimal output from this query command to decimal, see Using Hexadecimal on page 741.
Syntax [name] <attributeName> [LOCAL] Description name of group. Omit for a list of all Trunk or Hunt Groups. to return only a single attribute from the query optional requests that data is retrieved from the card where the command is entered, instead of from the dBMaster [TRACE] optional data is displayed in as an object trace.

queryGrp AmerC1 ******* Facility Group Trace ******* CASTrunkGroup key........................"AmerC1" facilities.................<1d8c670> FacilityList (1 items) -> 1 (1): TGFacility facility...Span-6-8-18 cic........0 (0) timers.....................<25aabc0> CasTimers GuardTime...................4b0 (1200) ChargeDelay.................0 (0) TimedDisconnectTime.........1388 (5000) ForwardDisconnectTime.......c8 (200) RingCadenceOnTime...........7d0 (2000) RingCadenceOffTime..........fa0 (4000) MinFlashHookTime............12c (300) FlashInterval...............384 (900) MinWinkDuration.............64 (100) MaxWinkDuration.............15e (350) WinkDuration................c8 (200)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

73

General Switch Queries

DebounceTime................1e (30) FlashDuration...............384 (900) OffHookDigMax...............46 (70) OffHookDigMin...............0 (0) OnHookDigMax................46 (70) OnHookDigMin................0 (0) TerminatorDisconnectDelay...7d0 (2000) LCFO_Duration...............2bc (700) options....................<25aa180> CASOptions glareControl......................ODD outpulseAsDialed..................FALSE numOfDIDDigits....................a (10) networkServices...................NONE skipMinDigitsRestriction..........FALSE fgc911MakeFirstSecond.............OFF useANIDNIS........................NO routeOnRcvdCarrier................OUTBCRRIER_INBCARRIER diddtmfProvideDialtoneAfterWink...OFF selectionMethod............ROUND_ROBIN sendOAssistCalls...........FALSE sendDAssistCalls...........FALSE tandemRoutingType..........NO_ROUTING defaultDN..................0 restrictions...............(BITFIELD) -> 0 defaultNPA.................0 replaceDestinationDigits...FALSE replaceCarrier.............FALSE replaceAniDigits...........FALSE replaceInfoDigits..........FALSE ftrsProfile................0 replaceCSI.................FALSE localTermination...........ALLOWED tandemDefaultRoutingType...USE_CARRIER_NANP miscOptions................Dictionary (0 items) -> denyAniList................0 direction..................BI_DIRECTIONAL tandemCustomReplacement....NO trunkProtocol..............FXO signalingType..............LOOPSTART_D receivingProtocol..........NO_SUB_PROTOCOL outpulsingProtocol.........NO_SUB_PROTOCOL numDestDigits..............DEFAULT numAniDigits...............DEFAULT numInfoDigits..............DEFAULT outPulseProfileKey.........0 E911DefaultANI.............0

74

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Switch Queries

querySysMgr querySysMgr
If you perform this command on the card that is not the System Manager (SM), it returns the following:

Information about the cards role, for example, if this card is the Primary Management Interface (PMI) or Alternate Management Interface (AMI) Address of ISEhouse, if present Pointer to the active SM in the switch

querySysMgr System Manager status ===================== Current role is AMI SM Server (ISEhouse) shelf address is 210000. SM Server (ISEhouse) IP address is 172.19.161.20 The currently active SM is shelf 23/card 21 (0x17/0x15).
If you perform this command on the card that is the SM, it returns

Information about the cards role, showing it is the active SM Address of ISEhouse, if present States of all cards in the switch Outstanding timers against cards in the switch

querySysMgr System Manager status ===================== Current role is PMI SM Server (ISEhouse) shelf address is 210000. SM Server (ISEhouse) IP address is 172.19.161.20 Shelf numbers in this OCX system: 23 The currently active SM is this card, shelf 23/card 21 (0x17/0x15). S H E L F 23 =================================== Chassis = READY Slot 01 = READY Slot 02 = READY Slot 03 = READY Slot 04 = NULL Slot 05 = DISABLED Slot 06 = READY Slot 07 = READY Slot 08 = READY Slot 09 = NULL Slot 10 = READY Slot 11 = NULL Slot 12 = READY Slot 13 = NULL Slot 14 = NULL Slot 15 = READY Slot 16 = NULL Slot 17 = READY Slot 18 = NULL Slot 19 = READY Slot 20 = NULL Clk A = READY Clk B = NULL

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

75

General Switch Queries

queryConnections queryConnections
This command sends a HOSTD query event to all cards. It collects and reports the responses. It shows each network connection, and the connected shelf number in hexadecimal, the IP address, and the amount of time that the shelf has been connected to the switch. To convert hexadecimal output from this query command to decimal, see Using Hexadecimal on page 741. Also, see queryHostdProxyDb on page 81
queryConnections Card 17: Shelf:0xfd Card 21: Shelf:0x21 2 connections to shelf IP:172.19.168.5 Uptime:0 days 06:33:44 IP:172.19.161.20 Uptime:3 days 07:06:00

queryFaultStatus queryFaultStatus <cardNumber>

This command shows the mode (automatic or manual) of the fault manager and the card on which it is running.

queryFaultStatus Fault Manager is running in Auto mode in card 1.

setQueryWait setQueryWait <waitTime>

NOTE: This command has no effect, and is being deprecated

This command sets the wait time before performing a query command.
Syntax <waitTime> Description number of milliseconds

setQueryWait 1200

76

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Switch Queries

queryCardStatus queryCardStatus
This command shows card status for all of the cards in a switch, including the type of card and if it is in service or not.

queryCardStatus ************************************** ********* System Card Status ********* ************************************** SLOT ( 1):TICSUB Mgr SLOT ( 2):TIC SLOT ( 3):TIC SLOT ( 4):OUT-OF-SERVICE SLOT ( 5):OUT-OF-SERVICE SLOT ( 6):LTC SLOT ( 7):OUT-OF-SERVICE SLOT ( 8):PIC SLOT ( 9): SLOT (10):PICSUB Mgr SLOT (11): SLOT (12):PIC SLOT (13): SLOT (14):OUT-OF-SERVICE SLOT (15):BIC SLOT (16): SLOT (17):BICSUB Mgr SLOT (18): SLOT (19):BIC SLOT (20): CLCK (01):CLK CLCK (02):OUT-OF-SERVICE

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

77

General Switch Queries

queryShelfLEDs queryShelfLEDs
This command shows shelf light emitting diodes (LEDS) on all the cards in a switch and their severity.
queryShelfLEDs Slot: 1 2 3 Crit: - - Majr: - - Minr: - - Adbl: - - 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A - - - - - - - - - - - - - A - A A - - - - - - - - - A A - A A

shelf_inv
shelf_inv
This command shows which slots have in-service cards logged onto inventory (marked by asterisks) and which cards currently have Ethernet connections (marked by brackets around asterisks).

shelf_inv
S C L l O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 k T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A ==============================================================< - - - [*] - - - - - * * * - - - - - * * - C l k B *

78

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Switch Queries

dispOID
dispOID <OID>

This command displays the constituent parts of an OID.

Syntax <OID> Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. The OID can be entered in either hexidecimal or ASCII form.

dispOID FE-0-1-1 OID: 4144000 Card Shelf Type Inst = = = = 1 1 17 0

dispOID 4144000 OID: FE-0-1-1 Card Shelf Type Inst = = = = 1 1 17 0

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

79

General Switch Queries

status
status <oid> | (<object>) <key>)
This is the Generic CLI status command. For details, see status on page 7. It can also show command the Operational State, Master Operational State, Administrative State, Master Administrative State, Resource Status, and Resource Available status for an OID. However, this usage is being phased out. Use statusFacility instead.
Syntax [oid] Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.

status span-0 ***** Status for Span-0-1-10 ***** Operational State: ENABLED Master Operational State: ENABLED Administrative State: UNLOCKED Master Administrative State: UNLOCKED Resource Status: ISV Resource Available?: YES

statusFacility
statusFacility <oid> This command shows the Operational State, Master Operational State, Administrative State, Master Administrative State, Resource Status, and Resource Available status for an OID.
Syntax <oid> Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.

934> statusFacility span-0 935> ***** Status for Span-0-1-10 ***** Operational State: ENABLED Master Operational State: ENABLED Administrative State: UNLOCKED Master Administrative State: UNLOCKED Resource Status: ISV Resource Available?: YES

80

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Switch Queries

spanStatus
spanStatus
This command show the Operational State, Master Operational State, Administrative State, Master Administrative State, Resource Status, and Resource Available for all spans on the local card.

spanStatus Mastr Mastr Oper Oper Admin Admin Resrc Resrc OID State State State State Status Avail --------------------------------------------------------Span-0-6-23 ena ena unlk unlk isv yes Span-1-6-23 dis ena unlk unlk oos no

querySchedule querySchedule
This command shows the current task schedule. See addTask on page 597.

Tip
Although tasks can control alternate routing, they can also be used to automatically schedule any task that the switch should run periodically, such as backing up (flashing) the switch databases. querySchedule Current Time: 2004.09.05-10:34:39. Current Schedule: Task Name Start Time Card Period Command -------------------------------------------------------------------taskName yyyy.mo.dd-hh:mm:ss ## xxxxxxx x-command backup 2004.09.05-23:55:00 0 daily sh<6/backup

queryHostdProxyDb queryHostdProxyDb
This command lists all HOSTD connections to the switch. It shows OM, ISEhouse, and TOPI shelf connections in hexadecimal, and which card in the shelf terminates the connection. To convert hexadecimal output from this query command to decimal, see Using Hexadecimal on page 741. Also, see queryConnections on page
76.

queryHostdProxyDb host shelf:0x21 connected to proxy card 1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

81

General Switch Queries

now
now
This command returns the system time.

now Tuesday, 30 October 2007

20:17:22.982 [0, STD]

82

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Database Queries

Database Queries
queryDbMaster queryDbMaster
This command shows the card number of the database master card. The dB master contains the provisioning database. All cards in the system know which card is the dB master. If the card running the dB master fails, another running card automatically becomes the dB master.

queryDbMaster DbMaster: 1

queryDb
queryDb [dbManagerID [key [attribute]]]

Tip
If you do not enter a dbManagerID, all database managers are returned

This command shows the list of databases and can also show the database being managed by a certain database manager. If you enter a key, only the database item referring to the key appears.

Syntax dbManagerID optional

Description

the name of the db manager key optional the specific name (key) of the object that you want to query, for example the name of a rate center or the DN of a subscriber attribute optional

the attribute in the object of the database that you want to query queryDb tNailDbMgr Current Database... * * * * *

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

83

Database Queries

queryDbKeys queryDbKeys dbManagerID [card]

This command returns all of the database keys associated with the specified database manager.
Syntax dbManagerID [card] Description the name of the db manager optional card number (1-20). If no card number is specified, the database on the current card is queried

queryDbKeys tRateCenterDbMgr 1.rc1 2.rc2

queryMemAudit queryMemAudit
This command displays memory audit information, including information about db Flash.

Related Commands
See setDbFlashPadSize on page 600. See setServiceSaveInterval on page 601.

queryMemAudit ******* Memory Audit Information ******* ShelfNumber = 10 Low memory threshold: 15% of 190.734MB (28.609MB) Memory Test Sample Period = 5000 millisecs Memory Test Sample Threshold = 3 times Required memory pad for dbFlash = 500000 Service database autosave interval = 180000000 millisecs Sufficient memory condition for 32 audit cycles

84

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Database Queries

queryAttrDefs queryAttrDefs class

This command shows all attribute definitions for a given ADO.
Syntax <class> Description any Application Domain Object (e.g., Line, Trunk, Span, Card, Alarm, Subscriber, etc. for a list of database types, see queryDb on page 83.

queryAttrDefs IPAddrPair ***** Attribute Definition For Class (IPAddrPair), Attribute (sIPAddr) ***** INDEX: 0 ACCESS: ReadWrite REQUIRED: NO DISPLAYED ON GUI: YES PERSISTENT: YES DATA TYPE: tString DEFAULT VALUE: 0 VALID VALUES: Any String between 7 and 15 characters MIN/MAX: 7 15 ***** Attribute Definition For Class (IPAddrPair), Attribute (Port) ***** INDEX: 1 ACCESS: ReadWrite REQUIRED: NO DISPLAYED ON GUI: YES PERSISTENT: YES DATA TYPE: Integer DEFAULT VALUE: 1 VALID VALUES: Any Integer between 1 and 65535 MIN/MAX: 1 65535

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

85

Database Queries

queryAttrDef queryAttrDef <class> <attribute> [<attribute> <attribute>...>]

This command shows a definition for a specific attribute. The attribute definition specifies weather or not the attribute can be modified. It also shows the valid input values for the attributes.
Syntax <class> Description any Application Domain Object (e.g., Line, Trunk, Span, Card, Alarm, Subscriber, etc. for a list of database types, see queryDb on page 83. <attribute> [<attribute>, <attribute>...>] any valid attribute name seen from the query command optional any valid attribute name seen from the query command, more than one way may be specified

queryAttrDef Ds3Line operationalState ***** Attribute Definition For Class (Ds3Line), Attribute (operationalState) ***** INDEX : 4 ACCESS : ReadOnly REQUIRED : NO DISPLAYED ON GUI : YES PERSISTENT : NO DATA TYPE : Integer DEFAULT VALUE : 1 INPUT TYPE : String or Integer VALID VALUES : (DISABLED or 0), (ENABLED or 1), (ACTIVE or 2), (BUSY or 3),

86

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Database Queries

queryModifiedAttrs queryModifiedAttrs
This command lists the object attributes that have been modified. This is usually the result of applying a patch to a trunk group.

xqueryModifiedAttrs IPTrunkGroup:sendCPN-OCX5.0.0-0042 HuntGroup:sendPilotDNasANI-OCX5.0.0-0078 InterfaceGroup:discardSETUP-OCX5.0.0-0087 OfficeParms:pingPeriod-OCX5.0.0-0096 SS7TrunkGroup:passFacilityMessage-OCX5.0.0-0099 PRITrunkGroup:errIntervalInMils-OCX5.0.0-0123 PRITrunkGroup:lowWaterPerSec-OCX5.0.0-0123 PRITrunkGroup:highWaterPerSec-OCX5.0.0-0123 InterfaceGroup:lowWaterPerSec-OCX5.0.0-0123

queryIG
queryIG <RDTName>

Tip
An asterisk next to the Trunk OID shows which card is running the call control logic. When the path is Active, the asterisk will be on that trunk. When the path is Forwarding, the asterisk will be on the mates trunk.

This command shows the trunks that are assigned to the primary and secondary EOCs and TMCs for an RDT interface group, as well as their corresponding spans.
NOTE: A status of Forwarding is the same as Active.

Syntax RDTName

Description name of Interface Group

queryIG

entrisphere Lapd: In_service Lapd: In_service Lapd: In_service Lapd: In_service

EOC Primary Path Status : Active Trunk-83-11-9* EOC Secondary Path Status : Standby Trunk-107-11-9 TMC Primary Path Status : Standby Trunk-95-11-9 TMC Secondary Path Status : Active Trunk-119-11-9* Spans: 1 Span-3-11-9 2 Span-4-11-9 Primary Secondary

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

87

Database Queries

whoDependsOn whoDependsOn <dbMgrCatName> <key>

This command shows inter database dependencies. Some database objects reference other database objects. The referenced object cannot be deleted as long other objects contain references to them.
Syntax Description name of the database manager to be queried name of the object to check for dependencies

<dbMgrCatName> <key>

In this example, rate center rc1 is referenced by several subscribers. Until these subscribers are deleted, or their rate center changed, rate center rc1 cannot be deleted.

whoDependsOn tRateCenterDbMgr rc1 Dependencies on this database entry... Dependencies in database tSubscriberDbMgr... Key: 9724800020 Key: 9724800021 Key: 9724800022 Key: 9724800023 Key: 9724800024 Key: 9724800025 Key: 9724800026 Key: 9724800027 Key: 9724800028 Key: 9724800029

88

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CDRs

CDRs
queryCdrStatus
queryCdrStatus
This command displays Call Detail Record (CDR) counters and whether or not a billing collection host (for example, the OM) is connected.
Syntax maTotalTransmittedCdrCount maTotalRecordCdrCount maBufferedCdrCount Description The total number of CDRs transmitted from the card. The total number of CDRs created on this card since last boot. The total number of CDRs buffered on the card. If this value exceeds the maMaxCdrBuffer amount the system deletes the oldest CDRs to protect the cards memory. maTotalLostCdrCount maMaxCdrBuffer The total number of CDRs that were lost due to the CDR buffer being full. The maximum number of CDRs that can be stored on the card when the billing collector is not connected. The number of CDRs (default 30) sent to the billing collection system for every CDR transmission. The number of milliseconds between CDR transfers. The transfer rate for CDRs can be determined by using the following formula:

maMaxCdrPerTransmit

maCdrTransmitInterval

(maMaxCdrPerTransmit (CDR) / maCdrTransmitInterval (ms)) * 1000 = CDR/second

NOTE: The default CDR transfer rate is (30 / 2000) * 1000 = 15 CDR/second. If this rate is too slow, further analysis is required. maSessionNumber maSequenceNumber The last session number used. The last sequence number used.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

89

CDRs

Syntax maHostID

Description The destination id of the registered billing collection system. This value is only valid when the isHostConnected variable shows Yes connected. Indicates if CDRs are being held on the card (Yes), or being collected off the card, (No)

isCardBuffering

queryCdrStatus ******************************************** **************** CDR Status **************** ******************************************** maTotalTransmittedCdrCount.............8 maTotalRecordCdrCount..................8 maBufferedCdrCount.....................0 maMaxCdrBuffer.........................5000 maMaxCdrPerTransmit....................104 maCdrTransmitInterval..................1400 maSessionNumber........................8 maSequenceNumber.......................8

90

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CDRs

showCDR
showCDR <maxRecords> [maPrintCdrDetail]
This command displays uncollected CDR records from the card.
NOTE: When CDR collection is running properly, there will be no (or very few) CDRs to display on the card.

Syntax <maxRecords> [maPrintCdrDetail]

Description the maximum number of CDR records to display. optional specifies that besides the raw CDR data, a formatted trace of the CDR show also be printed. 0f -- detailed print of primary CDRs f0 -- detailed print of secondary (service) CDRs ff -- detailed print of primary and secondary CDRs 0 -- (default) do not print detailed information for any type of CDRs

showCDR 3 [BEGIN]--------------OCX Message Accounting------------------[00001] 1;11;01;01;0000001;000001;;cardInit;20061221191644001;;;;;;;;;; [00002] 0;11;01;01;0000;0;0000002;000002;9724800000;;20061222222028000;200612222 22112000;104;20061222222112000;0;;;;;;;;0000;9724800000;15;00;;;;;;;;;;00 00;;;0; 0;;;00;;;16;;;0 [00003] 0;11;01;01;0001;0;0000003;000003;9724800001;;20061222222031000;200612222 22113000;104;20061222222113000;0;;;;;;;;0000;9724800001;15;00;;;;;;;;;;00 00;;;0; 0;;;00;;;16;;;0

[END

]--------------OCX Message Accounting-------------------

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

91

Substitution

Substitution
querySubstitution querySubstitution
This command shows the substitution manager, group members, and status of substitution for the specific card.

****** Substitution Status Check ****** Substitution Manager Card: 10 Substitution Group Member Cards: (8) (9) Substitution is active for NONE Substitution Manager Card: 14 Substitution Group Member Cards: (12) Substitution is active for NONE Substitution Manager Card: 20 Substitution Group Member Cards: (17) (18) (19) Substitution is active for NONE

querySubBus querySubBus
This platform command validates the substitution bus configuration in the rear of the midplane.
querySubBus Reads and displays *current* sub bus configuration Warning: Lack of rear cards on ends of group appear as breaks Warning: With 2 rear sub cards on same bus, data is unreliable querySubBus: (myslot=15) is not currently setup as a subCard querySubBus: can only be run on a SubCard I2C: Rear card config: I/O I2C: Sub Bus Config: ON Sub BusF

92

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Substitution

displaySubBusGrps displaySubBusGrps
This platform command displays the saved substitution bus configuration from each substitution manager card.

displaySubBusGrps Displays *saved* sub bus configuration from each subCard Saved data is updated on power up and s/w subCard config* Warning: Lack of rear cards on ends of group appear as breaks Warning: With 2 rear sub cards on same bus, data is unreliable 1 2 S 3 X 4 x 5 x 6 X 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 - - - - - - - - - - - -

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

93

Central Office

Central Office
queryCAC
queryCAC <code>
This command shows the Carrier Access code and carrier attributes.
Syntax <code> Description 4-digit carrier access code

queryCAC 0333 Carrier: WorldComm, Code: 0333, Carrier Attributes: InterLata OS Capable DA Capable International

queryAudio
queryAudio [<name> | <ALL>]

Tip
Use this command to see which recorded announcements are provisioned on the switch: queryDbKeys tAudioDbMgr

This command shows a list of the recorded announcements on the switch. For a complete list of announcements on the T7000, see the T7000 Product Description Manual.
Syntax [name] [ALL] Description announcement name Keyword that acts as the key for all announcements.

queryAudio offHook Announcement: offHook Bytes: 54084 queryAudio ALL Current Announcement list --Announcement: --Announcement: --Announcement: --Announcement: --ScrNumToDel Announcement18 DelEntry Bytes: 149130 Bytes: 12364

Bytes: 80248 Bytes: 68262

Announcement19

94

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Central Office

Announcement: --Announcement: --Announcement: --Announcement: ---

allCircuitsBusy SCAoff ARLast

Bytes: 46799

Bytes: 23640 Bytes: 15686 Bytes: 42546

SCRAnnouncement

[subsequent output trimmed]

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

95

Protocols

Protocols
Commands in this section are grouped by protocol, such as MGCP, VoIP, SS7, etc. For most MGCP commands, use the Generic CLI query command.

MGCP
queryGWY
queryGWY <associationId | all> [debug]
This command returns the Local and Remote addressing information for the requested Association ID(s). It queries the MGCP Stack Interface to get the association table information and dumps it for debugging purposes. An association can be thought of as a pairing between one FE's IP/port (either fe0 or fe-1 for the PIC) and the Gateway's IP/port (or the Gateway's Domain Name, if the IP is not yet known).
Syntax <associationId | all> [debug] Description Association ID, or the keyword all to query all Association IDs Optional keyword that provides additional information, mostly of interest to Taqua TAC personnel.

queryGWY all
172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.160.111/2727 169.254.175.7/2427/hxt2.taqua.com hNXT2 169.254.175.6/2427/hxt1.taqua.com hNXT 172.19.177.240/2427/arris.taqua.com Aris 172.19.160.138/2427acgw.taqua.com gw3 172.19.160.128/2427/atagw2.taqua.com gw1

5 Gateway Associations are defined.

In the above example, the local IP Address of the 1st Association ID is 172.19.160.111, and the local Port number is 2727. The remote IP address of the same Association ID is 169.254.175.7, the Port Number is 2427, the Domain Name is hxt2.taqua.com,and the Gateway Instance is hNXT2.
queryGWY all debuug Assoc. Table entry size = 608 bytes. Id Prev NxtF Local IP/Port Remote IP/Port/Name Gateway Instance 1 8197 4 172.19.160.111/2727 0.0.0.0/0/[1] No Gateway Instance. 3 4 7 172.19.160.111/2727 169.254.175.7/2427/hxt2.taqua.com hNXT2 4 1 3 172.19.160.111/2727 169.254.175.6/2427/hxt1.taqua.com hNXT1 5 6 8197 172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.177.240/2427/arris.taqua.com Aris 6 7 5 172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.160.138/2427/acgw.taqua.com gw3 7 3 6 172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.160.128/2427/atagw2.taqua.com gw1 6 Gateway Associations are defined.

96

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

queryGWYCounts

Tip
Use this command to ensure your Gateways are provisioned in a "balanced" manner among the available PIC or PIC2 card.

queryGWYCounts
This command searches the Media Gateway database and prints how many Gateways are provisioned on each PIC or PIC2 card. It also provides a count of the number of Gateways that were locked at the time the command ran. The 1st example shows 2 Gateways provisioned on a single PIC:

queryGWYCounts Card: PIC17 Gwy Count: 2

Total Gwys = 2 Total Locked = 0

The next example shows multiple Gateways provisioned across multiple PICs:

queryGWYCountsqueryGWYCounts Card: PIC 6 PIC 8 PIC 9 PIC13 PIC17 Gwy Count: 3000 1 3000 2000 2000

Total Gwys = 10001 Total Locked = 0

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

97

Protocols

SIP
status
status <oid>
This is the Generic CLI command, used to show information about a PIC cards Fast Ethernet (FE) interfaces.
Syntax <oid> Description Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface Facility (FEIF).

Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit of the near end network interface OID provisioned on the T7000. See OID on page 30.

status fe-0 ***** Status for FE-0-7-9 ***** Operational State: ENABLED Master Operational State: ENABLED Administrative State: UNLOCKED Master Administrative State: UNLOCKED Resource Status: ISV Resource Available?: YES Bearer Activity?: 0 Bearer Resource Available?: YES IP Dialogue Activity? : 0 IP Dialogue Resource Available? : YES

98

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

queryListByCodecProfile queryListByCodecProfile <codecProfileName>

Tip
Use this command to see which codec profiles have been provisioned: query CodecProfile

This command shows the codec list or lists to which the codec profile belongs.
Syntax <codecProfileName> Description name of the codec profile to query

queryListByCodecProfile prf10 CodecProfileName:prf10 Key(codecProfileLstName): prflist3A Member in CodecProfileLst: codecProfile...: prf10 codecProfile...: prf30 codecProfile...: prf20 Key(codecProfileLstName): prflist3B Member in CodecProfileLst: codecProfile...: prf10 codecProfile...: prf20 codecProfile...: prf30

queryIPTrunkReservation queryIPTrunkReservation [IPTrunkGroupName]

This command shows which IP trunks in an IP trunk group are currently reserved.
Syntax [IPTrunkGroupName] Description name of the IP trunk group to query

queryIPTrunkReservation Reservation By Trunk Group Reservation By Card

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

99

Protocols

querySipEndpointByName querySipEndpointByName [[ALL] | [sipEndpointName]]

Without a parameter, this command returns a list of all SIP endpoints with names. With a parameter of SIP endpoint name, this command returns the entry in the Sip Endpoint Database that corresponds to that name. With a parameter of ALL, this command returns all entries in the Sip Endpoint Database with a name.
NOTE: Since Name is not a mandatory field for SIP endpoints, this command may not return as much data as querySipEndpoint on page 101.

Syntax [sipEndpointName] [ALL]

Description name of SIP endpoint Keyword that acts as the key for all SIP endpoints with a name.

querySipEndpointByName SIP Endpoint Name ============================== querySipEndpointByName ALL 0 item(s) found using 'ALL' ) SIP Endpoint DN ===============

100

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

querySipEndpoint
querySipEndpoint [[ALL] | [SipEndpointDN]]
Without a parameter, this command returns a list of all SIP endpoint keys. With a parameter of a SIP endpoint key, this command returns the entry in the Sip Endpoint Database that corresponds to that key. With a parameter of ALL, this command returns all entries in the Sip Endpoint Database.
Syntax [sipEndpointKey] [ALL] Description 10-digit directory number that acts as a key for SIP endpoint Keyword that acts as the key for all SIP endpoints.

querySipEndpoint Key(SipEndpointDN): 9724691000 Usage: querySipEndpoint [SipEndpointDN or 'ALL'] querySipEndpoint 9724691000

<60c6bd0> SipAgwEndpoint key......................."9724691000" endpointName..............<> profileName..............."agwP1" bearerGrpKey.............."bg_agw" priHostIPAddrPair.........0 (0) altHostIPAddrPairs........0 (0) actHostIndex..............PRIMARY_HOST_ACTIVE transportType.............UDP signalingType.............SIP cmtsName..................<> FQDN......................<> outboundProxyIPAddrPair...0 (0)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

101

Protocols

querySipEndpointByAddr querySipEndpointByAddr [[ipAddrPair] | [ALL]]

Without a parameter, this command returns a list of all SIP endpoint IP Addresses and Port numbers. With a parameter of a IP Address and Port number, this command returns the entry in the Sip Endpoint Database that corresponds to that IP Address and Port number. With a parameter of ALL, this command returns all entries in the Sip Endpoint Database.
Syntax [ipAddrPair] [ALL] Description IP address and port Keyword that acts as the key for all SIP endpoints.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods for example: 10.2.86.195

querySipEndpointByAddr Key=IP Address Pair SIP Endpoint DN ===================== ========================= 10.1.130.251:5060 9726921979 10.1.164.191:5060 9726921847 10.1.164.34:6200 9723847905 172.19.160.104:6060 9723847705 querySipEndpointByAddr 10.1.130.251:5060 1 item(s) found using '10.1.130.251:5060' <3907860> SipNgwEndpoint key......................."9726921979" endpointName..............<> priHostIPAddrPair.........<3907920> <3907920> IPAddrPair sIPAddr..."10.1.130.251" Port......13c4 (5060) lSecHostIPAddrPair........<> actHostIndex..............PRIMARY_HOST_ACTIVE bearerCards...............<39079c0> <39079c0> BearerCardList keyType......Integer

102

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

valType......Integer collection...List (1 items) -> (1) IntegerValue: 8 (8) transportType.............UDP signalingType.............SIP profileName..............."ngwProfile1" cmtsName..................<> outboundProxyIPAddrPair...0 (0) * * * * *

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

103

Protocols

printGateInfo printGateInfo <cmtsName>

This command dumps the active gate IDs for the specified CMTS. A Gate ID is associated with each DQoS call (similar to a call reference) and is released after the call is over. GateIDs are allocated and maintained by the CMTS. The switch requests a new GateID when it is about to make a call for an endpoint that has enabled DQoS service. If the CMTS has not allocated any Gate IDs, the command returns a prompt.
Syntax Description Name of the CMTS to query.

<cmtsName> printGateInfo cmts2

****** Current Gate IDs ******** 12 346 ***********************************

104

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

SS7
The following commands query the status of SS7 objects

SS7RouteStatus SS7RouteStatus [routeName]

This command returns the status of an SS7 Route. if routeName is omitted, it returns the status of all SS7 Routes is returned
Syntax [routeName] Description name of the SS7 Route to query

SS7RouteStatus R1_MIN SS7Route: R1_MIN Object ID: SS7Route-0-0-23 DPC: 229-123-100 Priority: 1 Congestion: 0 Status: Available LinkSet LinkSet1 is Available routeLB1 Object ID: 0x92c000 DPC: 200-200-200 Priority: 1 Congestion: 0, Status: Available LinkSet LinkSetLB1 is Available

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

105

Protocols

getSLSMap
getSLSMap [linksetName]
This command shows the Signaling Link Selection (SLS) mapping for the SS7 links in the specified lank set. If no link set is specified, the SLS maps for all link sets are showed.
Syntax Description name of the link set to display

linksetName

LinkSet: LinkSetLB1 (PC: 200-200-200) : Active, In Service Members: LinkLB1, Available ==================== SLSMAP for linkset 'LinkSetLB1' ==================== SLS Current Link Defined Link Alternate Link flag Link Set ___ ____________ ____________ ______________ ____ ________ 0 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 1 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 2 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 3 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 4 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 5 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 6 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 7 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 8 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 9 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 10 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 11 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 12 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 13 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 14 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 15 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 16 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 17 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 18 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 19 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 20 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 21 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 22 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 23 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 24 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 25 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 26 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 27 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 28 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 29 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 30 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 31 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 ...... route on link: LinkLB1 total: 128 percent: 100

106

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

linkSetStatus linkSetStatus [linkSetName]

This command shows the status of an SS7 link set. If no link set is specified, the command shows the status for all link sets
Syntax [linkSetName] link set name Description

linkSetStatus LinkSetLB1 LinkSet Error Correction Method: Basic Error Correction Method Type: F LinkSet Object ID: 0x928000 PC: 200-200-200 Status: Active In Service Members: LinkLB1

linkStatus
linkStatus [linkName]
This command shows the status of a SS7 link within a link set. If no link is specified, the command shows the status for all links
Syntax [linkName] link name Description

linkStatus Linkset: LinkSetLB1, Error Correction Method: Basic Error Correction Method Link: LinkLB1 Error Correction Method: Basic Error Correction Method Type: F Link Object ID: 0x4c924000, Channel: Trunk-23-19-9 SLC: 00, PC: 200-200-200, Instance: 0 Status: Available

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

107

Protocols

nodeStatus
nodeStatus [nodeName]
This command reports the status of SS7 nodes. If no node is specified, the command shows the status for all nodes
Syntax [nodeName] node name Description

nodeStatus CXautoNode Object ID: 0x930000 PC: 100-100-100 Local, No Transfer Capability, ( Local) Not Restarting LBautoNode Object ID: 0x930001 PC: 200-200-200 Remote, No Transfer Capability, Adjacent Node Not Restarting, Accessible

SS7NetworkStatus SS7NetworkStatus [networkName]

This command reports the status of the objects contained in an SS7 network. If no network is specified, the command shows the status for all networks
Syntax [networkName] network name Description

SS7NetworkStatus ss7LBnet Object ID: 0x934000, Not BCC Network, Local Network. Not Restarting Members: OCXautoNode LBautoNode

108

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

queryCIC
queryCIC pointCode
This command shows all CICs for a specified point code.

CAUTION
This command could return a very large number of CICs.

Syntax pointCode

Description point code of a switch in an SS7 network

queryCIC 2-2-2 ******* CIC Trace for 2-2-2 ******* CIC = 15, OID=Trunk-14-2-5 CIC = 1, OID=Trunk-0-2-5 CIC = 16, OID=Trunk-15-2-5 CIC = 2, OID=Trunk-1-2-5 CIC = 17, OID=Trunk-16-2-5 CIC = 3, OID=Trunk-2-2-5 CIC = 18, OID=Trunk-17-2-5 CIC = 4, OID=Trunk-3-2-5 CIC = 19, OID=Trunk-18-2-5 CIC = 5, OID=Trunk-4-2-5 CIC = 20, OID=Trunk-19-2-5 CIC = 6, OID=Trunk-5-2-5 CIC = 21, OID=Trunk-20-2-5 CIC = 7, OID=Trunk-6-2-5 CIC = 22, OID=Trunk-21-2-5 CIC = 8, OID=Trunk-7-2-5 CIC = 23, OID=Trunk-22-2-5 CIC = 9, OID=Trunk-8-2-5 CIC = 10, OID=Trunk-9-2-5 CIC = 11, OID=Trunk-10-2-5 CIC = 12, OID=Trunk-11-2-5 CIC = 13, OID=Trunk-12-2-5 CIC = 14, OID=Trunk-13-2-5

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

109

Protocols

dispPCMap
dispPCMap [nodeName]
This command displays the PC (Point Code) map for a given Alias node. The PC map routes ISUP messages by CIC to the Alias node.
Syntax [nodeName] Description Optional SS7 node name.Omit to display the PC map for all Alias nodes.

dispPCMap Garland AliasPCName Garland AliasPC 229-100-102 DestinationPC CICrange 230-100-011 0044-0056

queryLinkTimers queryLinkTimers [linkName]

This command shows link timer values. If no linkName is specified, the command shows the status for all SS7 links.
Syntax [linkName]
queryLinkTimers link1 Link: link1 Object ID: SS7Link-0-8-20 L2Tie: 1 L2Tin: 4 L2T1: 13002 L2T2: 12000 L2T3: 11800 L2T4e: 593 L2T4n: 2300 L2T5: 100 L2T6: 3500 L2T7: 1000 Link uses BASIC Error Correction Method L3T1: 800 L3T2: 1400 L3T3: 800 L3T4: 800 L3T5: 800 L3T7: 1000 L3T12: 800 L3T13: 800 L3T14: 2000 L3T17: 1500 L3T19: 480000 L3T20: 90000 L3T21: 90000 L3T31: 10000 L3T33: 60000 L3T34: 5000

Description link name

110

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

SLTC T1: 10000 SLTC T2: 30000 TXCongestionAbatementL1:30 TXCongestionOnsetL1:40 TXCongestionDiscardL1:60 TXCongestionAbatementL2:50 TXCongestionOnsetL2:70 TXCongestionDiscardL2:90 TXCongestionAbatementL3:80 TXCongestionOnsetL3:100 TXCongestionDiscardL3:110 TXCongestionTimer:30

queryNodeTimers queryNodeTimers [nodeName]

This command shows SS7 node timer values. If no node is specified, the command shows the status for all nodes.
Syntax [nodeName] node name Description

queryNodeTimers Houston Houston Object ID: SS7Node-2-0-20 L3T25: 30000 L3T28: 3000 L3T29: 60000

queryNWTimers queryNWTimers [networkName]

This command shows the network timers for local and remote SS7 networks. If no network is specified, the command shows the status for all networks
Syntax [networkName] network name Description

queryNWTimers ss7LBnet Object ID: 0x934000 L3T22: 8000 L3T23: 16000 L3T24: 15000 L3T26: 12000 L3T27: 3000

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

111

Protocols

queryRouteTimers queryRouteTimers [routeName]

This command shows SS7 route timer values. If noSS7 Route is specified, the command shows the status for all SS7 Routes.
Syntax [routeName] route name Description

queryRouteTimers toHou toHou Object ID: SS7Route-0-0-20 L3T6: 800 L3T8: 1000 L3T10: 30000 L3T15: 2000 L3T16: 1400

112

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

GR-303/PRI
queryDS1s
queryDS1s <rdtName>
This command shows the status of DS1s that connect the switch to an RDT.
Syntax rdtName Description name of Interface Group

queryDS1s Etres 1 InServ 2 InServ Provisioned Provisioned NotInLoopback NotInLoopback {} {}

query921Status query921Status [instance]

This command shows the status of EOC and TMC links that use Link Access Protocol D (LAPD) for GR-303 or the status of a d-channel for links using PRI.
Syntax [instance] Description LAPD instance

NOTE: This command only returns information about the card to which it is directly connected. For the status of all d-channels on the switch, see queryDchStatus on page 114.

query921Status Inst 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LAPD State TEI_Assigned TEI_Assigned TEI_Assigned TEI_Assigned Multiple_frame_established Multiple_frame_established Multiple_frame_established Multiple_frame_established Multiple_frame_established DLCI 104 904 104 100 100 104 904 104 100 OID Trunk-299 Trunk-299 Trunk-311 Trunk-311 Trunk-335 Trunk-299 Trunk-299 Trunk-311 Trunk-311 (012b) (012b) (0137) (0137) (014f) (012b) (012b) (0137) (0137) Port 1 1 2 2 3 1 1 2 2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

113

Protocols

queryDchStatus queryDchStatus <TrkGrpName>

This command shows status for d-channels for PRI trunk groups.
NOTE: A path status of Forwarding is the same as Active.

Syntax <TrkGrpName>

Description PRI trunk group name

queryDchStatus toHoustonPRI PRI/NFAS Group: toHoustonPRI D-ch Primary (Trunk-263-10-20) Path Status : FailedLapd: Out_of_service Primary Trunk-263-10-20 Signaling Status: ISDND: lapdActive Channel: Failed Path: Failed Path Protection Status: PPS: waitingPathAvai Primary: Failed

114

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

queryRDTClasses queryRDTClasses
This command shows all the long and short names of the RDT classes.

queryRDTClasses *******RDT CLASS NAMES FOR COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE******* Long Name: (NetworkElement) --- Abbreviated Name: (ne) -- Integer Value: (6) Long Name: (Equipment) --- Abbreviated Name: (eq) --Integer Value: (7) Long Name: (Memory) --- Abbreviated Name: (mem) --- Integer Value: (8) Long Name: (IdlcCPProfile) --- Abbreviated Name: (icpp) -- Integer Value: (25) Long Name: (IdlcDLProfile) --- Abbreviated Name: (idlp) -- Integer Value: (26) Long Name: (AnalogLineTerm) --- Abbreviated Name: (alt) -- Integer Value: (10) Long Name: (DS1LineTerm) --- Abbreviated Name: (ds1) --Integer Value: (17) Long Name: (ProtectionGroupUnit) --- Abbreviated Name: (pgu) --- Integer Value: (5) Long Name: (AlarmCountList) --- Abbreviated Name: (acl) -- Integer Value: (9)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

115

Protocols

queryRDTLines queryRDTLines rdtName [startTermId] [endTermId]

This command shows the analog lines attached to an RDT.
Syntax rdtName [startTermId] name of RDT optional the number associated with the first analog line (1-2048) on the RDT [endTermId] optional the number associated with the last analog line (1-2048) on the RDT Description

queryRDTLines Etres 1 2 3 4 5 6 InServ InServ InServ InServ InServ InServ Provisioned Provisioned Provisioned Provisioned Provisioned Provisioned NotRemoved NotRemoved NotRemoved NotRemoved NotRemoved NotRemoved {} {} {} {} {} {}

116

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

queryRDTObject queryRDTObject <rdtName> <objectClass> <instNum>

This command shows RDT object classes.
Syntax <rdtName> <objectClass> name of RDT Enter one of the following for the corresponding element: ne to query the network element eq to query equipment (cards, circuits, etc.) on the RDT mem to query CPU and software memory on the RDT icpp to query the attributes and timers of the TMC idlp to query the data link between the switch and the RDT that contains the attributes and timers of the EOC, EOC PPS, and TMC PPS alt to query analog lines on the RDT ds1 to query DS1 links on the switch pgu to query DS1s that backup the EOC and TMC acl to query the RDT alarms on the switch and how many times each alarm has occurred <instNum> The number of instances of the query you want to appear: ne is 1 mem is 1 icpp is 1 idlp is from 1-4 alt is from 1-2048 ds1 is from 1-28 pgu is from 1-4 acl is 1 Description

queryRDTObject Etres mem 1 ******** RDT Object ObjectClass ObjectId PrimarySrvcState SecondarySrvcState Trace ******** - Memory - 1 - InServ - {}

******** End Object Trace ********

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

117

Protocols

querySubCRVs querySubCRVs <RDT/GW>

This command returns either:

for GR-303 subscribers the subscriber DNs on an RDT and the unique call reference value (CRV) assigned to each subscriber DN for MGCP subscribers the subscriber DNs on an MGCP gateway and the unique termination ID assigned to each subscriber DN
Syntax <RDT/GW> Description name of the GR-303 RDT/name of the MGCP GW

querySubCRVs Etres Subscribers for IG Etres: CRV/MgTermID: 1Subscriber: 9724800001 CRV/MgTermID: 2Subscriber: 9724800002 CRV/MgTermID: 3Subscriber: 9724800003

queryCRVs
queryCRVs <RDTName|PRIGroupName> [p|r]

This command shows which CRVs are reserved or assigned to trunks for that RDT or PRI interface group.
Syntax RDTName| PRIGroupName [p|r] Description name of the GR-303 RDT name of the PRI interface group p permanent signal, returns only CRVs in which the phone has been off-hook for over 2.5 minutes r reserved, returns only CRVs reserved (unavailable while the switch allocates a trunk for the call).

queryCRVs AFC_NW_TARRANT

118

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Protocols

viewRDTCmds viewRDTCmds <rdtName>

This command shows the RDT commands in the command queue.
Syntax <rdtName> name of RDT Description

viewRDTCmds Etres RDT EOC queue empty.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

119

FTRS

FTRS
queryPretranslation queryPretranslation <PreTransKey> | <ALL>
This command shows all patterns of a pretranslation table.

Prerequisites
Create an FTRS profile, see FTRSProfile on page 231 Create an FTRS pretranslation table, see createPretranslation on page 223 Add an FTRS pretranslation, see addPretranslation on page 224
Syntax <PreTransKey <ALL> Description the name of the pretranslation table a keyword that acts as the key for all pretranslation tables

queryPretranslation E911_Service_T Pre-Translation Table : 'E911_Service_T' ----------------------------------------------------------1: 911T /REM 1,3 /INS 1,2124800005 =CARRIER /CAC 0999 /REM 1,10 /INS 1,911 /CT 10 ===========================================================

120

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

FTRS

queryPretransByDigitPtn queryPretransByDigitPtn <PreTransKey> <digitPtnStr>

This command shows the patterns digit string of a pretranslation table.

Prerequisites
Create an FTRS profile, see FTRSProfile on page 231 Create an FTRS pretranslation table, see createPretranslation on page 223 Add an FTRS pretranslation, see addPretranslation on page 224
Syntax <PreTransKey> <digitPtnStr> Description the name of the pretranslation table A digit pattern string in the pretranslation table. A pattern is the called number, dialed by the subscriber or received on a trunk group.
9*4600000

queryPretransByDigitPtn pretrantest

Pre-Translation Table : 'pretrantest' ----------------------------------------------------------9*4600000 = SUBSCRIBER ===========================================================

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

121

Routing

Routing
queryRouting queryRouting <NANP | LNP | CARR | TANDEMCARR | TANDEMANI>

Tip
Use query TandemTGRouteLis t to query Tandem Trunk Group routing.

This command returns the auxiliary routing tree for all route lists of the specified type, along with their minimum and maximum digits.

Syntax NANP

Description NANP North American Numbering Plan, routes calls when the destination is in the same carrier's network as the switch. LNP Local Number Portability, routes to telephone numbers that are moved between or within Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). CARR Carrier routes a four-digit number that identifies any company that provides circuit communications. TANDEMCARR Tandem Carrier routes from a subtending switch to an AT or ICX using the carrier code or a combination of the carrier code and the route code. TANDEMANI Tandem Automatic Number Identification, routes from a subtending switch to a AT or IXC using the ANI of the call.

LNP

CARR

TANDEMCARR

TANDEMANI]

122

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Routing

queryRouting NANP ***** 1-DIGIT ROUTE LISTS ***** ROUTE LIST NAMED: RappServ MIN_DIGITS: (0) MAX_DIGITS: (0) ROUTE #0: ipngwaz1 ***** 3-DIGIT ROUTE LISTS ***** ROUTE LIST NAMED: ANA_T6000 MIN_DIGITS: (685) MAX_DIGITS: (685) ROUTE #0: ipngwVDngw ROUTE LIST NAMED: PSAP1 MIN_DIGITS: (911) MAX_DIGITS: (911) ***** 10-DIGIT ROUTE LISTS ***** ROUTE LIST NAMED: IAD1_MGCP MIN_DIGITS: (2124605000) MAX_DIGITS: (2124605000) ROUTE #0: ipngwVDngw ROUTE LIST NAMED: 2124605002 MIN_DIGITS: (2124605002) MAX_DIGITS: (2124605002) ROUTE #0: ipngwVDngw ROUTE LIST NAMED: skinney ROUTE #0: ipngwaz1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

123

In-Service Upgrades

In-Service Upgrades
Taqua Technical Assistance Center (TAC) uses in-service upgrades (ISUs) to modify T7000 software while the switch is carrying call traffic. ISUs can either be applied to one card or all cards on a T7000. An ISU can be applied individually or as part of a Service Pack. Service Packs bundle ISUs in groups. This bundling reduces ISU dependencies and improves ISU interaction testing. ISUs in Service Packages are built, tested, and released together on the last General Availability (GA) software release and all previously-released Service Packages. Once an ISU is applied, it installs and re-applies itself automatically on every successive reboot of the cards. If an ISU is unapplied, but not unloaded, it reapplies itself on successive reboots.

WARNING
ISUs should always be applied on a T7000-wide basis, unless directed by Taqua. ISUs applied to a single-card should only be performed by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances. If misused, single-card ISUs can cause the T7000 state to get out of sync and negatively affect call processing.

124

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

In-Service Upgrades

queryPatch
queryPatch [-v] [-s] <patchID | applied | catalyst | functional | all>
This command shows the ISU number, patch status, active status, and timestamp for one or more ISUs on a particular card.
Syntax [-v] [-s] <patchID applied catalyst Description The verbose parameter displays all ISU information. The default is to display brief ISU information. The sort parameter displays ISUs in numerical order. The default is to display ISUs in the order which they were applied. patchID Returns information for a particular ISU. applied Returns information on all applied (i.e. active) ISUs. catalyst Returns information on ISUs classified as catalysts. A catalyst ISUs does nothing when applied, but its presence or absence causes other ISUs to behave differently. functional Returns information on ISUs classified as functional. Functional ISUs take action when applied. all Returns information on all ISUs.

functional all>
queryPatch all Patch ID ======== OCX5.0.0-0004 OCX5.0.0-0007 OCX5.0.0-0015 OCX5.0.0-0014 OCX5.0.0-0017 OCX5.0.0-0018 OCX5.0.0-0010 OCX5.0.0-0001 OCX5.0.0-0006 OCX5.0.0-0011 OCX5.0.0-0012 OCX5.0.0-0013

Status ====== Applied Applied Applied Applied Applied Applied Applied Applied Applied Applied Applied Applied

Act. ==== Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No/C No/C Yes Yes Yes

Flags ===== 00000015 00000005 00000015 00000015 00000015 00000015 00000015 00000005 00000015 00000015 00000015 00000015

Timestamp ========= 11/13/2006 11/13/2006 11/13/2006 11/13/2006 11/13/2006 11/13/2006 11/13/2006 11/13/2006 11/13/2006 11/13/2006 11/13/2006 11/13/2006

11:07:38 11:20:40 11:07:38 11:07:39 11:07:39 11:07:39 11:07:40 11:20:43 11:07:41 11:07:41 11:07:41 11:07:4

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

125

In-Service Upgrades

sysQueryPatch sysQueryPatch [-g]|[[-v][-s]] [-c[<shelf>:][<card>]] <patchID>|applied|catalyst|functional|all

This command can only be used on the active System Manager card. It queries ISU data from any card in the switch.
Syntax [-g] Description The grid printout parameter displays all ISUs on the switch in a grid. The cards are represented by columns, and the status of each ISU on each card is shown by a character. NOTE: Do not use this parameter with the -v or -s parameter. [-v] [-s] The verbose parameter displays all ISU information. The default is to display brief ISU information The sort parameter displays ISUs in numerical order. The default is to display ISUs in the order which they were applied. shelf switch shelf number card switch card number patchID Returns data for that particular ISU. applied Returns information on all applied (i.e. active) ISUs. catalyst Returns ISUs classified as catalysts. Catalyst ISUs do nothing when applied, but its presence or absence causes other ISUs to behave differently. functional Returns ISUs classified as functional. Functional ISUs take action when applied. all Returns information on all ISUs.

-c [<shelf>:] [<card>] <patchID applied catalyst

functional all>

sysQueryPatch -g OCX5.0.0-0004 *************** ** Shelf: 20 ** *************** C C l l 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 k k PatchID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B ------------------------------------------------------------OCX5.0.0-0004 A A A A Aa a A: applied,active U: unapplied,active blank: not loaded a: applied,inert u: unapplied,inert dash: not loaded on mother/daughter

126

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

CALEA
queryPenCommands queryPenCommands <admPW>
This shows all of the Pengroup commands.

Prerequisites
Create a pen group, createPenGrp on page 176 Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179
Syntax <admPW> Description administrator password.

queryPenCommands pw System Level Commands: createPenGrp, deletePenGrp, queryPenGrp, startPenMonitor, stopPenMonitor, setPenAttr, changePenPW, queryPenTarget, queryPenData, queryPenCommands, setPenGroupTimer Lea Level Commands: addLea, removeLea, queryLeas, queryLea, addLeaSpan, removeLeaSpan, startLeaMonitor,stopLeaMonitor, setLeaAttr Case Level Commands: addLeaCase, removeLeaCase, queryLeaCase, startCaseMonitor, stopCaseMonit or, addVoiceChnl, removeVoiceChnl, setCaseAttr Other Commands: queryPenLog, resizePenLog, purgePenLog

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

127

CALEA

queryPenGrp queryPenGrp <admPW>

This command shows information about the Pen Group. To convert hexadecimal output from this query command to decimal, see Using Hexadecimal on page 741.

Prerequisites
Create a pen group, createPenGrp on page 176 Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179
Syntax <admPW> Description administrator password

queryPenGrp pw ******* PenGroup Trace ******* <<2bc6c68>> PenGroup (key)0: <2b3ee68> (leaDict)1: <2b3da88> (targetDict)2: <2b3d098> (defaultPW)3: <2deff60> (adminPW)4: <1a98028> (ocxSystemID)5: <29e99a8> (ocxCardOID)6: 4a00001 (ocxMonitoringState)7: 1 (callDataCount)8: 0 (callContentCount)9: 0 (penClient_T1_period)a: 4b (penClient_T2_period)b: ea60 (penClient_T3_p eriod)c: a (dialedDigitExtraction)d: 1 <2b3ee68> tString {pengrp} <2b3da88> Dictionary (numItems)0: 0 (dataItems)1: <2b3e478> <2b3e478> tArray 0: 0 1: 0 2: 0 <2b3d098> Dictionary (numItems)0: 0 (dataItems)1: <2de6240> <2de6240> tArray 0: 0 1: 0 2: 0 3: 0 4: 0 <2deff60> tArray 0: 51 1: d0 2: f0 3: 59 4: 10 <1a98028> tArray 0: 4e 1: b3 <29e99a8> tString {PlanoT7000}

128

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

queryPenTarget queryPenTarget <targetDirn> <admPW>

This command shows the surveillance data related to a subject's directory number.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179 Add a case, see addLeaCase on page 187
Syntax <targetDirn> <admPW> Description subject's directory number administrator password

queryPenTarget 9724800031 pw Target Dirn: 9724800031 LeaName: NTTA CaseID: TollRunner1001 Case Monitoring State: DISABLED Lea Monitoring State: ENABLED InterceptType: Call Data Start Date: Stop Date:

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

129

CALEA

queryPenData queryPenData admPW

This command shows the ocxSystemID, ocxCardOID, the ocxMonitoringState, and the value of the CALEA timers.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see setPenGroupTimer on page 180 Create the Pen group database, see createPenGrp on page 176
Syntax <admPW> Description administrator password

queryPenData pw PenGroup Data: ocxSystemID = testT7000 ocxCardOID = Card-1-1-10 penClientT1 = 75 penClientT2 = 60000 penClientT3 = 10 dialedDigitExtraction = ENABLED ocxMonitoringState = ENABLED

130

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

queryLea
queryLea <leaName> <admPW>
This command shows a LEA's attributes, its optionally assigned T1 spans, and a list of its cases. View individual cases using queryLeaCase, see queryLeaCase on page 132.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179 Add a LEA, see addLea on page 181
Syntax <leaName> <admPW> Description Law Enforcement Agency name administrator password

queryLea NTTA pw LeaName: NTTA LEA ipAddr: 10.1.2.3 LEA Port: 5060 LEA Client Instance: 1 LEA Monitoring State: ENABLED LEA leaTrunkProtocol: NO_PROTOCOL Spans: logicalSpan - spanOID ---------------------------------Cases: 291> CaseIDs - TargetDirns ---------------------------------TollRunner1001 - 9724800031

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

131

CALEA

queryLeaCase queryLeaCase <leaName> <caseID> <admPW>

This command shows case.data: the Target Directory Number, the LEA, the Case ID, the LEAs monitoring state, the Intercept Type (Call Data, or Call Data plus Call Content), and the Surveillance Start and Stop dates.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179
Syntax <leaName> <caseID> <admPW> Description Law Enforcement Agency name name assigned to the case administrator password

queryLeaCase NTTA TollRunner1001 pw Target Dirn: 9724800031 LeaName: NTTA CaseID: TollRunner1001 Case Monitoring State: DISABLED Lea Monitoring State: ENABLED InterceptType: Call Data Start Date: Stop Date:

132

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

queryPenLog queryPenLog <admPW> [numRecords]

This command shows the Pen log.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179
Syntax <admPW> [numRecords] Description administrator password optional the number of records you would like returned
queryPenLog pw 15 ---------------------OCX Pen-Link (Calea) Event Log------------------[01/25/07-16:24:48]: (Unknown) Informational - ADM password changed. [01/25/07-16:31:30]: (NTTA) Informational - LEA NTTA was added. [01/25/07-16:32:53]: (NTTA) Informational - Case was added.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Queries

133

CALEA

134

Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning
Use the commands in this chapter to set up the switch.

5
WARNING
The procedures in this guide are recommended by Taqua. Taqua does not assume responsibility for loss of data and in no event will Taqua be liable for any incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material. The CLI provides low-level system access to users. This access has the potential to cause disruption of service, rendering the switch unusable and requiring intervention from Taquas field service personnel. To minimize provisioning and configuration errors Taqua recommends the following: 1. Use provisioning scripts instead of entering individual provisioning commands. Scripts are a group of dependent or related commands. 2. Test scripts using dryISE. dryISE simulates the operations of a real switch and provides a place to test scripts without affecting the call traffic on a switch. 3. Test scripts using a non-production switch with the same software image, and preferably the same configuration.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

135

911

911
911 over CAS
CAS trunks using the FGC protocol route 911 calls. For information on Basic 911 and E911, see the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

911 over CAS Process

To provision 911 over CAS on the switch:
Step
1

Action Provision a CAS trunk group with FGC protocol (7-digit ANI) or FGCOS protocol (10-digit ANI) connecting the switch to the 911 tandem. For Basic 911, set the following trunk group timers (see CAS Trunk Group Timers on page 244): MinFlashHookTime 70 ms FlashInterval 60 ms FlashDuration 100 ms

Provision the prefixes (NPANXXs) on the switch.See Prefixes on page 403. Provision a 9-digit route list with the format 911NPANXX for each prefix with associated subscribers on the switch. See NANP Route List on page 519. Add the CAS trunk group that connects to the 911 tandem to each 9digit route list. See CAS Trunk Groups on page 235.

E911 over SS7 Process

To provision E911 over SS7 on the switch do the following:
Step
1 2

Action Provision the SS7 network. Provision the dedicated SS7 trunk group connecting the switch to the E911 tandem and a shared SS7 trunk group to take over if the dedicated SS7 trunk group fails. See SS7 Trunk Groups on page 324. Provision the prefixes (NPANXXs) on the switch. See Prefixes on page 403. Provision a 9-digit route list with the format 911NPANXX for each prefix with associated subscribers for each prefix on a switch. See NANP Route List on page 519.

136

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

911

Step
5

Action Associate the SS7 trunk groups connecting to the E911 tandem with each 9-digit route list. See Adding Facilities to a SS7 Trunk Group on page 344.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

137

AIN

AIN
Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) triggers are events that specify when the switch suspends call processing and queries the AIN database on a Service Control Part (SCP). The SCP, rather than the switch, stores calling services logic, leaving more storage room on the switch.

Before Provisioning AIN

Before provisioning AIN, ensure the following SS7 and TCAP elements are built.

Step
1 2

Action Add an SCCP node to the local node, if one does not already exist. Add an SCCP Subsystem to the SCCP node of the local node, with the SSNs of the TCAP service. The SS7 service provider gives you the SSN value. Add an SCCP node to the Remote SCP or STP Alias node, if one does not already exist. Add an SCCP Subsystem to the Remote SCCP node of the SCP or STP Alias node. Use the same SSN for the remote Subsystem as was used for the local Subsystem in step 2. Add a generic AIN TCAP service with the applicable attributes including: svcType AINSVC remotePC point code of the remote node with the AIN database used by this service. See Point Codes on page 470.

138

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

AIN

Provisioning AIN
The following figure shows the order of provisioning for AIN:

Step
1

Action Create service pattern profile(s) for each of the following AIN trigger profile types: N11 Public Feature Code Specific Digit String Service pattern profiles contain services patterns

Add AIN service pattern(s) to each of the service pattern profiles created in step 1, The service pattern associates a digit pattern or code pattern with a TCAP service. Create AIN trigger profile(s) for each AIN trigger type. An AIN trigger profile

contains an AIN trigger type, which is either a digit pattern or a feature code. An AIN trigger profile tells the switch which SCP to route to or when to use escape codes and digit patterns.
4

Create a Service Profile for each set of AIN trigger profiles. A Service Profile contains AIN trigger profiles. Add a Service Profile to a subscriber or the Central Office.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

139

AIN

Creating AIN Service Pattern Profiles create N11PatternProfile <key> create PFCPatternProfile <key> create SDSPatternProfile <key>
Use the Generic CLI create command to create the following types of AINservice pattern profiles:

pattern profile name N11PatternProfile

description An N11 pattern profile stores N11 service patterns. The switch sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials an N11 number (where N=2-9). Use N11 service pattern profiles to assign numbers such as 711 or 511 to provide services to subscribers.

WARNING
Do not use the N11 Pattern Profile to assign 911 service. PFCPatternProfile A Public Feature Code pattern profile stores PFC patterns. The switch sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials a Public Feature Code *XX (where X=0-9). Use Public Feature Code service pattern profiles to assign codes such as *09 to provide services to subscribers. SDSPatternProfile A Specific Digit String pattern profiles stores SDS patterns. The switch sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials a Specific Digit String NXXXXXXXXX (where N=2-9 and X=0-9). Use Specific Digit String service pattern profiles to assign lists of digits (such as DNs) to provide services to subscribers.

Syntax <key>

Description required service pattern profile name

create N11PatternProfile N11Pat

See Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6.

140

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

AIN

Related Commands destroy N11PatternProfile <key> destroy PFCPatternProfile <key> destroy SDSPatternProfile <key query N11PatternProfile <key> query PFCPatternProfile <key> query SDSPatternProfile <key

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

141

AIN

Adding Service Patterns to a Service Pattern Profile insertInto <dbObject> <key> patterns <subKey> <subValue>

Tip
The same service pattern profile can have multiple service patterns.

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a service pattern to a service pattern profiles patterns list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

Syntax <dbObject>

Description name of the database object. One of: N11PatternProfile PFCPatternProfile SDSPatternProfile

<key> <subKey> <subValue>

name of a service pattern profile previously created the digits comprising the pattern to be added the TCAP service previously defined that will be invoked when this pattern is recognized

insertInto N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 311 HOST3 insertInto N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 411 HOST4 insertInto N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 511 HOST5
See Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6

Prerequisites
Create each service pattern profile before adding a service pattern to it (see Creating AIN Service Pattern Profiles on page 140). Create a TCAP service before adding a service pattern that invokes it. See TCAPServiceGTT on page 488 and TCAPServicePCSSN on page 492.

Related Commands query N11PatternProfile <key> query PFCPatternProfile <key> query SDSPatternProfile <key

142

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

AIN

Removing Service Patterns from Service Pattern Profiles deleteFrom <dbObject> <key> patterns <subKey>
Use the Generic deleteFrom CLI command to remove service patterns from a service pattern profiles patterns list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <dbObject> Description name of the database object. One of: N11PatternProfile PFCPatternProfile SDSPatternProfile <key> <subKey> name of a service pattern profile previously created the digits comprising the pattern to be removed.

deleteFrom N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 311 deleteFrom N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 411 deleteFrom N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 511
See Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6

Prerequisites
Create each service pattern profile before adding a service pattern to it (see Creating AIN Service Pattern Profiles on page 140). Create a TCAP service before adding a service pattern that invokes it. See TCAPServiceGTT on page 488 and TCAPServicePCSSN on page 492.

Related Commands query N11PatternProfile <key> query PFCPatternProfile <key> query SDSPatternProfile <key>

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

143

AIN

Creating Escape Code Pattern Profiles create EscapeCodePatternProfile <key>

Escape code pattern profiles hold digit patterns which do not invoke an AIN Service Trigger. An escape code pattern profile may be optionally added to an Off Hook Delay Trigger, Public Feature Code, or to a Specific Digit String Trigger profile. In addition, an escape code pattern profile holds DNs that can be dialed without entering an Account Code. See Account Codes on page 154.
Syntax <key> Description name of the escape code pattern

create EscapeCodePatternProfile OHDEscapeCodes

See Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6.

Related Commands query EscapeCodePatternProfile <key> Deleting Escape Code Pattern Profiles destroy EscapeCodePatternProfile <key>
Remove an escape code patterns profile from all Off Hook Delay Trigger, Public Feature Code, or a Specific Digit String Trigger profiles before attempting to delete it.
Syntax <key> Description name of the escape code pattern profile previously created

destroy EscapeCodePatternProfile OHDEscapeCodes

See Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6.

Related Commands query EscapeCodePatternProfile <key>

144

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

AIN

Adding Escape Code Patterns to an EscapeCodePatternProfile insertInto EscapeCodePatternProfile <key> escapeCodes <index> <value>
Use this command to add an escape code to an escape code profiles escapeCodes list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax EscapeCodePattern Profile <key> <index> Description keyword which specifies the EscapeCode object class name of the escape code pattern profile previously created the position in the list where <value> is to be inserted

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert an escape code at the start of the escape code profile. Use a index of -1 to insert an escape code at the end of the escape code profile.

<value>

a string of digits

insertInto EscapeCodeProfile esc escapeCodes 1 111

See Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6.

Prerequisites
Create an Escape Code Pattern before adding an escape code pattern to it (see Creating Escape Code Pattern Profiles on page 144).

Related Commands query EscapeCodePatternProfile <key>

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

145

AIN

Removing Escape Code Patterns from an EscapeCodePatternProfile deleteFrom EscapeCodePatternProfile <key> escapeCodes <index>
Use this command to remove an escape code from an escape code profile from an EscapeCodePatternProfiles escapeCodes list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax Description

EscapeCodePattern keyword which specifies the EscapeCode object class Profile <key> <index> name of the escape code pattern profile previously created the index number of the digit string to be removed from the escape code pattern profile

deleteFrom

EscapeCodePatternProfile

OHDEscapeCodes escapeCodes 333

See Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6.

Prerequisites
Create an Escape Code Pattern Profile and add an Escape Code to it before deleting an Escape Code Pattern from it (see Adding Escape Code Patterns to an EscapeCodePatternProfile on page 145).

Related Commands query EscapeCodePatternProfile <key>

146

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

AIN

Creating AIN Trigger Profiles

create create create create create create N11Profile <key> <serviceName> <servicePatternKey> OffHookDelayProfile <key> <serviceName> <serviceRouteID> OffHookImmediateProfile <key> <serviceName> <serviceRouteID> PublicFeatureCodeProfile <key> <serviceName> <servicePatternKey> SpecificDigitStrProfile <key> <serviceName> <servicePatternKey> TermAttemptProfile <key> <serviceName> <serviceRouteID>

Use the Generic CLI create command to create the following types of AIN Trigger Profiles. Required parameters are underlined.
name N11Profile description N11 (where N=2-9) This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials an assigned N11 number. Use service pattern profiles to assign numbers like 711 or 511 to provide services to subscribers. parameters key name of trigger profile serviceName name of service this trigger profile provides servicePatternKey name of previouslycreated service pattern profile associated with this trigger profile

Tip
Taqua recommends assigning this profile to the office service profile, not a subscriber service profile OffHookDelayProfile

This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials digits not in the escape code profile.

key name of trigger profile serviceName name of service this trigger profile provides serviceRouteID the TCAP service previously defined that contains the routing to the SCP escapeProfileKey name of escape code pattern profile

Tip
Taqua recommends assigning this profile to a subscriber service profile, not the office service profile.

OffHookImmediateProfile

This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP key name of trigger profile when it receives an off-hook indication from a serviceName name of service this trigger non-ISDN subscriber or a SETUP message profile provides from an ISDN interface. serviceRouteID the TCAP service previously defined that contains the routing to the SCP

Tip

Taqua recommends assigning this profile to a subscriber service profile, not the office service profile.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

147

AIN

name

description

parameters key name of trigger profile allowRetries the number of times a subscriber can attempt to enter a valid account code Range: 0 - 2 Default: 0 acctCodePrompt determines the type of prompt used: PlayAnnAndDialTone (default) Play announcement and provide dial tone PlayAnnAndStutterTone Play announcement and provide stutter dial tone DialToneOnlyDial Tone only StutterToneOnly Stutter Tone only PlayAnnOnly Play announcement only servicesCalltypeProfileKey name of a previously created Call Type profile for the following call types: Call Forwarding Variable Call Forwarding Fixed Call Forwarding Do Not Answer Call Forwarding Busy Selective Call Forwarding Calls to a remote call forwarding subscriber Automatic callback Speed dial Automatic Call Return Warmline Revertive Call LDCalltypeProfileKey name of a previously created Call Type profile for toll call types 2, 4, 6. calltypeProfileKeyAssignment name of a previously created Call Type profile for call types 0 - 15

AccountCode- The Account Code Profile determines which Profile call types require account code digits, and how account code digits are collected. An Account Code Profile can be assigned to multiple Service Profiles. NOTE: If OffHookImmediateProfile and AccountCodeProfile are both assigned to the same subscriber, OffHookImmediateProfile takes precedence over AccountCodeProfile.

PubicFeatureCodeProile

Public Feature Code XX (where X=0-9) This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials the assigned service code (e.g., *XX). Use service pattern profiles to assign codes like *09 to provide services to subscribers.

key name of trigger profile serviceName name of service this trigger profile provides servicePatternKey name of previously created service pattern profile associated with this trigger profile

Tip
Taqua recommends assigning this profile to a subscriber service profile, not the office service profile.

148

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

AIN

name SpecificDigitStrProfile

description Specific Digit String NXXXXXXXXX (N=2-9 and X=0-9) This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials a series of assigned digits. Use service pattern profiles to assign a list of digits (such as a DN) to provide services to subscribers.

parameters key name of trigger profile serviceName name of service this trigger profile provides servicePatternKey name of previously created service pattern profile associated with this trigger profile

Tip
Taqua recommends assigning this profile to the office service profile, not a subscriber service profile

TermAttemptProfile

This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP when the call directed to the Directory Number (DN) reaches the Termination Attempt Trigger Detection Point (TDP). This occurs when the call terminates to a subscriber on the T7000 (with or without facility).

key name of trigger profile serviceName name of service this trigger profile provides serviceRouteID the TCAP service previously defined that contains the routing to the SCP

Tip
Taqua recommends assigning this profile to a subscriber service profile, not the office service profile.

create N11Profile N11Prof1 SilverN11 N11Pat Prerequisites

For N11, Public Feature Code, and Specific Digit String AIN trigger profiles

create one or more service pattern profiles (see Creating AIN Service Pattern Profiles on page 140). add one or more service patterns to each service pattern profile (see Adding Service Patterns to a Service Pattern Profile on page 142).

For Off Hook Delay and Specific Digit String profiles,

Create a TCAP service before adding a service pattern that invokes it. See TCAPServiceGTT on page 488 and TCAPServicePCSSN on page 492. Create an escape code pattern profile (see Creating Escape Code Pattern Profiles on page 144).

NOTE: Escape code pattern profiles are optional for Specific Digit String profiles.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

149

AIN

For Off Hook Delay, Off Hook Immediate and Termination Attempt trigger profiles

Create a TCAP service before adding a service pattern that invokes it. See TCAPServiceGTT on page 488 and TCAPServicePCSSN on page 492.

For AcountCodeProfile

Create one or more call type profiles,

Related Commands query N11Profile <key> query OffHookDelayProfile <key> query OffHookImmediateProfile <key> query PublicFeaureCodeProile <key> query SpecificDigitStrProile <key> query TermAttemptProfile <key>

150

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

AIN

Deleting AIN Trigger Profiles destroy N11Profile <key> destroy OffHookDelayProfile <key> destroy OffHookImmediateProfile <key> destroy PublicFeatureCodeProfile <key> destroy SpecificDigitStrProfile <key> destroy TermAttemptProfile <key>
Use this command to remove an AIN trigger profile.
Syntax Description keyword which specifies the N11 Profile object class keyword which specifies the Off Hook Delay Profile object class

N11Profile OffHook-DelayProfile

OffHookImmediate- keyword which specifies the Off Hook Immediate Profile object class Profile PublicFeatureCode keyword which specifies the Public Feature Code Profile Profile object class SpecificDigitStrProfile TermAttemptProfile
<key> keyword which specifies the Specific Digit String Profile object class

keyword which specifies the Termination Attempt Profile object class name of the AIN Trigger Profile previously created

destroy N11Profile N11

See Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6.

Prerequisites
Before deleting an AIN trigger profile:

Remove the AIN trigger profile from the Service Profile to which it is assigned.

Related Commands query N11Profile <key> query OffHookDelayProfile <key> query OffHookImmediateProfile <key> query PublicFeatureCodeProile <key> query SpecificDigitStrProfile <key> query TermAttemptProfile <key>

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

151

AIN

Service Profile
A Service Profile contains one or more AIN trigger profiles. The Service Profile can have many AIN trigger profiles, as long as each is of a different trigger type. An AIN trigger profile specifies calls that require AIN processing. Assign a Service Profile to:

individual subscribers all subscribers on the switch both individual subscribers and all subscribers

NOTE: Taqua recommends assigning these Trigger Profiles only to subscribers: Off Hook Delay, Off Hook Immediate, Public Feature Code, Termination Attempt. NOTE: Taqua recommends assigning these Trigger Profiles only to the Office: N11, Specific Digit String

AIN triggers are first checked against an individual subscribers Service Profile. If there is no match, the trigger is then checked against the officeService Profile. A Service Profile has the following attributes. Each AIN Trigger Profile key is the name of an AIN Trigger Profile. See Creating AIN Trigger Profiles on page 147.
Attribute key OffHookImmediateProfileKey OffHookDelayProfileKey PublicFeatureCodeProfileKey SpecificDigitStringProfileKey N11ProfileKey AccountCodeProfileKey Service Profile name Off Hook Immediate AIN Trigger Profile key Off Hook Delay AIN Trigger Profile key Public Feature Code AIN Trigger Profile key Specific Digit String AIN Trigger Profile key N11 AIN Trigger Profile key Account Code AIN Trigger Profile key Description

TermAttemptTriggerProfileKey Termination Attempt AIN Trigger Profile key

152

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

AIN

The the Generic CLI is used for all Service Profile commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

OffHookImmediateProfileKey OffHookDelayProfileKey TermAttemptTriggerProfileKey PublicFeatureCodeProfileKey SpecificDigitStringProfileKey N11ProfileKey AccountCodeProfileKey

NOTE: A newly created Service Profile does not have any AIN Trigger Profiles associated with it. Use the Generic CLI modify command to add one or more AIN Trigger Profiles to a Service Profile.

create ServiceProfile SP1 modify ServiceProfile SP1 N11ProfileKey N11Prof1 Deleting Service Profiles
Use the destroy command to delete a Service Profile. You can delete a Service Profile without first deleting its contents. The AIN trigger profiles assigned to that Service Profile will remain available to other Service Profile. However, before removing a Service Profile, remove it from the office and/or subscribers to which it is assigned.

destroy ServiceProfile SP1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

153

Account Codes

Account Codes
The Account Codes feature, first introduced in Release 6.0, shares many of the same concepts as AIN Triggers (See AIN on page 138.)

Account Code Overview

Account Codes are used to place restrictions on the types of calls a subscriber can make. For example, you can restrict a subscribers ability to make toll calls. When a subscriber dials one of the call types controlled by an Account Code, additional digits (the account code) must be entered before the switch will complete the call.

Tip
Other vendors may refer to non-verified account codes as account codes or "project codes", and to verified account codes as authorization codes.

The switch may verify the account code digits against a provisioned digit length. Taqua calls this case a non-verified account code. Or, the switch may verify the account code digits against a list of allowed digit strings. Taqua calls this case a verified account code. The collected digits appear in the CDR record for Taqua customer billing purposes.

154

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Account Codes

Provisioning Account Codes

The following figure shows the order of provisioning for Account Codes:

Step
1

Action (Optional) Create an Escape Code Pattern Profile. An Escape Code Pattern Profile contains numbers that can be called without an Account Code. See Creating Escape Code Pattern Profiles on page 144. (Optional) Create an Account Code Pattern Profile. An Account Code Pattern Profile contains a list of Account Codes that a subscriber dials to complete a call. See AcctCodePatternProfile on page 157. NOTE: An Account Code Pattern Profile is not required if you are provisioning non-verified account codes. In this case, the subscriber may enter any combination of digits that matches the digitsLength attribute in the Call Type Profile. See CalltypeProfile on page 160.

Create a Call Type Profile. A Call Type Profile determines the length of the Account Code. It also determines whether or not an Escape Code Pattern Profile, or an Account Code Pattern Profile, or both, are used. See CalltypeProfile on page 160.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

155

Account Codes

Step
4

Action Create an Account Code Profile. An Account Code Profile specifies which call types require Account Code digits and the account code collection requirements. These collection requirements determine the user prompt when an Account Code is required, and the number of retries allowed when an invalid Account Code is entered. An Account Code Profile also specifies which call types require Account Code digits. See AccountCodeProfile on page 161.

Create a Service Profile. The Service Profile associates the Account Code Profile with the Subscriber to which the account code requirements apply. See Service Profile on page 152. NOTE: You may also assign the Account Code Profile to an existing Service Profile. Such a Service Profile will also contain AIN trigger profiles, which allow AIN-based features for the subscriber.

Assign the Service Profile to a subscriber. See serviceProfile on page 538.

156

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Account Codes

AcctCodePatternProfile
An Account Code Pattern Profile contains a list of Account Codes that a subscriber dials to complete a call. An AcctCodePatternProfile has the following attributes:
Attribute key patterns Description name of the Account Code Pattern Profile a list of Account Codes.

The Generic CLI is used for all Account Code Pattern Profile commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The insertInto and insertInto commands apply to the following parameters:

patterns

See Adding Account Codes to an AccountCodePatternProfile on page 158 and Removing Account Codes from an AccountCodePatternProfile on page 159

create AcctCodePatternProfile threeDigitList query AcctCodePatternProfile threeDigitList destroy AcctCodePatternProfile threeDigitList

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

157

Account Codes

Adding Account Codes to an AccountCodePatternProfile insertInto AcctCodePatternProfile <key> patterns <index> <value>
Use this command to add an Account Code to an AccountCodePatternProfiles patterns list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax AcctCodePattern Profile <key> <index> Description keyword which specifies the Account Code Pattern Profile object class name of a previously created Account Code Pattern Profile the position in the list where <value> is to be inserted

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert an escape code at the start of the Account Code Patter Profile. Use a index of -1 to insert an escape code at the end of the Account Code Patter Profile.

<value>

a string of digits representing a Directory Number.

insertInto AcctCodePatternProfile threeDigitList patterns -1 234

Prerequisites
Create an Account Code Pattern Profile before adding an Account Code pattern to it (see AcctCodePatternProfile on page 157).

158

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Account Codes

Removing Account Codes from an AccountCodePatternProfile deleteFrom AcctCodePatternProfile <key> patterns <index>
Use this command to remove an Account Code from an AccountCodePatternProfiles patterns list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax Description

AcctCodePattern keyword which specifies the Account Code Pattern Profile object Profile class <key> <index> name of the Account Code Pattern Profile previously created the index number of the digit string to be removed from the Account Code Pattern Profile

deleteFrom AcctCodePatternProfile threeDigitList patterns 2

Prerequisites
Create an Account Code Pattern Profile and add an Account Code to it before deleting an Account Code from it (see Adding Account Codes to an AccountCodePatternProfile on page 158).

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

159

Account Codes

CalltypeProfile

Tip
Different Call Type Profiles with different values in the digitsLength field can use the same Account Code Pattern Profile. Each Call Type Profile will only match on the number of Account Code digits specified in the digitsLength field.

A Call Type Profile determines the length of the Account Code. It also determines whether or not an Escape Code Pattern Profile, or an Account Code Pattern Profile, or both, are used. A Call Type Profile has the following attributes: Attribute key digitsLength Description name of the Call Type Profile the number of Account Code digits in the Account Code Pattern Profile to verify

acctCodePattern optional name of the Account Code Pattern Profile associated with ProfileKey this Call Type Profile. Do no data fill this attribute if you are provisioning non-verified account codes. escCodePatternP optional name of the Escape Code Pattern Profile associated with rofileKey this Call Type Profile. Do no data fill this attribute if you are provisioning non-verified account codes.

The Generic CLI is used for all Call Type Profile commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key digitsLength

The optional parameters for the create command are:

acctCodePatternProfileKey escCodePatternProfileKey

The modify command applies to the following parameters:

digitsLength acctCodePatternProfile escCodePatternProfile

create CalltypeProfile threeDigitVerified 3 threeDigitList query CalltypeProfile threeDigitVerified

160

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Account Codes

AccountCodeProfile
An Account Code Profile specifies which call types require Account Code digits and the account code collection requirements. These collection requirements determine the user prompt when an Account Code is required, and the number of retries allowed when an invalid Account Code is entered. An Account Code Profile has the following attributes:
Attribute key allowRetries Description name of the Call Type Profile the number of times a subscriber may reenter an Account Code. Range: 0 - 2. Default: 0 acctCodePrompt the type of prompt the switch will provide when a call is attempted that requires an Account Code. Values are: PlayAnnAndDialTone (default) Prompt announcement followed by dial tone. PlayAnnAndStutterTone Prompt announcement followed by stutter tone. DialToneOnly Dial tone only. StutterToneOnly Stutter tone only. PlayAnnOnly Prompt announcement only. servicesCalltype the name of a previously provisioned Call Type Profile to be used ProfileKey for the following types of services calls: Call Forwarding Variable Call Forwarding Fixed Call Forwarding Do Not Answer Call Forwarding Busy Selective Call Forwarding Calls to a remote call forwarding subscriber Automatic callback Speed dial Automatic Call Return Warmline Revertive Call If a Call Type Profile is not assigned to this attribute, account codes are not required for these services.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

161

Account Codes

Attribute LDCalltypeProfileKey

Description the name of a previously provisioned Call Type Profile to be used for intralata, interlata and international calls. These are the typical call types for which the user requests account code service (toll restriction with PIN). If a Call Type Profile is not assigned to this attribute, account codes are not required for these types of calls. NOTE: You may alternately provision one or more specific call types in the calltypeProfileKeyAssignment list.

calltypeProfile- a list of call types, each with an associated Call Type Profile. KeyAssignment NOTE: If you provision an LDCallTypeProfile key, and also provision a CallType Profile for Call Types 2, 4 or 6, the CallType Profiles provisioned here take priority over the LDCallTypeProfile.

The Generic CLI is used for all Account Code Profile commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The optional parameters for the create command are

allowRetries acctCodePrompt servicesCalltypeProfileKey LDCalltypeProfileKey

The modify command applies to the following parameters:

allowRetries acctCodePrompt servicesCalltypeProfileKey LDCalltypeProfileKey calltypeProfileKeyAssignment

create AccountCodeProfile LD_3_digit_verified modify AccountCodeProfile LD_3_digit_verified calltypeProfileKeyAssig nment OAInterlata_3 threeDigitVerified

162

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

BearerGroup

BearerGroup
A BearerGroup is a set of one or more Fast Ethernet Interfaces (FEIs). A BearerGroup object simplifies bearer management for IP Endpoints. Prior to Release 6.0.1, each MediaGateway and SIP Endpoint had its own separate list of Fast Ethernet Interfaces to be used as bearer resources for IP calls. Frequently, these lists were identical. With a BearerGroup, the list of Fast Ethernet Interfaces is centralized. This simplifies maintenance: whenever the list of Fast Ethernet Interfaces needs to be changed, instead of updating several IP Endpoints, only a single BearerGroup need be updated. A BearerGroup object has the following attributes:
Attribute key bearerFEs Description Name of the BearerGroup object A list containing Fast Ethernet Interface OIDs.

The Generic CLI is used for all BearerGroup commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

bearerFEs

See Adding a Fast Ethernet Interface to a BearerGroup on page 164 and Removing a Fast Ethernet Interface From a BearerGroup on page 164.

create BearerGroup bg1 query BearerGroup bg1 destroy BearerGroup bg1 Dependent Commands
After creating a BearerGroup, assign it to one or more IP Endpoints. See MediaGateway on page 371, Setting up a Subscriber Access SIP Endpoint on page
420, and Setting up a Network Gateway SIP Endpoint on page 421.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

163

BearerGroup

Adding a Fast Ethernet Interface to a BearerGroup insertInto BearerGroup <key> bearerFEs <subkey> <subvalue>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a Fast Ethernet Interface to a BearerGroups bearerFE list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> BearerGroup name This is the index in the bearerFE list where you want to enter the Fast Ethernet Interface OID. Description

<subkey>

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert the Fast Ethernet Interface OID at the start of a BearerGroups bearerFEs list. Use a index of -1 to insert Fast Ethernet Interface OID at the end of a BearerGroups bearerFEs list.

<subvalue>

This attribute specifies the Fast Ethernet Interface Object ID. See OID on page 30.

The following command adds Fast Ethernet Interface 1 to the start of the bearerFE list for BearerGroup bg1:

insertInto BearerGroup bg1 bearerFEs 1 fe-1 Removing a Fast Ethernet Interface From a BearerGroup deleteFrom BearerGroup <key> bearerFEs <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a Fast Ethernet Interface from a BearerGroups bearerFE list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> carrier name The index in the bearerFE list of the Fast Ethernet interface that is being removed. Note that the FE to be removed is specified by its position in the bearerFE List, not by its instance! Description

<subkey>

The following command removes the Fast Ethernet Interface at the start of the bearerFE list for BearerGroup bg1

deleteFrom BearerGroup bg1 bearerFEs 1

164

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CardConfiguration

CardConfiguration
Tip
You must create a CardConfiguration object before any provisioning can be done to the card. This is a major change from previous releases, one that is sure to break every existing script!

New in Release 6.0 is the CardConfiguration object. CardConfiguration lets you define a card on the shelf before the card is physically booted. This enables you to pre-provision a card before it is installed on the shelf, and protects the integrity of the provisioning database when a card type other than what has been provisioned is inserted into the shelf. Whenever a card boots, its card type is checked against the corresponding entry in the CardConfiguration object. If the card types do not match, there is a mismatch between what is provisioned in the database and what is present on the shelf. In such a case, the switch will not unlock the card, and the card can not be used for processing calls. When faced with such a mismatch, you must either replace the front card to agree with the database, or modify the CardConfiguration object to change its card type. You may change the card type as long as the new card type has more facilities than the old type. Only the following changes are allowed, all other combinations will fail:

TIC to TIC2_16SPAN TIC to a TIC2 TIC2_16SPAN to a TIC2 PIC to a PIC2_2 PIC2 to a PIC2_3

If you can not change the CardConfiguration card type, you must first destroy the old CardConfiguration object for that slot and then create a new CardConfiguration object.
NOTE: The old card will have to be deprovisioned before Generic CLI will let you destroy its corresponding CardConfiguration object.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

165

CardConfiguration

A CardConfiguration object has the following attributes:

Attribute key type Description Name of the CardConfiguration object Type of Card. Values are: LTC a Line Termination Card TIC a T1 Interface Card (16 T1s) TIC2 a T1 Interface Card 2 (20 T1s) TIC2_16Span a T1 Interface Card 2, paired with a TII rear card (16 T1s) BIC a Broadband Interface Card PIC a Packet Interface Card (2 FEs) PIC2_3 a Packet Interface Card 2 (3 FEs) PIC2_2 a Packet Interface Card 2, paired with a FEI (2FEs) slot Slot in the shelf where the card resides. Range: 1 - 20

The Generic CLI is used for all CardConfiguration commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key type slot create CardConfiguration PIC17 PIC 17

166

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CardConfiguration

query Card
query Card
This command displays information about card objects. Since the output from this command is both long and varies by card type, this section is organized a little differently than the rest of the document. For whatever type of card the command is run on, the following information is displayed:
query card (OID: 5b00001) <48e6400> LTCard key.........................<> objectID....................Card-1-1-27 dependentOIDs...............Array (7 items, zero items suppressed) ->

Attribute <oid>

Description Object Identifier of the Card, in hex. Object Identifier unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit of the near end network interface OID provisioned on the T7000. See OID on page 30.

cardType

The type of card being queried. Values are: LTCard Line Termination Card TICard T1 Interface Card ETICard TI Interface Card 2 DS3Card Broadband Interface Car VPCard Packet Interface Card PIC2Card Packet Interface Card 2

objectID dependentOIDs

Object Identifier of the Card, in the form of Card-SlotSlot-Shelf A list of the Lines (LTC), T-1 Spans (LTC, TIC, TIC2), DS-3s (BIC), or Fast Ethernet Interfaces (PIC, PIC2) that the card contains.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

167

CardConfiguration

The following is a sample output from an LTC Card:

dependentOIDs...............Array (7 items, zero items suppressed) -> [0] <48e6290> tArray Array Size: 2 (zero elements supressed) [0] IntegerValue: Span-0-1-27 [1] IntegerValue: Span-1-1-27 [1] <4900500> tArray Array Size: 32 (zero elements supressed) [0] IntegerValue: Line-0-1-27 [1] IntegerValue: Line-1-1-27 [2] IntegerValue: Line-2-1-27 [rest of output trimed to save space]

This is the corresponding sample output from a TIC Card:

dependentOIDs...............Array (7 items, zero items suppressed) -> [0] <48f86c0> tArray Array Size: 16 (zero elements supressed) [0] IntegerValue: Span-0-1-1 [1] IntegerValue: Span-1-1-1 [2] IntegerValue: Span-2-1-1 [rest of output trimed to save space]

This is the corresponding sample output from a BIC Card:

dependentOIDs...............Array (7 items, zero items suppressed) -> [3] <4cc2130> tArray Array Size: 3 (zero elements supressed) [0] IntegerValue: Ds3-0-1-1 [1] IntegerValue: Ds3-1-1-1 [2] IntegerValue: Ds3-2-1-1

This is the corresponding sample output from a PIC2 Card

dependentOIDs...............Array (7 items, zero items suppressed) -> [4] <48aebf0> tArray Array Size: 3 (zero elements supressed) [0] IntegerValue: FE-0-1-1 [1] IntegerValue: FE-1-1-1 [2] IntegerValue: FE-2-1-1

Attribute containerOID operationalState

Description Object Identifier of the shelf containing the card, in the form of Shelf-<shelfNumber>-0-<shelfNumber> Status of the card for processing call traffic. For more detail, see The T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide Status of the controlling device for processing call traffic. For more detail, see The T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide

masterOperationalState

168

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CardConfiguration

Attribute administrativeState

Description Status of the card for making changes. For more detail, see The T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide Status of the controlling device for processing call traffic. For more detail, see The T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide LTC, PIC and PIC2: Total number of active calls on this card in hex (decimal) LTC, PIC and PIC2: Maximum possible number of active calls on this card in hex (decimal). The DS-3/span/trunk/line is currently in Test mode (i.e., diagnostics are being run. Number of T-1 Spans on this card in hex (decimal) Internal value. Number of Lines on this card in hex (decimal) Number of Digital Signal Processors on this card in hex (decimal). Number of DS-3s on this card in hex (decimal). Number of Fast Ethernet Interfaces on this card in hex (decimal). Internal Value. Controls the local Fault Manager. For details, consult The T70000Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide. Internal, read-only value. When flow control is disabled on an ingress port (i.e. FE0, FE1, FE2) frames are subject to Weighted Random Early Drop (WRED) whenever the average rate for that port has been exceeded. During this time frames are differentiated based upon their drop precedence. During Level 1 dropping only rateControlHighDrop percent of High-Drop frames will be dropped. If Level 1 dropping is insufficient to reduce the incoming rate, then Level 2 dropping will become active. When this occurs all High-Drop frames are dropped and rateControlLowDrop percent of LowDrop frames are also dropped.

masterAdministrativeSta te currentActivityCount maximumActivityCount inTest spansPerCard spanType linesPerCard dspsPerCard ds3sPerCard feifsPerCard operatingMode systemMode

rateControlHighDrop

rateControlLowDrop

See rateControlHighDrop on page 169.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

169

CardConfiguration

Attribute qosFixedPriority_CPU

Description Internal, read-only value. The fixed values for the FE ports use a value of 0 for low priority and 1 for high priority.

qosFixedPriority_GigE

Internal, read-only value. The fixed values for the FE ports use a value of 0 for low priority and 1, 2, or 3 for higher priority.

qosVlanTransmitPriority

Internal, read-only value. Sets the transmit priority level based upon the vlan tag priority bits. qosVlanTransmitPriority, qosFixedPriority_CPU and qosFixedPriority_GigE controls are mutually exclusive (i.e., only one them should be set).

qosVlanDropPriority

Internal, read-only value. When ports are configured to use VLAN Tag based Transmit priority one should also setup the VLAN Drop Priority. This control is used when congestion occurs to map the vlan tag priority bits to a drop level, and to decide which packets to drop first. The High Drop Priority packets are dropped first. A value of 0 = Low drop priority, 1 = High Drop Priority

qosBufferReservations

Internal, read-only value. This value adjusts the size of the ZL50410 internal buffers, which are used to store ingress packets.

qosBufferThresholds

Internal, read-only value. This value adjusts the ZL50410 internal buffer pool thresholds. When buffer usage in a pool exceeds its threshold the ZL50410 may either flow control or drop the incoming packet.

ipFlowControlThresholds

Internal, read-only value.

170

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CardConfiguration

Attribute incomingCallQueueMode

Description Low-level software incoming rate limiting. This value changes how the switch arrives at a time interval to wait between handling MGCP:RsIP, SIP:REGISTER, and SIP:INVITE messages. Values are: Fixed. Uses incomingCallQueueIntervals Dynamic. The software will do its best to arrive at a good interval value based on processor usage.

CAUTION
Contact Taqua TAC Support before changing this value! incomingCallQueueIntervals Millisecond interval for low-level software incoming rate limiting. There is one interval for each supported protocol.

CAUTION
Contact Taqua TAC Support before changing any of these values! outgoingCallQueueIntervals Millisecond interval for low-level software outgoing rate limiting. There is one interval for each supported protocol.

CAUTION
Contact Taqua TAC Support before changing any of these values!

PIC 2 Cards show the following additional information. These are internal objects used by the system software.

qosFixedPriority_GigE qosVlanTransmitPriority qosVlanDropPriority qosBufferReservations qosBufferThreshold

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

171

CardConfiguration

PIC and PIC 2 Cards show the following additional information. This is an internal object used by the system software.

ipFlowControlThreshold

PIC and PIC 2 Cards show the information about their codecs. Sample output is displayed below:

codecList...................List (3 items) -> (1) <48aed10> Codec key..............Codec-0-1-1 codecType........G711 codecWeight......64 (100) maximumSession...32 (50) activeSessions...0 (0) (2) <48aecb0> Codec key..............Codec-0-1-1 codecType........G726 codecWeight......c8 (200) maximumSession...2e (46) activeSessions...0 (0)

172

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CardConfiguration

(3) <48aec50> Codec key..............Codec-0-1-1 codecType........G729 codecWeight......c8 (200) maximumSession...30 (48) activeSessions...0 (0)
Attribute Description Default name for a codec Type of codec. A measure of the processing load placed on a DSP when using this codec Maximum number of sessions this codec can handle Count of the number of sessions this codec is currently handling.

key codecType codecWeight maximumSession activeSessions

PIC and PIC 2 Cards show the following additional information.

Attribute Description Maximum Number of incoming/outgoing IP signaling call legs in hex (decimal) Count of the current number of IP signaling call legs in hex (decimal) Maximum number of allowed bearer sessions going through this card in hex (decimal) Current number of allowed bearer sessions going through this card in hex (decimal) Weighted total of all the codec's maximum sessions. Weighted total of all the codec's active sessions

maximumDialogueCou nt currentDialogueCou nt maximumBearerCount currentBearerCount maximumBearerUsage currentBearerUsage

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

173

CALEA

CALEA
CALEA is an acronym for Communications Assistance for Law Enforcement Act of 1994. CALEA requires that the switch support legal surveillance by remote Law Enforcement Agencies (LEAs) of subscribers in real time. The surveillance includes call-detail information and may also include call-content (voice) information for a surveillance. The following table describes the types of surveillances.
Table 1: CALEA Surveillance Surveillance Call Data (CD) Surveillance Connection TCP/IP Description Contains the following: Start Time, Stop Time, Calling Party, and Called Party of each call. Call Data Channels (CDCs) deliver this data. This is also called a Pen-Register, or Trap-andTrace surveillance. Call Content (CC) TCP/IP and trunks Contains the following: Surveillance in a T1 The voice content of the telephone call and the Call Content Channels (CCCs) for the call The CD surveillance data This is also called a Title III surveillance.

WARNING
Information about Law Enforcement A surveillance activities is confidential. If non-authorized personnel access this information, they could alert the subjects of the surveillance and interfere with lawful investigations. To maintain confidentiality, all CALEA commands (except the createPenGrp command) require a password (.

174

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

Order of Provisioning
Order of provisioning for CALEA: l
Step
1 2

Action Create the Pen group database, see createPenGrp on page 176 Change the administrator password, see changePenPW on page 179 Add a LEA, see addLea on page 181 Add a subject: If the case requires Call Content, add T1 span(s) to the LEA, see addLeaSpan on page 183 Add a case, see addLeaCase on page 187 If the case requires Call Content, add voice channels to the case, see addVoiceChnl on page 189 Enable surveillance on the case, see startCaseMonitor on page 192 Monitor Control Description system level allows all monitoring on the switch does not disable LEA monitoring default value is enabled

3 4

Pen Monitoring Control

LEA Monitoring Control

LEA level allows the monitoring of cases on the LEA disables the monitoring of all cases for a LEA default value is enabled

Case Monitoring Control

case level controls monitoring for individual cases default value is disabled

By default, the Pen level and LEA level monitoring are enabled, but individual cases default to disabled. This allows the carrier to provision surveillance in advance of the surveillance start date. When the court order takes effect, all that need be done is to manually enable the cases individually.

CAUTION
Do not use the switch scheduler software to activate or deactivate cases automatically. The scheduler does not currently have password protection, which is required to ensure the confidentiality.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

175

CALEA

createPenGrp createPenGrp <cardOID> <ocxSystemID>

This creates the Pen Group database. Only one Pen Group is provisioned. The Pen Group contains all CALEA data. A Pen Group is an object that contains provisioning data, including the connecting LEAs. The Pen Group object identifies the TCP\IP interface between the switch and the LEAs data collection device. The Pen Group database identifies which card on the switch is used to make the TCP/IP connection for surveillances. The TCP/IP connection sends call-data information to the LEAs using binary messages in BER/ASN.1 format.
Syntax <cardOID> Description The switch card that interfaces (TCP/IP) to the data collection device. See OID on page 30.

<ocxSystemID> The Intercept Access Point (IAP) system identification text string. The LEA uses the IAP to distinguish messages sent to it from various switches.

Dependent Commands
After creating the Pen Group, change the Pen group password, see changePenPW
on page 179

All other CALEA commands. Run this command before any other CALEA commands.

createPenGrp card-3 OCX-1_PLANO_TX

176

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

deletePenGrp deletePenGrp <admPW>

This deletes the Pen group database. When you delete the database, the Pen Log is also deleted.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179 Remove all related cases and LEAs. Remove case data, see removeLeaCase on page 188 Remove LEA data, see removeLea on page 182
Syntax <admPW> Description The administrator password.

deletePenGrp pw

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

177

CALEA

setPenAttr setPenAttr <attrType> <value> <admPW>

This command modifies Pen group attributes.
Syntax <attrType> Description The name of the attribute to set. AttrName is one of the following (case sensitive): CARDOID The object identifier for the card that provides the TCP/IP connection to the LEAs. OCXSYSTEMID The Intercept Access Point (IAP) system identification tag, which is a text string that the connecting LEA references. The first LEA that you connect to provides you with the system ID, this ID remains the same for other LEAs that connect to the switch. DDEXTRACT ENABLED the switch sends a dialed digit extraction message with any digits that the subject enters after the call is set up, for example, a calling card number. DISABLED the switch does not send a dialed digit extraction message. <value> The new value of the attribute. For DDEXTRACT, 1=Enabled and 0=Disabled <admPW> The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179 Create the Pen group database, see createPenGrp on page 176 Stop Pen group database monitoring, see stopPenMonitor on page 191

setPenAttr CARDOID Card-1 pw setPenAttr OCXSYSTEMID Danville pw setPenAttr DDEXTRACT 1 pw

178

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

changePenPW changePenPW <oldPW> <newPW> [ADM:DEF]

This command changes the default or administrator password. You must first change the password before running any other CALEA commands. There are two types of CALEA passwords:

Default password - initially set by Taqua Administrator password - set by you and used with all CALEA commands

When you provision the Pen group database, both passwords are set to the same value oldpw. At that time, you can reset the default password to another value, which causes the administrator password to be set to the same value. After you change the administrator password, you cannot change the default password. You can change the administrator password at any time, but not back to the default value.
Syntax <oldPW> <newPW> [ADM:DEF] Description The current password (case sensitive). The new password (case sensitive). This specifies which password to change. If pwType is omitted, it is assumed to be ADM. If specified, pwType must be one of the following (case sensitive): DEF - default ADM - administrator

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179.
See createPenGrp on page 176.

changePenPW oldpw pw ADM Dependent Commands

All CALEA commands other than createPenGrp require a password.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

179

CALEA

setPenGroupTimer setPenGroupTimer <timer> <value> <admPW>

This command modifies a TCP/IP CALEA client timer value.
Syntax <timer> The timer to set. Description

TimerType is one of the following (case sensitive):

CL_T1 The timer that sets the interval between messages sent to the connecting LEA server in milliseconds. Range is from 10 to 1000. CL_T2 The timer for the card with the TCP/IP connection that determines the period, in milliseconds, between attempts to open a closed socket. Range is from 15000 to 3200000. CL_T3 The timer that sets the interval between connection test messages sent to the LEA. This time ranges between 60,000 and 3200000 minutes. If set to 0, the switch does not send connection test messages. <value> <admPW> The new integer value of the specified timer (measured in milliseconds). The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179.
See createPenGrp on page 176.

setPenGroupTimer CL_T1 100000 pw

180

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

addLea

Tip
If a single LEA has multiple data collection systems, each system will have its own IP Address and port. In this case, create a separate LEA for each data collection system.

addLea <leaName> <leaIPAddr> <leaPort> [FXO] <admPW>

This command adds a new LEA to the Pen group database. The LEA gathers data on the subject when authorized by a court order. The switch supports up to 25 LEAs.
Syntax <leaName> Description The name of the Law Enforcement Agency. This name identifies with the connecting data collection device. Create a LEA for each data collection device to which you connect. The LEA's IP address.

<leaIPAddr>

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195 <leaPort> [FXO] <admPW> The IP port the LEA is using. Internal value The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Create the Pen group database, see createPenGrp on page 176. Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179.

Dependent Commands
After defining a LEA, you may add one or more T1 spans to deliver call-content information to the LEA's data collection device. In this situation, assign logical span numbers to the T1 spans to be dedicated to the LEA. Later, when the you add voice channels to the LEA's cases, the appropriate logical span number is used along with the T1 channels assigned for call-content delivery.

See addLeaSpan on page 183. See addLeaCase on page 187. See addVoiceChnl on page 189.

addLea fbi 10.1.165.13 6050 pw

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

181

CALEA

removeLea removeLea <leaName> <admPW>

This command deletes a LEA from the Pen group database.
Syntax <leaName > <admPW> Description The name of the Law Enforcement Agency. The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Remove all cases in the LEA, see removeLeaCase on page 188. Stop LEA monitoring, see stopLeaMonitor on page 185.

removeLea fbi pw

182

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

addLeaSpan addLeaSpan <leaName> <spanOID> <logicalSpan> <admPW>

This command assigns a T1 span to a LEA for use in Call Content surveillances. Using a logical span number to identify a switch T1 span provides a way for the switch operator and the and the LEA to identify the LEA's T1 spans.
Syntax <leaName> <spanOID> <logicalSpan> Description The name of the Law Enforcement Agency. The switch span OID that connects to the LEA. See OID on page 30. A number (001 - 999) that identifies the switch span. Logical span numbers must be unique for a given LEA, although different LEAs can use the same numbers. The administrator password.

<admPW>

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Add the LEA, see addLea on page 181.

Dependent Commands
See addLeaCase on page 187. See addVoiceChnl on page 189. See startCaseMonitor on page 192.

addLeaSpan fbi span-0-3-2 1 pw

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

183

CALEA

removeLeaSpan removeLeaSpan <leaName> <spanOID> <admPW>

This command removes a switch T1 span from a LEA.
Syntax <leaName> <spanOID> <admPW> Description The name of the Law Enforcement Agency. The switch T1 span OID. See OID on page 30. The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Add the LEA span, see addLeaSpan on page 183. Remove the voice channels, see removeVoiceChnl on page 190.

Dependent Commands
See removeVoiceChnl on page 190.

removeLeaSpan fbi 1 pw

184

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

startLeaMonitor startLeaMonitor <leaName> <admPW>

This command starts the delivery of call-detail and call-content information for cases enabled on a particular LEA.
NOTE: You cannot enable case-level monitoring without first enabling LEA-level monitoring.

Syntax <leaName> <admPW>

Description The name of the Law Enforcement Agency. The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Define the LEA, see addLea on page 181. Add case data, addLeaCase on page 187.

startLeaMonitor fbi pw stopLeaMonitor

Tip
Disabling LEA-level monitoring disables all of the LEAs cases. When reenabling LEA-level monitoring, the cases remain disabled. You must manually re-enable the cases

stopLeaMonitor <leaName> <admPW>

This command stops the delivery of current and subsequent call originations and terminations, of call-detail and call-content for all directory numbers targeted by this LEA. All of the LEA's Case monitoring states are automatically forced to disabled.
Syntax leaName admPW Explanation The name of the Law Enforcement Agency. The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Start the LEA monitoring, see startLeaMonitor on page 185.

stopLeaMonitor fbi pw

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

185

CALEA

setLeaAttr setLeaAttr <leaName> <attrType> <value> <admPW>

This command modifies LEA attributes. Use this to change the name or IP data for a LEA.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Define the LEA, see addLea on page 181. Stop LEA monitoring, see stopLeaMonitor on page 185.
Syntax <leaName> <attrType> Description The Law Enforcement Agency name. The name of the attribute to set. AttrName is one of the following (case sensitive): LEAIPADDR The IP address for the data collection device of the connecting LEA LEAPORT The port number for the data collection device of the connecting LEA <value> <admPW> The new value of the attribute. The administrator password.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

setLeaAttr fbi LEAIPADDR 10.1.165.15 pw setLeaAttr fbi LEAPORT 6050 pw

186

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

addLeaCase addLeaCase <leaName> <leaCaseID> <targetDirn> <interceptType> <admPW>

This command adds a case to a LEA. To set up the surveillance of a directory number (subject) on the switch, add a LEA case to the database. The case identifies the leaCaseID, subject directory number, and surveillance type.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Define the LEA, see addLea on page 181.
Syntax <leaName> <lealeaCaseID> <targetDirn> <interceptType> Description The Law Enforcement Agency name. The name assigned to the case. This value is usually provided by the LEA. The subjects directory number. The type of surveillance authorized for this subject. One of the following (case sensitive): CD Call Data CC Call Content + Call Data

NOTE: The switch allows a subject to be added to all provisioned LEAs, but only a maximum of 5 LEAs can monitor a subject at the same time (J-STD-25 requirement/limitation) <admPW> The administrator password.

Dependent Commands
If Call Content is authorized, assign logical spans and trunks for the call content surveillance. See addVoiceChnl on page 189.
See startCaseMonitor on page 192.

addLeaCase fbi 3 9726920003 CC pw

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

187

CALEA

removeLeaCase removeLeaCase <leaName> <lealeaCaseID <admPW>

This command removes a case from a LEA.
Syntax <leaName> <lealeaCaseID> <admPW> Description The Law Enforcement Agency name. The Case ID assigned to the case. The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Stop the case monitoring, see stopCaseMonitor on page 193. Remove voice channels, see removeVoiceChnl on page 190.

Dependent Commands
See stopCaseMonitor on page 193. See removeVoiceChnl on page 190.

removeLeaCase fbi case3 pw

188

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

addVoiceChnl addVoiceChnl <leaName> <lealeaCaseID> <logicalSpan> <chan> <admPW>

This command assigns a voice channel to a case. Voice channels are trunks in the LEA Span that provide call-content data to the LEA. Call-content surveillances require a minimum of one pair of voice channels. Additional channels may be necessary to handle call-forwarding scenarios. Coordinate which logical span and trunks to use with the LEA, and use an even number of voice channels. The switch supports any number of voice channels per case. limited only by the number of spans assigned to the LEA, ensuring that there are enough voice channels to capture call content when a call is forwarded, once or multiple times.
Syntax <leaName> <lealeaCaseID> <logicalSpan> <chan> <admPW> Description The Law Enforcement Agency name. The name assigned to the case. The logical span number of the T1 span that corresponds with the voice channel The voice channel (1 - 24) for one leg of the subject's call. The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Define the LEA, see addLea on page 181. Add T1 span(s) to the LEA, see addLeaSpan on page 183. Add a case, addLeaCase on page 187.

Dependent Commands
See startCaseMonitor on page 192.

addVoiceChnl fbi case3 1 5 6 7 8 pw

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

189

CALEA

removeVoiceChnl removeVoiceChnl <leaName> <lealeaCaseID> <logicalSpan> <chan> <admPW>

This command removes a voice channel from a case.

Prerequisites
Add a voice channel, see addVoiceChnl on page 189.
Syntax <leaName> <lealeaCaseID > <logicalSpan> <chan> <admPW> Description The Law Enforcement Agency name. The name assigned to the case. The logical span number of the T1 span that corresponds with the voice channel The voice channel (1 - 24) for one leg of the subject's call. The administrator password.

removeVoiceChnl fbi case3 pw

190

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

startPenMonitor startPenMonitor <admPW>

This command controls monitoring at the switch level, allowing the delivery of calldetail and call-content for all cases whose LEA and case monitoring states are enabled.
Syntax <admPW> Description The administrator password.

Dependent Commands
See createPenGrp on page 176.

startPenMonitor pw stopPenMonitor stopPenMonitor <admPW>

This command controls monitoring at the switch level. When switch level monitoring is disabled, the card OID that provides the TCP/IP connection may be changed (see setPenAttr on page 178).

NOTE: To stop pen monitoring first disable the LEA monitoring.

Syntax <admPW>

Description The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179.
See startPenMonitor on page 191.

stopPenMonitor pw

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

191

CALEA

startCaseMonitor startCaseMonitor <leaName> <leaCaseID> <admPW>

This command enables the delivery of call-detail and call-content info for a specific case (subject directory number). When a case is first added, monitoring is disabled. This command starts delivery of call-detail and call-content to the LEA. Surveillance takes effect for subsequent calls after enabling monitoring calls that are already in progress when monitoring is enabled are not affected.
Syntax <leaName> <leaCaseID> <admPW> Description The Law Enforcement Agency name. The name assigned to the case. This is the administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. If a case's surveillance type requires call-content delivery, you cannot enable monitoring until the voice channels are provisioned. See addVoiceChnl on page 189. Define the LEA, see addLea on page 181. Add T1 span(s) to the LEA if required, see addLeaSpan on page 183. Add case data, addLeaCase on page 187. Add voice channels to the case, if required, addVoiceChnl on page 189.

startCaseMonitor fbi case3 pw

192

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

stopCaseMonitor stopCaseMonitor <leaName> <leaCaseID> <admPW>

This command disables the delivery of call-detail and call-content info for a specific case (subject directory number). If a call is currently being monitored, that monitoring is terminated.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Start case monitoring, see startCaseMonitor on page 192.
Syntax <leaName> <leaCaseID> <admPW> Description The Law Enforcement Agency name. The name assigned to the case. The administrator password.

stopCaseMonitor fbi case3 pw

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

193

CALEA

setCaseAttr setCaseAttr <leaName> <leaCaseID> <attrType> <value> <admPW>

This command modifies the attributes of a case.
Syntax <leaName> <leaCaseID> <attrType> Description The Law Enforcement Agency name. The name assigned to the case. The name of the attribute to set. AttrType is one of the following (case sensitive):

COURTORDER The alphanumeric characters that represent the court order. This field is for reference only. INTERCEPTTYPE The type of surveillance the case requires: - 1 for call-content surveillances (includes call-data) - 0 for call-data only surveillances STARTDATE date/time string (for reference only) STOPDATE date/time string (for reference only) <value> <admPW> The new value of the attribute. The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179. Add case data, see addLeaCase on page 187. Stop case level monitoring, see stopCaseMonitor on page 193. To change intercept type from CC to CD, see removeVoiceChnl on page 190. To change intercept type from CD to CC, see addVoiceChnl on page 189.
NOTE: The STARTDATE and STOPDATE attributes do not control the enabling and disabling of a case. Changing the INTERCEPTTYPE from call-content to call-detail does note remove the voice channels assigned to the case. You need to remove these voice channels, see removeVoiceChnl on page 190. Add voice channels before changing INTERCEPTTYPE from call-detail only to call-detail plus voice.

setCaseAttr fbi case3 INTERCEPTTYPE CD pw

194

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CALEA

resizePenLog resizePenLog <newSize> <admPW>

This command changes the size of the Pen group event notification log. The Pen log holds messages generated as a result of Pen group activities. This log is useful to troubleshoot problems while working with LEAs.
Syntax <newSize> Description The size of the Pen Group log is between 1 and 1,000 events. The log size is limited to the available memory on the switch. The default size is 300 events. The administrator password.

<admPW>

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179.
See createPenGrp on page 176.

resizePenLog 700 pw purgePenLog purgePenLog <admPW>

This command empties the Pen log.
Syntax admPW Description The administrator password.

Prerequisites
Change the Pen group password, see changePenPW on page 179.
See createPenGrp on page 176.

purgePenLog pw

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

195

Carriers

Carriers
A carrier is a company that provides communication circuits. Each carrier attached to the switch has a Carrier Access Code (CAC), a list of capabilities, and routing information. Carriers assigned to a subscriber are chosen automatically, or the subscriber can over ride the carrier assignments by dialing 101 followed by the CAC. A Carrier has the following attributes:
attribute key code intraLata value name of carrier, for example ATT 4-digit carrier access code, for example 4321 for AT&T This attribute specifies the toll services that originate and terminate in the same Local Access and Transport Area (LATA). Possible values: NO The carrier does not offer toll services that originate and terminate in the same LATA, calls route to treatment. CarrierRoute If this carrier offers toll services that terminate in the same LATA, using a Carrier Route List route. NanpRoute The carrier offers toll services that terminate in the same LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route NANP Route List route Carrier Route List route AniRoute The carrier offers toll services that terminate in the LATA using the following routes in order of priority: ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_CarrierRoute The carrier offers toll services that terminate in the same LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_AniRoute The carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order: Subscriber route ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route

196

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Carriers

attribute interLata

value This attribute specifies the services that terminate in another LATA Possible values: NO The carrier does not offer toll services that originate and terminate in another LATA, calls route to treatment. CarrierRoute If this carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA, using a Carrier Route List route. NanpRoute The carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route NANP Route List route Carrier Route List route AniRoute The carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_CarrierRoute The carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_AniRoute The carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order: Subscriber route ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

197

Carriers

attribute international

value This attribute specifies the toll services that terminate in a different country. Possible values: NO The carrier does not offer international call service that originate and terminate in another LATA, calls route to treatment. CarrierRoute If this carrier offers international call service that terminate in another LATA, using a Carrier Route List route. NanpRoute The carrier offers international call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route NANP Route List route Carrier Route List route AniRoute The carrier offers international call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_CarrierRoute The carrier offers international call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_AniRoute The carrier offers international call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order: Subscriber route ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route

198

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Carriers

attribute worldZone1

value This attribute specifies the services to countries identified by the single-digit country code of 1 (Canada, and most Caribbean countries), not the U.S. Possible values: NO The carrier does not offer worldzone1 call service that originate and terminate in another LATA, calls route to treatment. CarrierRoute If this carrier offers worldzone1 call service that terminate in another LATA, using a Carrier Route List route. NanpRoute The carrier offers worldzone1 call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route NANP Route List route Carrier Route List route AniRoute The carrier offers worldzone1 call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_CarrierRoute The carrier offers worldzone1 call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_AniRoute The carrier offers worldzone1 call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order: Subscriber route ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

199

Carriers

attribute OSCapable

value This attribute specifies Operator Services. Possible values: NO The carrier does not offer operator services call service that originate and terminate in another LATA, calls route to default OS provider. CarrierRoute If this carrier offers operator services call service that terminate in another LATA, using a Carrier Route List route. NanpRoute The carrier offers operator services call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route NANP Route List route Carrier Route List route AniRoute The carrier offers operator services call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_CarrierRoute The carrier offers operator services call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_AniRoute The carrier offers operator services call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order: Subscriber route ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route

200

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Carriers

attribute DACapable

value This attribute specifies Directory Assistance services. Possible values: 0 NO The carrier does not offer directory assistance call service that originate and terminate in another LATA, calls route to default DA provider. CarrierRoute If this carrier offers directory assistance call service that terminate in another LATA, using a Carrier Route List route. NanpRoute The carrier offers directory assistance call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route NANP Route List route Carrier Route List route AniRoute The carrier offers directory assistance call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_CarrierRoute The carrier offers directory assistance call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority: Subscriber route Carrier Route List route Nonlocal_AniRoute The carrier offers directory assistance call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order: Subscriber route ANI Route List route Carrier Route List route

OS01NXCode OS011NXCode

The 1NX code that is sent to this carrier for 01+ operatorassisted calls. The default value is 158. The 1NX code that is sent to this carrier for 011+ operatorassisted calls originating from pay stations (for example, pay telephones, hotels). The default value is 138.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

201

Carriers

attribute routeCodesMap

value NOTE: routeCodesMap is an object with its own attributes. See the examples at the end of this command for usage. The 2-digit route code for each type of call that the switch sends when routing to this carrier over FGD. This is also called an OZZ code and the switch sends a 0 before the code. These codes need to match the code that the connecting switch is expecting. The connecting switch only uses this code if it routes calls using the carrier access code and the route code. As a default, the switch sends 00 for the route code. Attributes: local extendedArea calls to an extended area interLATA OAInterLATA Operator Assisted InterLATA calls intraLATA OAIntraLATA Operator Assisted IntraLATA calls international OAInternational Operator Assisted international calls worldZone1 OAWorldZone1 Operator Assisted World Zone 1 calls e911 Enhanced 911 calls DAIntraLATA Directory Assisted IntraLATA calls DAInterLATA Directory Assisted InterLATA calls OAZeroMinus Operator Assisted calls to 0 SAC Special Access Code (SAC) calls, typically 800 toll free numbers. A SAC query supplies one of the following: Telephone number where the call can be routed Carrier name that handles calls for that toll free number Range: 0 - 99

deniedInfoDigits NOTE: deniedInfoDigits is a list object. See the examples at the end of this command for usage. This attribute specifies which information digits that you want to block from an IC or OSS and send the default 00 digits instead. By default none of the digits are denied from routing to an OSS.

202

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Carriers

attribute ANIKPType

value This attribute specifies the outpulsed tones on trunks using the FGCOS protocol to none so the KP tone (start of pulsing signal) is sent. Possible values: NONE KP tone (start of pulsing signal) is sent SIGNALING KP is sent if DTMF is used PRE_SUB KP is sent if the subscriber is presubscribed (CAC not dialed), KP is sent if the subscriber is not pre-subscribed (CAC dialed). BOTH KP is sent if DTMF is used and the subscriber is presubscribed (CAC not dialed), KP is sent if DTMF is used and the subscriber is not pre-subscribed (CAC dialed).

restrictions

This attribute specifies the restrictions assigned Type is Bitfield. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example. Possible values: DA_ONLY Allow directory assistance calls only NO_CAC Do not allow CAC calls (101XXXX) NO_DA Do not allow directory assistance calls NO_OSDIALED Do not allow operator services (0+, 00, 0) calls NO_OSSTATION Do not allow operator service station (hotel, motel, etc.) calls NO_PRE_SUB Do not allow calls without a presubscribed carrier OS_ONLY Allow operator services calls only PRE_SUB_ONLY Allow calls with a pre-subscribed carrier only

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

203

Carriers

attribute circuitCodeForTNS

value NOTE: circuitCodeForTNS is an object with its own attributes.

See the examples at the end of this command for usage

This attribute specifies the circuit code in the optional

Transit Network Selection (TNS) parameter that includes the associated CAC or PCAC. The TNS is sent when using SS7 trunks. This circuit code is sent to the AT and the AT uses it to determine the call type and where to send the call.
Attributes: local extendedArea interLATA OAInterLATA intraLATA OAIntraLATA international OAInternational worldZone1 OAWorldZone1 e911 DAIntraLATA DAInterLATA OAZeroMinus SAC Follow the call type attribute with the circuit code sent in the optional Transit Network Selection (TNS) parameter, which includes the associated CAC or PCAC. The TNS is sent when using SS7 trunks. This circuit code is sent to the AT and the AT uses it to determine the call type and where to send the call. Range: 0 - 15

204

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Carriers

attribute PCAC

value This attribute specifies the 4-digit PCAC of the carrier that is sent in the outgoing call setup signal. In standard call processing, the CAC in the outgoing signaling message is the same as the CAC used for routing. Use this field to send a different CAC in the signaling message than the switch uses to route the call.

NOTE: The switch uses the PCAC of the carrier if there is not a PCAC assigned to the associated prefix.

When the switch uses a carrier with an assigned PCAC then:

For CAS signaling, the switch sends the PCAC in the outgoing signaling message. If the switch uses SS7, it sends the PCAC in the optional TNS and CIP parameters of the IAM. To set the TNS, see circuitCodeForTNS on page 204.

If the switch uses PRI signaling, it sends the PCAC in the SETUP message.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

205

Carriers

The Generic CLI is used for all Carrier commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key code

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

code intraLata interLata international worldZone1 OSCapable DACapable OS01NXCode OS011NXCode routeCodesMap ANIKPType restrictions circuitCodeForTNS
PCAC

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

deniedInfoDigits

See Adding deniedInfoDigits to a Carrier on page 210 and Removing deniedInfoDigits from a Carrier on page 210.

create Carrier MCI 1234 modify modify modify modify Carrier Carrier Carrier Carrier MCI MCI ATT ATT restrictions OS_ONLY 0 circuitCodeForTNS extendedArea 1 routeCodesMap interLATA 23 PCAC 1212

destroy Carrier MCI

206

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Carriers

Dependent Commands
After creating a carrier modify its attributes, see modify on page 6. After creating a carrier assign it to:

A route list, see Carrier Route List on page 515.

NOTE: A tandem carrier route list uses the route codes assigned to a carrier, see Tandem Carrier RouteList on page 523.

A subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530. The directory assistance and operator services fields of the Office Parameter, see OS Provider on page 382 and DA Provider on page 382.

NOTE: A carrier must be OS or DA capable to be assigned as the default carrier in the office parameter, see OfficeParams on page 382.

Deleting a carrier potentially disassociates it from:

A route list, see Carrier Route List on page 515. A subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530. The directory assistance and operator services fields of the Office Parameter, see OfficeParams on page 382.

CAUTION
Deleting a carrier may negatively affect operations.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

207

Carriers

query Carrier

Tip
Use this command without a key to see which carriers have been provisioned on the switch.

query Carrier <key>

This Generic CLI command shows the carrier access code (4-digit number) and the attributes assigned to a specified carrier.
Syntax <key> carrier name Description

query Carrier MCI <52c6120> Carrier key................."MCI" code................"1234" intraLata...........NO interLata...........NO international.......NO worldZone1..........NO OSCapable...........NO DACapable...........NO OS01NXCode..........9e (158) OS011NXCode.........8a (138) routeCodesMap.......<52c7840> <52c7840> CarrierRouteCodes local.............0 (0) extendedArea......0 (0) interLATA.........0 (0) OAInterLATA.......0 (0) intraLATA.........0 (0) OAIntraLATA.......0 (0) international.....0 (0) OAInternational...0 (0) worldZone1........0 (0) OAWorldZone1......0 (0) e911..............0 (0) DAIntraLATA.......0 (0) DAInterLATA.......0 (0) OAZeroMinus.......0 (0) SAC...............0 (0) deniedInfoDigits....<52c76c0> <52c76c0> InfoDigitsList valType......Integer collection...List (0 items) ->

208

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Carriers

ANIKPType...........NONE restrictions........(BITFIELD) -> 0 circuitCodeForTNS...<52c7910> <52c7910> CircuitCode local.............0 (0) extendedArea......0 (0) interLATA.........0 (0) OAInterLATA.......0 (0) intraLATA.........0 (0) OAIntraLATA.......0 (0) international.....0 (0) OAInternational...0 (0) worldZone1........0 (0) OAWorldZone1......0 (0) e911..............0 (0) DAIntraLATA.......0 (0) DAInterLATA.......0 (0) OAZeroMinus.......0 (0) SAC...............0 (0) PCAC................<>

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

209

Carriers

Adding deniedInfoDigits to a Carrier insertInto Carrier <key> deniedInfoDigits <subkey> <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a value to a Carriers deniedInfoDigits list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> carrier name This is the index in the denied Info Digits list where you want to enter the information digits. Description

<subkey>

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert deniedInforDigits at the start of a carriers deniedInfoDigits list. Use a index of -1 to insert deniedInforDigits at the end of a carriers deniedInfoDigits list.

<subvalue>

This attribute specifies which information digits that you want to block from an IC or OSS and send the default 00 digits instead. By default none of the digits are denied from routing to an OSS.

The following command adds info digits "11" to the start of the deniedInfoDigits list for carrier ATT:

insertInto Carrier ATT deniedInfoDigits 1 11 Removing deniedInfoDigits from a Carrier deleteFrom Carrier <key> deniedInfoDigits <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a value to a Carriers deniedInforDigits list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> subkey carrier name This attribute specifies which information digits you want to remove from the deniedInfoDigits list Description

The following command removes the info digits at the start of the deniedInfoDigits list for carrier ATT:

deleteFrom Carrier ATT deniedInfoDigits 1

210

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Change Number Announcement

Change Number Announcement

Use Change Number Announcement (CNA) when a single directory number or a range of directory numbers is changed, and you wish to provide an announcement to inform callers of the new number(s). When the old number is dialed, the switch generates a custom announcement informing the caller of the old and new directory numbers. CNA may be pre-provisioned, and placed in an inactive state. This allows the service to be deployed when it is needed. To provision Change Number Announcement for a single directory number:
Step
1

Action Create a NANP route list for the number that will trigger the Change Number Announcement (see NANP Route List on page 519 for more information about route lists). The following example creates a route list for subscriber 9724800013. We will call this Change Number Announcement route list CNA_9724800013, to help us remember which subscriber the announcement is for. In this example, we are going to pre-provision the CNA route list, so we want it to be intially inactive. create NANPRouteList CNA_9724800013 9724800013 9724800013 NO

Add the service to the route list (see Route Lists on page 514, and Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527 for more information). insertInto NANPRouteList CNA_9724800013 routes 1 CNASvc:2145301945 Note that the type of route list and the name of the route list were determined in step 1, and that routes is a keyword that must be used when inserting route into a route list. "1" is the positiion in the route list where we want to enter the service. Also, note that CNASvc: is a keyword that identifies the Change Number Announcement service, and "2145301945" is the changed number for the subscriber.

NOTE: If you omit the final ":" in "CNASvc" the announcement will omit the 1st digit of the new number!
3

At some later time, we will want to activate the Change Number Announcement for the subscriber. This is done with the Generic CLI modify command:
modify NANPRouteList CNA_9724800013 active YES

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

211

Change Number Announcement

Tip
Use CNA with a range of directory numbers to provision NPA overlays.

To provision Change Number Announcement for a range of directory numbers:

Step
1

Action Create a NANP route list for the range of directory numbers that will trigger the Change Number Announcement (see NANP Route List on page 519 for more information about route lists). The following example creates a route list for the range of directory numbers 9724800000 to 9724809999. We will call this Change Number Announcement route list CNA_97248, to help us remember the range of directory numbers in this route list. In this example, we are not going to pre-provision the CNA route list, because we want the changes to take place immediately. create NANPRouteList CNA_972480 9724800000 9724809999

Add the service to the route list (see Route Lists on page 514, and Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527 for more information). insertInto NANPRouteList CNA_972480 routes 1 CNASvc:214575XXXX See step 2 in the previous example for a discussion about the type and name of the route list. In this step, we want to concentrate on the format of the CNA number. In this example, "214575" replaces "972480". Each "X" in the string "XXXX" is a wildcard that allows the corresponding digit in the original dialed number to be used in the Changed Number Announcement. To illustrate: if a caller dials "9724800021", the announcement would be, The number you are calling, 9724800021, has been changed. Please make a note of the new number, 2145750021

212

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Equipment Provisioning

Equipment Provisioning
lockFacility lockFacility <facilityOID>
This command places a facility (device) in an out-of-service administrative state. Syntax <facilityOID> Description facilityOID the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See OID on page 30.

statusFacility line-1 ***** Status for Line-1-1-10 ***** Operational State: ENABLED Master Operational State: ENABLED Administrative State: UNLOCKED Master Administrative State: UNLOCKED Resource Status: ISV Resource Available?: YES lock line-1 statusFacility line-1 ***** Status for Line-1-1-10 ***** Operational State: ENABLED Master Operational State: ENABLED Administrative State: LOCKED Master Administrative State: UNLOCKED Resource Status: OOS Resource Available?: NO

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

213

Equipment Provisioning

unlockFacility unlockFacility <facilityOID>

This command places a facility (device) in an in-service administrative state. Syntax <facilityOID> Description facilityOID the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See OID on page 30.

statusFacility line-1 ***** Status for Line-1-1-10 ***** Operational State: ENABLED Master Operational State: ENABLED Administrative State: LOCKED Master Administrative State: UNLOCKED Resource Status: OOS Resource Available?: NO unlockFacility line-1 statusFacility line-1 ***** Status for Line-1-1-10 ***** Operational State: ENABLED Master Operational State: ENABLED Administrative State: UNLOCKED Master Administrative State: UNLOCKED Resource Status: ISV Resource Available?: YES

214

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Equipment Provisioning

shutdownFacility shutdownFacility <facilityOID>

Tip
Once a facility has been shut down, use unlockFacility on page 214 to return it to service.

This command places a facility (device) in an administrative state where it does not accept new service requests, but keeps performing current activities until done.

Syntax <facilityOID>

Description facilityOID the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See OID on page 30.

statusFacility line-1 ***** Status for Line-1-1-10 ***** Operational State: ENABLED Master Operational State: ENABLED Administrative State: UNLOCKED Master Administrative State: UNLOCKED Resource Status: ISV Resource Available?: YES shutdownFacility line-1 statusFacility line-1 ***** Status for Line-1-1-10 ***** Operational State: ENABLED Master Operational State: ENABLED Administrative State: LOCKED Master Administrative State: UNLOCKED Resource Status: OOS Resource Available?: NO

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

215

Equipment Provisioning

statusFacility statusFacility <facilityOID>

This command displays the operational and administrative status of a facility (device). Syntax <facilityOID> Description facilityOID the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See OID on page 30.

statusFacility line-1 ***** Status for Line-1-1-10 ***** Operational State: ENABLED Master Operational State: ENABLED Administrative State: LOCKED Master Administrative State: UNLOCKED Resource Status: OOS Resource Available?: NO

216

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Equipment Provisioning

modifyFacility modifyFacility <facilityOID>

Tip
Tip: use queryAttrDefs on page 85 to see the list of facility attributes and their valid values, and queryFacility on page 69 to see the current attribute values of a specific facility.

This command modifies one or more facility (device) attributes.

Syntax <facilityOID>

Description facilityOID the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See OID on page 30.

The following example changes the ringingType attribute of a Line.

queryFacility line-1 (OID: 4a18001) <3f25020> Line key.........................<> objectID....................Line-1-1-10 dependentOIDs...............<> containerOID................Card-1-1-10 ringingType.................0 (0) modifyFacility line-1 ringingType 1 <done> queryFacility line-1 (OID: 4a18001) <3f25020> Line key.........................<> objectID....................Line-1-1-10 dependentOIDs...............<> containerOID................Card-1-1-10 ringingType.................1 (1)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

217

Equipment Provisioning

The following example provisions a Primary and Secondary DNS on a Fast Ethernet Interface.

query fe-0 (OID: 4544000) <2a0dba0> FEIf key.........................<> objectID....................FE-0-1-5 dependentOIDs...............Array (25 items, zero items suppressed) -> [0] IntegerValue: IPTrunk-0-1-5 output trimmed to conserve space [24] IntegerValue: IPTrunk-24-1-5 primaryDns..................<> secondaryDns................<> inimumDnsTTL...............5 (5) modifyFacility fe-0 primaryDns 172.19.160.110 modifyFacility fe-0 secondaryDns 172.19.160.210 query fe-0 (OID: 4544000) <2a0dba0> FEIf key.........................<> objectID....................FE-0-1-5 dependentOIDs...............Array (25 items, zero items suppressed) -> [0] IntegerValue: IPTrunk-0-1-5 output trimmed to conserve space [24] IntegerValue: IPTrunk-24-1-5 primaryDns.................."172.19.160.110" secondaryDns................"172.19.160.210" minimumDnsTTL...............5 (5)

218

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Equipment Provisioning

modifyFacilityNestedObject modifyFacilityNestedObject <oid> <attrName> <subAttrName> <subAttrValue> [...<subAttrName> <subAttrValue>]

This command is used to modify nested object attributes for objects not yet under Generic CLI.
Syntax <facilityOID> <attrName> <subAttrrName> <subAttrValue> ... Description facilityOID the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See OID on page 30. Name of attribute within the object, typically this is itself another object. Name of nested attribute. New value for subAttrName subAttrName, subAttrValue may repeat to change additional attributes of attrName.

modifyFacilityNestedObject Card-17 qosBufferReservations rmac 5

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

219

Equipment Provisioning

NailedUpCircuit
A NailedUpCircuit creates a nailed-up path between two trunks or spans and initiates a TDM connection between them. Nailed-up trunks/spans allow the switch to have a dedicated, non-switched path from an input DS0 port on a T1 to an output DS0 port on a T1. The nailed-up path through the switch does the following:

Guarantees transmission Prevents information on the path from being subject to call processing Provides a clear-channel (no signaling data) 64 Kbps connection between two trunks Provides a DS0 cross-connect function within the switch, eliminating external equipment for separating switched and non-switched circuits

A NailedUpCircuit has the following attributes:

attribute key circuit_A value name of the nailed-up circuit The Object Identifier of the first trunk or a span. Trunks are nailed to trunks and spans are nailed to spans. See OID on page 30. The Object Identifier of the second trunk or a span. Trunks are nailed to trunks and spans are nailed to spans. See OID on page 30.

circuit_B

The Generic CLI is used for all NailedUpCircuit commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key circuit_A circuit_B

The modify command does not apply to the NailedUpCircuit object.

create NailedUpCircuit nailup-1 Trunk-4 query NailedUpCircuit nailup-1 <5ee11f0> NailedUpCircuit key........."nailup-1" circuit_A...Trunk-4-1-27 circuit_B...Trunk-8-1-27 destroy NailedUpCircuit nailup-1

Trunk-8

220

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Equipment Provisioning

setLineTimer setLineTimer <lineOid> <TimerName> <TimerValue>

This command sets the timers on a facility or lines on an RDT.

CAUTION
Use caution when setting timers on an RDTs facilities.

Prerequisites

Tip
Use this command to see a complete list of line timer names and attributes: queryAttrDefs SubscriberFacil ityTimers

RDT, see createRDT on page 351.

Syntax <lineOid <TimerName> <TimerValue Description Object Identifier of a line. Command will not work on Trunks or Spans. See OID on page 30. timer name. number of milliseconds

setLineTimer Line-1 ChargeDelay 2500

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

221

Equipment Provisioning

modifyProtocol modifyProtocol <LineOID> <Protocol> [signalingType]

This command sets the trunk protocol for a line.
Syntax <LineOID> Description Object Identifier of a line See OID on page 30. <Protocol> FXO See FXO on page 746. NONE no protocol on the line. [signalingType] Optional signaling type. Values are: GROUNDSTART LOOPSTART

modifyProtocol line-4 NONE LOOPSTART

222

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

FTRS

FTRS
The Flexible Translation, Routing and Signaling (FTRS) option alters the switchs call processing and customize digits. For more information on FTRS, see the T7000 Provisioning Guide. Provision FTRS by adding pretranslation tables, patterns and route, then adding the profile:
Step
1

Action Create the pretranslation table (see createPretranslation on page 223.) Add a pretranslation to the pretranslation table. (see addPretranslation on page 224.) Create a profile and associate a pretranslation table and/or a common route table with the profile (see FTRSProfile on page 231.). Assign the profile to a subscriber, trunk group, or the office parameters. (see Subscribers on page 530, Trunk Groups on page 233 or OfficeParams on page 382).

createPretranslation createPretranslation <PreTransKey>

This command creates a pretranslation table. A pretranslation table is a container that contains one or more patterns.
Syntax PreTransKey Description The name of the pretranslation table

createPretranslation PreTrans972 Dependent Commands

Adding an FTRS pretranslation, addPretranslation on page 224.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

223

FTRS

addPretranslation addPretranslation <PreTransKey> <Str1> [Str1...]

A pattern includes:

A set of incoming digits that trigger FTRS. When the switch matches a pattern to the incoming digits, it applies FTRS. Inbound actions: Inbound actions change the digits, CAC, ANI II information digits, or ANI. This is done after digit collection is complete, but before screening and routing. Outbound digits: Outbound digits change to the outpulsed digits, CAC, ANI II information digits, or ANI, after the route is defined. Optional common routes. A common route changes the following outbound actions after screening:

Route type specifies the route that the call uses including: Carrier route, Route List or Subscriber. Outbound digits change to the outpulsed digits, CAC, ANI II information digits, or ANI, after the route is defined

Syntax <PreTransKey> <Str1>

Description The name of the pretranslation table This field defines the string you attach to the pretranslations table. Strings include a pattern, an inbound action and an outbound action. Enclose the string in quotation marks.

224

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

FTRS

Syntax pattern

Description Pattern Use a pattern to set incoming digits that the switch matches, then applies FTRS inbound actions. Digits from Subscribers 1 to 30 digits including, * and #. Digits from Trunks 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. For CAS trunks, specify KP (Key Pulse signal) and ST (STart signal) values as follows: K KP B KP' (KP prime) C KP' '(KP double prime) A KP'' (KP triple prime) [ Any of the KP values (KP, KP, KP, or KP). S ST B ST' (ST prime) C ST'' (ST double prime) A ST''' (ST triple prime) ] Any of the ST values (ST, ST, ST, or ST). T Perform critical timing on a digit collection for a digit pattern. See CriticalDigitTimeout on page 391. After the critical timer expires, the switch declares the collected set of digits is complete and processes the call. T(n) The number of milliseconds the switch waits before indicating the collected set of digits is complete and processes the call, where n=0-30. Use T(n) after a specific digit string to lengthen or shorten the critical timer. For example, 0111504T2 shortens the critical timer to 2 seconds after collecting the specified digits. The default critical timer setting is 4 seconds, see OfficeParms Timers on page 391

Tip
When entering digit sequences, X matches any digit 0 - 9, and N matches any digit 2 - 9. To match a range of digits enter the first values of the range followed by a series of Xs. For example, to include all numbers from 9724800000 to 9724809999, type 972480XXXX.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

225

FTRS

Syntax InboundActions

Description Inbound Actions change the digits, CAC, ANI II information digits, or ANI, after digit collection is complete but before screening and routing. /REM n, n removes from position n, n number of digits. For example, /REM 1, 3, removes 3 digits from position 1 (the first digit). /INS n, "digit string" inserts a digit string (parameter n, n position, digit string). For example, /INS 1,972480 inserts 972480 before the digit string. /VAR n collects one or more digits from the end of the pattern. Used for international numbers after the 7th digit. For example, / VAR 3, collects up to 3 more digits. /ANI n stores n digits from position 1 as the Automatic Number Identifier. For example, /ANI 10, store the next 10 digits as the ANI. /CAC n stores n digits from position 1 as the Carrier Access Code. For example, /CAC 4, stores the first four digits as the CAC. x/ESC profile name when the digit x is received FTRS escapes to another profile. This is used for IAD subscribers in a business group that press a number to get an outside line. /CLGDB X specifies a list of ANIs to match in addition to the called number before actions are applied. The ANIs themselves are in pretranslation table X.

226

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

FTRS

Syntax OutboundActions

Description Outbound Actions (these actions are triggered by the =) = CARRIER to modify the routing of a call by PIC or CAC and modify the outbound digits of the call. This is for calls that are routed by carrier. = routeListname to modify the outbound digits by the route list name, using the following route list type: NANP, LNP, Carrier, Tandem Carrier, Tandem Trunk Group, Tandem ANI using the route list name. If the exact name is not found, the switch searches for a matching pattern in the order of the route lists above. = SUBSCRIBER to send the call to the subscriber, you use the REM or INS option with this type of routing. /CAC for the CARRIER option, uses the Carrier Access Code to route the call. For example = CARRIER /CAC, routes the call to the CAC. /CAC XXXX for the CARRIER option, reroutes the call using the CAC that you enter. For example: = CARRIER /CAC 0333, reroutes the call using the 0333 CAC. /PIC 1 or /PIC 2 for the CARRIER option, uses the subscribers PIC1 (interLATA) or PIC2 (intraLATA) to reroute the call. /REM n, n(performed before a route is selected) removes from position n, n number of digits. For example, /REM 1, 3, removes 3 digits from position 1 (the first digit). /INS n, "digit string (performed before a route is selected) inserts a digit string (parameter n, n - position, digit string). For example, /INS 1,972480 inserts 972480 at position 1. /ANI XXXXXXXXXX outpulses digits as the ANI.

NOTE: Effective with Release 6.0, the /ANI outbound action has been enhanced. See examples.

/II XX outpulses specified digits as Information Digits /PCAC XXXX outpulse a Pseudo Carrier Access Code instead of the CAC. /DEST name sends the call to a common route table using the name you enter. /LNP overrides an FTRS outbound route action if an LNP route exists /CT alters the call type for a given digit pattern prior to outpulsing, resulting in modification of the outpulsed called number, ST digit, and digit sequences dependent on the outgoing trunk group protocol (0-17) see the T7000 Provisioning Guide for more information.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

227

FTRS

Prerequisites
Create an FTRS profile, see FTRSProfile on page 231. Add an FTRS pretranslation table, see createPretranslation on page 223 Use the following models with the addPretranslation command:

addPretranslation <preTransKey> "pattern, inbound actions, = routeList routeListName, outbound actions" addPretranslation < preTransKey > "pattern, inbound actions, = CARRIER (/CAC, /CAC XXXX or /PIC) addPretranslation < preTransKey > "pattern, inbound actions, = SUBSCRIBER (/REM or /INS) addPretranslation < preTransKey > "pattern, inbound actions, /DEST destinationName

addPretranslation pretran972 "972480XXXX =SUBSCRIBER /REM 1,3" addPretranslation pretran972 "469480XXXX /REM 1, 3 /INS 1, 214 /DEST Local" addPretranslation pretran972 "972999XXXX /REM 4,3" addPretranslation pretran972 "972T /INS 4, 4801002" addPretranslation pretran972 "2144801031 /DEST Route1_214" addPretranslation pretran972 "8174801032 /REM 1,10 /INS 1, 2144801002 = CARRIER /CAC 0333" addPretranslation pretran972 "1002 /INS 1,214480 /DEST TenDigitIntraLata" addPretranslation pretran972 "469467X0XX = CARRIER /CAC 0333 /ANI 9724801001 /REM 1,6 /INS 1, 214480" addPretranslation pretran972 "469467000X = R2144801001 /REM 1, 10 /INS 1,2144801001" addPretranslation pretran972 "569480XXXX /REM 1, 3 /INS 1 214 = R2144801001"

The following examples demonstrate the new outbound ANI feature as of Release 6.0:
addPretranslation "972XXXXXXX = SUBSCRIBER /ANI 8174800000" # outpulse fixed ANI 8174800000 addPretranslation "XXXXXXXXXX = SUBSCRIBER /ANI 972XXXXXXX" # outpulse variable ANI 972XXXXXXX, only replace NPA

If Subscriber A (2144800000) calls 8174800000, the outpulse ANI will be 9724800000 using FTRS if Subscriber B (2144800001) calls 8174800000, the outpulse ANI will be 9724800001 using FTRS if Subscriber A or B calls 9724800000, the outpulse ANI will be 8174800000.

228

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

FTRS

modifyPretranslation modifyPretranslation <PreTransKey> <PtnStr>

This command changes the digit pattern string on a pretranslation table.
Syntax <PreTransKey> <PtnStr> Description The name of the pretranslation table. A digit pattern string in the pretranslation table. A pattern is the set of incoming digits that the switch matches.

Prerequisites
Create an FTRS profile, see FTRSProfile on page 231. Add an FTRS pretranslation table, see createPretranslation on page 223. Add a pretranslation to the pretranslation table, see addPretranslation on page 224.

modifyPretranslation preTran972 972T /INS 4, 4801002 removePretranslation removePretranslation <PreTransKey> <lineNum>

This command removes a line from a pretranslation.
Syntax <PreTransKey> <lineNum> Description The name of the pretranslation table The line number that you want to remove. Use queryPretranslation on page 120 to find the line number of an action.

Prerequisites
Create an FTRS profile, see FTRSProfile on page 231. Add an FTRS pretranslation table, see createPretranslation on page 223. Add an FTRS pretranslation, see addPretranslation on page 224.
removePretranslation PreTrans972 1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

229

FTRS

deletePretranslation deletePretranslation <PreTransKey>

This command deletes a pretranslation table.
Syntax PreTransKey Description The name of the pretranslation table

Prerequisites
Create an FTRS profile, see FTRSProfile on page 231. Create an FTRS pretranslation table, see addPretranslation on page 224. deletePretranslation PreTrans972

230

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

FTRS

FTRSProfile
An FTRSProfile is a container for a rule pattern that applies to a specific subscriber, originating trunk group, or the entire office. A rule pattern is a pretranslation table and an optional common route table. After you build a profile, assign it to a subscriber, trunk group, or the office parameters. An FTRSProfile object has the following attributes:
Attribute key PretransKey RouteKey Description The name of the FTRS profile Optional name of the pretranslation table associated with the profile. Optional name of route table associated with the profile. Note: This is the name defined by using the /DEST syntax for the pretranslation. See createPretranslation on page 223.

The Generic CLI is used for all FTRSProfile commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

PretransKey RouteKey

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

Prerequisites

PretransKey RouteKey

Create the pretranslation table, see createPretranslation on page 223.

NOTE: If a route list is provisioned for the modified FTRS digit string, a common route is not needed.

createPretranslation res_DP1 addPretranslation res_DP1 "0T" create FTRSProfile IAD_Basic_Res res_DP1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Provisioning

231

FTRS

Dependent Commands
Add the profile to a subscriber, trunk group or the office parameters, see Subscribers on page 530,Trunk Groups on page 233 and OfficeParams on page 382.

232

Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Trunk Groups
Tip
The trunk group name is used during CDR conversion. The AMA/EMI record is populated with the last four characters. Taqua recommends the trunk group names have 4 digit trunk group numbers. For example: CAS Trunk Groups start from 0000 PRI Trunk Groups start from 1000 ISUP Trunk Groups start from 2000 Hunt Groups start from 3000 IP Trunk Groups start from 4000 MGCP Trunk Groups start from 5000.

A trunk is a communication line between two switches. For example, a trunk could connect the T7000 to a Private Branch Exchange (PBX), or to another T7000.Trunk groups bundle one or more trunks that perform a similar function. The function is defined by the trunk group. Customer demand or call traffic determines when and where trunk groups are deployed. The switch supports the following types of trunk groups:

CAS, see CAS Trunk Groups on page 235 Clear Channel, see Clear Channel Trunk Groups on page 252 Interface Groups, Interface Groups on page 258 IP, see IP Trunk Groups on page 307 MGCP, see MGCP Trunk Group on page 359 Multi-Line Hunt Group, see Hunt Groups on page 273 PRI, see PRI Trunk Groups on page 286 SS7, see SS7 Trunk Groups on page 324

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

233

Trunk Groups

The tandemRoutingType Trunk Group attribute

The tandemRoutingType attribute controls the type of tandem routing for the trunk group. The switch typically routes calls on the dialed number, the LRN, or the subscribers carrier when making a toll call. However, the switch has additional routing methods for other switching applications. The switch can act as:

End Office (EO) routes calls to an Access Tandem (AT) with special routing information, for example: a Carrier Identification code and a route code. Access Tandem (AT) routes calls to Inter-exchange Carriers (ICs) using the incoming Carrier Identification code/route code, the incoming trunk group, or ANI from the EO.

NOTE: The software does not currently support Tandem Screening (SCP dips for N00 routing, 8xx service, LNP, and AIN triggers). The T7000 performs LNP screening and routing if the tandem routing type is set to NO_ROUTING and an LRN is received. T7000 performs an SCP dip and routing (as if the call were a subscriber origination) if an LRN is not received, but the prefix is set to ported. For all other tandem routing types, the T7000 routes based on called number.

Attribute <tandemRoutingType>

Values Tandem Routing Type attribute NONE Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscribers carrier, or the LNP code CARRIER Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists TRUNKGROUP Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists ANI Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

Dependent Commands
If you selected the CARRIER tandem routing type, provision the Carrier Identification code and route codes for each carrier, see Carriers on page 196. If you selecting the TRUNKGROUP or AIN routing type, ensure the trunk protocol matches the protocol on the other end, see modifyProtocol on page 222. Provision tandem route lists and add routes, see Route Lists on page 514.

234

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

CAS Trunk Groups

Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) is a form of in-band circuit state signaling. CAS indicates circuit state by repetitively sending one or more bits of signaling status associated with a specific circuit. Trunks in CAS trunk groups are voice trunks and are DS0 full duplex circuits. CAS trunk groups are directional trunk groups that connect a switch to other switches or to subscribers. Use a CAS trunk group for any in-band signaling and for DID (Direct Inbound Dialed) numbers. Create CAS trunk groups to connect to any switch that does not have SS7 capability. A CAS Trunk Group has the following attributes
Attribute key Description trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semi-colon (;), nor can it consist of either the word ALL or the word all facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the trunk group. See Adding Facilities to a CAS Trunk Group on page 251, and Removing Facilities from a CAS Trunk Group on page 251. The timers for this trunk group. See CAS Trunk Group Timers on page 244. The options for this trunk group. See CAS Trunk Group Options on page 247. FIRST_AVAILABLE always select the first trunk available ROUND_ROBIN (default) sequentially rotate the use of trunks sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls TRUE allow operator assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow operator assisted calls TRUE allow directory assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow directory assisted calls

timers options selectionMethod

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

235

Trunk Groups

Attribute tandemRoutingType

Description Sets the type of routing for calls received on the trunk group. For a discussion of this attribute, see The tandemRoutingType Trunk Group attribute on page 234. NO_ROUTING Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscribers carrier, or the LNP code. Note: when custom tandem TG outpulsing is required, choose this option for the inbound tandem TG, and set the tandemCustomReplacement attribute to YES. CARRIER_ROUTING (default) Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists TRUNKGROUP_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists ANI_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

defaultDN

The default directory number when the trunk group connects to a PBX that needs to have default Primary IntraLATA or InterLATA Carrier (PIC). Also, add a default subscriber with this number to set the specific IntraLATA or InterLATA Carrier to bill the number correctly. see Subscribers on page 530 Length: 10

CAUTION
Only use a defaultDN for CAS trunk groups with a DIDMF or a DIDDTMF protocol.

NOTE: If assigned, the defaultDN becomes the default ANI for 911 calls made without a 10 digit ANI. See E911DefaultANI on page 242 restrictions The restrictions on this trunk group. See CAS Trunk Group Restrictions on page 250.

236

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute defaultNPA

Description The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7-digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see Prefixes on page 403. Length: 3

NOTE: For DIDMF or DIDDTMF CAS trunks, the homeNPA of the defaultDN is added to the 7-digits, if available. If a defaultDN is not available, then the defaultNPA is used. For CAS trunks using FXO protocol, the homeNPA of the subscriber is added on the 7-digits replaceDestinationDigits TRUE allow the use of replacement destination digits (called number) on the trunk group. The switch replaces part or all of the destination digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see Subscribers on page 530, Destination Digit Replacement on page 346, and replacementMode on page 405. FALSE do not replace Destination Digits and send the dialed digits. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not replace Destination Digits in the outgoing signaling messages if the called DN has a non-T7000 LRN associated with it replaceCarrier This attribute controls the use of a PCAC on the trunk

group.
TRUE allow the use of PCAC on the trunk group. The switch replaces the CAC depending on how the prefix or carrier is provisioned. See Prefixes on page 403, replacementMode on page 405, and Carriers on page 196. FALSE do not use a PCAC on the trunk group and send the CAC. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use a PCAC if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CAC.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

237

Trunk Groups

Attribute replaceAniDigits

Description This attribute controls the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group. TRUE allow the use of a Pseudo ANI (PANI) on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI (calling number) depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see Subscribers on page 530. FALSE do not use a PANI on the trunk group and send the ANI. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use a PANI if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI.

replaceInfoDigits

TRUE allow the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI II digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned,See Subscribers on page 530. FALSE do not use PANI II digits on the trunk group and send the ANI II digits on the facility. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use PANI II digits if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI II digits on the facility

ftrsProfile

The profile assigned to the incoming trunk group. This profile determines how the switch manipulates digits and routing. See FTRS on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a FXO trunk group with a profile, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide. replaceCSI

This controls the use of the Carrier Selection Information parameter in outgoing messages on the trunk group.
TRUE allow the use of a PCSI on the trunk group. The switch replaces the outpulse of the CSI parameter depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See Subscribers on page 530 FALSE do not send a PCSI on the trunk group and send the CSI. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use PCSI if the called number has an non- T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CSI.

238

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute localTermination

Description

The localTermination attribute controls if incoming trunk group allows for local terminations or not. If it does not allow for local terminations then use the trunk group in a tandem routing application. If you allow local terminations in a tandem routing trunk group, then if the DN terminates on the switch the calls for that DN will not be tandemed out of the switch.
ALLOW (default) allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch. NOT_ALLOWED only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

tandemDefaultRoutingType

The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned: USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list. USE_NANP_CARRIER Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list. USE_CARRIER_ONLY Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. USE_NANP_ONLY Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions

The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs). An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see Screen Lists on page 415 and Prefixes on page 403.

denyAniList

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

239

Trunk Groups

Attribute direction

Description ONE_WAY_IN One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions. ONE_WAY_OUT One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

BI_DIRECTIONAL Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call tandemCustomReplacement Used to outpulse 7 digits for tandem calls. NO (default) no special outpulsing is performed. YES outpulse 7 digits for non-ported subscribers. See 7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing on page 409

240

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute trunkProtocol One of the following:

Description

DIDMF See DIDMF on page 747. DIDDTMF See DIDDTMF on page 747. FGC See FGC on page 745. FGCB2 See FGCB2 on page 745. FGCOF See FGCOF on page 745. FGCOS See FGCOS on page 745. FGDAT See FGDAT on page 746. FGDATOS See FGDATOS on page 746. FGCVZOS See FGCVZOS on page 745. FGD (default) See FGD on page 745. FGDEOIC See FGDEOIC on page 746. FGDICEO See FGDICEO on page 746. FGDEOAT See FGDEOAT on page 746. FGDATEO See FGDATEO on page 746. DIDMF See DIDMF on page 747. DIDDTMF See DIDDTMF on page 747. WSMF2WAY See WSMF2WAY on page 747. FGDINC See FGDINC on page 746. FXO See FXO on page 746. WSMF2WAY See WSMF2WAY on page 747. signalingType This parameter is optional for all protocols except FXO and FXS. For these protocols, the signaling type must be either LOOPSTART or GROUNDSTART. For all other protocols, the signalingType defaults to EM numDestDigits the number of digits outpulsed. DEFAULT sets the number of destination digits to be outpulsed to ten 7 sets the number of destination digits to be outpulsed to seven 10 sets the number of destination digits to be outpulsed to ten numAniDigits the number of ANI digits outpulsed. DEFAULT sets the number of ANI digits to be outpulsed to ten 7 sets the number of ANI digits to be outpulsed to seven 10 sets the number of ANI digits to be outpulsed to ten

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

241

Trunk Groups

Attribute numInfoDigits

Description the number of informational digits OUTPULSED. DEFAULT sets the number of Information digits to be outpulsed to two 1 sets the number of Information digits to be outpulsed to one 2 sets the number of Information digits to be outpulsed to two

outPulseProfileKey E911DefaultANI

Used with the FGCOF protocol to customize outpulsing sequences. See See OutPulseProfile on page 397 This attribute is used to specify a 10 digit ANI when a 911 call is made and a 10 digit ANI is not received, and a defaultDN is not assigned to the Trunk Group.

The Generic CLI is used for CAS Trunk Group commands, see Using Generic CLI
Commands on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

trunkProtolcol signalingType

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

242

timers options selectionMethod sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls tandemRoutingType defaultDN restrictions defaultNPA replaceDestinationDigits replaceCarrier replaceAniDigits replaceInfoDigits ftrsProfile replaceCSI localTermination

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

tandemDefaultRoutingType denyAniList direction trunkProtocol signalingType numDestDigits numAniDigits numInfoDigits outPulseProfileKey

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

facilities

See Adding Facilities to a CAS Trunk Group on page 251, and Removing Facilities from a CAS Trunk Group on page 251.

create CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano modify CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano sendOAssistCalls FALSE query CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano destroy CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

243

Trunk Groups

CAS Trunk Group Timers

A CAS Trunk Group Timer object contains the timers that control the behavior of a CAS Trunk Group. The CAS timers default settings meet the industry standard. CAS Trunk Group Timers have the following attributes
Timer GuardTime Description The time after the release of a circuit that prevents a new connection signal before the other end is released. Range: 700 - 1,200 ms Default: 1,200 ms ChargeDelay The amount of time a terminating trunk waits before generating answer supervision toward the originator. Range: 0 - 5,000 ms Default: 0 ms TimedDisconnectTime TimedDisconnectTime The amount of time a called party can go back onHook and remain onHook before switch declares disconnect. Also called calling party control, which allows a subscriber to answer a call and put the telephone onHook for a short period of time. 2.000 - 10,000 ms Default: 5,000 ms ForwardDisconnectTime The amount of time the calling party can go back onHook and remain onHook before the switch declares disconnect. 200 - 800 ms Default: 200 ms MinFlashHookTime Sets the lower boundary for a flash hook of which a shorter flash hook is ignored. Flash hook is the button that hangs up the telephone that is also called a switch hook. For example, Call Waiting or Three-Way Calling requires using flash hook. Set this time for 70 ms in a Basic 911 configuration. See 911 over CAS on page 136. Default: 300 ms FlashInterval Sets the limit for a flash hook. The maximum time for a flash hook is the MinFlashHookTime plus the FlashInterval. (TimedDisconnectTime). Set this time for 60 ms in a Basic 911 configuration. See 911 over CAS on page 136. Default: 900 ms

244

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Timer

Description

NOTE: A wink is used to signal acknowledge of a facility seizure and readiness to accept digits MinWinkDuration MinWinkDuration: the minimum duration which will qualify a brief incoming off hook signal as a wink. Default: 100 ms MaxWinkDuration MaxWinkDuration: the maximum duration which will be allowed when attempting to qualify an incoming off hook signal as a wink. If this duration is exceeded, the off hook will be declared as a sustained off hook. This may be interpreted by an E&M protocol as either an origination or an answer signal. Default: 350 ms WinkDuration WinkDuration is the duration of a wink signal that the T7000 will transmit outbound for E&M protocols. Default: 100 ms FlashDuration Limit for the duration that the switch sends a flash signal. Set this time for 100 ms in a Basic 911 configuration. See 911 over CAS on page 136. Default: 900 ms

CAUTION
Changing any of OffHook or OnHook T1 driver timers could adversely effect subscribers with dial pulse, see options on page 543 OffHookDigMax The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Default: 70 ms OffHookDigMin The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Default: 0 ms OnHookDigMax The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Default: 70 ms OnHookDigMin The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Default: 0 ms TerminatorDisconnectDelay The time for the terminating telephone to receive dial tone after the originating telephone hangs up. Range: 1,500 - 10,000 ms Default: 2,000

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

245

Trunk Groups

Timer LCFO_Duration

Description This is the duration of the Loop Current Feed Open (LCFO) signal. This forward disconnect signaling is required by some answering machines and voice mail systems to be longer than normal. 150 - 7,500 ms Default: 700

modify CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano timers LCFO_Duration 900

246

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

CAS Trunk Group Options

A CAS Trunk Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a CAS Trunk Group. CAS Trunk Group Options have the following attributes:
Attribute glareControl Description Glare control identifies the trunks on which the switch processes seizure when there is glare and those from which the switch backs down. Coordinate these values with the other side of the trunk group, for example, if the switch is all then the other end is none. ODD To process seizure on the odd trunks in the trunk group and back down on the even trunks EVEN To process seizure on the even trunks in the trunk group and back down on the odd trunks ALL To process seizure of all the trunks in the trunk group NONE To back down on all of the trunks in the trunk group outpulseAsDialed NOTE: Only available for DIDMF and DIDDTMF protocols

Outpulse as Dialed allows a switch acting as a local End Office (EO) to provide long distance service without having an InterLATA carrier provisioned. The local EO outpulses the dialed digits to the local tandem office. Then, the local tandem office, not the local EO, performs screening and translation on the dialed digits. For more information, see The T7000 Provisioning Guide. TRUE routes by and outpulses the exact digits the subscriber dials FALSE the switch translates the digits, chooses a call type and routes based on the call type (local, extended, intraLATA, interLATA, worldZone1, International, etc.). numOfDIDDigits Sets the number of direct inward dialing digits allowed (0-10) for trunk groups with DIDMF or DIDDTMF protocols. Range: 1 - 30 Default: 10

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

247

Trunk Groups

Attribute networkServices

Description Set BLV/BLI only on trunk groups coming from an operator station. You need one trunk group for each service. Allow for one of the following operator services: NONE (Default) Neither BLV or BLI. BLV Busy Line Verification allows an external operator to verify if a subscriber line is busy. An operator calling over a BLV trunk receives a busy signal if the line is busy or a ringback if the line is idle. BLI Busy Line Interrupt allows an external operator to interrupt a busy line. An operator calling over a BLI trunk interrupts the busy subscriber who can either drop the existing conversation and accept the operator call or continue with the existing conversation.

skipMinDigitsRestriction

TRUE If a subscriber enters less than the minimum number of digits required by a protocol, the switch collects the digits entered and tries to process the call. Use TRUE if the trunk group has an FTRS profile, which adds digits to meet the requirements. FALSE If a subscriber enters less than the minimum number of digits required by the protocol, the call does not complete.

fgc911MakeFirstSecond

ON changes the FGCVZOS protocol for 911 calls, outpulsing the second stage for the first stage and nothing for the second stage OFF no change to the outpulsing For DIDDTMF and DIDMF trunk groups: USE_ANI If ANI is received T7000 outpulses *ANI** If ANI not received and home NPA is stored with trunk group T7000 outpulses *HNPA** If ANI is not received and home NPA is not stored with trunk group T7000 outpulses *** USE_DNIS T7000 outpulses **DNIS* USE_BOTH If ANI is received and home NPA is stored with trunk group T7000 outpulses *ANI*DNIS* If ANI not received and home NPA is stored with trunk group T7000 outpulses *HNPA*DNIS* If ANI not received and home NPA is not stored with trunk group T7000 outpulses **DNIS* NO (default)

useANIDNIS

248

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute routeOnRcvdCarrier

Description InbCarrier_OutbCarrier route on the Incoming Carrier if available, otherwise, route on the Outbound Carrier. InbCarrier_only route on the Incoming Carrier only. OutbCarrier_InbCarrier (default) route on the Outbound Carrier, if available, otherwise, route on the Incoming Carrier. OutbCarrier_only route on the Outbound Carrier only.

NOTE: The incoming carrier is the outpulsed carrier value received on CAS trunk groups diddtmfProvideDialtoneAf Enables the T7000 to provide dial tone directly after sending a terWink wink. Two situations where this could be useful: 1. When the T7000 is connected to a PBX: here, a PBX subscriber could dial 9 for an outside line. After the PBX seizes an E&M circuit and the T7000 acks the seizure with the standard wink supervision, the T7000 would then provide dial tone and collect digits. From the point of view of the PBX subscriber, it would seem as though he were connected directly to the T7000. 2. When the T7000 is connected to an IVR system, the IVR can redirect calls back out to the network. Contact Taqua Technical support for configuration details. The feature is only for DTMF E&M, not MF E&M. Most users do not have an MF capable phone. ON The switch provides dial tone after a wink. OFF (default) The switch does nothing special after a wink.
modify CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano options skipMinDigitsRestriction TRUE modify CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano options glareControl ODD

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

249

Trunk Groups

CAS Trunk Group Restrictions

CAS Trunk Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. A CAS Trunk Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section. CAS Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes
Attribute NO_OSSTATION NO_OSDIALED NO_DA OS_ONLY DA_ONLY NO_INTRALATA NO_INTERLATA NO_OS_INTRALATA NO_OS_INTERLATA NO_DA_INTRALATA NO_DA_INTERLATA NO_INTERNATIONAL NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL NO_INBOUND_PAYSTATI ON Description Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls. Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls. Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group. Restrict all calls except operator services calls. Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List. Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls. Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2). Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1). Restrict OS intraLATA calls. Restrict OS interLATA calls. Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2). Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1). Restrict international calls. Restrict OS international calls. Does not allow a non-subscriber-initiated call if the information digit/OLI is 7, 29 or 70.

NO_INBOUND_WITHOUT_ Does not allow calls that do not include the ANI. ANI

The CAS Trunk Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

modify modify

1 turns the restriction on 0 turns the restriction off.

CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano restrictions NO_DA 1 CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano restrictions OS_ONLY 0

250

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Adding Facilities to a CAS Trunk Group insertInto CASTrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey> <subvalue>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a trunk to a CAS Trunk Groups facilities list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

CAS Trunk Group name

This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility.

<subkey>

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert a facility at the start of the facilities list. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of the facilities list.

<subvalue>

This attribute specifies which trunk you want to add to the Trunk Group.

The following command adds trunk 0 on the local card to CAS Trunk Group SWBELL-Plano:
insertInto CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano facilities 1 TGFacility trunk-0

Removing Facilities from a CAS Trunk Group deleteFrom CASTrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a trunk to a CAS Trunk Groups facilities list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
NOTE: You must first lock the Trunk before you can remove it from the Trunk Group.

Syntax <key>

Description

CAS Trunk Group name

This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

<subkey>

The following example locks trunk 0 on the local card and then removes it from CAS Trunk Group SWBELL-Plano:

lock trunk-0 deleteFrom CASTrunkGroup

SWBELL-Plano facilities 1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

251

Trunk Groups

Clear Channel Trunk Groups

Clear Channel Trunk Groups have no attributes, such as signaling type or protocol. Clear Channel Trunk Groups do have features such as the following:

error-checking to ensure the trunks added are not in another trunk group different modes of route selection (first available, round robin) automatic deletion of routes upon trunk group deletion

A clear channel trunk group has the following attributes

Attribute key Description trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semi-colon (;), nor can it consist of either the word ALL or the word all facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the trunk group. See Adding Facilities to a Clear ChannelTrunk Group on page 257, and Removing Facilities from a Clear ChannelTrunk Group on page 257. FIRST_AVAILABLE always select the first trunk available ROUND_ROBIN (default) sequentially rotate the use of trunks defaultNPA The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see Prefixes on page 403. Length: 3 replaceDestinationDigit TRUE allow the use of replacement destination digits s (called number) on the trunk group. The switch replaces part or all of the destination digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See Subscribers on page 530, Destination Digit Replacement on page 346, and replacementMode on page 405. FALSE do not replace Destination Digits and send the dialed digits. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not replace Destination Digits in the outgoing signaling messages if the called DN has a nonT7000 LRN associated with it

selectionMethod

252

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute replaceCarrier

Description This attribute controls the use of a PCAC on the trunk

group.
TRUE allow the use of PCAC on the trunk group. The switch replaces the CAC depending on how the prefix or carrier is provisioned. See Prefixes on page 403, replacementMode on page 405, and Carriers on page 196. FALSE do not use a PCAC on the trunk group and send the CAC. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use a PCAC if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CAC. replaceAniDigits

This attribute controls the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group.
TRUE allow the use of a Pseudo ANI (PANI) on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI (calling number) depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see Subscribers on page 530. FALSE do not use a PANI on the trunk group and send the ANI. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use a PANI if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI.

replaceInfoDigits

TRUE allow the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI II digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned,See Subscribers on page 530. FALSE do not use PANI II digits on the trunk group and send the ANI II digits on the facility. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use PANI II digits if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI II digits on the facility

ftrsProfile

The profile assigned to the incoming trunk group. This profile determines how the switch manipulates digits and routing. See FTRS on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a FXO trunk group with a profile, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

253

Trunk Groups

Attribute replaceCSI

Description

This controls the use of the Carrier Selection Information parameter in outgoing messages on the trunk group.
TRUE allow the use of a PCSI on the trunk group. The switch replaces the outpulse of the CSI parameter depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see Subscribers on page 530 FALSE do not send a PCSI on the trunk group and send the CSI. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use PCSI if the called number has an non- T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CSI.

localTermination

The localTermination attribute controls if incoming trunk group allows for local terminations or not. If it does not allow for local terminations then use the trunk group in a tandem routing application. If you allow local terminations in a tandem routing trunk group, then if the DN terminates on the switch the calls for that DN will not be tandemed out of the switch.
ALLOW (default) allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch. NOT_ALLOWED only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

tandemDefaultRouting Type

The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned: USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list. USE_NANP_CARRIER Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list. USE_CARRIER_ONLY Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. USE_NANP_ONLY Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions

The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs). An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see Screen Lists on page 415 and Prefixes on page 403.

denyAniList

254

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute direction

Description ONE_WAY_IN One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions. ONE_WAY_OUT One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

BI_DIRECTIONAL Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call

All Clear Channel Trunk Group commands use the Generic CLI, see Using Generic
CLI Commands on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

key

There are no optional parameters for the create command. The modify command applies to the following attributes:

selectionMethod defaultNPA replaceDestinationDigits replaceCarrier replaceAniDigits replaceInfoDigits ftrsProfile replaceCSI localTermination tandemDefaultRoutingType denyAniList direction

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

255

Trunk Groups

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

facilities

See Adding Facilities to a Clear ChannelTrunk Group on page 257, and Removing Facilities from a Clear ChannelTrunk Group on page 257.

create CLRTrunkGroup SWB2 modify CLRTrunkGroup SWB2 direction ONE_WAY_IN query CLRTrunkGroup SWB2 destroy CLRTrunkGroup SWB2

256

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Adding Facilities to a Clear ChannelTrunk Group insertInto CLRTrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey> TGFacility <subvalue>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a trunk to a Clear Channel Trunk Groups facilities list. See theinsertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

Clear Channel Trunk Group name

This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility.

<subkey>

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert a facility at the start of the facilities list. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of the facilities list.

<subvalue>

This attribute specifies which trunk you want to add to the Trunk Group.

The following command adds trunk 0 on the local card to Clear Channel Trunk Group SWB2:
insertInto CLRTrunkGroup SWB2 facilities 1 TGFacility trunk-0

Removing Facilities from a Clear ChannelTrunk Group deleteFrom CLRTrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a trunk to a Clear Channel Trunk Groups facilities list. See thedeleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
NOTE: You must first lock the Trunk before you can remove it from the Trunk Group.

Syntax <key>

Description

Clear Channel Trunk Group name

This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

<subkey>

The following example locks trunk 0 on the local card and then removes it from Clear Channel Trunk Group SWB2:

lock trunk-0 deleteFrom CLRTrunkGroup

SWB2 facilities 1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

257

Trunk Groups

Interface Groups Tip

See the T7000 Provisioning Guide for an in-depth discussion of Interface Groups.

Use an Interface Group to connect the switch to an RDT using GR-303. An Interface Group consists of at least two, and as many as 28 T1 spans. These spans connect the T7000 to an RDT. The primary T1 span carries the primary Embedded Operations Channel (EOC) and the Timeslot Management Channel (TMC). The secondary T1 span contains carries the secondary EOC and TMC, which provide redundancy when the primary EOC and TMC are unusable. The remaining trunks in the spans are used to carry voice traffic between the switch and the RDT. Additional spans may be added to the Interface Group to provide even more capacity. A Interface Group has the following attributes.
Attribute key Description trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semicolon (;), nor can it consist of either the word ALL or the word all facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the trunk group. See Adding Facilities to an Interface Group on page 272, and Removing Facilities from an Interface Group on page 272. The timers for this trunk group. See Interface Group Timers on page 263. The options for this trunk group. See Interface Group Options on page 269. FIRST_AVAILABLE always select the first trunk available ROUND_ROBIN (default) sequentially rotate the use of trunks sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls TRUE allow operator assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow operator assisted calls TRUE allow directory assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow directory assisted calls

timers options selectionMethod

258

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute tandemRoutingType

Description Sets the type of routing for calls received on the trunk group. For a discussion of this attribute, see The tandemRoutingType Trunk Group attribute on page 234. NO_ROUTING (default) Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscribers carrier, or the LNP code CARRIER_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists TRUNKGROUP_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists ANI_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

restrictions defaultNPA

The restrictions on this trunk group. See Interface Group Restrictions on page 271. The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7-digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see Prefixes on page 403. Length: 3 ALLOW (default) allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch. NOT_ALLOWED only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

localTermination

tandemDefaultRoutingType

The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned: USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list. USE_NANP_CARRIER Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list. USE_CARRIER_ONLY Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. USE_NANP_ONLY Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions

The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs).

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

259

Trunk Groups

Attribute denyAniList

Description An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see Screen Lists on page 415, and Prefixes on page 403. ONE_WAY_IN One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions. ONE_WAY_OUT One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions. NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch. BI_DIRECTIONAL Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call

direction

vendor

the company that manufactured the RDT connected to this trunk group. Values are: If you are connecting to a Nortel RDT, you must enter "nortel" (without the quotes") If you are connecting to a Tollbridge RDT, you must enter "tollbridge" (without the quotes")

location primarySpanOID

the location of the RDT. This is an informational field, and does not affect the operation of the switch Object ID of the Primary T1 Span for this Interface Group. This span is used for the Primary Embedded Operations Channel (EOC), EOC Path Protection Switch (PPS), Timeslot Management Channel (TMC), and the TMC PPS. See OID on page 30. NOTE: The switch automatically assigns the 12th timeslot (trunk 11) to the EOC and the 24th timeslot to the TMC (trunk

primarySpanLogicalID

Logical value the Primary T1 Span for this Interface Group. Range: 1 - 28.

260

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute secondarySpanOID

Description Object identifier of the span the EOC backup and TMC backup use after PPS has occurred. See OID on page 30. The switch automatically assigns the 12th timeslot (trunk11) to the EOC and the 24th timeslot to the TMC (trunk23).

secondarySpanLogicalID primaryEOCTrunk secondaryEOCTrunk primaryTMCTrunk secondaryTMCTrunk isdnMsgTrace

Logical value the Secondary T1 Span for this Interface Group. Range: 1 - 28. Shows the OID, service state and path status of the Primary EOC. Shows the OID, service state and path status of the Secondary EOC. Shows the OID, service state and path status of the Primary TMC. Shows the OID, service state and path status of the Secondary TMC. This debug attribute controls how the switch shows ISDN Call Establishment, Call Clearing, Maintenance and Miscellaneous messages. The messages are displayed when running a CLI session on the card that has the active TMC. Values are: MSG_TRACE_NONE (default) The message trace for this trunk group is off. MSG_ONLY Shows the ISDN messages MSG_WITH_INBOUND_DUMP Shows ISDN messages and a dump of inbound IEs. MSG_WITH_OUTBOUND_DUMP Shows ISDN messages and a dump of outbound IEs. MSG_WITH_BOTH_DUMP Shows ISDN messages and a dump of both inbound and outbound IEs.

CAUTION
Contact Taqua TAC Support before using this option. flowThroughProvisioning NO_EOC the RDT does not support messaging over the EOC interface NO the RDT supports messaging over the EOC interface, but does not allow flow-through provisioning YES the RDT allows for flow-through provisioning using the OM GUI or T7000 CLI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

261

Trunk Groups

The Generic CLI is used for all Interface Group commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key vendor location primarySpanOID primarySpanLogicalID secondarySpanOID secondarySpanLogicalID

The optional parameters for the create command are:

flowThroughProvisioning

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

timers options selectionMethod sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls tandemRoutingType restrictions defaultNPA localTermination tandemDefaultRoutingType denyAniList direction isdnMsgTrace flowThroughProvisioning

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

facilities

See Adding Facilities to an Interface Group on page 272, and See Removing Facilities from an Interface Group on page 272.
create InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 Richardson AFC span-0-2 1 span-1-3 2 1 modify InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 sendOAssistCalls FALSE query InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 timers destroy InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1

262

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Interface Group Timers

An Interface Group contains the following timers:
Timer GuardTime Description The time after the release of a circuit to ensure that a minimum time interval is used between calls. Network side timer. Default: 1,200 ms ChargeDelay The amount of time a terminating trunk waits before generating answer supervision toward the originator. Network side timer. Default: 0 TimedDisconnectTime The amount of time a called party can go back onHook and remain onHook before switch declares disconnect. Also called calling party control, which allows a subscriber to answer a call and put the telephone onHook for a short period of time. Range: 2,000 - 10,000 ms Default: 5,000 ForwardDisconnectTime The amount of time the calling party can go back onHook and remain onHook before the switch declares disconnect. Range: 150 - 500 ms Default: 200 RingCadenceOnTime RingCadenceOffTime MinFlashHookTime The period that a telephone rings. Default: 2,000 The period between rings. Default: 4,000 ms Sets the lower boundary for a flash hook of which a shorter flash hook is ignored. Flash hook is the button that hangs up the telephone that is also called a switch hook. For example, Call Waiting or Three-Way Calling requires using flash hook. Default: 300 ms FlashInterval Sets the limit for a flash hook. The maximum time for a flash hook is the MinFlashHookTime plus the FlashInterval. (TimedDisconnectTime). Default: 900 ms MinWinkDuration MinWinkDuration is the minimum duration which will qualify a brief incoming off hook signal as a wink. Default: 100 ms

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

263

Trunk Groups

Timer MaxWinkDuration

Description MaxWinkDuration is the maximum duration which will be allowed when attempting to qualify an incoming off hook signal as a wink. If this duration is exceeded, the off hook will be declared as a sustained off hook. This may be interpreted by an E&M protocol as either an origination or an answer signal.

NOTE: A wink is used to signal acknowledgment of a facility seizure and readiness Default: 350 ms to accept digits. WinkDuration

WinkDuration is the duration of a wink signal that the T7000 will transmit outbound for E&M protocols Default: 200 ms Limit for the duration that the switch sends a flash signal. Default: 900 ms The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Changing this T1 driver timer could adversely effect subscribers with dial pulse, see options on page 543. Default: 70 ms The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Changing this T1 driver timer could adversely effect subscribers with dial pulse, see options on page 543. Default: 0 ms. The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Changing this T1 driver timer could adversely effect subscribers with dial pulse, see options on page 543. Default: 70 ms The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Changing this T1 driver timer could adversely effect subscribers with dial pulse, see options on page 543. Default: 0 ms. The time for the terminating telephone to receive dial tone after the originating telephone hangs up. Range: 1,500 - 10,000 ms Default: 2,000 ms

FlashDuration OffHookDigMax

OffHookDigMin

OnHookDigMax

OnHookDigMin

TerminatorDisconnectDelay

LCFO_Duration

This is the duration of the Loop Current Feed Open (LCFO) signal. This forward disconnect signaling is required by some answering machines and voice mail systems to be longer than normal. Range: 150 - 7,500 ms Default: 700 ms

264

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Timer T301

Description The time between receiving an ALERT message and receiving a CONNECT message. Clears the call when the timer expires, not used with a network supervision call control. Network side timer. Default: 180,000 ms The time between sending SETUP and receiving a CONNECT from the IDT. Sends a SETUP message when the timer expires. Network side timer. Default: 4,000 ms

T303

T305

The time between sending a disconnect without progress indicator and receiving the same or a REL (release) message. The network sends a REL message when the timer expires. Clears the call when a REL COMPLETE message is received. Network side timer. Default: 30,000 ms

T306

Started instead of T305 when the toneOption is set in the PRI group (see toneOption on page 296). In this case, the switch will to play the tone or announcement (whatever is appropriate) instead of the device handling that itself. Network side timer. Default: 30,000 ms The time between sending a SUSPEND ACK message and sending a RES (resume) ACK message. Clears the network connection when the timer expires. Network side timer. Default: 180,000 ms The time between sending and receiving a REL message. Resends a REL message and resets when the timer expires. Network side timer. Default: 4,000 ms

T307

T308

T309

The time between data link disconnection and data link reconnection. The network channel clears and the B channel releases when the timer expires. Network side timer. Default: 90,000 ms

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

265

Trunk Groups

Timer T310

Description The time between receipt of Call Proceeding and the next message (Alert, Connect, or Disconnect) is received. Network side timer. Default: 10,000 ms NOTE: The switch supports this timer, but IDTs do not send Call Proceeding.

T313

The time between sending a RESUME request and receiving a RESUME ACK message. Sends a DISC (disconnect) messages when the timer expires. User side timer. Default: 4,000 ms

T316

The time between sending a RESTART message and receiving a RESTART ACK message. RESTART message may be sent several times after the timer expires. Network and user side timer. Default: 30,000 ms The time between receiving a RESTART message and the internal clearing of call reference. The switch sends a maintenance notification when the timer expires. Set at less than the value of T316. Network and user side timer. Default 20,000 ms The time between sending a RESUME request and receiving a RESUME ACK or RESUME REJ (reject) message. The switch sends a release message when the timer expires. User side timer. Default: 4,000 ms The time between sending a SUSPEND message and receiving a SUSPEND ACK or SUSP (suspend) REJ message. The device enters an active state when the timer expires. User side timer. Default: 4,000 m The time between a D-channel failure and receiving a response to a layer 3 message. The switch sends a DLESTABLISHMENT message request on both channels when the timer expires. Network and user side timer. Default: 40,000 ms The time between sending a STATUS ENQ message and receiving a STATUS DISC, REL, or REL COMPLETE message. Sends STATUS ENQ when the timer expires. Network and user side timer. Default: 4,000 ms

T317

T318

T319

T321

T322

266

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Timer RotaryDialingGuardTimer

Description Allows for pulse dialing by ignoring all messages until the timer times out. This rejects messages from RDTs that send immediate off-hook and keeps the switch from interpreting the off-hook as a digit. Default 400 ms The amount of delay between messages sent over the EOC. Do not set this timer to less than 500 ms. Any value less could lead to system instability. Default: 500 ms The delay between the time the switch receives "Connect Ack" and the time it checks for offhook or onhook on the signaling bits on the trunk. The delay is needed to account for timing sensitivities in the driver. Range: 500 - 2,000 ms Default: 700 ms

EOCMessageDelay

SignalBitAuditDelay

CRVReserveTime

The amount of time between reserving a CRV and assigning a trunk to that CRV. If this timer expires before the CRV has a trunk assigned, the CRV is removed from the reserved state and made available. Range: 1,000 - 20,000 ms Default: 10,000 ms

hdlcErrorInterval

Tip
The flexibility of being able to set both the interval and the water marks let you react to either error spikes (a burst of errors in a short period of time) or a "trickle" of errors over a longer period of time.

The Error Interval is used with the "high" and "low" water marks to determine how tolerant the switch will be with respect to detected errors. See hdlcErrorLowWaterMark on page 302 and hdlcErrorHighWaterMark on page 303. The switch counts errors on the link for the duration of the hdlcErrorInterval. If the low water mark is "10", and 10 errors occur during the 10 second interval, the switch issues a warning. If the high water mark is reached during the interval, the switch takes the link down. After the interval expires, the timer and the error counts are reset and the switch starts counting again from zero. Range: 1,000 60,000 ms Default: 10,000 ms

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

267

Trunk Groups

Timer sendResponseTime

Description The number of milliseconds the bearer circuit waits after sending a circuit status update for an acknowledgement from the signaling circuit. If no acknowledgement is received, the timer expires and the status is retransmitted. Range: 1,000 60,000 ms Default: 5,000 ms

CAUTION
Contact Taqua TAC Support before changing this timer.
modify InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 timers hdlcErrorInterval 30000

268

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Interface Group Options

A Interface Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a GR-303 Interface Group. Interface Group Options have the following attributes:
Option Name statusEnqOption Values Sends a Status Enquiry or a Status message if an unrecognized or unexpected message is received. Values are: ON Send a Status Enquiry message OFF Send a Status message noFlowThroughAutoLineProvision NOT_ALLOWED the RDT supports flow through provisioning or it automatically reports line provisioning to the switch. When you add a subscriber to the switch with a CRV, the subscriber does not automatically go in service. Instead, the switch sends an Analog Line Termination query to sync RDT Line status. ALLOWED the RDT does not support flow through provisioning and it does not automatically report the line provisioning to the switch. When you add a subscriber to the switch with a CRV, the switch sets the Analog Line Termination to provisioned queries the RDT for the line's service state (inservice or out-of-service). discardSETUP OFF to accept all SETUP messages from the RDT. CRV_NOT_PROVISIONED to discard all SETUP messages from the RDT if the CRV line state is not provisioned. CRV_NO_SUBSCRIBER to discard all SETUP messages from the RDT if the CRV line state is not provisioned or there is no subscriber CRV_NOT_INSERVICE to discard all SETUP messages from the RDT if the CRV line state is not provisioned or there is no subscriber or the CRV is Out Of Service hdlcErrorLowWaterMark The number of errors that can occur on the link during the hdlc Error Interval before the switch issues an hdlcWarning event. This is for informational purposes only. No action is taken by the system, although a tech should probably investigate the cause of the alarm If the value is zero, the switch will never issue a warning, no matter how many errors occur on the link. See hdlcErrorInterval on page 295. Default: 5

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

269

Trunk Groups

hdlcErrorHighWaterMark

The number of errors that can occur on the link during the hdlc Error Interval before the switch takes the link out of service. Once the errors reach the high water mark, the link is immediately removed from service. It will not come back into service until someone acknowledges (clears) the alarm which requires manual intervention. If the value is zero, the switch will never take the link out of service, no matter how many errors occur on the link. See hdlcErrorInterval on page 295. Default: 0 NOTE: For backward compatibility, the default value (zero) disables this feature. Values greater than zero enable the feature. Also note, the switch does not mind if the High Water Mark is actually lower than the Low Water Mark (in this case, the warning is never issued, but the alarm is issued and the link is taken out of service when the number of errors exceeds the High Water Mark).

reoriginateWithoutRelease ON when the terminator leaves the phone off hook (after the originator hangs up), the line will remain connected to the original trunk as it proceeds with call reorigination (playing dial tone, etc). If no digits are entered, and the phone is left off hook long enough, the line will enter the Permanent Signal state, and the T7000 sends a Disconnect with Cause Code = 27. OFF send Disconnect with Normal Clearing after the timer expires.
modify InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 options reoriginateWithoutRelease ON

270

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Interface Group Restrictions

Interface Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. An Interface Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section PRI Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes
Attribute NO_OSSTATION NO_OSDIALED NO_DA OS_ONLY DA_ONLY NO_INTRALATA NO_INTERLATA NO_OS_INTRALATA NO_OS_INTERLATA NO_DA_INTRALATA NO_DA_INTERLATA NO_INTERNATIONAL Description Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls. Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls. Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group. Restrict all calls except operator services calls. Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List. Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls. Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2). Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1). Restrict OS intraLATA calls. Restrict OS interLATA calls. Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2). Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1). Restrict international calls.

NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL Restrict OS international calls.

The Interface Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

modify modify

1 turns the restriction on 0 turns the restriction off.

InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 restrictions NO_DA 1 InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 restrictions OS_ONLY 0

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

271

Trunk Groups

Adding Facilities to an Interface Group insertInto InterfaceGroup <key> facilities <subkey> RdtLogicalSpan <oid> <cic>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a span to a Interface Groups facilities list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> <subkey> Interface Group name This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility. Range: 1 - 28 Description

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert a facility at the start of the facilities list. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of the facilities list.

<oid>

This attribute specifies which span you want to add to the Interface Group.

<logicalSpan This attribute specifies the Logical Span Number of the inserted Span. Number>

The following command adds Span 1 in Card 2 as Logical Span number 3 to Interface Group AFCUMC1:
insertInto InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 facilities 3 RdtLogicalSpan Span-1-2-27 3

Removing Facilities from an Interface Group deleteFrom InterfaceGroup <key> facilities <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a span from an Interface Groups facilities list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
NOTE: You must first lock the Span before you can remove it from the Interface Group.

Syntax <key> <subkey> Interface Group name

Description This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

The following example locks Span 1 on the local card and then removes it from PRI Trunk Group SWB1:

lock Span-1-2-27 deleteFrom InterfaceGroup

AFCUMC1

facilities 3

272

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Hunt Groups
The following types of hunts are associated with a multi-line hunt group: 1. Regular hunting this type of hunt begins with the terminal dialed and ends with the last terminal in the hunt group 2. Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) this is the default type of hunt group 3. Circular hunting this type of hunt beings with the terminal following the most-recently-used terminal and ends with the terminal immediately preceding the starting terminal. Any start hunt information is ignored, since it chooses the start hunt point based on the last terminal dialed.
NOTE: Use the Generic CLI modify command to change the type of hunt used, see selectionMethod on page 274.

To create a hunt group, follow this procedure:

Step
1

Action Create or select a subscriber for the pilotLDN. see Subscribers on page 530 Make sure the subscriber has a facility. The subscriber chosen for the PilotLDN cannot have any of the following services: Call Waiting Caller ID Hot Line Revertive Call Warm Line In addition, the pilotLDN subscriber can not be an Enhanced Voice Services subscriber.

Create the Hunt Group using the subscriber from step 1 as the pilotLDN. You may also specify an optional overflowDN at this time. This is usually the DN of a Voice Mail System. Note that the subscriber chosen for the overflowDN can not have the Revertive Call service, or be an Enhanced Voice Services subscriber. See Creating a Hunt Group on page 279.

Add the pilotLDN facility to the Hunt Group. See Adding Facilities to a Hunt Group on page 281.This subscribers facility is Terminal 0, or the first terminal. Add additional facilities to the Hunt Group. See Adding Facilities to a Hunt Group on page 281.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

273

Trunk Groups

A Hunt Group has the following attributes:

attribute key value hunt group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semicolon (;), nor can it consist of either the word ALL or the word all. facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the Hunt Group. See Adding Facilities to a Hunt Group on page 281, and Removing Facilities from a Hunt Group on page 283. The timers for this Hunt Group. Hunt Groups use CAS Trunk Group Timers, see CAS Trunk Group Timers on page 244. The options for this trunk group. Hunt Groups use CAS Trunk Group options. See CAS Trunk Group Options on page 247. REGULAR_HUNT This type of hunt begins with the terminal dialed and ends with the last terminal in the hunt group. CIRCULAR_HUNT This type of hunt begins with the terminal dialed and ends with the terminal immediately preceding the starting terminal. UNIFORM_CALL_DISTRIBUTION_HUNT This type of hunt beings with the terminal following the most recentlyused terminal and ends with the terminal immediately preceding the starting terminal. Any start hunt information is ignored, since it chooses the start hunt point based on the last terminal dialed. sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls TRUE allow operator assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow operator assisted calls TRUE allow directory assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow directory assisted calls

timers

options

selectionMethod

274

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

attribute tandemRoutingType

value Sets the type of routing for calls received on the trunk group. For a discussion of this attribute, see The tandemRoutingType Trunk Group attribute on page 234. NO_ROUTING Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscribers carrier, or the LNP code CARRIER_ROUTING (default) Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists TRUNKGROUP_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists ANI_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

restrictions localTermination

The restrictions on this Hunt Group. See Hunt Group Restrictions on page 280. This attribute is not meaningful for Hunt Groups. Please ignore it.

tandemDefaultRoutingType The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned: USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list. USE_NANP_CARRIER Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list. USE_CARRIER_ONLY Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. USE_NANP_ONLY Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. miscOptions The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs). An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see Screen Lists on page 415, and Prefixes on page 403. The Hunt Group direction attribute is inherited from Trunk Groups, where it is used to set up pairs of incoming an outgoing trunk groups. For a Hunt Group, however, direction should always be set to BI_DIRECTIONAL.

denyAniList

direction

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

275

Trunk Groups

attribute pilotLDN

value A pilot listed directory number (LDN) is a number assigned to the first line of a group of lines that forms the multi-line hunt group. The pilotLDN is the number dialed to reach the group. There must be at least one pilotLDN per hunt group, but there can be multiple pilotLDNs per multi-line group for nested sets. Note: this field is read-only. Optional, the number to which the call routes if all terminals in a hunt group are busy. If no number is specified, then all terminals busy results in the busy tone. The overflow DN of one hunt group can be the pilotLDN of another hunt group. Used to associate an optional start hunt number with a terminal in the Hunt Group. One or more additional start hunt numbers may be added to a hunt group. Once

overflowDN

associatedDNs

additional start hunt numbers are added to the hunt group, either a start hunt number or the pilotLDN can be dialed to start the hunt.
Used only for regular or circular hunt type Hunt Groups. Hunt groups using the UCD hunt type do not require start hunt points.

NOTE: After adding a Start Hunt number, the switch adds a route list using the associatedDN and adds the hunt group as the route. trunkProtocol trunkSignalingType One of the following: FXO See FXO on page 746. LOOPSTART A supervisory signal from a telephone or PBX that completes the signaling loop path GROUNDSTART A method of analog signaling from a terminal or subscriber loop to a switch, where one side of a cable pair is temporarily grounded memberOrigination The memberOrigination allows a terminal without a subscriber associated with it to originate calls. Values are TRUE to allow terminals without a subscriber associated to them to originate calls. The terminal uses the pilotLDN as the ANI. FALSE to restrict terminals without a subscriber associated to them from making calls. This attribute has a complex relationship with the gr303UsePilotND and sendPilotDNasANI attributes. See ANI Sent and Services Used on page 278.

276

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

attribute gr303UsePilotDN

value This attribute allows GR-303 members to originate calls using the Pilot DN instead of their own. This does not apply to any kind of transfer, forward, etc. This attribute has a complex relationship with the memberOrigination ad sendPilotDNasANI attributes. See ANI Sent and Services Used on page 278. TRUE to allow GR-303 members to originate using the pilot ANI instead of their own if member origination is enabled. This does not apply to any kind of transfer, forward, etc. FALSE (default) to restrict GR-303 members from using the pilot ANI

sendPilotDNasANI

This attribute sends the Pilot DN as the ANI when a member of a Hunt Group makes a call. This attribute has a complex relationship with the memberOrigination and gr303UsePilotDN attributes. See ANI Sent and Services Used on page 278. TRUE members send the Pilot DN as ANI. FALSE (default) members do not send the Pilot DN as ANI.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

277

Trunk Groups

ANI Sent and Services Used

Members of a Hunt Group who do not have Subscriber records of their own use the services of the Pilot DN. However, things become complicated when the Hunt Group members are also subscribers, and are provisioned with their own services. The following table summarizes the feature interaction between the memberOrigination, gr303UsePilotDN and sendPilotDNasANI attributes. Note that GR-303 members may receive special treatment.
Attributes sendPilot DNasANI FALSE FALSE FALSE Member Has Subscriber Member Has No Subscriber

gr303Use memberANI Sent Services ANI Sent Services PilotDN Origination FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE member member member GR303: pilot, others: member pilot pilot member member member GR303: pilot, pilot others: member member member GR303: pilot, can not make calls pilot pilot pilot can not make calls pilot pilot can not make calls

FALSE

TRUE

TRUE

TRUE TRUE

FALSE FALSE

FALSE TRUE

TRUE

TRUE

FALSE

pilot others: member GR303: pilot,

can not make calls

TRUE

TRUE

TRUE

pilot others: member

pilot

pilot

278

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Creating a Hunt Group

The Generic CLI is used for all Hunt Group commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key pilotLDN

The optional parameters for the create command are:

overflowDN create HuntGroup WeekdayOffice 9724801111

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

modify modify

timers options selectionMethod sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls restrictions localTermination tandemDefaultRoutingType denyAniList direction overflowDN trunkProtocol trunkSignalingType memberOrigination gr303UsePilotDN sendPilotDNasANI

HuntGroup WeekdayOffice timers ChargeDelay 4000 HuntGroup WeekdayOffice overflowDN 9734800010

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

facilities associatedDNs

See Adding Facilities to a Hunt Group on page 281, Removing Facilities from a Hunt Group on page 283, Adding associatedDNs to a Hunt Group on page 284, and
Removing associatedDNs from a Hunt Group on page 285

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

279

Trunk Groups

Hunt Group Restrictions

Hunt Group Trunk Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. A Hunt Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section Hunt Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes
Attribute NO_OSSTATION NO_OSDIALED NO_DA OS_ONLY DA_ONLY NO_INTRALATA NO_INTERLATA NO_OS_INTRALATA NO_OS_INTERLATA NO_DA_INTRALATA NO_DA_INTERLATA NO_INTERNATIONAL NO_OS_INTERNATION AL Description Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls. Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls. Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group. Restrict all calls except operator services calls. Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List. Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls. Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2). Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1). Restrict OS intraLATA calls. Restrict OS interLATA calls. Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2). Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1). Restrict international calls. Restrict OS international calls.

The Hunt Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

modify modify

1 turns the restriction on 0 turns the restriction off.

HuntGroup HG12 restrictions NO_DA 1 HuntGroup HG12 restrictions OS_ONLY 0

280

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Adding Facilities to a Hunt Group insertInto HuntGroup <key> facilities <subkey> <facilityType> <subvalue>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a facility to a Hunt Groups facilities list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

Hunt Group name

This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility.

<subkey>

Tip
You can add a facility to the front of the list by entering a "1" here, but only do so when entering the Pilot DN. Use a -1 to add a facility to the end of the list.

<facilityType>

Valid values are: TDMFacility GR303Facility MGCPFacility SIPFacility. NOTE: Hunt Groups do not support SIP Access Subscribers.

<subvalue>

This attribute specifies which facility you want to add to the Trunk Group.

Add the pilotLDN's facility to the Hunt Group as the first facility in the Hunt Group. This subscribers facility is Terminal 0, or the first terminal. See insertInto on page 6. The following command adds a pilot DN facility to a Hunt Group:
insertInto HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities 1 TDMFacility Line-0-1-27

The following example adds additional facilities to a Hunt Group. The query command verifies the ordering of the facilities in the Hunt Group.
NOTE: When adding additional facilities into the Hunt Group, make sure the subkey is greater than 1, as the Pilot DN must be the 1st facility in the Hunt Group!

insertInto HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities 2 TDMFacility Line-2-1-27 insertInto HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities 3 TDMFacility Line-3-1-27

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

281

Trunk Groups

query HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities <48fe374> facilities.................<48f9890> <48f9890> HGFacilityList collection...List (3 items) -> (1) <4906d40> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-0-1-27 (2) <4907f60> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-2-1-27 (3) <4903030> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-3-1-27

282

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Removing Facilities from a Hunt Group deleteFrom HuntGroup <key> facilities <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a facility from a Hunt Groups facilities list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
NOTE: You must first lock the facility before you can remove it from the Hunt Group.

Syntax <key>

Description

CAS Trunk Group name

This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

<subkey>

This example builds on the configuration set up in Adding Facilities to a Hunt Group. The following example locks Line-3-1-27 on the local card and then removes it from Hunt Group WeekdayOffice. The query command verifies that the desired facility was removed from the Hunt Group.

lock Line-3-1-27 deleteFrom HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities 3 query HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities <48fe374> facilities.................<48f9890> <48f9890> HGFacilityList collection...List (2 items) -> (1) <4906d40> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-0-1-27 (2) <4907f60> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-2-1-27

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

283

Trunk Groups

Adding associatedDNs to a Hunt Group insertInto HuntGroup <key> associatedDNs <subkey> <subvalue>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add an associated DN to a Hunt Groups associatedDNs dictionary. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

Hunt Group name

This attribute is the DN that you wish to add to the Hunt Group. The DN must not exist. This is the terminal number which you wish to assign the DN to. When the DN is dialed, hunting will commence from this terminal.

<subkey> <subvalue>

NOTE: After adding a Start Hunt number, the switch adds a route list using the associated DN and adds the hunt group as the route.

The following command adds a new associated DN to a Hunt Group, and associates it with terminal 2. The query command verifies the ordering of the associated DNs in the Hunt Group. Note that the switch automatically created a new route to the associated DN.
insertInto HuntGroup WeekdayOffice associatedDNs 9724801000 2 ****** Event Notification ****** (eventName): Configuration (senderID): <49035d0> (objectID): "Src S:0 C:0 Pid:3f " (timestamp): 47e1a4dd (refdate): 7d8313 (reftime): f341a (rawreftime): 47e1992 a (reserved): 0 (text): "MGR: tNANPRoutingDbMgr CREATED: WeekdayOffice_startHunt _2_9724801000" query HuntGroup WeekdayOffice associatedDNs <490db90> associatedDNs...............<490f7d0> <490f7d0> StartHuntDict collection...Dictionary (2 items) -> StringKey: 9724800000 IntegerValue: 1 (1) StringKey: 9724801000 IntegerValue: 2 (2)

284

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Removing associatedDNs from a Hunt Group deleteFrom HuntGroup <key> associatedDNs <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove an associated DN from a Hunt Groups facilities dictionary. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

Hunt Group name

This is the DN in the associatedDNs dictionary that you want to delete.

<subkey>

NOTE: After deleting a Start Hunt number, the switch removes the route list using the associated DN.

This example builds on the configuration set up in Adding associatedDNs to a Hunt Group. The following command removes associated DN 9724801000 from Hunt Group WeekdayOffice. The query command verifies that the desired associated DN was removed from the Hunt Group.
deleteFrom HuntGroup WeekdayOffice associatedDNs 9724801000 ****** Event Notification ****** (eventName): Configuration (senderID): <490e100> (objectID): "Src S:0 C:0 Pid:3f " (timestamp): 47e19f0a (refdate): 7d8313 (reftime): f341a (rawreftime): 47e1992 a (reserved): 0 (text): "MGR: tNANPRoutingDbMgr DELETED: WeekdayOffice_startHunt _2_9724801000" query HuntGroup WeekdayOffice associatedDNs <490db90> associatedDNs...............<490f7d0> <490f7d0> StartHuntDict collection...Dictionary (1 items) -> StringKey: 9724800000 IntegerValue: 1 (1)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

285

Trunk Groups

PRI Trunk Groups Tip

See the T7000 Provisioning Guide for an in-depth discussion of PRI Trunk Groups.

ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) can transmit up to 1.544 megabytes per second of data or up to 24 telephone calls at one time. ISDN PRI 23B+D consists of:

23 Bearer (B) channels available to transfer information, at 64 kilobytes per second each. One Data (D) channel used for signaling to control the status of a connection, at 64 kilobytes per second.

NOTE: PRI trunk groups can have a total of 20 spans

A PRI Trunk Group has the following attributes.

Attribute key Description trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semicolon (;), nor can it consist of either the word ALL or the word all facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the trunk group. See Adding Facilities to a PRI Trunk Group on page 306, and Removing Facilities from a PRI Trunk Group on page 306. The timers for this trunk group. See PRI Trunk Group Timers on page 293. The options for this trunk group. See PRI Trunk Group Options on page 296. FIRST_AVAILABLE always select the first trunk available ROUND_ROBIN (default) sequentially rotate the use of trunks sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls TRUE allow operator assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow operator assisted calls TRUE allow directory assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow directory assisted calls

timers options selectionMethod

286

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute tandemRoutingType

Description Leave this attribute set to the default value of NO_ROUTING. ISDN PRI routes calls based on either the calling number or default DN subscriber record. Refer to screenDN on page 300 to determine which subscriber record is used. optional default directory number. Used when the trunk group connects to a PBX that needs to have default Primary IntraLATA or InterLATA Carrier (PIC). Make sure you add a default subscriber with this number to set the specific IntraLATA or InterLATA Carrier to bill the number correctly, as well as to allow for allowed/ denied lists and an NANP route list for the range of DNs that the PBX handles.

defaultDN

NOTE: If assigned, the defaultDN becomes the default ANI for 911 calls made without a 10 digit ANI. See E911DefaultANI on page 314 restrictions defaultNPA The restrictions on this trunk group. See PRI Trunk Group Restrictions on page 305. The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7-digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see Prefixes on page 403. Length: 3 replaceDestinationDigits TRUE allow the use of replacement destination digits (called number) on the trunk group. The switch replaces part or all of the destination digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See Subscribers on page 530, Destination Digit Replacement on page 346, and replacementMode on page 405 FALSE do not replace Destination Digits and send the dialed digits. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not replace Destination Digits in the outgoing signaling messages if the called DN has a non-T7000 LRN associated with it

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

287

Trunk Groups

Attribute replaceCarrier

Description This attribute controls the use of a PCAC on the trunk

group.
TRUE allow the use of PCAC on the trunk group. The switch replaces the CAC depending on how the prefix or carrier is provisioned. See Prefixes on page 403, replacementMode on page 405, and Carriers on page 196. FALSE do not use a PCAC on the trunk group and send the CAC. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use a PCAC if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CAC. replaceAniDigits

This attribute controls the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group.
TRUE allow the use of a Pseudo ANI (PANI) on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI (calling number) depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See Subscribers on page 530. FALSE do not use a PANI on the trunk group and send the ANI. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use a PANI if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI.

replaceInfoDigits

TRUE allow the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI II digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned,See Subscribers on page 530. FALSE do not use PANI II digits on the trunk group and send the ANI II digits on the facility. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use PANI II digits if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI II digits on the facility

ftrsProfile

The profile assigned to the incoming trunk group. This profile determines how the switch manipulates digits and routing. See FTRS on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a FXO trunk group with a profile, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

288

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute replaceCSI

Description

This controls the use of the Carrier Selection Information parameter in outgoing messages on the trunk group.
TRUE allow the use of a PCSI on the trunk group. The switch replaces the outpulse of the CSI parameter depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See Subscribers on page 530 FALSE do not send a PCSI on the trunk group and send the CSI. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use PCSI if the called number has an non- T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CSI.

localTermination

ALLOW (default) allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch. NOT_ALLOWED only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

tandemDefaultRoutingType

The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned: USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list. USE_NANP_CARRIER Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list. USE_CARRIER_ONLY Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. USE_NANP_ONLY Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions

The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs). An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked. See Prefixes on page 403, and Prefixes on page 403

denyAniList

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

289

Trunk Groups

Attribute direction

Description ONE_WAY_IN One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions. ONE_WAY_OUT One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

BI_DIRECTIONAL Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call tandemCustomReplacement Used to outpulse 7 digits for tandem calls. NO (default) no special outpulsing is performed. YES outpulse 7 digits for non-ported subscribers. See 7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing on page 409. dChannelOIDprimary side object identifier of the OOS trunk acting as the data channel for the PRI trunk group switch role: USER If the PRI interface is a PBX or other configuration that receives PRI service. NET If the switch is positioned in the network as a Class 5 End Office or other configuration that provides PRI service. primaryLogicalSpan dChannelOIDSecondary secondaryLogicalSpan optional logical identifier of the D-channel; for example, 1 optional object identifier of the trunk acting as the data channel backup for the PRI trunk group optional logical identifier of the D-channel backup; for example, 2

290

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute isdnMsgTrace

Description This debug attribute controls how the switch shows ISDN Call Establishment, Call Clearing, Maintenance and Miscellaneous messages. The messages are displayed when running a CLI session on the card that has the PRI span. Values are: MSG_TRACE_NONE (default) The message trace for this trunk group is off. MSG_ONLY Shows the ISDN messages MSG_WITH_INBOUND_DUMP Shows ISDN messages and a dump of inbound IEs. MSG_WITH_OUTBOUND_DUMP Shows ISDN messages and a dump of outbound IEs. MSG_WITH_BOTH_DUMP Shows ISDN messages and a dump of both inbound and outbound IEs.

CAUTION
Contact Taqua TAC Support before using this option. terminalEndpointID E911DefaultANI optional Terminal Endpoint Identifier. Range: 0 - 63, default: 0 This attribute is used to specify a 10 digit ANI when a 911 call is made and ANI does not contain a 10 digit number, and a defaultDN is not assigned to the Trunk Group.

The Generic CLI is used for all PRI Trunk Group commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key dChannelOIDPrimary

The optional parameters for the create command are:

side primaryLogicalSpan dChannelOIDSecondary secondaryLogicalSpan terminalEndpointId

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

291

Trunk Groups

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

timers options selectionMethod sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls tandemRoutingType defaultDN restrictions defaultNPA replaceDestinationDigits replaceCarrier replaceAniDigits replaceInfoDigits ftrsProfile replaceCSI localTermination tandemDefaultRoutingType denyAniList direction isdnMsgTrace terminalEndpointId

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

facilities

See Adding Facilities to a PRI Trunk Group on page 306, and Removing Facilities from a PRI Trunk Group on page 306.

create PRITrunkGroup SWB1 Trunk-23-1-27 modify PRITrunkGroup SWB1 sendOAssistCalls FALSE query PRITrunkGroup SWB1 timers destroy PRITrunkGroup SWB1

292

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

PRI Trunk Group Timers

A PRI Trunk Group Timer object contains the timers that control the behavior of a PRI Trunk Group. The PRI timers default settings meet the industry standard. PRI Trunk Group Timers have the following attributes
Timer GuardTime Description The time after the release of a circuit to ensure that a minimum time interval is used between calls. Network side timer. Range: 700 - 1,000 ms ChargeDelay The amount of time a terminating trunk waits before generating answer supervision toward the originator. Network side timer. Range: 2,000 - 5,000 ms T301 The time between receiving an ALERT message and receiving a CONNECT message. Clears the call when the timer expires, not used with a network supervision call control. Network side timer. Minimum of 180,000 ms T303 The time between sending a SETUP message and receiving an ALERT, CONNECT, CALL PROC (processing), or SETUP ACK (acknowledge) message. Sends a SETUP message when the timer expires. Network side timer. Default: 4,000 ms T305 The time between sending a disconnect without progress indicator and receiving the same or a REL (release) message. The network sends a REL message when the timer expires. Clears the call when a REL COMPLETE message is received. Network side timer. Default: 30,000 ms T306 The time between sending a disconnect with progress indicator and receiving the same or a REL message. The tone stops and sends a REL message when the timer expires. Network side timer. Default: 30,000 ms T307 The time between sending a SUSPEND ACK message and sending a RES (resume) ACK message. Clears the network connection when the timer expires. Network side timer. Default: 180,000 ms

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

293

Trunk Groups

Timer T308

Description The time between sending and receiving a REL message. Resends a REL message and resets when the timer expires. Network side timer. Default: 4,000 ms

T309

The time between data link disconnection and data link reconnection. The network channel clears and the B channel releases when the timer expires. Network side timer. Default: 90,000 ms

T310

The time between data link disconnection and data link reconnection. The call clears when the timer expires. Network side timer. Default: 10,000 ms

T313

The time between sending a RESUME request and receiving a RESUME ACK message. Sends a DISC (disconnect) messages when the timer expires. User side timer. Default: 4,000 ms

T316

The time between sending a RESTART message and receiving a RESTART ACK message. RESTART message may be sent several times after the timer expires. Network and user side timer. Default: 30,000 ms

T317

The time between receiving a RESTART message and the internal clearing of call reference. Sends a maintenance notification when the timer expires. Set at less than the value of T316. Network and user side timer. Default: 20,000 ms

T318

The time between sending a RESUME request and receiving a RESUME ACK or RESUME REJ (reject) message. Sends a release message when the timer expires. User side timer. Default: 4,000 ms

T319

The time between sending a SUSPEND message and receiving a SUSPEND ACK or SUSP (suspend) REJ message. The device enters an active state when the timer expires. User side timer. Default: 4,000 ms

294

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Timer T321

Description The time between a D-channel failure and receiving a response to a layer 3 message. Sends a DL-ESTABLISHMENT message request on both channels when the timer expires. Network and user side timer. Default: 40,000 ms

T322

The time between sending a STATUS ENQ message and receiving a STATUS DISC, REL, or REL COMPLETE message. Sends STATUS ENQ when the timer expires. Network and user side timer. Default: 4,000 ms

T3M1

The time between sending a SERVICE message and receiving a SERVICE ACKNOWLEDGE message. The SERVICE status of the B-Channels should be unchanged as a result of a temporary D-Channel failure. The CPE should use a SERVICE message to notify the Network of the state change once the DChannel comes back into service. For AT&T B-Channel availability procedure only. Default: 120,000 ms

hdlcErrorInterval

Tip
The flexibility of being able to set both the interval and the water marks let you react to either error spikes (a burst of errors in a short period of time) or a "trickle" of errors over a longer period of time.

The Error Interval is used with the "high" and "low" water marks to determine how tolerant the switch will be with respect to detected errors. See hdlcErrorLowWaterMark on page 302 and hdlcErrorHighWaterMark on page 303. The switch counts errors on the link for the duration of the hdlcErrorInterval. If the low water mark is "10", and 10 errors occur during the 10 second interval, the switch issues a warning. If the high water mark is reached during the interval, the switch takes the link down. After the interval expires, the timer and the error counts are reset and the switch starts counting again from zero. Range: 10,000 - 60,000 milliseconds Default: 10,000

modify PRITrunkGroup SWB1 timers hdlcErrorInterval 30000

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

295

Trunk Groups

PRI Trunk Group Options

A PRI Trunk Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a PRI Trunk Group. PRI Trunk Group Options have the following attributes:
Option Name releaseOption Values Sends a RELEASE COMPLETE or RELEASE with Cause Value 81 if an unrecognized, unexpected, or status message is received. Values are: Off On responseToStatusEnquiry Controls what type of message to send as a response when a Status Enquiry message is received, Values are: 0 Send a Status message 1 Send a Release Complete message rejectOption Sets the call reject option to refuse the call rejected calls by sending a RELEASE COMPLETE message with cause No. 21, call rejected, and the user returns to the Null state. Values are: Off On statusEnqOption Sends a Status Enquiry or a Status message if an unrecognized or unexpected message is received. Values are: Send a Status Enquiry message Send a Status message toneOption Provides a tone for the network side when there is a disconnect message. Values are: Off On callingNameDisplayOption NO does not display the calling name of the caller DISPLAY_IE use this value to display calling name on Nortel PBXs FACILITY_IE use this value to display calling name on Lucent PBXs or PBXs that are Nation ISDN standard PBXs. This is the Bellcore standard. transferSubadressAllowOption Allows the transfer of a subaddress to another PRI subscriber. Values are: Off On

296

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

autoRestartOnBoot

Automatically sends a RESTART message after booting the D-channel. A restart message drops all calls on the Bchannels. Values are: Off On

autoRestartOnLinkBounce

Automatically sends a RESTART message when a link bounces. A restart message drops all calls on the Bchannels. Values are: Off On

allowNX64

Allows the trunk group to originate NX64 calls, a multirate call that uses multiple B channels. Currently the switch supports 2X64. Values are: Off On

contiguousNX6

Uses contiguous B-channels for NX64 calls. Values are: Off On

networkServices

Set BLV/BLI only on trunk groups coming from an operator station. You need one trunk group for each service. Allow for one of the following operator services: Values are: BLV Busy Line Verification allows an external operator to verify if a subscriber line is busy. An operator calling over a BLV trunk receives a busy signal if the line is busy or a ring-back if the line is idle. BLI Busy Line Interrupt allows an external operator to interrupt a busy line. An operator calling over a BLI trunk interrupts the busy subscriber who can either drop the existing conversation and accept the operator call or continue with the existing conversation.

sendCarrierId

Sends the CAC in the call set up messaging. This option allows the switch to send the CAC to another switch in the network and only works when the trunk group is set to USER_SIDE. The CAC is sent in the optional Translation Network Selection information element. Values are: NO YES includes all call types SOME_CALL_TYPES includes: INTER_LATA, OA_INTER_LATA, INTRA_LATA, OA_INTRA_LATA, INTERNATIONAL, OA_INTERNATIONAL, WORLDZONE1, OA_WORLDZONE1, DA_INTRA_LATA, DA_INTER_LATA, OA_ZERO_MINUS, and TANDEM_CALL

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

297

Trunk Groups

sendCalledNumberAsPBX

Sends the called number as dialed to the terminator, including: 7-digit dialing, 0-, 0+, 1+ and carrier dialing (101XXXX+1+NPANXXXXXX). This allows the switch to play the role of a PBX between subscribers and an end office. The switch also sends the CAC for IntraLATA and InterLATA calls. This attribute only applies to USER role. Values are: NO YES

NOTE: If set, this attribute overrides both outPulseAsDialed on page 298 and numOfDIDDigits on page 299 attributes. bChannelAvailabilityProcedure NO the switch only responds to SERVICE messages. ATT indicates the status change on a B-channel for Call Processing. Use this when connecting to PBXs that use the ATT procedure. The switch sends and responds to SERVICE messages NOTE: This attributre is ignored in USER mode if sendCalledNumberAsPBX on page 298 is set.

outPulseAsDialed

For calls terminating to the PRI group, this attribute allows the switch to act as a local End Office (EO), providing long distance service without having an InterLATA carrier provisioned. The switch, acting as a local EO, outpulses the dialed digits to the local tandem office. Then, the local tandem office, not the local EO, performs screening and translation on the dialed digits. Values are: False the switch translates the digits, chooses a call type and routes based on the call type (local, extended, intraLATA, interLATA, worldZone1, International, etc.). True routes by and outpulses the exact digits the subscriber dials and does not send the CAC for the call.

NOTE: If set, this attribute overrides numOfDIDDigits on page 299 in either USER or NETWORK mode.

298

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

numOfDIDDigits NOTE: This attributre is ignored in USER mode if sendCalledNumberAsPBX on page 298 is set. This attributre is ignored in USER or NETWORK mode if outPulseAsDialed on page 298 is set.

Set the number of direct inward dialing digits allowed from two to ten. Values are: ALL the switch sends (outpulses) all of the digits that it receives. 1-10 the switch only sends (outpulses) the last number of digits that you select. redirectingNumberOption Redirecting a calling number is used when connecting to a voice mail system using PRI. In a scenario where A calls B and B forwards to voice mail, C is the redirecting number. This setting determines which Information Element (IE) is used to send the redirecting DN. Values are: NO does not send the redirecting number, even if it is present, to a voice mail system. REDIRECTING_NUMBER_IE inserts the redirecting DN (B) in the setup message as the redirecting number IE. Use for Lucent PBXs. ORIGINAL_CALLED_NUMBER_IE sends the redirecting DN (B) as the original called number IE, in the setup message. Use for a Nortel PBX. CALLING_NUMBER_IE sends the redirecting DN (B) as the calling number IE in the setup message. Use for Taqua Courier voice mail. CALLED_NUMBER_IE sends the redirecting DN (B) as the called number IE in the setup message. Use for TNS voice mail systems Zeus. implicitChannelId This setting is for PRI FAS groups (only 1 span in the group): Values are: Off sends the Channel Id formatted in the explicit or long form. Onsends the Channel Id (sent with the Service or Service Ack message) formatted in the implicit or short form that some vendors require. Note: the implicit or short formatting is rarely required. useImplicitChannelIdForPPS This setting is for PRI NFAS groups. Values are: Off sends the Channel Id formatted in the explicit or long form. On sends the Channel Id (sent with the Service or Service Ack message) formatted in the implicit or short form that some vendors require. The implicit or short formatting is rarely required

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

299

Trunk Groups

releaseCompleteAtSetup

for GR-303 only. Values are: Off On

screenDN

This setting is for PRI calls that originate on the T7000. Values are: DEFAULTDN if a default DN exists and has a subscriber, it becomes the subscriber key in the facility CPN if a calling party number is known and the subscriber is on the T7000, the calling party number replaces the subscriber key in the facility. DEFAULTDN_CPN DEFAULTDN is performed, if there is no default DN or no subscriber for that DN, CPN is performed. CPN_DEFAULTDN CPN is performed, if the calling party number is unknown or the subscriber is not on the T7000, DEFAULTDN is rarely required.

sendCPN

This setting works with screenDN. It sets which digits are sent for calling party number. Values are: CPN_DEFAULTDN if no CPN, use default DN DEFAULTDN use default DN as the calling party number CPN use CPN as the calling party number DEFAULTDN_CPN use default DN, if there is no default DN, use CPN. NONE the T7000 does not provide calling party

sendChargeNumber

Values are: DEFAULTDN (default) The default DN will be sent in the charge number. CPN If the calling party Number is received then CPN will be sent in the charge number. If calling party number is not received and there is a default DN for the trunk group then default DN will be sent in the charge number. BILLING_NUM If the Billing number is present for the subscriber used for screening it will be sent in charge number, otherwise the screened DN number will be sent in the charge number. Note: The screen DN option affects the choice of screenDN and therefore this option.

blockCPN

This setting prevents the Calling Party Number from being sent unless the CPN presentation is Allowed. It is useful when connecting to a PBX that is does not honor a restricted CPN presentation. Values are: Off Send CPN according to CPN presentation. On No not send CPN unless CPN presentation is allowed.

300

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

backwardProgressIndication

This setting is for PRI trunks connecting to a PBX that terminates to subscribers using CAS trunks. Values are: USE_NOT_END_TO_END_ISDN ISDN ensures the switch connecting to the T7000 does not use inband USE_INBAND_AVAILABLE ensures the switch connecting to the T7000 uses inband

mplicitInterfaceIdi

This setting is for PRI trunk groups with one d-channel. It controls the formatting of the "channel Id Interface Element" field. Values are: FALSE the switch does not send a message TRUE the switch sends a message saying the bearer channel is in the same span as the d-channel

sendLocalCallasSubscriber

This setting allows the switch to take an incoming PRI call and use the Remote Call Forwarding service to send the call over an outgoing PRI trunk group yet treat the call as local: FALSE adds a 1 to the called party number TRUE If a call is LOCAL or EXTENDED_AREA the switch flags every called party number as an ISDN subscriber number

releaseTreatment

Values are: RELEASE_CALL the access equipment provides treatment PROVIDE_TREATMENT the switch plays an announcement when there is a problem with the digits received

originalNumberOption

This option is used to populate various elements of the PRI Setup message. It can be useful when dealing with the interactions between multiple call forwardings and a persnickety voice mail system. Values are: NO No special processing is done (default) REDIRECTING_NUMBER_IE The Original Called Number parameter populates the Redirecting Number parameter. ORIGINAL_CALLED_NUMBER_IE The Original Called Number parameter populates the Redirecting Number parameter. CALLING_NUMBER_IE The Original Called Number parameter populates the Calling Number Information Element parameter. CALLED_NUMBER_IE The Original Called Number parameter populates the Called Number Information Element parameter.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

301

Trunk Groups

networkSendDisconnectOnBusy

This option is used when dealing with equipment that cannot handle a Release message when a call is placed to a busy subscriber. Values are: SEND_RELEASE_ON_BUSY the switch sends Release when a subscriber on the PBX places a call to the switch for a busy subscriber (default) SEND_DISCONNECT_ON_BUSY the switch sends Disconnect when a subscriber on the PBX places a call to the switch for a busy subscriber

passExtCharForCallingName This option controls how the Calling Name is presented. The Calling Name is conveyed using ASCII characters. Normally, only the lower half of the 256 ASCII character set are sent. However, sometimes characters from the upper half are sent as well. Although the upper half of the ASCII character set contains mostly graphics characters, it also contains some characters used in European languages, such as , , and . Unfortunately, some switches will interpret a character from the upper half of the ASCII character set as being the end of the Calling Name (technically, this is called the Extension Bit, and it indicates the last octet in the field). In such a case, you will need to set this attribute to TRUE to prevent the T7000 from confusing the switch at the other end. Values are: FALSE (default) limits the value of characters in the Calling Name to the lower half of the ASCII character set. TRUE does not limit the values of characters in the Calling Name. hdlcErrorLowWaterMark The number of errors that can occur on the link during the hdlc Error Interval before the switch issues an hdlcWarning event. This is for informational purposes only. No action is taken by the system, although a tech should probably investigate the cause of the alarm If the value is zero, the switch will never issue a warning, no matter how many errors occur on the link. See hdlcErrorInterval on page 295. Default: 5

302

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

hdlcErrorHighWaterMark

The number of errors that can occur on the link during the hdlc Error Interval before the switch takes the link out of service. Once the errors reach the high water mark, the link is immediately removed from service. It will not come back into service until someone acknowledges (clears) the alarm - which requires manual intervention. If the value is zero, the switch will never take the link out of service, no matter how many errors occur on the link. See hdlcErrorInterval on page 295. Default: 0

sendUnknownCalledPtyForNumOfDIDDigits

This setting controls how the switch builds a SETUP message when outPulseAsDialed (see page 298) is set to FALSE and the called party number is less than 7 digits long. Values are: FALSE (default) set the numberingPlanId field in the SETUP message to ISDN_NUMBERING_PLAN and the typeOfNumber field in the SETUP message to ISDN_SUBSCRIBER_NUMBER. TRUE set the numberingPlanId field in the SETUP message to UNKNOWN_NUMBERING_PLAN, and the typeOfNumber field in the SETUP message to ISDN_UNKNOWN_NUMBER,

routeOnRcvdCarrier

InbCarrier_OutbCarrier route on the Incoming Carrier if available, otherwise, route on the Outbound Carrier. InbCarrier_only route on the Incoming Carrier only. OutbCarrier_InbCarrier (default) route on the Outbound Carrier, if available, otherwise, route on the Incoming Carrier. OutbCarrier_only route on the Outbound Carrier only.

NOTE: The outbound carrier ID is the carrier value received in the TNS parameter for PRI trunk groups playBusyToneOnNetworkSid This setting allows the switch to play a busy tone on the e Network side of a PRI Trunk when the Far End indicates a busy condition after requesting cut-through. Values are: FALSE (default) switch does not play busy tone (PBX supplies busy tone). TRUE switch plays busy tone.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

303

Trunk Groups

defaultCnameDelivery

This setting controls the default behavior for calling name delivery when no calling name is available on the incoming trunk. Values are: All_Subscribers (default) Uses the name associated with the DefaultDN of the trunk group for all calls. Local_Subscribers_Only Uses the name associated with the DefaultDN of the trunk group only for local terminations. No_Delivery No delivery of the name associated with the DefaultDN.

delaySIPInviteForCallingPartyName

This setting affects PRI to SIP calls. It instructs the switch to wait for a ISDN PRI FACILITY message (which contains the Calling Party Name) before sending out the INVITE to the terminating endpoint. A value of 0 means no delay. Range: 0 - 1000 ms

modify PRITrunkGroup SWBPRI options responseToStatusEnquiry 1

304

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

PRI Trunk Group Restrictions

PRI Trunk Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. A PRI Trunk Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section PRI Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes
Attribute NO_OSSTATION NO_OSDIALED NO_DA OS_ONLY DA_ONLY NO_INTRALATA NO_INTERLATA NO_OS_INTRALATA NO_OS_INTERLATA NO_DA_INTRALATA NO_DA_INTERLATA NO_INTERNATIONAL Description Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls. Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls. Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group. Restrict all calls except operator services calls. Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List. Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls. Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2). Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1). Restrict OS intraLATA calls. Restrict OS interLATA calls. Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2). Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1). Restrict international calls.

NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL Restrict OS international calls. NO_INBOUND_WITHOUT Does not allow calls that do not include the ANI. _ANI

The PRI Trunk Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

modify modify

1 turns the restriction on 0 turns the restriction off.

PRITrunkGroup SWB1 restrictions NO_DA 1 PRITrunkGroup SWB1 restrictions OS_ONLY 0

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

305

Trunk Groups

Adding Facilities to a PRI Trunk Group insertInto PRITrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey> PRIFacility <oid> <cic>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a trunk to a PRI Trunk Groups facilities list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> <subkey> Description

PRI Trunk Group name

This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility.

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert a facility at the start of the facilities list. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of the facilities list.

<oid> <cic>

This attribute specifies which trunk you want to add to the Trunk Group. This attribute specifies the Circuit Identification Code of the inserted Trunk.

The following command adds trunk 26 on the local card to PRI Trunk Group SWB1:
insertInto PRITrunkGroup SWB1 facilities -1 PRIFacility Trunk-26-1-27 1

Removing Facilities from a PRI Trunk Group deleteFrom PRITrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a trunk to a PRI Trunk Groups facilities list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
NOTE: You must first lock the Trunk before you can remove it from the Trunk Group.

Syntax <key> <subkey>

Description

PRI Trunk Group name

This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

The following example locks trunk 26 on the local card and then removes it from PRI Trunk Group SWB1:

lock Trunk-26-1-27 deleteFrom PRITrunkGroup SWB1 facilities 1

306

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

IP Trunk Groups
An IP trunk group connects a SIP endpoint to a PIC cards Fast Ethernet Interface. More than one IP trunk group can be assigned to a SIP endpoint, as long as the directory number (DN) ranges assigned to each trunk group are different. Trunk Group has the following attributes:
Attribute key Description trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semi-colon (;), nor can it consist of either the word ALL or the word all options selectionMethod sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls tandemRoutingType The options for this trunk group. See IP Trunk Group Options on page 317. Note: this field is read-only. ROUND_ROBIN sequentially rotate the use of trunks TRUE allow operator assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow operator assisted calls TRUE allow directory assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow directory assisted calls Sets the type of routing for calls received on the trunk group.

NOTE: This attribute should be set to NO_ROUTING for IP trunk groups.

NO_ROUTING (default) Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscribers carrier, or the LNP code. CARRIER_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists TRUNKGROUP_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists ANI_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

307

Trunk Groups

Attribute defaultDN

Description Optional field for NetworkGateway endpoints. This is the pseudo subscriber DN for a Network Gateway. The default directory number (DN) is used for screening incoming IP calls on this trunk group. If provisioned, add a default subscriber with this number. see Subscribers on page 530

NOTE: If assigned, the defaultDN becomes the default ANI for 911 calls made without a 10 digit ANI. See E911DefaultANI on page 314 restrictions defaultNPA The restrictions on this trunk group. See IP Trunk Group Restrictions on page 322. The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7-digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see Prefixes on page 403. Length: 3 replaceDestinationDigits TRUE allow the use of replacement destination digits (called number) on the trunk group. The switch replaces part or all of the destination digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see Subscribers on page 530, Destination Digit Replacement on page 346, and replacementMode on page 405. FALSE do not replace Destination Digits and send the dialed digits. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not replace Destination Digits in the outgoing signaling messages if the called DN has a non-T7000 LRN associated with it replaceCarrier This attribute controls the use of a PCAC on the trunk

group.
TRUE allow the use of PCAC on the trunk group. The switch replaces the CAC depending on how the prefix or carrier is provisioned. See Prefixes on page 403, replacementMode on page 405, and Carriers on page 196. FALSE do not use a PCAC on the trunk group and send the CAC. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use a PCAC if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CAC.

308

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute replaceAniDigits

Description

This attribute controls the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group.
TRUE allow the use of a Pseudo ANI (PANI) on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI (calling number) depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See Subscribers on page 530. FALSE do not use a PANI on the trunk group and send the ANI. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use a PANI if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI.

replaceInfoDigits

TRUE allow the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI II digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned,See Subscribers on page 530. FALSE do not use PANI II digits on the trunk group and send the ANI II digits on the facility. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use PANI II digits if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI II digits on the facility

ftrsProfile

The profile assigned to the incoming trunk group. This profile determines how the switch manipulates digits and routing. See FTRS on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a FXO trunk group with a profile, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide. replaceCSI

This controls the use of the Carrier Selection Information parameter in outgoing messages on the trunk group.
TRUE allow the use of a PCSI on the trunk group. The switch replaces the outpulse of the CSI parameter depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See Subscribers on page 530 FALSE do not send a PCSI on the trunk group and send the CSI. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use PCSI if the called number has an non- T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CSI.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

309

Trunk Groups

Attribute localTermination

Description

The localTermination attribute controls if incoming trunk group allows for local terminations or not. If it does not allow for local terminations then use the trunk group in a tandem routing application. If you allow local terminations in a tandem routing trunk group, then if the DN terminates on the switch the calls for that DN will not be tandemed out of the switch.
ALLOW (default) allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch. NOT_ALLOWED only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

tandemDefaultRoutingType The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned: USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list. USE_NANP_CARRIER Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list. USE_CARRIER_ONLY Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. USE_NANP_ONLY Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. miscOptions The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs). An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see Screen Lists on page 415,and Prefixes on page 403.

denyAniList

310

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute direction

Description ONE_WAY_IN One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions. ONE_WAY_OUT One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

BI_DIRECTIONAL Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call tandemCustomReplacement Used to outpulse 7 digits for tandem calls. NO (default) no special outpulsing is performed. YES outpulse 7 digits for non-ported subscribers. See 7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing on page 409. codecListName The name of the codec list for this trunk group. A codec list is a container for codec profiles that are associated with one or more IP or MGCP trunk groups. See CodecProfileList on page 425. The name of the media stream parameter for this trunk group. Media stream parameters control the characteristics of the bearer or RTP portion of a VoIP call. See MediaParam on page 431

mediaParamName

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

311

Trunk Groups

Attribute maximumCalls

Description The number of maximum calls (sessions) based on the number of cards in the system or protection group and codec types used from 0-5376. The number of calls is based on the use of virtual IP trunks from the pool of 1,344 possible trunks per PIC. Since an IP trunk group has no physical facilities, there would otherwise be no limit to the number of calls that a subscriber or a group of subscribers could originate or terminate. This is where the IP Trunk Group concentration ratio is defined. For example, if you had 800 subscribers using a trunk group you could assign 200 as the maximum calls for a 4:1 ratio. Also, you could over assign the maximum calls per group, since the trunks get assigned as they are requested from the pool. 24=default 0-5376=range

priNearEndNiOid

Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface Facility (FEIF). This is the interface and associated IP address used for signalling. See OID on page 30. The secondary Fast Ethernet (FE) interface and associated IP address the PIC uses to provide redundancy.

secNearEndNiOid

NOTE: If you do not provision a secNearEndNiOid (secondary near end network interface object identifier) FE, the primary is always active and you do not have redundancy. If you do provision a secondary FE, the first FE to come into service is active. actNearEndNiOid activeCalls Note: This field is read-only. This field shows which FEIF is active. Note: This field is read-only. This dynamic field shows the number of calls the trunk group is currently carrying. operationalState Note: This field is read-only. UNREACHABLE Network problems are preventing the switch from communicating with the IP endpoint at the other end of the IP Trunk Group. REACHABLE the switch can communicate with the IP endpoint at the other end of the IP Trunk Group

312

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute administrativeState

Description Note: This field is read-only. LOCKED The IP Trunk Group is administratively prohibited from providing services. See lock on page 7. UNLOCKED The IP Trunk Group is administratively allowed to provide services. See unlock on page 7.. SHUTTING_DOWN The IP Trunk Group is currently providing services, but no new services are allowed to start. As soon as the last service completes, the administrativeState will automatically transition to LOCKED. See shutdown on page 7.

bearerAuditTimer1

The time, in milliseconds, after the IP call is established to initiate a check for received RTP packets. The default is 3600000 milliseconds (3600 seconds, or one hour). See auditBearerResources in this section. The time, in milliseconds, after bearerAuditTimer1 has expired to check for received RTP packets. The default is 600000 milliseconds (600 seconds, or ten minutes). See auditBearerResources in this section. This flag enables or disables bearer audits. Bearer audits timers prevent a hung IP call from using bandwidth. Bearer resource audits prevent a hung IP call from using bandwidth. The switch compares RTP packet counts from bearerAuditTimer1 and bearerAuditTimer2. If the count is the same, indicating no RTP packets have been exchanged, the switch tears down the call. If the count is different, indicating RTP packets have been exchanged, auditing restarts. TRUE the switch compares RTP packet counts from bearerAuditTimer1 and bearerAuditTimer2. If the count is the same, indicating that no RTP packets have been exchanged, the switch tears down the call. If the count is different, indicating RTP packets have been exchanged, auditing restarts (default). FALSE no bearer audit is performed.

bearerAuditTimer2

auditBearerResources

signalingAuditTimer signalingAuditMethod screenDN

Future feature. Note: This field is read-only. Future feature. Note: This field is read-only. a optional DN on which to screen calls. See screenDNChoice on page 317.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

313

Trunk Groups

Attribute useINFOMethod

Description TaquaWorks: Use of this option causes all routing and call control to be done by the BroadWorks platform NOTE: BroadWorks uses a propitiatory extension to the INFO method. This INFO method should only be sent to a BroadWorks application server. If set, the T7000 uses the INFO method to send hook flash events to BroadWorks, and receives Call Waiting Caller ID infromation from BroadWorks. FALSE (default) do not use the BroadWorks proprietary extension to the INFO method True use the BroadWorks proprietary extension to the INFO method.

sigFQDN

Fully Qualified Domain Name of the signaling Network Interface. If populated, this string can be used in place of the IP address and port number of the FEIF. See useSigFQDN on page 314. This attribute controls if the sigFQDN is used instead of the IP Address and Port Number of the Fast Ethernet Interface associated with this IP Trunk Group. Note that sigFQDN must be provisioned, or this field has no effect. Values are: FQDN_FOR_FROM_HDR use the sigFQDN to construct the FROM header. FQDN_FOR_CONTACT_HDR use the sigFQDN to construct the CONTACT header. FQDN_FOR_RPARTY_ID use the sigFQDN to construct the REMOTE PARTY ID header. FQDN_FOR_DIVERSION use the sigFQDN to construct the DIVERSION header.

useSigFQDN

bearerFreeGrpKey E911DefaultANI

future feature This attribute is used to specify a 10 digit ANI when a 911 call is made and the From: header does not contain a 10 digit number and a defaultDN is not assigned to the Trunk Group.

314

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

The Generic CLI is used for all IP Trunk Group commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key priNearEndNiOid

The optional parameters for the create command are:

defaultDN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

315

Trunk Groups

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

options sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls tandemRoutingType defaultDN restrictions defaultNPA replaceDestinationDigits replaceCarrier replaceAniDigits replaceInfoDigits ftrsProfile replaceCSI localTermination tandemDefaultRoutingType denyAniList direction codecListName mediaParamName maximumCalls priNearEndNiOid secNearEndNiOid bearerAuditTimer1 bearerAuditTimer2 auditBearerResources screenDN useINFOMethod sigFQDN useSigFQDN create IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp fe-0-10 modify IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp options sendCPN CPN modify IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp useINFOMethod TRUE lock IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp destroy IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp

316

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

IP Trunk Group Options

An IP Trunk Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a IP Trunk Group. IP Trunk Group Options have the following attributes:
Option Name plusOnePrepend Values TRUEsends the 1 with the 10-digit DN dialed in the INVITE message. This is required by Level3 for SIP network trunking FALSEno +1 is prepended doCallingNameDip TRUE a TCAP Calling Name database dip on incoming calls may be performed. If the Incoming Calling Name Presentation received = No Indication, then the Calling Name dip is done based on the Calling Number. The name received in the CName response is sent in the From header. If the Incoming Calling Name Presentation received = Toggle, then the Calling Name dip is done based on the Calling Number. The name received in the CName response is sent in the From header. If the Incoming Calling Name Presentation received = Available, then the Calling Name dip is not done for the Calling Number. The name received is sent in the From header. If the Incoming Calling Name Presentation received = Restricted, then the Calling Name dip is not done for the Calling Number. The Name presentation in the RPID or Privacy header is set to restricted. FALSE Calling Name database dip is never performed screenDNChoice Specifies how screening is performed for calls placed from IP trunk groups. By setting this attribute, you are instructing the switch to use different DNs to screen the call. Most values list more than one DN. If the first choice is not present, the switch looks for the second, and so on. NOTE: Calls are billed the using chargeNumberChoice (see page 321). SCREEN_DN (default) use this option when multiple IP Trunk Groups provisioned off the same Network Gateway require different screening treatments. Provision a screenDN in the IP Trunk Group and a pseudo-subscriber for the screenDN.
1. IP Trunk Group Screen DN IP Trunk Group Default DN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

317

Trunk Groups

Option Name screenDNChoice (continued)

Values CALLING_DN use this option for residential EVS subscribers or businesses. Provision a pseudo-subscriber on the T7000 for the calling DN.
1. Calling Party DN 2. IP Trunk Group Screen DN IP Trunk Group Default DN

DEFAULT_DN use this option for businesses and for IP Trunk Groups. Provision a defaultDN for the IP Trunk Group and a pseudo-subscriber for the defaultDN.
IP Trunk Group Default DN

DIVERSION_THEN_SCREEN use this option when the Network Gateway supplies a Diversion Header to indicate call forwarding and when multiple IP Trunk Groups provisioned off the same Network Gateway require different screening treatments. Provision a pseudo-subscriber for the diversion (redirecting) party on the T7000. Provision a screenDN in the IP Trunk Group and a pseudo-subscriber for the screenDN.
1. Diversion Header party 2. IP Trunk Group Screen DN IP Trunk Group Default DN

DIVERSION_THEN_CALLING use this option when the Network Gateway supplies a Diversion Header to indicate call forwarding. Provision a pseudo-subscriber for the diversion (redirecting) party on the T7000.
1. Diversion header party 2. Calling Party DN 3. IP Trunk Group Screen DN IP Trunk Group Default DN

DIVERSION_THEN_DEFAULT use this option when the Network Gateway supplies a Diversion Header to indicate call forwarding.. Provision a pseudo-subscriber for the diversion (redirecting) party on the T7000.
1. Diversion header party IP Trunk Group Default DN

routeAdvance

CALLING_DN use this option for residential EVS subscribers or businesses. Provision a pseudo-subscriber on the T7000 for the calling DN.
1. Calling Party DN 2. IP Trunk Group Screen DN 3. IP Trunk Group Default DN

318

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Option Name

Values

supportEarlyCutThrough for devices (typically IVRs) that need to cut through the twoway SIP voice path before the call is answered. Do not set these values for devices that support cutting through the twoway SIP voice path after the call is answered Type is Bitfield. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example. SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru Support early cut through for SIP to SS7 and SIP to PRI calls. SIPtoTDM_EarlyCutThru Support early cut through for SIP to TDM calls. sendCPN This option affects how the switch determines the Calling Party Number for SIP originations from a Network Gateway endpoint.

NOTE: The Preferred Privacy Option and the Privacy information received in incoming RPID or Privacy Header still continue to determine the Name and Number presentation.

Values are: CPN_DEFAULTDN (default) the T7000 sends the User Portion of the From Header as the Calling Party Number. If the From header does not have a User Portion then the DefaultDN from the Network gateway IP Trunk Group will be sent. DEFAULTDN The T7000 sends the defaultDN of the IPTrunkGroup as the Calling Party Number. DEFAULTDN_CPN The T7000 sends the defaultDN of the IPTrunkGroup as the Calling Party Number if it is provisioned on the IP Trunk group and datafilled in the Subscriber database. If no default DN is provisioned, the T7000 sends the User Portion of the From Header as the Calling Party Number (since DefaultDN is mandatory for a Network gateway IP Trunk Group, this option is the same as DEFAULTDN). NONE The T7000 does not send the Calling Party Number. CPN The T7000 sends the User Portion of the From Header as the Calling Party Number. sendUserForNoANI This option controls what to display on a SIP phone when a call originating from a CAS trunk has no ANI. SEND_UNAVAILABLE "Unavailable" SEND_ANONYMOUS "Anonymous" SEND_PRIVATE "Private" SEND_OUT_OF_AREA "Out-Of-Area"

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

319

Trunk Groups

Option Name sendCarrierId

Values This option controls which carrier ID to send. Values are: Off (default) Do not send a carrier ID. InbCarrier_OutbCarrier Send the inbound carrier ID, if it is present, otherwise, send the outbound carrier ID, if it is present. InbCarrier_only send the Inbound carrier ID, if it is present. OutbCarrier_InbCarrier Send the outbound carrier ID, if it is present, otherwise, send the inbound carrier ID, if it is present. OutbCarrier_only send the outbound carrier ID if it is present.

routeOnRcvdCarrier

InbCarrier_OutbCarrier route on the Incoming Carrier if available, otherwise, route on the Outbound Carrier. InbCarrier_only route on the Incoming Carrier only. OutbCarrier_InbCarrier (default) route on the Outbound Carrier, if available, otherwise, route on the Incoming Carrier. OutbCarrier_only route on the Outbound Carrier only.

callingPartyPresentationDisplay

This option affects how the switch builds the From header of an INVITE request when the endpoints preferredPrivacyMethod option is set to NO_PRIVACY_METHOD and the calling name or number is restricted. SEND_UNAVAILABLE "Unavailable" SEND_ANONYMOUS (default) "Anonymous" SEND_PRIVATE "Private" SEND_OUT_OF_AREA Out-Of-Area" See: preferredPrivacyMethod on page 437 (SIP Access Gateway Options) preferredPrivacyMethod on page 445 (SIP Emergency Services Gateway Options) preferredPrivacyMethod on page 455 (SIP Network Gateway Options)

revertToPrimaryFE

This option controls how the switch behaves after a failed primary FE recovers. Values are: FALSE (default) the switch continues to use the secondary FE. TRUE the switch reverts to using the primary FE.

320

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Option Name bypassVmNotifyDeliveryCheck

Values This option allows a subscriber who is not assigned to a Voice Mail Service to use call forwarding to forward a call to an M6 VMS. Values are: FALSE (default) the switch checks that a subscriber has voice mail service assigned before processing an incoming NOTIFY message. TRUE the switch processes the incoming NOTIFY message from the voice mail system without checking to see if the subscriber has voice mail service assigned.

chargeNumberChoice

This option selects the Charge Number for the call from one of the following choices: SCREEN_DN set the Charge Number to the screen DN if it exists, otherwise use the default DN of the Trunk Group CALLING_DN set the Charge Number to Calling Party Number if it exists, otherwise use the default DN of the Trunk Group DEFAULT_DN set the Charge Number to the default DN of the Trunk Group DIVERSION_THEN_SCREEN set the Charge Number to the diversion header number if it exists, otherwise use the screen DN if it exists, otherwise use the original address if it exists, otherwise use the Default DN of the Trunk Group. DIVERSION_THEN_CALLING set the Charge Number to the diversion header number if it exists, otherwise use the then original address if it exists, otherwise se the Calling Party number if it exists, otherwise use the Default DN of the Trunk Group DIVERSION_THEN_DEFAULT set Charge Number to the diversion header number if it exists, otherwise use the original address if it exists, otherwise use the Default DN SCREEN_CHOICE (default) set the charge number to the subscriber key

modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options screenDNChoice DEFAULT_DN modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThrough 1

NOTE: The supportEarlyCutThrough attribute is a nested bitfield, and must be handled differently from a normal bitfield. See Limitiations on page 10.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

321

Trunk Groups

IP Trunk Group Restrictions

IP Trunk Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. An IP Trunk Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section IP Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes
Attribute NO_OSSTATION NO_OSDIALED NO_DA OS_ONLY DA_ONLY NO_INTRALATA NO_INTERLATA NO_OS_INTRALATA NO_OS_INTERLATA NO_DA_INTRALATA NO_DA_INTERLATA NO_INTERNATIONAL NO_INBOUND_WITHOUT _ANI Description Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls. Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls. Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group. Restrict all calls except operator services calls. Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List. Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls. Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2). Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1). Restrict OS intraLATA calls. Restrict OS interLATA calls. Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2). Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1). Restrict international calls. Does not allow calls that do not include the ANI.

NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL Restrict OS international calls.

322

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

The IP Trunk Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

modify modify

1 turns the restriction on 0 turns the restriction off.

IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp restrictions NO_DA 1 IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp restrictions OS_ONLY 0

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

323

Trunk Groups

SS7 Trunk Groups

A Signaling System 7 (SS7) trunk group connects a switch to one of the following SS7 capable nodes:

Service Switching Point (SSP) a switch that recognizes Intelligent Network (IN) calls and can route and connect those calls Access Tandem (AT) a Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) switching system that provides access between a local exchange network and the interexchange networks Interexchange Carrier (IC) a long distance carrier that includes all facilities-based interLATA

An SS7 Trunk Group has the following attributes.

Attribute key Description trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semi-colon (;), nor can it consist of either the word ALL or the word all facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the trunk group. See Adding Facilities to a SS7 Trunk Group on page 344, and See Removing Facilities from a SS7 Trunk Group on page 344. The timers for this trunk group. See SS7 Trunk Group Timers on page 332. The options for this trunk group. See SS7 Trunk Group Options on page 336. FIRST_AVAILABLE always select the first trunk available ROUND_ROBIN (default) sequentially rotate the use of trunks sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls TRUE allow operator assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow operator assisted calls TRUE allow directory assisted calls FALSE (default) do not allow directory assisted calls

timers options selectionMethod

324

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute tandemRoutingType

Description Sets the type of routing for calls received on the trunk group. For a discussion of this attribute, see The tandemRoutingType Trunk Group attribute on page 234. NO_ROUTING (default) Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscribers carrier, or the LNP code. CARRIER_ROUTING (default) Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists TRUNKGROUP_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists ANI_ROUTING Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

restrictions defaultNPA

The restrictions on this trunk group. See CAS Trunk Group Restrictions on page 250. The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7-digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see Prefixes on page 403. Length: 3

NOTE: For DIDMF or DIDDTMF CAS trunks, the homeNPA of the defaultDN is added to the 7-digits, if available. If a defaultDN is not available, then the defaultNPA is used. For CAS trunks using FXO protocol, the homeNPA of the subscriber is added on the 7-digits replaceDestinationDigits TRUE allow the use of replacement destination digits (called number) on the trunk group. The switch replaces part or all of the destination digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See Subscribers on page 530, Destination Digit Replacement on page 346, and replacementMode on page 405. FALSE do not replace Destination Digits and send the dialed digits. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not replace Destination Digits in the outgoing signaling messages if the called DN has a non-T7000 LRN associated with it

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

325

Trunk Groups

Attribute replaceCarrier

Description This attribute controls the use of a PCAC on the trunk

group.
TRUE allow the use of PCAC on the trunk group. The switch replaces the CAC depending on how the prefix or carrier is provisioned. See Prefixes on page 403, replacementMode on page 405, and Carriers on page 196. FALSE do not use a PCAC on the trunk group and send the CAC. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use a PCAC if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CAC. replaceAniDigits

This attribute controls the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group.
TRUE allow the use of a Pseudo ANI (PANI) on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI (calling number) depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see Subscribers on page 530. FALSE do not use a PANI on the trunk group and send the ANI. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use a PANI if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI.

replaceInfoDigits

TRUE allow the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI II digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned,see Subscribers on page 530. FALSE do not use PANI II digits on the trunk group and send the ANI II digits on the facility. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use PANI II digits if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI II digits on the facility

ftrsProfile

The profile assigned to the incoming trunk group. This profile determines how the switch manipulates digits and routing. See FTRS on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a FXO trunk group with a profile, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

326

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute replaceCSI

Description

This controls the use of the Carrier Selection Information parameter in outgoing messages on the trunk group.
TRUE allow the use of a PCSI on the trunk group. The switch replaces the outpulse of the CSI parameter depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see Subscribers on page 530 FALSE do not send a PCSI on the trunk group and send the CSI. REPLACE_IfNotPorted do not use PCSI if the called number has an non- T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CSI.

localTermination

The localTermination attribute controls if incoming trunk group allows for local terminations or not. If it does not allow for local terminations then use the trunk group in a tandem routing application. If you allow local terminations in a tandem routing trunk group, then if the DN terminates on the switch the calls for that DN will not be tandemed out of the switch.
ALLOW (default) allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch. NOT_ALLOWED only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

tandemDefaultRoutingType The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned: USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list. USE_NANP_CARRIER Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list. USE_CARRIER_ONLY Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. USE_NANP_ONLY Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. miscOptions The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs). An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked.See Screen Lists on page 415, and Prefixes on page 403.

denyAniList

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

327

Trunk Groups

Attribute direction

Description ONE_WAY_IN One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions. ONE_WAY_OUT One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

BI_DIRECTIONAL Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call tandemCustomReplacement Used to outpulse 7 digits for tandem calls. NO (default) no special outpulsing is performed. YES outpulse 7 digits for non-ported subscribers. See 7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing on page 409. pointCode type point code of non-adjacent node to which trunk group connects. See Point Codes on page 470. The signaling type that matches the connection at the other end: ANSI for American National Standards Institute signaling type primarily used in North America ITU Internal value, not available in current release

328

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Attribute isdnMsgTrace

Description This debug attribute controls how the switch shows ISDN Call Establishment, Call Clearing, Maintenance and Miscellaneous messages. The messages are displayed when running a CLI session on the card that has the SS7 Trunk Group. MSG_TRACE_NONE The message trace for this trunk group is off. MSG_ONLY Shows ISDN Call Establishment, Call Clearing, Maintenance, and Miscellaneous messages in a Procomm window that connects to the card that contains the span. MSG_WITH_INBOUND_DUMP Shows ISDN messages and a dump of inbound IEs. MSG_WITH_OUTBOUND_DUMP Shows ISDN messages and a dump of outbound IEs. MSG_WITH_BOTH_DUMP Shows ISDN messages and a dump of inbound and outbound IEs.

CAUTION
Contact Taqua TAC Support before using this option. defaultJIP This optional attribute is used to specify a default Jurisdiction Information Parameter (JIP) when the JIP is not included in an incoming IAM message. JIP is an optional parameter in the IAM message, but it should always be included when feasible. If an IAM message is received without a JIP, the defaultJIP will be used to determine the Rate Center and recorded in the CDR. If the call is forwarded through the switch, the defaultJIP will be sent if the incoming IAM did not include a JIP. The defaultJIP should reflect the LATA or MSC of the originating switch, and be in the form of NPA-NXX. E911DefaultANI This attribute is used to specify a 10 digit ANI when a 911 call is made and neither the Calling Number nor the Charge Number contains a 10 digit ANI.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

329

Trunk Groups

The Generic CLI is used for all SS7 Trunk Group commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key pointCode

The optional parameters for the create command are:

type

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

timers options selectionMethod sendOAssistCalls sendDAssistCalls tandemRoutingType restrictions defaultNPA replaceDestinationDigits replaceCarrier replaceAniDigits replaceInfoDigits ftrsProfile replaceCSI localTermination tandemDefaultRoutingType denyAniList direction type isupMsgTrace

330

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

facilities

See Adding Facilities to a SS7 Trunk Group on page 344, and Removing Facilities from a SS7 Trunk Group on page 344.

Prerequisites
Provision the SS7 network before provisioning SS7 trunk groups, see createSS7Network on page 475. Provision a non-adjacent SS7 node with the same point code as the SS7 trunk group before provisioning an SS7 trunk group, see createNode on page 476.

createSS7Network net y n createNode remote 229-101-000 net Y n n create SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 229-101-000 ANSI modify SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 sendOAssistCalls FALSE query SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 options destroy SS7TrunkGroup SSP1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

331

Trunk Groups

SS7 Trunk Group Timers

An SS7 Trunk Group Timer object contains the timers that control the behavior of an SS7 Trunk Group. The SS7 timers default settings meet the industry standard. SS7 Trunk Group Timers have the following attributes
Timer GuardTime Description The time after the release of a circuit to ensure that a minimum time interval is used between calls Range: 700 - 1,200 ms Default: 1,200 ms ChargeDelay The amount of time a terminating trunk waits before generating answer supervision toward the originator. Range: 0 - 5,000 ms Default: 0 ms T1 The time between sending a Release message and receiving a Release Complete message. Resends a Release message and restarts the T1 timer when the timer expires. Range: 4,000 - 15,000 ms Default: 10,000 ms T5 The time between sending the initial Release message and receiving the Release Complete message. Sends a Reset Circuit Message, starts the T17 timer, and stops the T1 timer when the timer expires. Default: 60,000 ms T6 The time between the Network Suspend message and receiving a Resume message. This message has dual significance, local and remote and starts the release procedure. Default: 30,000 ms T7 The time between the Initial Address message and the address and routing information for normal release. This message has dual significance, local and remote. Releases all equipment and connections when the timer expires. Default: 25m000 ms T8 The time between receiving the Initial Address message of previous or incoming continuity check and receiving the Continuity message. Releases all equipment and connections when the timer expires. Default: 12,000 ms

332

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Timer T12

Description The time between the Blocking message and the Blocking Acknowledge message. Resends a Blocking message and restarts T12 when the timer expires. Default: 10,000 ms The time between the initial Blocking message and the Blocking Acknowledge message. Resends a Blocking message, starts T13 timer, and stops the T12 timer when the timer expires. Default: 60,000 ms The time between the initial Blocking message and the Blocking Acknowledge message. Resends Unblocking message and restarts T14 when the timer expires. Default: 10,000 ms The time between the initial Unblocking message and the Unblocking Acknowledge message. Resends Unblocking message, starts T15 timer, and stops T14 when the timer expires. Default: 60,000 ms The time between the sending of a Reset Circuit message not due to a T5 timer ending and the receipt of Release Complete message. Resends Reset Circuit message and restarts T16 when the timer expires. Default: 10,000 ms The time between sending an initial Reset Circuit message not due to the expiration of T5 and receiving a Release Complete message. Resends the Reset Circuit message, restarts T17, and stops T16 when the timer expires. Default: 60,000 ms The time between a Circuit Group Blocking message and the receipt of Circuit Group Blocking acknowledgement. Resends the Circuit Group Blocking message and restarts T18 when the timer expires. Default: 10,000 ms The time between the initial Circuit Group Blocking message and the receipt of Circuit Group Blocking acknowledgement. Resends the Circuit Group Blocking message, restarts T19, and stops T18 when the timer expires. Default: 60,000 ms

T13

T14

T15

T16

T17

T18

T19

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

333

Trunk Groups

Timer T20

Description The time between the initial Circuit Group Unblocking message and the receipt of Circuit Group Unblocking acknowledgement. Resends Circuit Group Unblocking message and restarts T20 when the timer expires. Default: 10,000 ms The time between the initial Circuit Group Unblocking message and the receipt of Circuit Group Unblocking acknowledgement. Resends Circuit Group Unblocking message, restarts T21, and stops T20 when the timer expires. Default: 60,000 ms The time between the Circuit Group Reset message and the receipt of an acknowledgement. Resends Circuit Group Reset message and restarts T22 when the timer expires. Default; 10,000 ms The time between the initial Circuit Group Reset message and the receipt of an acknowledgement. Resends Circuit Group Reset message, restarts T23, and stops T22 when the timer expires. Default: 60,000 ms The time between sending a check tone and the receipt of the backward check tone. Sends Continuity message indicating failure and starts T25 when the timer expires. Default: 1,900 ms The time between the first Continuity Check failure and when continuity is detected. Sends a Continuity Check Request message and repeats Continuity Check when the timer expires. Default: 5,000 ms The time between a second Continuity Check failure and continuity is detected. Sends a Continuity Check Request message, restarts T26, and checks continuity when the timer expires. Default: 60,000 ms The time between the receipt of a Continuity message indicating failure of repeat continuity check and the receipt of Continuity Check Request message. Sends Reset Circuit message, starts T16, and stops T17 when the timer expires. 180,000 ms The time between a Circuit Query message and the receipt of Circuit Query Response message. 10,000 ms

T21

T22

T23

T24

T25

T26

T27

T28

334

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Timer T34

Description The time between sending a Loop-Back Acknowledge message in response to the receipt of Continuity Check Request message and a Continuity or Release message. Releases all equipment, sends a Reset Circuit message, starts T16, and stops T17 when the timer expires. Default: 10,000 ms The time between a Circuit Reservation Acknowledge message and the receipt of Initial Address message or Release message. Initiates the release procedure when the timer expires. Default: 20,000 ms The time between a Circuit Validation Test message and the receipt of Circuit Validation Response message. Resends the Circuit Validation Test message and restarts TCVT when the timer expires. Default: 10,000 ms The time between a Continuity Check Request message and the receipt of Loop-Back Acknowledgement message. Sends a Reset Circuit message, starts T16, and starts T17 when the timer expires. Default: 20,000 ms The Hardware Carrier Group Alarm is the time between carrier loss and carrier restore. Default: 120,000 ms The time between receiving an ACC indicator and expiration of the alarm. Removes the ACC controls in the exchange when the timer expires. Default: 5,000 ms The time between a Circuit Group Blocking message and the receipt of Circuit Group Blocking or Circuit Group Unblocking message. Accepts the subsequent Circuit Blocking message as a new message when the timer expires. Default: 5,000 ms The time between a Circuit Group Reset Message and the receipt of Circuit Group Reset Message. Accepts the subsequent Circuit Group Reset Message as a new message when the timer expires. Default: 5,000 ms

TCRA

TCVT

TCCR

THGA

TACC

TCGB

TGRS

modify SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 timers T1 4750

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

335

Trunk Groups

SS7 Trunk Group Options

An SS7 Trunk Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a SS7 Trunk Group. SS7 Trunk Group Options have the following attributes:
Option Name chargingOffice Defines if the switch records the outboundCarrierConnectTime and the outboundCarrierDisconnectTime in the CDR generates partial CDRs for originating calls in the trunk group. 0=False outboundCarrierConnectTime and outboundCarrierDisconnectTime are not stored, and that the partial CDR is not generated. 1=True CarrierConnectTime and outboundCarrierDisconnectTime are stored, and that the partial CDR is generated continuityTestFrequency Determines how often the switch tests availability by sending a signal from the sending party that is looped back by the receiving party. The value specifies the number of calls completed per termination per port before a test is made. The switch sends the COT test at 2010 Hz for 4-wire and 1780 Hz for 2-wire circuits 0=Never Range: 1-16, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100 glareControl Glare control identifies the trunks on which the switch processes seizure when there is glare and those from which the switch backs down. Coordinate these values with the other side of the trunk group, for example, if the switch is all then the other end is none. 0=Odd To process seizure on the odd trunks in the trunk group and back down on the even trunks 1=Even To process seizure on the even trunks in the trunk group and back down on the odd trunks 2=All To process seizure of all the trunks in the trunk group 3=None To back down on all of the trunks in the trunk group Values

336

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Option Name sendCallingName

Values Determines how the calling name, if available, will be sent in the Initial Address Messages. 0=FALSE do not send calling name 1=sendGenericName include calling name in the generic name parameter 2=sendPartyInfo include calling name in party info parameter if the calling name is not restricted 3=sendPartyInfoThenGn include the calling name in party info parameter if the calling name is not restricted, otherwise include calling name in the generic name parameter

sendCallingNumber

Indicates if the number of the calling party is included in signaling for the trunk group. 0=False 1=True

sendCarrierId

Indicates if the carrier identification of the service provider is included in signaling for the trunk group. 0=False 1=True

sendJurisdictionInformation

Indicates if the information about the geographic boundary of the service provider is included in signaling for the trunk group. This is the LRN value assigned to the originating rate center of the calling party. 0=False 1=True

sendChargeNumber

The charge number is one of the following: Billing number for subscribers located on the switch, the ANI for calls received on CAS trunk groups, or the charge number received on PRI and SS7 trunk groups. If a charge number is not received, the switch uses the Calling Party Number. The options for charge number are: 0=IF_NOT_CALLING sends the Charge Number parameter only when the value is different from the Calling Party Number parameter value for the call 1=ALWAYS_CPN_CHARGE_NUM always sends the Calling Number as the Charge Number. 2=NEVER never sends a Charge Number parameter 3=ALWAYS_CHARGE_NUM always sends the Charge Number parameter\.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

337

Trunk Groups

Option Name sendCallProgress

Values Indicates if the status of the telephone line (including: ringing, busy ring, voicemail answering, intercept) is included in signaling for the trunk group. 0=False 1=True

terminationType

Indicates the type of SS7 termination switch: 0=SSP Switch Signaling Point for terminations to another End Office 1=AT Access Tandem for terminations to a Class 4 switch 2=IXC Inter Exchange Carrier for terminations to a carrier switch

continuityProcedure

Indicates the type of wire, either 2 wire (2w) if the terminating switch is analog or 4 wire (4w) if it is digital. 2=2wsends COT at 1780Hz and receives COT at 1780Hz 4=4wsends COT at 2010Hz and receives COT at 2010Hz

sendHopCounter

Sends the hop parameter (the number of nodes between a source and a destination) in the Initial Address message. 0=False 1=True

OLIRequired

Allows the switch to accept an inbound call without the Originating Line Information (OLI) parameter in an Initial Address Message (IAM). 0allow the switch to accept these calls 1not allow the switch to accept these calls.

sendGenericDigits

Allows the switch to send digits in the outgoing IAM message that identify supplementary service, for example the Calling Name Delivery is allowed or restricted 0=False 1=True

338

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Option Name networkServices

Values Set BLV/BLI only on trunk groups coming from an operator station. One trunk group is required for each service. 0=NONE 1=BLVBusy Line Verification allows an external operator to verify if a subscriber line is busy. An operator calling over a BLV trunk receives a busy signal if the line is busy or a ring-back if the line is idle. 2=BLIBusy Line Interrupt allows an external operator to interrupt a busy line. An operator calling over a BLI trunk interrupts the busy subscriber who can either drop the existing conversation and accept the operator call or continue with the existing conversation.

sendTNS

Options for sending the Transit Network Selection (TNS) parameter in the IAM for non-SAC calls (for AT and IXC terminationType trunk groups): 0=STANDARDsends the TNS according to the definitions in GR-394-CORE: For a terminationType of AT, the switch always sends the TNS if the carrier is not 0110 For a terminationType of IXC, the switch only sends the TNS for international calls 1=ALWAYSalways send TNS regardless of terminationType or carrier 2=NEVERnever send TNS regardless of terminationType or carrier 3=CARRIER_NOT_0110send TNS only if the carrier value for the call is not 0110, for AT terminationType trunk groups only (Note: 0110 is the CAC for SAC calls.) 4=CARRIER_0110send TNS only if the carrier value for the call is 0110, for AT terminationType trunk groups only

NOTE: The sendTNS field does not apply to trunk groups with an SSP terminationType, the switch never sends the TNS for this type.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

339

Trunk Groups

Option Name sendSACTNS

Values Options for sending the Transit Network Selection (TNS) parameter in the IAM for SAC calls (for AT terminationType trunk groups): 0=STANDARDif switch does not perform the SCP dip for the SAC number, the switch always sends a TNS parameter with carrier value 0110 1=SAC_CARRIER_0110the switch sends the TNS parameter only if the carrier value for the call is 0110 2=NEVERthe switch never sends the TNS parameter

releaseOption

RELEASE_CALL sends a release with cause (rejects the call) to the far end when a call cannot be completed, use in tandem applications RELEASE_TREATMENT releases the call and send it to treatment

send00asOLI

In the Initial Address Message (IAM), the T7000 includes the Originating Line Identifier (OLI) parameter. OLI is populated using the provisioned originatingLineType for subscriber originations, and the received OLI/facility information digits value for trunk group originations. 1=TRUEIf an OLI parameter is sent in the outgoing IAM, the T7000 sets the OLI value to 00 for all calls routed on the SS7 trunk group. 0=FALSEIf an OLI parameter is sent in the outgoing IAM, the T7000 sends the originating OLI/Information digit value in the outgoing IAM.

keepIncoming7dNOA

When the NPA is added, this option checks the nature of address (NOA) for the called number included in the outbound IAM: 0=TRANSLATE_NOANOA changes from SUBSCRIBER_NUMBER to NATIONAL_NUMBER 1=KEEP_NOANOA stays the same

routeAdvance

1=TRUEif a specific cause value is returned, attempt to route the call on the next trunk group in the route list. 0=FALSEif a specific cause value is returned, the call routes to treatment

340

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

Option Name passExtCharForCallingName

Values This option controls how the Calling Name is presented. The Calling Name is conveyed using ASCII characters. Normally, the Calling Name is composed of characters from the lower half of the 256 ASCII character set. However, sometimes characters from the upper half are sent as well. Although the upper half of the ASCII character set contains mostly graphics characters, it also contains some characters used in European languages, such as , , and . Unfortunately, some switches will interpret a character from the upper half of the ASCII character set as being the end of the Calling Name (technically, this is called the Extension Bit, and it indicates the last octet in the field). In such a case, you will need to set this attribute to FALSE to prevent the T7000 from confusing the switch at the other end. Values are: FALSE (default) limits the value of characters in the Calling Name to the lower half of the ASCII character set. TRUE does not limit the values of characters in the Calling Name.

sendCPCategoryAsEmergency ForESGW

Overrides the call type of calls sent from an Emergency Services Gateway. Such calls are translated by the gateway into a 10 digit DN, which may be recognized by the PSAP as a 911 call. TRUE forces the ESGW call type to be e911 FALSE (default) sends the default call type for the call.

doNotUseJipForCallingNumber

Determines if the call type is determined by JIP (the Jurisdiction information parameter, which is optionally sent by the originating exchange in the IAM message). Only affects calls which have the JIP available. TRUE do not use the jurisdiction Info number to determine the call type. FALSE (default) use the jurisdiction Info number to determine the call type.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

341

Trunk Groups

Option Name recTNSinOutbCarrier

Values This option determines the handling of Carrier Code information in the CDR of a call that was routed using carrier routing. TRUE populate the CDR with the outbound Carrier Code, regardless of how the call is routed. FALSE (default) only populate the CDR with the outbound Carrier Code when the call is routed using Carrier Routing.

passFacilityMessage

Determines if the switch passes any received ISUP FACILITY message from an inbound SS7 trunk to the outbound SS7 Trunk Group. TRUE pass any received ISUP FACILITY message on to the outgoing SS7 trunk group. FALSE (default) do not pass the received ISUP FACILITY message on to the outgoing trunk group.

routeOnRcvdCarrier

InbCarrier_OutbCarrier route on the Incoming Carrier if available, otherwise, route on the Outbound Carrier. InbCarrier_only route on the Incoming Carrier only. OutbCarrier_InbCarrier (default) route on the Outbound Carrier, if available, otherwise, route on the Incoming Carrier. OutbCarrier_only route on the Outbound Carrier only.

NOTE: The incoming carrier is the CARRIER ID parameter received on SS7 trunk groups. The outbound carrier ID is the carrier value received in the TNS parameter for SS7 trunk groups sendToneOnE911TrunkAtOnHook Determines if the switch sends a tone to the PSAP if an E911 caller goes on hook TRUE switch sends dial tone to the PSAP if an E911 caller goes on hook. FALSE (default) no tone is sent ignore1stFacilityMessage This option determines the handling of the ISUP Facility message. It was added for Canadian 911 service. TRUE ignore the Facility message. FALSE (default) do not ignore the Facility message.
modify SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 options sendCPCategoryAsEmergencyForESGW TRUE modify SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 options sendSACTNS SAC_CARRIER_0110

342

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Groups

SS7 Trunk Group Restrictions

SS7 Trunk Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. An SS7 Trunk Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions. SS7 Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes
Attribute NO_OSSTATION NO_OSDIALED NO_DA OS_ONLY DA_ONLY NO_INTRALATA NO_INTERLATA NO_OS_INTRALATA NO_OS_INTERLATA NO_DA_INTRALATA NO_DA_INTERLATA NO_INTERNATIONAL NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL Description Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls. Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls. Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group. Restrict all calls except operator services calls. Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List. Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls. Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2). Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1). Restrict OS intraLATA calls. Restrict OS interLATA calls. Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2). Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1). Restrict international calls. Restrict OS international calls.

NO_INBOUND_PAYSTATIO Does not allow a non-subscriber-initiated call if the N information digit/OLI is 7, 29 or 70. NO_INBOUND_WITHOUT_ ANI Does not allow calls that do not include the ANI.

The SS7 Trunk Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

modify modify

1 turns the restriction on 0 turns the restriction off.

SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 restrictions NO_DA 1 SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 restrictions OS_ONLY 0

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

343

Trunk Groups

Adding Facilities to a SS7 Trunk Group insertInto SS7TrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey> TGFacility <subvalue>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a trunk to an SS7 Trunk Groups facilities list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

SS7 Trunk Group name

This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility.

<subkey>

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert a facility at the start of the facilities list. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of the facilities list.

<subvalue>

This attribute specifies which trunk you want to add to the Trunk Group.

The following command adds trunk 0 on the local card to SS7 Trunk Group SSP1:
insertInto SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 facilities 1 SS7Facility Trunk-0-1-27 1

Removing Facilities from a SS7 Trunk Group deleteFrom SS7TrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a trunk to an SS7 Trunk Groups facilities list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
NOTE: You must first lock the Trunk before you can remove it from the Trunk Group.

Syntax <key>

Description

SS7 Trunk Group name

This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

<subkey>

The following example locks trunk 0 on the local card and then removes it from SS7 Trunk Group SSP1:

lock trunk-0 deleteFrom SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 facilities 1

344

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Outgoing Signaling Customization

Outgoing Signaling Customization

Outgoing Signal Customization customizes outgoing signaling information for inband and out-of-band signaling. This feature alters the outgoing signaling message content and format, without changes to the switch software. Outgoing Signal Customizing changes the following content of signaling messages:

CAC Substitution uses a Pseudo Carrier Access Code (PCAC) that replaces the original pre-subscribed or dialed CAC in the signaling message.See CAC Substitution on page 346.
Destination Digit Replacement uses a replacement string of digits that replace or overlay digits in an original destination number. The new number is sent as the called number in the signaling message.See Destination Digit Replacement on page 346. ANI Replacement uses Pseudo ANI (PANI) digits that replace the original ANI (calling number). The PANI is sent out in the outgoing signaling message.See ANI Replacement on page 347. ANI II Digit Replacement uses PANI II digits that replace the original ANI II digits. The PANI II digits are sent out in the outgoing signaling message. See ANI II Digit Replacement on page 347. CSI Replacement uses a Pseudo Carrier Selection Information (PCSI)

value that defines if a subscriber is presubscribed to a carrier or not. CSI replacement applies only to calls originating on the switch. See CSI Replacement on page 348.
NOTE: The Flexible Translation, Routing, and Signaling (FTRS, see FTRS on page 223) feature also customizes outgoing signaling information for in-band and outof-band signaling. If FTRS and Outgoing Signal Customization are provisioned on a switch, FTRS takes priority over Outgoing Signal Customization.

Outgoing Signal Customization only applies to calls originating on the switch, as well as to calls tandemed through the switch on CAS, PRI, IP and SS7 Trunk Groups. This feature applies to all subscriber originations on the switch, including: analog lines, GR-303, a PBX with a default DN, and hunt groups. However, outgoing Signal Customization does not affect:

CDR

E911 calls

The callType of the CDR is the call type of the call before outgoing signaling customization occurs. Each of the pseudo replacements have their own unique CDR field.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

345

Outgoing Signaling Customization

CAC Substitution
CAC Substitution provisions a PCAC that is sent in the outgoing call setup signal. In standard call processing, the CAC in the outgoing signaling message is the same as the CAC used for routing. When the leading digits of an Original Destination Number match a terminating prefix with a PCAC, this feature sends a different CAC (the PCAC) in the signaling message in place of the one the switch uses to route the call.

For CAS signaling the switch sends the PCAC in the outgoing signaling message. For SS7 signaling the switch sends the PCAC in the optional Transit Network Selection (TNS) and Carrier Identification Parameter (CIP) parameters of the Initial Address Message (IAM). To set the TNS, use the Generic CLI modify command on the Carrier to set the circuit code. See
Carriers on page 196.

For PRI signaling, if the TNS Information Element (IE) is sent in the SETUP, the switch sends the PCAC in the TNS IE.

The following objects determine the CAC the switch uses to route the call:

The pre-subscribed carrier for the subscriber (PIC1/PIC2) The carrier from the 101XXXX CAC dialed by the subscriber The switchs default OS and DA carriers The switchs default PIC2 carrier

Destination Digit Replacement

Destination Digit Replacement provisions replacement destination digits sent in outgoing call setup messages. In standard call processing, the destination digits in the outgoing signaling message are the same as the digits dialed by the subscriber or derived by translation in the switch. This feature sends different destination digits in the signaling message than the switch uses to route the call. When the leading digits of an Original Destination Number match a terminating prefix that has replacement digits assigned:

For CAS signaling the switch sends the modified destination digits in the outgoing signaling message. For SS7 signaling the switch sends the modified destination digits in the Called Party parameter of the IAM. For PRI signaling the switch sends the modified destination digits in the Called Party Number of the SETUP message.

346

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Outgoing Signaling Customization

ANI Replacement
ANI (calling number) Replacement provisions a Pseudo ANI (PANI) sent in outgoing call setup messages. In standard call processing, the ANI sent in the outgoing signaling message is the same as the ANI of the subscriber. This feature sends a different ANI (the PANI) in the signaling message in place of the subscriber's ANI. When leading digits of an Original Destination Number match a terminating prefix with a PANI assigned:

For CAS signaling the switch sends the replacement ANI in the outgoing signaling message. (Except for FGC.) For SS7 signaling the switch sends the replacement ANI in the Calling Party parameter in the IAM. For PRI signaling the switch sends the replacement ANI in the Calling Party Number of the SETUP message.

The following table contains examples of replacing the ANI.

Original No. Dialed 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 Original ANI (Dialing) 214 597 1234 214 597 1234 214 597 1234 214 597 1234 817 817 540 817 540 5575 817 540 5575 PANI ANI in Outgoing Signal 817 817 540 817 540 5575 817 540 5575

ANI II Digit Replacement

ANI II Digit Replacement provisions Pseudo ANI II (PANI II) digits sent in outgoing call setup messages. In standard call processing, the ANI II digits sent in the outgoing signaling message are the same as the ANI II digits associated with the facility. This feature sends different ANI II digits (the PANI II digits) in the signaling message in place of the ANI II digits associated with a facility. When leading digits of a Original Destination Number match a terminating prefix with PANI II digits assigned:

For CAS signaling the switch sends the PANI II digits in the outgoing signaling message. For SS7 signaling the switch sends the PANI II digits in the IAM.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

347

Outgoing Signaling Customization

CSI Replacement
Replaces the Carrier Selection Information (PCSI) value, which defines if a subscriber is presubscribed to a carrier or not. CSI replacement applies only to calls originating on the switch. The CSI is an optional parameter in the SS7 Initial Addressing Message (IAM). For CAS, the CSI is the KP digit in the ANI sequence. The CSI value overrides the ANI KP type in the CAS protocol.Outgoing Signal
CSI Value SS7 Selected CAC presubscribed and not input by calling party 0000 0001 Selected CAC presubscribed and input by calling party Selected CAC presubscribed, no indication of whether input by calling party CAS Selected CAC presubscribed and not input by calling party FGCOS DP=KP DTMF=KP' FGDAT/OS DP=KP DTMF=KP Selected CAC presubscribed and input by calling party FGCOS DP=KP DTMF=KP FGDAT/OS DP=KP DTMF=KP Selected CAC presubscribed, no indication of whether input by calling party FGCOS DP=KP DTMF=KP FGDAT/OS DP=KP DTMF=KP Selected CAC not presubscribed and input by calling party FGCOS DP=KP DTMF=KP FGDAT/OS DP=KP DTMF=KP 0000 0010 0000 0011 Outpulse

Selected CAC not presubscribed and input by calling party 0000 0100

348

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Outgoing Signaling Customization

Replacement Mode
Controls what is or is not replaced on a Prefix, i.e., sets the replacement mode for a prefix on the switch. For details, see Prefixes on page 403, and replacementMode on page 405. The following table contains examples of digit replacement.
Original No. Replace Prefix 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 972 692 1909 555 1212 972 692 972 692 972 692 972 692 972 692 972 692 972 692 972 692 972 692 972 692 1909 972 555 1212 817 540 540 817 540 4 817 540 817 817 540 4 817540 817 817 5 404 817 540 5575 004 555 1212 005 555 1212 817 540 1909 540 1909 817 540 4 1909 817 540 1909 817 692 1909 817 540 4909 817540 817 817 5 404 817 540 5575 004 555 1212 005 555 1212 Same length replacement of the prefix Shorter replacement of the prefix Longer replacement of the prefix Same length overlay of digits Shorter overlay of digits Longer overlay of digits Same length replacement of digits Shorter replacement of digits Longer replacement of digits Same length replacement of digits 972 is the home NPA of the caller 214 is the home NPA of the caller Prefix Replacement Digits Digits in Outgoing Signal Description

Overlay Original Destination Digits

Replace Original Destination Digits

1411, 411 or 0411 214 411

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

349

Outgoing Signaling Customization

Customization Provisioning Process

Outgoing Signal Customization is provisioned on the prefix and carrier and controlled on trunk groups. Use the following steps to provision outgoing signal customization on the switch: 1. Use these commands to provision the outgoing signal customization on the prefix: Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see Prefixes on page 403) PCAC attribute to set the Pseudo CAC (PCAC) for a prefix sent in the outgoing call setup signal.

Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see Prefixes on page 403) replacementDigits attribute to set replacement destination digits (called number) for the original destination number in the outgoing call setup message. Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see Prefixes on page 403) and the replacementMode attribute (see replacementMode on page 405) to set the replacement mode for a prefix. Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see Prefixes on page 403) replacementCSI attribute to set the replacement CSI for subscriber. Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see Prefixes on page 403) replacementAniDigits attribute to set the replacement digits for the ANI (calling number) of a call. Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see Prefixes on page 403) replacementInfoDigits attribute to set Pseudo ANI II (PANI II) digits sent in outgoing call setup messages.

2. Use the Generic CLI modify command to set the PCAC for a carrier object that is sent in the outgoing call setup signal. See Carriers on page 196. 3. Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Carrier to set the circuit code in the optional Transit Network Selection (TNS) parameter sent with the associated CAC or PCAC, when using SS7 trunks. See Carriers on page 196. 4. Use the Generic CLI modify command to control the use of digit, PCAC, ANI, and ANI II digit replacement on a trunk group. This enables the outgoing signal customization feature on the applicable trunk groups. See Trunk Groups on
page 233.

350

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

GR-303

GR-303
General Requirements (GR)-303 is a group of specifications. The switch uses GR303 to be part of an Integrated Digital Loop Carrier (IDLC) system. The GR-303 option configures and connects the switch to a Remote Digital Terminal (RDT). The RDT, in turn, connects to subscribers telephones.

createRDT
This command was replaced in Release 6.0.1 with the Generic CLI create command. See Interface Groups on page 258

replaceRDT
replaceRDT <name> <location> <vendor> <primarySpanOID> <primarySpanLogicalID> <secondarySpanOID> <secondarySpanLogicalID> [flow-thru provisioning]
This command changes the attributes of an existing RDT. See createRDT on page 351 for information on each attribute.

CAUTION
Replacing an RDT may negatively affect operations.

replaceeRDT RDT1

Dependent Commands
Add analog lines and spans:

see provisionRDTLine on page 353

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

351

GR-303

reprovisionRDT reprovisionRDT rdtName

This command reprovisions an RDT. Use this command if you are replacing an RDT. This command works whether or not flow-through provisioning (FTP) is enabled. With FTP enabled, you can reprovision the RDT using CLI. Without FTP enabled, this command just cycles through the initialization phase without provisioning.

Prerequisites
RDT, see createRDT on page 351
Syntax rdtName RDT name Description

reprovisionRDT RDT1

Dependent Commands
After reprovisioning the RDT, you can:

Provision analog lines on the RDT, if it allows FTP, provisionRDTLine on

page 353.

Resynchronize the EOC and TMC, syncRDTLine on page 356.

352

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

GR-303

provisionRDTLine provisionRDTLine <rdtName> <startTermId> [endTermId] [loop | ground] [2wire | 4wire] [setOOS]
This command provisions one or more RDT analog lines connecting the RDT to subscribers.

Prerequisites
RDT, see createRDT on page 351.
Syntax <rdtName> [endTermId] [loop ground] name of RDT number of the last analog line on the RDT to add. If adding only one analog line, do not enter this value. loopstart if the RDT provides battery on the ring and ground on the tip groundstart if the RDT provides battery on the ring and open (0 VDC) on the tip. Description

<startTermId> the number of the first analog line on the RDT to add (1-2048)

NOTE: The RDT must have a line card that can recognize groundstart [2wire 4wire] [setOOS] 2wire terminating switch is analog 4wire terminating switch is digital sets the line(s) out of service

NOTE: To put the line in the in-service state, ensure the physical connection has been made and skip this parameter.

provisionRDTLine RDT1 1 100 loop 2wire

Dependent Commands
After you add analog lines you can:

add GR-303 subscribers, see Subscribers on page 530. bring the line into service, restoreRDTLine on page 355.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

353

GR-303

deprovisionRDTLine deprovisionRDTLine <rdtName> <termId> [endTermId]

This command deprovisions one or more RDT analog lines connecting the RDT to subscribers.
NOTE: Deprovisioning does not remove an analog line from service, but removes the attributes set when provisioning the analog lines. To remove an analog line from service, see removeRDTLine on page 355.

Prerequisites
RDT lines, see provisionRDTLine on page 353.
Syntax <rdtName> <termId> [endTermId] name of RDT number of the first analog line on the RDT you want to deprovision (12048) number of the last analog line on the RDT to deprovision if deprovisioning only one analog line, do not enter this parameter Description

deprovisionRDTLine RDT1 1 100

354

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

GR-303

restoreRDTLine restoreRDTLine <rdtName> <termId>

This command restores an RDT analog line connecting an RDT to a subscriber. Restoring an RDT analog line places a provisioned RDT analog line back in service.

Prerequisites
RDT lines, see provisionRDTLine on page 353. RDT lines, see removeRDTLine on page 355.
Syntax <rdtName> <termld> name of RDT number of the RDT analog line on the RDT to restore (1-2048) Description

restoreRDTLine RDT1 515

removeRDTLine removeRDTLine <rdtName> <termId> [normal | forced]

This command removes an RDT analog line connecting an RDT to a subscriber. Removing an RDT analog line does not deprovision the line (i.e. remove the lines attributes). Removing an RDT analog line actually removes that line from service.

Prerequisites
RDT lines, see provisionRDTLine on page 353.
Syntax <rdtName> <termld> [normal forced] name of RDT number of the RDT analog line on the RDT to remove (1-2048) normal removes the RDT analog line from service after all calls currently in progress have been completed forced removes the RDT analog line from service regardless of whether or not calls are in progress. Calls in progress on that line are dropped Description

removeRDTLine RDT1 515 normal

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

355

GR-303

syncDS1Line syncDS1Line <rdtName> <startLineId> [endLineId]

This command retrieves the status of a DS1 spans connecting a switch to an RDT. When a RDT is physically disconnected, but not deprovisioned, use syncDS1Line after a new RDT is connected. The DS1 should automatically resync, but this command ensures that they are resynced..
Syntax <rdtName> [endLineId] name of RDT last DS1 to sync (1-28) <startLineId> first DS1 to sync (1-28) Description

syncDS1Line RDT1 1 28

syncRDTLine syncRDTLine <rdtName> <startTermId> [endTermId]

This command retrieves the status of an RDT analog line connecting an RDT to a subscriber.

Prerequisites.
RDT lines, see provisionRDTLine on page 353.
Syntax <rdtName> [endTermId] name of RDT last RDT analog line on the RDT to sync (1-2048) Description

<startTermId> first RDT analog line on the RDT to sync (1-2048)

syncRDTLine RDT1 1 2048

356

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

GR-303

syncRDTClock syncRDTClock <rdtName>

This command synchronizes the RDT clock to the T7000 clock.
NOTE: Not all RDTs support this command. Consult your equipment documentation.

Prerequisites
RDT with EOC or TMC, see createRDT on page 351..
Syntax <rdtName> name of RDT Description

syncRDTClock RDT1

setEOCTasks setEOCTasks <rdtName> <on | off>

This command turns background tasks on/off. These tasks are audits between the switch and the RDT.

Prerequisites
RDT with EOC or TMC, see createRDT on page 351..
Syntax <rdtName> <on off> name of RDT on turns EOC audits on off turns EOC audits off Description

setEOCTasks RDT1 off

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

357

MGCP

MGCP
Order of Provisioning

For information on the commands included in the above provisioning flow, refer to the following topics in the VoIP section:

setFeifIPAddr on page 422 setFeifOptions on page 424 CodecProfile on page 427

CodecProfileList on page 425 MediaParam on page 431

The Generic CLI is used for all MGCP commands, see Using Generic CLI
Commands on page 6.

358

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

MGCP Trunk Group

An MGCP trunk group has the following attributes:
attribute key options selectionMethod value MGCP trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233. The options for this trunk group. See MGCPTrunk Group Options on page 363. Note: This field is read-only. FIRST_AVAILABLE always select the first available route ROUND_ROBIN (default) use the available routes sequentially defaultDN In the defaultDN field, enter the default directory number (DN) for a trunk group used for screening incoming IP calls on this trunk group. Also, add a default subscriber with this number. See See Subscribers on page 530..

tandemDefaultRoutingType The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned: USE_CARRIER_NANP Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list USE_NANP_CARRIER Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list USE_CARRIER_ONLY Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. USE_NANP_ONLY Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment. miscOptions denyAniList Miscellaneous options are added using ISUs. These appear at the trunk group level. The name of a previously created screening list. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see Screen Lists on page 415.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

359

MGCP

attribute direction

value ONE_WAY_IN One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions. ONE_WAY_OUT One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions. NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch. BI_DIRECTIONAL Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call

tandemCustomReplaceme nt

Used to outpulse 7 digits for tandem calls. NO (default) no special outpulsing is performed. YES outpulse 7 digits for non-ported subscribers. See 7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing on page 409

codecListName

The name of the codec list for this trunk group. A codec list is a container for codec profiles that are associated with one or more IP or MGCP trunk groups. See CodecProfileList on page 425. The name of the media stream parameter for this trunk group. Media stream parameters control the characteristics of the bearer or RTP portion of a VoIP call. See MediaParam on page 431. The maximum number of active calls this trunk group can handle. Since an MGCP trunk group has no physical facilities, there would otherwise be no limit to the number of calls that a subscriber or a group of subscribers could originate or terminate. Note: This field is read-only. This dynamic field shows the number of calls the trunk group is currently carrying.

mediaParamName

maximumCalls

activeCalls

operationalState

Note: This field is read-only. UNREACHABLE Network problems are preventing the switch from communicating with the IP endpoint at the other end of the MGCP Trunk Group. REACHABLE the switch can communicate with the IP endpoint at the other end of the MGCP Trunk Group

360

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

attribute administrativeState Note: This field is read-only.

value

LOCKED The MGCP Trunk Group is administratively prohibited from providing services. See lock on page 7. UNLOCKED The MGCP Trunk Group is administratively allowed to provide services. See unlock on page 7. SHUTTING_DOWN The MGCP Trunk Group is currently providing services, but no new services are allowed to start. As soon as the last service completes, the administrativeState will automatically transition to LOCKED. See shutdown on page 7. bearerAuditTimer1 The time, in milliseconds, after the IP call is established to initiate a check for received RTP packets. The default is 3600000 milliseconds (3600 seconds, or one hour). The time, in milliseconds, after bearerAuditTimer1 has expired to check for received RTP packets. The default. is 600000 milliseconds (600 seconds, or ten minutes) auditBearerResources This flag enables or disables bearer audits. Bearer audits timers prevent a hung IP call from using bandwidth. When bearer audits are enabled, the switch compares RTP packet counts from bearerAuditTimer1 and bearerAuditTimer2. If the count is the same, indicating that no RTP packets have been exchanged, the switch tears down the call. If the count is different, indicating RTP packets have been exchanged, auditing restarts. The default is TRUE. Assigned key string for customized Digit Map. See Digit Maps on page 378.

bearerAuditTimer2

digitMapKey

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

361

MGCP

Creating an MGCP Trunk Group

The Generic CLI is used for all MGCP Trunk Group commands, see Using Generic
CLI Commands on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

defaultDN

Modifying an MGCP Trunk Group

The modify command applies only to the following attributes:

options defaultDN tandemDefaultRoutingType denyAniList direction codecListName mediaParamName maximumCalls bearerAuditTimer1 bearerAuditTimer2 auditBearerResources digitMapKey create CardConfiguration pic1 PIC 10 create MGCPTrunkGroup ipgrp1 modify MGCPTrunkGroup ipgrp1 maximumCalls 250 lock MGCPTrunkGroup ipgrp1 destroy MGCPTrunkGroup ipgrp1

362

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

MGCPTrunk Group Options

An MGCP Trunk Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a MGCP Trunk Group. MGCP Trunk Group Options have the following attributes:
Option Name Values

supportEarlyCutThrough For devices (typically IVRs) that need to cut through the twoway voice path before the call is answered. Do not set this option for devices that support cutting through the two-way voice path after the call is answered. Values are: ON support early cut through of the two-way voice path before the call is answered. OFF (default) do not support early cut through of the twoway voice path before the call is answered.
modify MGCPTrunkGroup ipgrp1 options supportEarlyCutThrough ON

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

363

MGCP

MediaGatewayProfile
A MediaGatewayProfile defines different types of media gateways. Associate one or more MediaGateways with a media MediaGatewayProfile. A MediaGatewayProfile has the following attributes:
attribute key terminationPrefix values name of MediaGatewyaProfile the prefix portion of the analog access line local termination names: aaln/# analog access lines, for example: aaln/1, aaln/2 phone phones, for example: phone1, phone2 requestedInfo a bitfield of information the T7000 can audit. These options are individually turned on or off by name. REQUESTED_EVENTS DIGIT_MAP SIGNAL_REQUESTS REQUEST_IDENTIFIER NOTIFIED_ENTITY CONNECTION_IDENTIFIER DETECT_EVENTS OBSERVED_EVENTS VERSION_SUPPORTED REASON_CODE EVENT_STATES (default) MAX_MGCP_DATAGRAM CAPABILITIES quarantineHandling NONE If the MediaGateway cannot process the MGCP command CRCXs Q parameter, set this to NONE STEP one notification per NotificationRequest is allowed LOOP (default) multiple notifications per NotificationRequest are allowed supportedPackages a bitfield of packages supported by the T7000. These options are individually turned on or off by name. LINE (default) GENERIC (default) DTMF (default) MEDIA_FORMAT

364

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

attribute signalSupport

values a bitfield that describes the behavior of a signal sent to the MediaGateway. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example. NOTE: Gateways from different vendors require different sets of attributes. Before setting these attributes, Read Your Friendly Manual to see which attributes your Gateway requires! CRCXorRQNTwithTO when sending a CRCX or RQNT, include a "t" with the digit map parameter. Some MTAs won't work without the "t" CRCXwoSDP send offering CRCX without SDP. Send MDCX with SDP after call been established DetectEvt4EmbedRQNT send Detect Events in embedded RQNT IgnoreOffOnHookEvts when the PostEmbeddedRQNT option is selected, the NOTIFY received may contain OffHook and OnHook events without any digits. This option allows the switch to ignore the OffHook/OnHook event and not send a CRCX/DLCX... when Media Terminations is in the idle (OnHook) state LCFOSupport select if the MTA/CM supports the ability to send the Loop Current Feed Open (LCFO) signal when the termination disconnects, required by some terminations (default is on) MDCXonConnect if enabled the T7000 sends MDCX when the call has been answered (default is off) MDCXonTransient after the subscriber has dialed all of their digits, some MTAs require the Call Agent to send a MDCX indicating a media direction of "sendRecevie". Otherwise, when the called party answers, they get a one way voice path PostEmbeddedRQNT send an embedded RQNT when the MGCP phone goes onhook. This RQNT contains a digitMap (D: field). The next time the MGCP phone goes offhook, it plays dial tone and collects digits, based on the digitMap. When the phone matches a dialing pattern from the digitmap, or detects an inter-digit timeout, it sends a NOTIFY containing both the offhook event and collected digits.

Tip
If the MGCP phone supports an embedded RQNT, Taqua recommends using this option, since it results in significantly fewer messages passed between the phone and the switch.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

365

MGCP

attribute signalSupport (continued)

values ROHToggle if S:ot(-) is sent to MTA/CM to turn off ROH at ROH timeout (default is off) RQNTonHookEvent if enabled the T7000 sends RQNT when it receives NOTIFY hook event (off hook, on hook or flash hook). Set this flag to support Motorola and Scientific Atlanta EMTA's, and other devices that require an RQNT after a hook event RQNTorCRCXwSpecialDfield if enabled the T7000 sends a RQNT with a special string in the D: field. This option can be used to customize communication with certain gateways. See specialDfieldStr on page 369 SendAUEPatTO with this attribute set and upon receiving a timeout response from an AUEP or RQNT, the Call Agent will send an AUEP. Without that setting, the switch will assume the phone is idle and on hook. Leaving this attribute unset can keep the switch from flooding the ethernet with messages (on large scale failures). bracketType controls the type of bracketing added by the T7000 if the bracketedIP attribute is enabled. Has no effect if the bracketedIP attribue is disabled. disabled - [ip]:port enabled - [ip:port] bracketedIP if enabled, the T7000 adds brackets to the notified entity field of MGCP messages that are sent from the PIC. The type of brackets is controlled by the bracketType attribute cidCWaitSupport if MTA/CM supports S:rg,ci() signal for caller id call waiting (default is on) digitMapForMidCall use the digit map specified for this gateway when collecting digits in the middle of a call (for example, after hook flash). This attribue is not set by default, which means that the call agent will request the MTA to send one digit at a time. keepAlive if enabled, the T7000 sends an AUEP every <keepAliveTime> interval to keep firewall hole open for signaling path between T7000 and MTA/CM mwiToggle if turning off MWI stutter dial tone is indicated as S:L/mwi(-) or S:L/dl on the next call after voice mail indicator transition from YES to NO (default is off) reorderForROH certain gateways do not accept the ROH signal S:L/ot. If enabled S:L/ro is sent instead of ROH resendAUEP resend AUEP if bit set using 'auditInterval' in MGTerminationProfile

366

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

attribute DLCXOptions

values mechanism to delete a residual connection on the media gateway when it administratively transitions from locked to unlocked NO_DLCX(default) no DLCX is sent PREFIX_TERM_ID one DLCX is sent for every termination on the gateway (default) PREFIX_STAR one DLCX (with the terminationPrefix *) is sent to the gateway STAR_ONLY one DLCX (with the *) as the endpoint to the gateway

encodeDigitMap THIST

UPPERCASE where D: x is uppercase LOWERCASE where D: x is lowercase (default) the time, in milliseconds, that the T7000 waits before resending to the media gateway the last MGCP command the media gateway sent range 10,000-60,000 30,000 (default)

retransmitTime

initial timer value, in milliseconds, for the T7000 to retransmit the MGCP command it sent, if a response is not received by the T7000 range 100-2,000 200 (default)

keepAliveTime

If mgKeepAliveToggle is set to ON (in the signalSupport parameter), then this is the value of the interval range 1,000-180,000 60,000 (default)

MAX1

number of retransmits before trying another IP address of a media gateway, must be less than MAX2 range 5-25 7 (default)

MAX2

number of retransmits before disconnecting the association with a media gateway, must be greater than MAX1 range 5-25 11 (default)

TMAX

maximum time to continue retransmitting commands to the media gateway range 0-20000 20000 (default)

minRTOThresh

lower threshold for which the retransmission timer starts 200-2,000 1,000 (default)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

367

MGCP

attribute maxRTOThresh

values upper threshold for which the retransmission timer starts 2,000-10,000 4,000 (default)

responseAckParam

whether or not to send the transaction IDs included in the K line of the MGCP command (ResponseAck manages the facility with a list of confirmed transaction-id ranges), this adds previously unacknowledged transaction IDs to a new transaction (see responseAckNum to set the number of transaction IDs added) INCLUDE (default) NOT_INCLUDE

responseAckNum

Tip
You cannot modify this attribute after setting it. To change the value, delete and re-create the MediaGatewayProfile.

number of transaction IDs included in the K line of the MGCP command (see responseAckParam) 1-50 10 (default)

enablePiggyback

Internal value allows the T7000 to send several MGCP messages at the same time to one or more terminations on a media gateway and vice versa For example, after getting NOTIFY from a termination operating in lockstep mode, the T7000 sends the response and a new NotificationRequest command together to ensure message delivery fate-sharing of the two. ENABLE DISABLE (default)

piggybackTime

time to wait before sending a list of commands together using piggyback 0-200 200 (default)

transLowWaterMark

maximum pending transactions before the T7000 stops sending 101 Provisional Responses 0-100 25 (default)

transHighWaterMark

minimum pending transactions from the media gateway when the T7000 starts to send 101 Provisional Responses 0-100 50 (default)

368

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

attribute provRespTime

values time to wait for a media gateway retransmission, after which the T7000 sends a Provisional Response 100-1,000 200 (default)

responseRetransEnabled

enables retransmission of a response when the media gateway sends a Provisional Response YES (default) NO

keepIPAddrFromSTATICto YES (default) if the address Mode changes from RSIP STATIC, do not reset the IP address. NO reset the IP address when the address Mode changes from STATIC specialDfieldStr A custom digit map sent when RQNTorCRCXwSpecialDfield is set in signalSupport on page 365.

Tip
Support for Occum ([0-9#*]) is build into the switch software, and is automatically sent when

RQNTorCRCXwSpecialDfield is set. Populate this field only for equipment requiring a different custom digit map.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

369

MGCP

The Generic CLI is used for All MediaGatewayProfile command, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key terminationPrefix

The modify command applies only to the following parameters:

terminationPrefix requestedInfo quarantineHandling supportedPackages signalSupport DLCXOptions encodeDigitMap THIST retransmitTime keepAliveTime MAX1 MAX2 TMAX minRTOThresh maxRTOThresh responseAckParam enablePiggyback piggybackTime transLowWaterMark transHighWaterMark provRespTime responseRetransEnabled keepIPAddrFromSTATICtoRSIP spedialDfieldStr

create MediaGatewayProfile p "aaln/" modify MediaGatewayProfile p requestedInfo DIGIT_MAP 1 modify MediaGatewayProfile p signalSupport CRCXorRQNTwithTimeout 1

370

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

MediaGateway
A MediaGateway has the following attributes:
attribute key endpointName profileName value name of the MTA/CM a more descriptive or intuitive name for the MTA/CM name of MediaGatewayProfile associated with this

MediaGateway. See MediaGatewayProfile on page

364. bearerGrpKey priHostIPAddrPair name of the BearerGroup associated with this MediaGateway. See BearerGroup on page 163. If using STATIC as the addressMode this is the primary IP address and port of the MTA/CM. If using RSIP as the addressMode, this attribute should be left blank actHostIndex HOST_NOT_USED OUTBOUND_PROXY_ACTIVE PRIMARY_HOST_ACTIVE SECONDARY_HOST_ACTIVE transportType The IP protocol used for signaling UDP (default) TCP signalingType signaling to use when communicating with the MGCP gateway: MGCP 1.0 (default) MGCP_NCS MGCP 1.0 NCS 1.0 cmtsName FQDN administrativeState Name of the CMTS of this endpoint If the IP address mode for the gateway is DNS, this is the full-qualified domain name of the MTA/CM. LOCKED The MediaGateway is administratively prohibited from providing services. See lock on page 7. UNLOCKED The MediaGateway is administratively allowed to provide services. See unlock on page 7. SHUTTING_DOWN The MediaGateway is currently providing services, but no new services are allowed to start. As soon as the last service completes, the administrativeState will automatically transition to LOCKED. See shutdown on page 7 domain the domain portion of the termination identifier in MGCP messages. For example, in: Host1@taqua.com, taqua.com is the domain name

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

371

MGCP

attribute addressMode

value how the T7000 initiates communication with the media gateway STATIC The T7000 specifies the IP address. If the MTA/CM tries to communicate with a different address the T7000 rejects it. RSIP (default) the MTA/CM dynamically specifies the IP address

nearEndNiOid

Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface Facility (FEIF). See OID on page 30. This is the interface and associated IP address on the T7000 used to communicate with the MTA/CM.

terminations

a list of MGCP terminations associated with this MediaGateway.

372

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

The Generic CLI is used for all MediaGateway commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key profileName bearerGrpKey domain nearEndNiOid

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

endpointName profileName priHostIPAddrPair signalingType cmtsName FQDN domain addressMode nearEndNiOid

Use the lock and unlock commands before modifying a MediaGateway.

create MediaGateway gw1 p bg_mg1 "gw1.taqua.com" fe-0 lock MediaGateway gw1 modify MediaGateway gw1 priHostIPAddrPair $IP_ADDR:2400 modify MediaGateway gw1 addressMode STATIC

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

373

MGCP

MGTerminationProfile
A MGTerminationProfile defines different types of MediaGateway terminations. Associate MediaGateway terminations with these profiles. A MGTerminationProfile has the following attributes:
attribute key auditInterval value name of MGTerminationProfile rate, in milliseconds, at which AuditEndpoint (AUEP) messages are sent to the termination to synchronize it with the T7000. AUEP messages determines the status of a termination and aids in debugging. Also used by NCS. 60,000-1800000 60,000 (default) timedDisconnectTime for terminating calls, the time to wait (in milliseconds) after the called party has gone on hook before initiating disconnect procedures 2,000-10,000 5,000 (default) reoriginateTime time to wait (in milliseconds) after call completes before reorigination is started 1,000-10,000 2,000 (default) LCFODuration the duration (in milliseconds) of the Loop Current Feed Open (LCFO) signal. This signaling is required by some terminations. 0-7500 If set to 0, then no LCFO is signaled to the termination. 700 (default) sendLCFO priorityCallRingPattern ENABLE send LCFO to the termination (default) DISABLE do not send LCFO to the termination ring pattern to send for priority call rg mgcpRingDefault r0 mgcpRing0 r1 mgcpRing1 r2 mgcpRing2 r3 mgcpRing3 r4 mgcpRing4 r5 mgcpRing5 (default)

374

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

attribute acarRingPattern

value ring pattern to send for automatic callback/automatic call return alerting rg mgcpRingDefault r0 mgcpRing0 r1 mgcpRing1 r2 mgcpRing2 r3 mgcpRing3 (default) r4 mgcpRing4 r5 mgcpRing5

revertiveRingPattern

ring pattern to send for revertive ringing rg mgcpRingDefault r0 mgcpRing0 r1 mgcpRing1 (default) r2 mgcpRing2 r3 mgcpRing3 r4 mgcpRing4 r5 mgcpRing5

The Generic CLI is used for all MG Termination Profile commands, see Using
Generic CLI Commands on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The modify command applies only to the following parameters:

auditInterval timedDisconnectTime reoriginateTime LCFODuration sendLCFO priorityCallRingPattern acarRingPattern revertiveRingPattern

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

375

MGCP

MGTermination
A MGTrmination (MediaGateway) has some of the characteristics of lines or trunks. But MGTerminations are like GR-303 CRVs in that they must always belong to an MGCP trunk group. You cannot remove an MGTermination from an MGCP trunk group, but you can move it from one MGCP trunk group to another.
NOTE: Lock MG terminations to move them from one MGCP trunk group to another. See lock on page 7

An MGTermination has the following attributes:

attribute key mediaGatewayName termID profileName name of MediaGateway. number of MGTermination (similar to GR-303s CRV) name of MGTerminationProfile associated with this MGTermination is. See MGTerminationProfile on page 374. name of MGCP trunk group associated with this MGTermination. The Administrative state of the MGTermination. LOCKED The MGTermination is administratively prohibited from providing services. See lock on page 7. UNLOCKED The MGTermination is administratively allowed to provide services. See lock on page 7. SHUTTING_DOWN The MGTermination is currently providing services, but no new services are allowed to start. As soon as the current service completes, the administrativeState will automatically transition to LOCKED. See shutdown on page 7. masterAdministrativeState The Administrative state of the MGCP Trunk Group that contains this MGTermination. If the masterAdminstrative state is UNLOCKED, call processing uses the administrative state attribute, otherwise, it uses the masterAdministrative state. LOCKED The MGCP Trunk Group is administratively prohibited from providing services. See lock on page 7. UNLOCKED The MGCP Trunk Group is administratively allowed to provide services. See unlock on page 7. SHUTTING_DOWN The MGCP Trunk Group is currently providing services, but no new services are allowed to start. As soon as the last service completes, the administrativeState will automatically transition to LOCKED. See shutdown on page 7. value name of the MGTermination

mgcpTrunkGroupName administrativeState

376

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

The Generic CLI is used for all MG Termination commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key mediaGatewayName termID profileName mgcpTrunkGroupName

The modify command applies only to the following parameters:

profileName mgcpTrunkGroupName

NOTE: Use the lock and lock commands before modifying a MediaGateway.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

377

MGCP

Digit Maps
A Digit Map specifies one or more Digit Map patterns. A Digit Map is used to streamline call processing between the switch and an MGCP endpoint. Once a Digit Map is sent to an MGCP endpoint, the MTA uses the Digit Map patterns to collect the digits in a call, which it sends to the switch in one NTFY message. This is much more efficient than sending one digit at a time in a series of NTFY messages - all of which have to be acknowledged with a 200 OK reply. Consider the dialing plan in use at the CO when building up a Digit Map. In some cases, a single generic Digit Map pattern will suffice. In others cases, you may need to define several specific Digit Map patterns. Use the following characters to construct a Digit Map pattern.
Character 0, 1, 2, 3...9 X [] [-] * # T Any digit 0 through 9 Specifies a grouping of digits. Any one digit from the group satisfies the digitpattern. Specifies a range of digits. Any one digit from the range satisfies the digit pattern. Specifies the star key Specifies the pound key Specifies a timeout. Used to terminate a pattern. Description Digits 0 through 9, specified explicitly

A Digit Map pattern can be short and simple, or it can be a long, complex string of characters. Here are some example Digit Map patterns, ranging from simple to complex:
Digit Map "00" "*XX" "[2-9]11" Dial 0, 0 Dial any two digits, 0 through 9 Dial any single digit, 2 through 9, then 1, 1. The resultant patterns are: 211, 311, 411 911 "[01][2-9]11" Dial either 0 or 1, then any single digit, 2 through 9, then 1, 1 The resultant patterns are: 0211, 0311, 0411 0911, and 1211, 1311, 1411 1911 "0[T#]" Dial 0, then either the pound key or a timeout specifies the end of the dialing pattern. Meaning

378

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

Digit Map "101XXXX[29]XXXXXX[T#]" Dial 1, 0, 1,

Meaning then any 4 digits from 0 through 9, then any single digit 2 through 9, then any six digits 0 through 9 then either the pound key or a timeout specifies the end of the dialing pattern. (The resultant patterns are too numerous to list!)

The Generic CLI is used for all Digit Map commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

patterns

See Adding a Pattern to a Digit Map on page 380, and Removing a Pattern from a Digit Map on page 381.

create DigitMap n11

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

379

MGCP

Adding a Pattern to a Digit Map insertInto DigitMap <key> patterns <subkey> DigitMapPattern <subvalue>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a Digit Map pattern into a Digit Maps patterns list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

Digit Map name

This is the index in the pattern list where you want to enter the Digit Map pattern.

<subkey>

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert a DigitMap pattern at the start of the patterns list. Use a index of -1 to insert a DigitMap pattern at the end of the patterns list.

<subvalue>

This attribute specifies the Digit Map Pattern

insertInto DigitMap n11 patterns 1 DigitMapPattern "[2-9]11"

query DigitMap n11 <490a140> DigitMap key........"n11" patterns...<490af60> <490af60> DigitMapList collection...List (1 items) -> (1) <490cc50> DigitMapPattern pattern..."[2-9]11"

380

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

MGCP

Removing a Pattern from a Digit Map deleteFrom DigitMap <key> patterns <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a Digit Map pattern from a Digit Maps patterns list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

Digit Map name

This is the index in the pattern list where you want to remove the Digit Map Pattern.

subkey

deleteFrom DigitMap n11 patterns 1 query DigitMap n11 <490a140> DigitMap key........"n11" patterns...<490af60> <490af60> DigitMapList collection...List (0 items) ->

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

381

OfficeParams

OfficeParams
The OfficeParms object contains parameters that affect the entire switch An OfficeParms object has the following attributes:
Attribute key CLLICode Lata options OS Provider DA Provider name of the switch signed CLLI (Common Language Location ID) code three digit Local access and transport area identifier The options for this Officeparms object. See OfficeParms Options on page 389. name of the office-default carrier providing Operator Services (OS) If present, restrict must also be present name of the office-default carrier providing Directory Assistance (DA) If present, restrict and OS Provider must also be present rateCenter name of the local rate center If present, restrict, OS Provider and DA Provider must also be present timers OSSInfoDigits The timers for this Officeparms object. See OfficeParms Timers on page 391. The information digits (ANI digits) that force calls to route to an Operator Service System (OSS) instead of normal routing. By default, calls with information digits of 6, 7, and 29 are routed to an OSS The Service Profile to associate with this Central Office See Service Profile on page 152. Vertical Service Codes that specify the dialing patterns for Description

serviceProfile serviceCodes

CLASSSM and Custom Calling services such as Call Forwarding.

For a complete list of services, and their default service codes, see the T7000 Product Description Manual. countryCodes The countryCodes list specifies country codes of the countries that can be dialed. Country codes determine the proper country code of international OSS calls over CAS protocols.

Tip
To find a specific country code, go to http://www.the-acr.com/codes/cntrycd.htm

transFlag

Yes outpulses the translated number for local digit translation routing on the switch. No (default) does not outpulse the translated number for local digit translation routing.

382

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

OfficeParams

Attribute LLControl

Description Line load control level. When a line load class is suspended, subscribers with that line load class cannot make calls. Line load control relieves congestion by cutting off classes of subscriber lines to the switch. This provides better service to the remaining subscribers and reduces the chance of CO failure. Line load control divides subscribers into three separate groups: A the highest priority group, and requires communications during emergencies. Subscribers in this group include: law enforcement, fire, and rescue personnel. B secondary priority, typically businesses and some individuals C tertiary priority, typically individuals Typically, group A contains 10% of the subscribers with the B and C groups containing the remaining 90%. During an emergency, use line load control on C or on B and C to reduce congestion and allow subscribers in group A to communicate. This attribute is a bitfield. The line load classes are individually turned on or off by name. See example CLASS_A CLASS_B CLASS_C

Tip
To see the Line Load class of a particular subscriber, see query Subscriber on page 552.

vmwiTimerA

The number of hours that the switch attempts to send an Visual Message Waiting Indicator (VMWI) message to a subscriber line that is off-hook. If the timer expires, then the switch stops trying to send the Indicator message. This timer is only used when a subscriber is off-hook and receives a new voice mail message. Values are: 2hr 2.5hr 3hr 3.5hr 4hr Default: 2.5hr

vmwiTimerB

The interval that the switch sends a refresh message to subscribers with voicemail service. The refresh message updates the subscribers CPEs with VMWI. This ensures the correct status of a CPE, if the VMWI is lost for any reason. The switch does not send a refresh message if the setting is 0 minutes. Values are: none 15min 30min 45min 60min Default: 30min

redirectingNumberAs CallerID

No (default)) to send the calling partys DN as the caller ID when a call is forwarded from a base station Yes to send the DN of the base station as the caller ID (instead of that of the original caller) when a call is forwarded.

NOTE: The default value for this field is No, and should not be changed unless you want to change the Caller ID DN that is forwarded for all calls on the switch

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

383

OfficeParams

Attribute callingNameDisplayOption

Description LastNameFirst (default) to display the last name of the subscriber first on a subscribers caller ID device. For example Lisenby, Jeremy. FirstNameFirst to display the last name of the subscriber first on a subscribers caller ID device. For example Jeremy Lisenby.

useVMWIOSITimer

This field controls which timer is used when sending MWI to a subscribers phone: TRUE the switch uses the VMWIOSITimeout timer, see useVMWIOSITimer on page 384. FALSE (default) the switch uses the LCFO_Duration timer, see LCFO_Duration on page 246.

ftrsProfile

The FTRS profile assigned to all originations on the switch. The T7000 checks subscriber or trunk group FTRS profiles first; if the dialed pattern does not match a pattern in that FTRS profile the switch checks this profile. The name of a previously created screening list. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see Screen Lists on page 415. FALSE (default) Media Gateway IP addresses can not dynamically change. TRUE Media Gateway IP addresses can dynamically change automatically (i.e., without human intervention), as with a DNS, for example.

denyAniList

mgcpDynamicIPUpdates

sipUserAgentName

This is the string sent in the User-Agent Header of SIP request messages. As per RFC 3261, the sting is configurable, and can be changed if required.

ANA_announcement- The delay between first and second Automatic Number Pause Announcement. See Automatic Number Announcement on page 665. Values are in seconds Range: 1 - 10 Default: 5 NOTE: This timer also controls the delay between the first and second Changed Number Announcement. sendRespForREGSatOverFlow Determines the switch's response to a SIP REGISTER request when the maxREGScps threshold is exceeded. ResponseNone Do not send any response. Response403 (default) Send a 403 Forbidden response. Response503 Send a 503 Service unavailable response.

384

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

OfficeParams

Attribute sendRespForRSIPat OverFlow

Description Determines the switch's response when the maxRSIPScps threshold is exceeded ResponseNone Do not send any response. Response200 Send a 200 OK responseS

tmsDigit

Specifies the digit a caller needs to enter to interrupt the announcement and terminate the call when the Telemarketer Screening announcement is played. Type is Bitfield. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example. DISCONNECT_WITHOUT_DIGIT it the tmsDelay timer expires without the caller entering a digit. If this option is selected, the switch disconnects the call. If this option is not selected (default), the switch terminates the call normally TRIGGER_ON_RESTRICTED triggered for callers with a presentation of restricted, private or anonymous. If this option is selected, the Telemarketer Screening service is triggered for these call types. If this option is not selected (default), the Telemarketer Screening service is not triggered for these call types. NOTE: The Telemarketer Screening service is always triggered for callers with a presentation of Unavailable, Unknown or Out of Area. DISC_ON_RESOURCE_FAIL Determines if the caller should be disconnected due to insufficient resources to play the Telemarketer Screening announcement. If this option is selected, the switch disconnects the call. If this option is not selected (default), the switch terminates the call normally.

tmsOptions

sipAllowToUseTopVia Determines if the switch looks in the top VIA header to determine the originating endpoint of an INVITE request when the address is not found in the bottom VIA header. Normally the switch only uses the bottom VIA header. However, some SIP Devices send INVITEs with a private IP address in the bottom VIA. Such calls fail because the switch can not find the devices public IP address in the message. Select: TRUE Look in the bottom VIA, and, if necessary, the Top VIA, to determine the senders IP address. FALSE (default) Look only in the bottom VIA to determine the senders IP address.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

385

OfficeParams

The Generic CLI is used for all OfficeParms commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

CLLICode Lata options OSProvider DAProvider

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

CLLICode Lata options OSProvider DAProvider rateCenter timers serviceProfile serviceCodes transFlag LLControl vmwiTimerA vmwiTimerB redirectingNumberAsCallerID callingNameDisplayOption useVMWIOSITimer ftrsProfile denyAniList mgcpDynamicIPUpdates sipUserAgentName ANA_announcementPause

386

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

OfficeParams

The insertInto and the deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

See:

OSSInfoDigits countryCodes Adding a Country Code to OfficeParms on page 396 Removing a Country Code from Office Parms on page 396 Adding OSS Information Digits to OfficeParms on page 393 Removing OSS Information Digits from Office Parms on page 395
OfficeParms OfficeParms OfficeParms OfficeParms OfficeParms OfficeParms taquaTexas taquaTexas taquaTexas taquaTexas taquaTexas taquaTexas RICHTXCODS0 serviceCodes Cfwd_On "*55" LLControl CLASS_C 0 vmwiTimerA 3.5hr tmsOptions DISCONNECT_WITHOUT_DIGIT 1 tmsOptions DISC_ON_RESOURCE_FAIL 0

create modify modify modify modify modify

Prerequisites
Carriers, see Carriers on page 196 Rate Centers, see Rate Centers on page 410

Dependent Commands
After setting the Office Parameters, you can set the following:

AIN services, AIN on page 138

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

387

OfficeParams

query OfficeParms query OfficeParms

This Generic CLI command shows general information about the switch. The following examples queries the officeparm timers for switch 123.

query OfficeParms 123 timers timers........................<2beef98> <2beef98> OfficeTimers ExcessiveAlerting........3a98 (15000) ExceptionRecoveryTime....ea60 (60000) ROHToneDuration..........ea60 (60000) FirstDigitTimeout........4e20 (20000) InterDigitTimeout........2710 (10000) CriticalDigitTimeout.....fa0 (4000) PartialCdrTimeout........ea60 (60000) SpeedDialTimeout.........fa0 (4000) TermScanningDuration.....1b7740 (1800000) LongDurationCdrTimeout...24_HRS VMWIOSITimeout...........1388 (5000) pingPeriod...............bb8 (3000)f

388

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

OfficeParams

OfficeParms Options
The Officeparms options are a bitfield, individually turned on or off by name. See example. Name PIC2_REQUIRED_FOR_ INTRALATA INTRALATA_RESTRICTIONS_ APPLY_TO_CAC INTERLATA_RESTRICTIONS_ APPLY_TO_CAC INTERNATIONAL_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC ROUTE_ZERO_MINUS_TO_ PIC2 PREFIX_RATE_CENTER_OVERRIDES_SUBSCRIBER_RATE_ CENTER FAIL_UNKNOWN_DIGIT_ PATTERN ENABLE_877_SAC ENABLE_866_SAC ENABLE_866_SAC ENABLE_855_SAC ENABLE_844_SAC ENABLE_833_SAC ENABLE_822_SAC CALLING_NAME_QUERY_ REQUIRED Description Routes non-CAC calls for subscribers with no intraLATA carrier presubscribed to an announcement. Applies intraLATA toll subscriber restrictions to a dialed CAC and presubscribed PIC2. Applies interLATA toll subscriber restrictions to a dialed CAC and presubscribed PIC1. Applies international subscriber restrictions to a dialed CAC (for example, 1010288) and presubscribed PIC1. Operator services calls are routed to PIC2. Uses the rate center associated with the prefix instead of the rate center associated with the subscriber. Routes call to announcement if dialing pattern is not recognized. Enables 877 calls for toll free database lookup. Enables 866 calls for toll free database lookup Enables 866 calls for toll free database lookup. Enables 855 calls for toll free database lookup. Enables 844 calls for toll free database lookup. Enables 833 calls for toll free database lookup. Enables 822 calls for toll free database lookup Requires the switch to send a calling name query for local calls on the switch. By default the switch uses the subscriber database for local calling name. This option requires a query for all calls Rejects incoming calls with no calling number. Enables custom replacement of the carrier, ani, etc. even if calls use AIN to route. On intraLATA calls, the switch selects the PCAC from the Prefix database. If set, when the prefix is not defined in the Prefix database, the switch selects the PCAC from the Carrier On intraLATA calls, the switch selects the PCAC from the Prefix database. If set, when the prefix is not defined in the Prefix database, the switch selects the PCAC from the Carrier.

INBOUND_ANI_REQUIRED CUSTOM_REPLACE_AIN PCAC_FROM_CARRIER

CAC_FROM_CARRIER

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

389

OfficeParams

Name USE_AIN_CALLING_NAME

Description If set, use the Name Presentation and Name from the AIN Termination Attempt response and not preform the Calling Name TCAP dip for Intraswitch calls, even if the CALLING_NAME_QUERY_REQUIRED option is turned on

query OfficeParms taquaTexas options <2b89cec> options.......................(BITFIELD) -> 1c .INTRALATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC .INTERLATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC .INTERNATIONAL_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC modify OfficeParms taquaTexas options PCAC_FROM_CARRIER 1 modify OfficeParms taquaTexas options INTERNATIONAL_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC 0 query OfficeParms taquaTexas options <2b89cec> options.......................(BITFIELD) -> 2000c .INTRALATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC .INTERLATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC .PCAC_FROM_CARRIER

390

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

OfficeParams

OfficeParms Timers
The Officeparms timers are a nested object of timers. All numerical timer values are in milliseconds, except for LongDurationCdrTimeout, which is in hours.

CAUTION
Setting office timers to values other than their defaults could negatively affect operations.

Timer Name ExcessiveAlerting Internal value.

Description

ExceptionRecovery The number of milliseconds the switch sends the reorder tone after Time an announcement that follows a failure on the switch. ROHToneDuration FirstDigitTimeout The number of milliseconds the switch waits in an off-hook state before playing a receiver off-hook tone (howler tone). The number of milliseconds the switch waits for the caller to dial the first digit after going off-hook. Sends a loud tone that alerts the calling party when the timer expires. The number of milliseconds between digits dialed when placing a call when the collected set of digits are not subject to critical timing. Sends a message or tone to the caller when the timer expires.

InterDigitTimeout

CriticalDigitTimeout The number of milliseconds the switch waits before indicating the collected set of digits has matched a collection pattern. This is used when a matched pattern is a subset of a longer pattern and for 7digit dialing. PartialCdrTimeout The number of milliseconds before a partial CDR is created. The timer starts when a call is made on a SIP, SS7 or PRI Trunk, after the terminating circuit is seizing and alerting has begun, and the call is not completed. The timer is canceled if the originator hangs up. This is recordType 2 in the CDR. The number of milliseconds (configurable between 3 and 5 seconds) before a speed dial entry is triggered. Internal Value-This timer determines the length of time that the terminating switch will do terminating scanning for an Automatic Callback attempt. It is initialized when the terminating switch receives a terminating scanning request query message The number of hours between printing long duration CDRs. The range is 0-24hrs, with 24hrs being the default. For example, if this timer is 2hrs, a long duration CDR prints every two hours from when the call begins until it ends. The number of milliseconds (500-7500) the switch waits to turn on the Message Waiting Indication lamp at the CPE. The default is 5,000.

SpeedDialTimeout TermScanningDuration

LongDurationCdrTimeout

VMWIOSITimeout

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

391

OfficeParams

Timer Name pingPeriod

Description This versatile timer is used to ping the default gateway, as well as failed Network Gateways (NGWs) and Emergency Service Gateways (ESGWs). If the timer is non-zero, the switch pings the default gateways to detect failures. If the timer is zero, default gateways are not pinged. For ESGs and NSGWs, this timer works in conjugation with the Emergency Stand Alone feature. If enabled, the switch pings failed NGWs and ESGWs to detect when the gateway is once again reachable. If the timer is zero, failed NGWs and ESGWs are pinged at a default value. if the timer is non-zero, the interval that the switch pings the failed NGW or ESGW at default gateway is 10 times the provisioned value. The response time-out to the ping is determined by the pingRespTimerValue (see pingRespTimerValue on page 447). A response to the ping causes the switch to stop sending the ping to the failed NGW or ESGW. See ESAOption on page 464 Range: 0 - 600000 (600 seconds, or 10 minutes). The default is 3,000 ms.

tmsDelay

Telemarketer Screening timer. Works with the tmsOptions DISCONNECT_WITHOUT_DIGIT option. Range: 1000 - 30000 ms. The default is 10000 ms

modify OfficeParms taquaTexas timers FirstDigitTimeout 15000

392

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

OfficeParams

Adding OSS Information Digits to OfficeParms insertInto OfficeParms <key> OSSInfoDigits <subKey> <val>
The Generic CLI insertInto command adds Information Digits to the OfficeParmss OSSInfoDigits list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax Description the name of the switch, which was created with the create OfficeParms command the index of the list where you want to add the new Info Digits.

<key> <subKey>

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert Information Digits at the start of the OSSInforDigits list. Use a index of -1 to insert Information Digits at the end of the OSSInforDigits list.

<val>

Info Digits to route to Operator Service System (OSS)

This example stores info digits 06 to the OSSInfoDigits list at position 6. If there are fewer than 6 entries in the list, the digits are added to the end of the list.

insertInto OfficeParms taquaTexas OSSInfoDigits 6 6

By default each line is provisioned as POTS line (code 0). Use the following command when changing the line type to values between 00 and 99.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

393

OfficeParams

Flex ANI Out-Pulsed Information Digits

Originating Line Type 00 01 Any 02, 23-25 06 Conditions for ANI II Out-pulsed Digits POTS line Multiple line feature ANI is not available Invalid originating line type Hotel/Motel real time billing feature Note: You can configure this line type for normal routing instead of OSS by removing it from the OSS Information Digits list in Office Parameters. Call requiring special operator handling AOID featurenot currently available ANI II Digits Sent Routing based on by the switch ANI II Digits 00 01 02 00 00 06 Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Routed to OSS

10, 12-19, and 95 Not assignable or conflicting originating line type

07 20 00

07 00

Routed to OSS Normal Normal

SAC translated call with previously determined 23 information digits of 00 or 02 (only applicable if no information digits are received on SAC response)

Any station except A non-pay station with toll free SAC translated call 24 27, 29, 70 and ANI II digits are not 23 (only applicable if information digits are not received on SAC response) 27,29,70 Pay station with toll free SAC call (only applicable 25 if information digits are not received on SAC response) Pay station with network provided coin signaling (non SAC calls only) 27

Normal

Normal

27 29 30-32 34 40-49 52 60

Normal Routed to OS Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal

Call from inmate/detention type stations (non SAC 29 calls only) Intercept callnot currently available Telco OSS Unrestricted use that is locally determined by the carrier OUTWATTS calls not currently available A call delivered to a transport carrier from Traffic Routing Administration (TRA) provider, which originated from an unrestricted line A call from cellular/wireless carrier that is forwarded to an IXC over type 1or 2 trunks Pay Station call that does not use network provided coin signaling (no SAC calls) Reserved for future expansion A call originating from Virtual Private Network (VPN) Unassigned 00 00 40-49 00 60

61-63, 66, 67 70 80-89 93 All Others

61-63, 66, 67 70 80-89 93 All Others

Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal

394

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

OfficeParams

Removing OSS Information Digits from Office Parms deleteFrom OfficeParms <key> OSSInfoDigits <subKey>
The Generic CLI deleteFrom command removes Information Digits from the OfficeParmss OSSInfoDigits list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> <subKey> Description the name of the switch, which was created with the create OfficeParms command The index in the OSSInfoDigits list of the Info Digits that are being removed.

This example deletes the 3rd entry from the OSSInfoDigits list (Info Digits 29)

query OfficeParms taquaTexas OSSInfoDigits <2b89a20> OSSInfoDigits.................<29a5168> <29a5168> InfoDigitsList valType......Integer collection...List (3 items) -> (1) IntegerValue: 6 (6) (2) IntegerValue: 7 (7) (3) IntegerValue: 1d (29) deleteFrom OfficeParms taquaTexas OSSInfoDigits 3 query OfficeParms taquaTexas OSSInfoDigits <2b89a20> OSSInfoDigits.................<29a5168> <29a5168> InfoDigitsList valType......Integer collection...List (2 items) -> (1) IntegerValue: 6 (6) (2) IntegerValue: 7 (7)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

395

OfficeParams

Adding a Country Code to OfficeParms insertInto OfficeParms <key> countryCodes <pos> <val>
The Generic CLI insertInto command adds an international country code for countries subscribers can call to an OfficeParmss countryCode list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax Description the name of the switch, which was created with the create OfficeParms command the index of the list where you want to add the new country code value. An item added to the middle of the list will not delete any existing entry, but simply increase the length of the list.

<key> <pos>

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert a Country Code at the start of the countryCodes list. Use a index of -1 to insert a Country Code at the end of the countryCodes list.

<val>

new country code

This example stores Country Code 217 at position 222 in the country codes list.

insertInto OfficeParms taquaTexas countryCodes 222 217

Removing a Country Code from Office Parms

CAUTION
Deleting a country code may negatively affect operations.

deleteFrom OfficeParms <key> countryCodes <subKey>

The Generic CLI deleteFrom command removes a Country Code from an OfficeParmss countryCode list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> <subKey> Description the name of the switch, which was created with the create OfficeParms command The index in the countryCode list of the country code that is being removed.

This example deletes the Country Code at position 222 in the country codes list.

deleteFrom OfficeParms taquaTexas countryCodes 222

396

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

OfficeParams

OutPulseProfile
An OutPulseProfile defines a set of outpulsing sequences for an FGCOF Trunk Group. Both Stage 1 and Stage 2 out pulsing can be independently modified by call type. The custom out pulsing overrides the default out pulsing for each call type and is stored in the OutPulseProfile patterns dictionary. See "FGCOF Outpulsing" in
The T7000 Provisioning Manual.

A OutPulseProfile has the following attributes:

attribute key patterns name of OutPulseProfile A dictionary of type OutPulsePatternDict, used to store the custom outpulse patterns. The dictionary is keyed by call type. value

The Generic CLI is used for all OutPulseProfile commands, see Using Generic CLI
Commands on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

patterns

See Adding a Pattern to an OutPulseProfile on page 398, and Removing a Pattern from an OutPulseProfile on page 401.

create OutPulseProfile OPP1

Dependent Commands
An FGCOF Trunk Group, see CAS Trunk Groups on page 235 Associate the outPulseProfileKey with the FGCOF Trunk Group. See outPulseProfileKey on page 242. For example, to associate OutPulseProfile OPP1 with FGCOS Trunk Group TG1:

modify CASTrunkGroup TG1 outPulseProfileKey OPP1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

397

OfficeParams

Adding a Pattern to an OutPulseProfile insertInto OutPulseProfile <key> patterns <subkey> FGCOPPattern <Stage1St1> <Stage1St2> <Stage2St1> <Stage2St2>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a FGCOP pattern into an OutPulsePatterns patterns dictionary. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

OutPulsePattern name
This is the key to the patterns dictionary. The dictionary is keyed by call type. Values are: 0 = LOCAL 1 = EXTENDED_AREA 2 = INTER_LATA 3 = OA_INTER_LATA 4 = INTRA_LATA 5 = OA_INTRA_LATA 6 = INTERNATIONAL 7 = OA_INTERNATIONAL 8 = WORLDZONE1 9 = OA_WORLDZONE1 10 = E911 11 = DA_INTRA_LATA 12 = DA_INTER_LATA 13 = OA_ZERO_MINUS 14 = SAC 15 = UNKNOWN_CALL_TYPE 16 = TERMINATING_CALL 17 = TANDEM_CALL 18 = TERMINATING_LOCAL 19 = TERMINATING_EXTENDED 20 = TERMINATING_INTRATOLL 21 = SIP_IAD 22 = INTER_LATA_COIN 23 = INTRA_LATA_COIN

<subkey>

Tip
Either the decimal value or the call type string can be entered for the subkey, (e.g., instead of entering "OA_WORLDZONE1", you could simply enter "9".

398

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

OfficeParams

Syntax

Description 50 = TANDEM_INTRALATA 51 = TANDEM_E911 52 = TANDEM_DA 53 = TANDEM_INTERLATA 54 = TANDEM_WORLDZONE1 55 = TANDEM_SAC 56 = TANDEM_INTERNATIONAL 61 = TANDEM_OA_INTRALATA 62 = TANDEM_OA_INTERLATA 63 = TANDEM_OA_WORLDZONE1 64 = TANDEM_OA_INTERNATIONAL 65 = TANDEM_ZEROMINUS

<subkey>, continued

<Stage1St1>

FGCOF can send one or two ST tones per stage. This is the value for the first ST in Stage 1. Values are: None Do not send a signal ST Send an ST signal STP Send an ST Prime signal ST2P Send an ST Double Prime signal ST3P Send an ST Triple Prime signal

<Stage1St2>

FGCOF can send one or two ST tones per stage. This is the value for the second ST in Stage 1. Values are: None Do not send a signal ST Send an ST signal STP Send an ST Prime signal ST2P Send an ST Double Prime signal ST3P Send an ST Triple Prime signal

<Stage2St1>

FGCOF can send one or two ST tones per stage. This is the value for the first ST in Stage 2. Values are: None Do not send a signal ST Send an ST signal STP Send an ST Prime signal ST2P Send an ST Double Prime signal ST3P Send an ST Triple Prime signal

<Stage2St2>

FGCOF can send one or two ST tones per stage. This is the value for the second ST in Stage 2. Values are: None Do not send a signal ST Send an ST signal STP Send an ST Prime signal ST2P Send an ST Double Prime signal ST3P Send an ST Triple Prime signal

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

399

OfficeParams

insertInto OutPulseProfile OPP1 patterns OA_INTRA_LATA FGCOPPattern STP STP ST ST3P insertInto OutPulseProfile OPP1 patterns 3 FGCOPPattern ST2P None ST ST query OutPulseProfile OPP1 <5f1c760> OutPulseProfile key........"OPP1" patterns...<5f1c970> <5f1c970> OutPulsePatternDict (2 items) -> OA_INTRA_LATA: <5f2dfd8> FGCOPPattern Stage1ST1...STP Stage1ST2...STP Stage2ST1...ST Stage2ST2...ST3P OA_INTER_LATA: <6055b18> FGCOPPattern Stage1ST1...ST2P Stage1ST2...None Stage2ST1...ST Stage2ST2...ST

400

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

OfficeParams

Removing a Pattern from an OutPulseProfile OutPulseProfile <key> patterns <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove an FGCOP pattern from an OutPulsePatterns patterns dictionary. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

OutPulsePattern name
This is the key to the patterns dictionary. The dictionary is keyed by call type. Values are: LOCAL EXTENDED_AREA INTER_LATA OA_INTER_LATA INTRA_LATA OA_INTRA_LATA INTERNATIONAL OA_INTERNATIONAL WORLDZONE1 OA_WORLDZONE1 E911 DA_INTRA_LATA DA_INTER_LATA OA_ZERO_MINUS SAC UNKNOWN_CALL_TYPE TERMINATING_CALL TANDEM_CALL TERMINATING_LOCAL TERMINATING_EXTENDED TERMINATING_INTRATOLL SIP_IAD INTER_LATA_COIN INTRA_LATA_COIN

<subkey>

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

401

OfficeParams

deleteFrom OutPulseProfile OPP1 patterns OA_INTER_LATA query OutPulseProfile OPP1 <5f1c760> OutPulseProfile key........"OPP1" patterns...<5f1c970> <5f1c970> OutPulsePatternDict (1 items) -> OA_INTRA_LATA: <5f2dfd8> FGCOPPattern Stage1ST1...STP Stage1ST2...STP Stage2ST1...ST Stage2ST2...ST3P

402

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Prefixes

Prefixes
A prefixes specifies 3-digits (NPA), 6-digits (NPA-Nxx), or 7-10 digit numbers. Prefixes provides information used to determine the call type For subscriber originations, a prefix identifies the Rate Center for the called number. It also denotes 7 digit dialing for local calls originated from the prefix. For incoming trunk groups, a prefix determines the Rate Center for the calling and called number.

Tip
Since a prefix can be 10 digits long, adding the DNs of subscriber who have been ported off the switch can avoid LNP DIPs on the entire prefix

A prefix can be marked as ported (that is, at least one number from the prefix has moved to another switch). When a prefix is ported, the switch must query an SCP to determine the ported location of all numbers in the prefix.
NOTE: By default, all prefixes that are not defined map to InterLATA toll call type.

A Prefix has the following attributes:

attribute key value 3-10 digit prefix. The switch uses the closest match to a dialed number as the prefix. For example, if you add 972480 and 972 as Prefixes, and a subscriber calls 9724801234, the switch uses the 6-digit prefix. If the subscriber dials 9724814545, then the switch uses the 972 prefix nature The type of prefix. Values are: INTRALATA Calls to this prefix are intraLATA calls. INTERLATA Calls to this prefix are interLATA calls. WORLDZONE1 Calls to this prefix are countries identified by the single-digit country code of 1 (Canada and most Caribbean countries), other than the 48 contiguous United States. rateCenter The applicable rate center to which you want to apply this prefix. Valid only for INTRALATA prefixes. This is the terminating rate center on a call, the subscriber rate center is the originating rate center. When a subscriber makes a call to a prefix on the switch, this rate center is compared to the subscribers rate center to determine the call type.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

403

Prefixes

attribute ported

value Used only used for intraLATA prefixes: YES the prefix is a portable prefix, that is at least one number from the prefix moved to another switch, and a switch must query an SCP for the ported location of that number NO the prefix is not a portable prefix

allowedDialing

A bitfield of prefix dialing options. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example SEVEN_DIGIT_LD to allow 7-digit long distance dialing (0+7D, 1+7D). SEVEN_DIGIT_LOCAL to allow 7-digit local dialing. If the first digit is not 1 or 0 then local calling is assumed and local calls route immediately after seven digits are dialed and the 4 second CriticalDigitTimeout expires.

locallyAmbiguous

Controls how the switch behaves if 7-digit dialing is active and there are prefixes with NPAs that match prefixes with office codes (NXXs) on the switch: YES after dialing 7 digits the switch inserts a critical digit timeout (default 4 seconds) allowing the subscriber to continue dialing a 10-digit number NO after dialing 7 digits the call connects not allowing the subscriber to dial a 10-digit number

internationalCode

Valid only for WORLDZONE1 prefixes. For interLATA and intraLATA prefixes leave this field at its default setting. The code required to make calls to worldZone 1 areas (Canada and the Caribbean). The code should be 01 plus the region code of the worldZone 1 area. For example, 013 for calls the worldZone 1 area 450, or 011 for calls to counties except Canada and most countries in the Caribbean.

Npa

The NPA of an NXX prefix provisioned to support 7-digit dialing across NPA boundaries. See 7-Digit Dialing Across NPA Boundaries on page 408. The digits that you want to replace the destination digits (called number) for the original destination number in the outgoing call setup message. The switch replaces digits for numbers associated with a specific terminating prefix, See Outgoing Signaling Customization on page 345.. The PCAC is the 4-digit Pseudo CAC (PCAC) that is sent in the outgoing call setup signal. In standard call processing, the CAC in the outgoing signaling message is the same as the CAC used for routing. This field sends a different CAC in the signaling message than the switch uses to route the call, see Outgoing Signaling Customization on page 345..

replacementDigits

PCAC

404

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Prefixes

attribute replacementMode

value Sets the replacement mode for the prefix: NO_REPLACEMENT (default) Sends the original destination prefix or digits REPLACE_PREFIX Replaces the prefix digits regardless of the number of digits. For example, 3 digits could replace a 6-digit prefix. OVERLAY_ORIG_DEST Replaces the exact number of digits of the original destination number. REPLACE_ORIG_DEST Replaces the original destination digits with a different digit set. For examples, see Destination Digit Replacement on page 346.

replacementAniDigits

The Pseudo ANI (PANI) to replace the ANI (calling number) of a call that uses this prefix,. see Outgoing Signaling Customization on page 345. The PANI II Information digits to replace the digits sent in outgoing call setup messages. Use this field to send different ANI II digits (the Pseudo ANI II digits) in the signaling message in place of the ANI II digits associated with a facility, see Outgoing Signaling Customization on page 345. The Carrier Selection Information (CSI) type that defines if a subscriber is presubscribed to a carrier or not. CSI replacement applies only to calls originating on the switch. The CSI is an optional parameter in the SS7 IAM and for CAS the CSI is the KP digit in the ANI sequence. The CSI value overrides the ANI KP type in the CAS protocol. See Outgoing Signaling Customization on page 345. CSI_UNKNOWN Outpulses the CSI value that the switch determines. CARRIER_NOIND Outpulses 0 in the CSI parameter in SS7 or the default KP type in CAS. CARRIER_PRESUB Selected Carrier Access Code (CAC) presubscribed and not input by calling party. See CSI Replacement on page 348. CARRIER_PRESUB_INPUT Selected CAC presubscribed and input by calling party. See CSI Replacement on page 348. CARRIER_PRESUB_NOINDINPUT Selected CAC presubscribed, no indication of whether input by calling party. See CSI Replacement on page 348.. CARRIER_NOTPRESUB_INPUT Selected CAC not presubscribed and input by calling party. See CSI Replacement on page 348.

replacementInfoDigits

replacementCSI

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

405

Prefixes

The Generic CLI is used for all Prefix commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

nature rateCenter ported internationalCode

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

Prerequisites

nature rateCenter ported allowedDialing locallyAmbiguous internationalCode Npa replacementDigits PCAC replacementMode replacementAniDigits replacementInfoDigits replacementCSI

Rate center, see Adding a RateCenter on page 412

Dependent Commands
By adding a prefix, you are making this prefix available to associate with a:

create create modify

NANP route list, see NANP Route List on page 519 LNP route list, see LNP Route List on page 517 Subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530

Prefix 214777 INTRALATA rc1 Prefix 808 WORLDZONE1 Prefix 214777 allowedDialing SEVEN_DIGIT_LD 1

406

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Prefixes

query Prefix
query Prefix <prefix>

Tip
Use this command without a key to see which prefixes are provisioned on the switch.

This Generic CLI command shows information about a 3-, 6-, or 7-digit NANP prefix.
Syntax <prefix> Description A 3-, 6-, or 7-digit prefix of subscribers that connect to the switch.

query Prefix 817 <2bee040> Prefix key....................."817" nature..................INTRALATA rateCenter..............<> ported..................NO allowedDialing..........(BITFIELD) -> 0 locallyAmbiguous........NO internationalCode.......b (11) Npa.....................<> replacementDigits.......<> PCAC....................<> replacementMode.........NO_REPLACEMENT replacementAniDigits....<> replacementInfoDigits...<> replacementCSI..........CSI_UNKNOWN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

407

Prefixes

7-Digit Dialing Across NPA Boundaries

7-digit dialing across NPA boundaries allows subscribers in adjacent offices with adjacent area codes to dial each other using 7-digit dialing. This feature allows for extended area and local service across NPA boundaries using 7-digit dialing. Use the following process to provision 7-digit dialing across NPA boundaries:
Step
1

Action Provision an IntraLATA 6-digit prefix (NPA-NXX) for each office. For example, provision 214480 and 972455. See Prefixes on page 403. Set the prefixes to allow 7-digit local dialing. See allowedDialing on page 404. Provision a separate prefix for each 6-digit prefix using the three digits of the NXX. For example, provision a 480 and 455 prefix. See Prefixes on page 403.

2 3

NOTE: 7-digit dialing across NPA boundaries does not support provisioning identical NXXs. For example, the switch does not support local 7-digit dialing between 214480 and 972480.
4

Set the NPA value as the NPA of each NXX provisioned in step 1 on page 408. For example, provision 214 for the NPA of the 480 prefix and 972 for the NPA field of the 455 prefix. See Npa on page 404. Set the rate center relationships between the 6-digit prefixes as either local or extended area. See Adding a RateCenter on page 412.

408

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Prefixes

7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing

When tandeming a call from an SS7, CAS, PRI, or SIP Trunk Group, the switch can outpulse 7 digits to the outbound Trunk Group for subscribers who are not ported (the switch will still outpulse 10 digits for subscribers who are ported). Use the following process to provision 7-digit tandem call outpulsing.
Step
1 2 3

Action Set the inbound tandem Trunk Group tandemRoutingType to NO_ROUTING. Set the outbound tandem Trunk Group tandemCustomReplacement to YES. Set the outbound tandem Trunk Group replaceDestination to REPLACE_IfNotPorted Provision a 6-digit Prefix in the form of NPA-NXX for each 7 digit pattern. For example, to outpulse 7 digits for calls to 972-480-XXXX provision a 972480 prefix. Set the 6-digit Prefix replacementDigits to NXX. For example, in the 972480 prefix, set the replacementDigits to 480. Set the 6-digit Prefix replacementMode to REPLACE_PREFIX.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

409

Rate Centers

Rate Centers
A rate center is a designated geographic area within a Local Access and Transport Area (LATA). A switch must have at least one rate center. All calls made within the rate center are considered local (or non-toll). All calls made to another rate center may be local, extended area, or intraLATA toll.
NOTE: An intraLATA call for which both an original and remote rate center cannot be determined is considered local.

A rate center has the following attributes:

attribute key LRN restrictions value name of rate center local routing numbers area code and prefix a bitfield of rate center restrictions. These options are individually turned on or off by name. NO_HOME_NPA the caller does not have to dial his/ her home NPA for calls to the home NPA. RESTRICTIVE_ONE_PLUS 1+ dialing is required for toll calls and not allowed for local and extended area calls. Otherwise, 1+ is ignored for all call types. relationships a collection of dictionaries that hold intra lata and extended rate centers.

The Generic CLI is used for all rate center commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

LRN restrictions

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

LRN restrictions

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

relationships

410

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Rate Centers

See Adding a RateCenter on page 412, and See Removing a RateCenter on page 414.
NOTE: Deleting a rate center may negatively affect operations.

Dependent Commands
After creating a rate center, create a relationship between it and:

An extended area rate center, see Adding a RateCenter on page 412 An intratoll rate center, see Adding a RateCenter on page 412

After creating a rate center assign it to:

Prerequisites

A carrier, see Carriers on page 196 A prefix, see Prefixes on page 403 The Office Parameter, if it is the local rate center, see OfficeParams on
page 382

A subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530

Rate center, see Adding a RateCenter on page 412 To delete a rate center, you must remove or modify the following items that relate to the rate center:

Carriers, see Carriers on page 196 The rate center attribute in Office Parameters, see OfficeParams on page
382

Prefixes, see Prefixes on page 403 Subscribers, see Subscribers on page 530

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

411

Rate Centers

Adding a RateCenter insertInto RateCenter <key> relationships <subkey> <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to establish a relationship between two rate centers. The new rate center may be either an extended rate center, or an IntraToll area rate center. An extended area is a geographic area beyond the local service area to which traffic is classified as local for selected customers. Calls originating in one rate center and terminating in another rate center may be considered extended area, depending on the customers rate plan. A rate center can have more than one extended rate center associated with it. An IntraToll area rate center to another rate center. IntraLATA toll is when the distance between the caller and called party is determined as a different rate center, but still within the LATA (usually beyond 12 miles). If the subscriber has selected an IntraLATA carrier, the switch routes the call to the selected IntraLATA carrier for termination. A rate center can have more than one IntraToll area rate center associated with it.
NOTE: An intraLATA call for which both an original and remote rate center cannot be determined is considered local.

See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

Rate center name.

The name of the rate center you are adding. The type of relationship between the two rate centers. Values are: EXTENDED for extended rate centers INTRATOLL for intra lata rate centers

<subkey> <subvalue>

412

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Rate Centers

This example creates a 2nd and a 3rd ratecenter. The 2nd rate center has an extended relationship with the 1st rate center, and the 3rd rate center has an intra toll relationship with the 1st rate center.

create RateCenter rc2 972530 create RateCenter rc3 214289 insertInto RateCenter rc1 relationships rc2 EXTENDED insertInto RateCenter rc1 relationships rc3 INTRATOLL query RateCenter rc1 <1a01720> RateCenter key............."rc1" LRN............."972480" restrictions....(BITFIELD) -> 0 relationships...<2bfc758> <2bfc758> RelationshipDict keyType......Unknown valType......Integer collection...Dictionary (2 items) -> StringKey: rc2 IntegerValue: 1 (1) StringKey: rc3 IntegerValue: 2 (2)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

413

Rate Centers

Removing a RateCenter deleteFrom RateCenter <key> relationships <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a rate center from a rate centers relationships. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

Rate center name

The name of the rate center you are removing.

<subkey>

deleteFrom RateCenter rc1 relationships rc3 query RateCenter rc1 <1a01720> RateCenter key............."rc1" LRN............."972480" restrictions....(BITFIELD) -> 0 relationships...<2bfc758> <2bfc758> RelationshipDict keyType......Unknown valType......Integer collection...Dictionary (1 items) -> StringKey: rc2 IntegerValue: 1 (1)

Querying a RateCenter query RateCenter <name>

This Generic CLI command shows the attributes of a rate center.
Syntax <name> Description name of the rate center

query RateCenter rc1 Rate Center rc1Restrictions: 0 Extended Area Rate Centers rc2 IntraLata Toll Rate Centers rc3

414

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Screen Lists

Screen Lists
Screen lists are lists of prefixes or DNs for call screening. A screen list can apply to the entire Central Office or to a Trunk Group. See:

Central Office denyAniList on page 384 CAS Trunk Groups denyAniList on page 239 Clear Channel Trunk Groups denyAniList on page 254 Hunt Groups denyAniList on page 275 Interface Groups denyAniList on page 260 IP Trunk Groups denyAniList on page 310 MGCP Trunk Groups denyAniList on page 359 PRI Trunk Groups denyAniList on page 289 SS7 Trunk Groups denyAniList on page 327

Every subscriber has two screen lists, which may be provisioned:

Allowed list a subscriber can complete calls only to the prefixes in the screening list. See allowedList on page 537. Denied list a subscriber can complete calls to all prefixes except those in the screening list. See deniedList on page 537.

A screen list is also used for the following subscriber calling services:

Selective Call Acceptance a subscriber only receives calls from a list of DNs Selective Call Rejection a subscriber rejects calls from a list of DNs Selective Call Forwarding a subscriber forwards calls from a list of DNs Priority Call a subscriber receives calls with a distinctive ringing tone from callers on a list of DNs

A calling service screen list is automatically created when the service is provisioned, and automatically destroyed when the service is de-provisioned. See
setSubCOS on page 576.

NOTE: A screen list supports up to 10 numbers for each associated service

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

415

Screen Lists

A Screen List has the following attributes:

attribute name value Name assigned to the screen list. Note: for the following calling services, the name of the screen list must be the subscribers 10 digit DN followed by the service name, for a total of 13 characters. SCA selective call acceptance SCR selective call rejection SCF selective call forwarding PRI priority call Each calling service requires a separate screen list. listType This attribute is currently unused. Values are: GENERAL_LIST SUBSCRIBER_LIST

The Generic CLI is used for Screen List commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

name

There are no optional parameters for the create command. The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

facilities

See Adding a Prefix or DN to a Screen List on page 417, and Removing a Prefix or DN from a Screen List on page 417

create create create create create

ScreenList ScreenList ScreenList ScreenList ScreenList

9724801234SCA 9724801234SCF 9724801234SCR 9724801234PRI Deny800

416

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Screen Lists

Adding a Prefix or DN to a Screen List insertInto ScreenList <key> prefixes <subkey> [subvalue]
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a prefix or a DN to a screen lists prefixes list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

Screen list name. See name on page 416 for important information about subscriber screen list naming conventions
The prefixes list in a screen list is a sorted list. The key to this list is the DN you want to add to the screen list. The DN you want to add to this screen list. In the case of a ScreenList, the subvalue can be omitted, since it is the same as the subkey.

<subkey> [subvalue]

Either of the following commands adds the DN 9724801234 to the Priority Call Screen List for the subscriber at DN 9724800000:
insertInto ScreenList 9724800000PRI prefixes 9724801234 insertInto ScreenList 9724800000PRI prefixes 9724801234 9724801234

Either of the following command adds the prefix 408 to the badANI Screen List:

insertInto ScreenList badANI prefixes 408 insertInto ScreenList badANI prefixes 408 408

Removing a Prefix or DN from a Screen List deleteFrom ScreenList <key> facilities <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a prefix or a DN from a screen lists prefixes list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

Screen list name. See name on page 416 for important information about subscriber screen list naming conventions
The prefixes list in a screen list is a sorted list. The key to this list is the DN that you want to remove.

<subkey>

The following example removes the 408 prefix from the badANI screen list:

deleteFrom ScreenList badANI prefixes 408

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

417

SIP

SIP
See

Setting up an IP Network Interface on page 419 Setting up a Subscriber Access SIP Endpoint on page 420 Setting up a Network Gateway SIP Endpoint on page 421

418

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Setting up an IP Network Interface

Step
1

Action Provision an IP network interface: Remove the Fast Ethernet Interface (FEI) from service, see remove on page 628. Set the FEI attributes, see setFeifIPAddr on page 422. Set the FEI options, see setFeifOptions on page 424. (optional) Set the range of Real Time Protocol (RTP) port addresses to FEI, see setRtpPortBase on page 423. (optional) Restore the FEI to service, see restore on page 628.

Create codec lists: Create a Codec Profile List, see CodecProfileList on page 425. Create Codec Profiles, see CodecProfile on page 427. Modify Codec Profile attributes, see CodecProfile on page 427. Insert Codec Profiles into Codec Profile List, see Adding CodecProfiles to a CodecProfileList on page 426.

Create a host name and IP address table entry, see Host IP Addr Pair on page 429. (optional) Create media stream parameters, see MediaParam on page 431.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

419

SIP

Setting up a Subscriber Access SIP Endpoint

SubscriberAccess SIP endpoints are IP phones, ATAs, or other CPE devices directly controlled by the T7000 and using its SIP registrar functionality
NOTE: When T7000 IP subscribers get their services from a SIP Application Server instead of the T7000, they are provisioned as SubscriberAccess endpoints, and are called Hosted SIP Gateway (HSGW) Subscribers. When T7000 analog subscribers get their services from a SIP Application Server instead of the T7000, they are provisioned as SubscriberAccess endpoints, and are called Enhanced Voice Services (EVS) Subscribers. In either case, enter the name of the IP Trunk Group connecting the switch to the SIP Application Server in the subscribers appServerTG field. See the Provisioning Guide for details.

Step
1

Action If necessary, configure a BearerGroup of Fast Ethernet Interfaces, see BearerGroup on page 163. Create a SIP endpoint profile: Create a SubscriberAccess SIP endpoint profile, see SIP Access Gateway Profile on page 436. Use the modify command to change the SIP endpoint profiles options, see SIP Access Gateway Options on page 437 and SIP Timers on page 434.

Create a SubscriberAccess SIP endpoint, see Subscriber Access Gateway Endpoint on page 441. Add the IP trunk group that associates the FEI on the T7000 to the SIP endpoint, see IP Trunk Groups on page 307. Add a SIP subscriber whose 10-digit DN is the same the SIP endpoints, see Subscribers on page 530. Add the subscriber key (DN) and password.

420

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Setting up a Network Gateway SIP Endpoint

Network Gateway SIP endpoints are stand-alone IP gateways or distributed soft switch systems (such as Application Servers connecting IP Centrex business groups) to an IP access network and the PSTN.

Step
1

Action If necessary, configure a BearerGroup of Fast Ethernet Interfaces, see BearerGroup on page 163. Create a SIP endpoint profile: Create a Network Gateway SIP endpoint profile, see SIP Network Gateway Profile on page 454. Use the modify command to change the SIP endpoint profiles options, see SIP Network Gateway Options on page 455 and SIP Timers on page 434.

Create a Network Gateway SIP endpoint: Create a Network Gateway SIP endpoint, see SIP Network Gateway Endpoint on page 459. Add the primary IP address and port. (optional) Assign an alternate IP address and port, see Adding IP Addr Pairs to a SIP Network Gateway Endpoint on page 462..

Add the IP trunk group that associates the FEI on the T7000 to the SIP endpoint, see Trunk Groups on page 233. Add a pseudo-SIP subscriber whose 10-digit DN is the same the SIP endpoints, see Subscribers on page 530. Add an NANP Route List with the range of DNs on the Network Gateway (SIP AP), see NANP Route List on page 519 Add the IP trunk group to the route list, see Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

421

SIP

setFeifIPAddr

Tip
Use modifyFacility on page 217 to set the primary and secondary DNS for an FE.

setFeifIPAddr <feifoid> <sigIPaddr> <rtpIPaddr> <netmask> <defaultgateway>

This command configures the IP addresses of a Fast Ethernet Interface (FEI).

Prerequisites
Remove the FEI oid from service, see remove on page 628. IP host, see Host IP Addr Pair on page 429.
Syntax <feifoid> <sigIPaddr> <rtpIPaddr> Description Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface Facility (FEIF). See OID on page 30. IP address of the FE used to receive signaling packets. IP address of the FEI used to receive RTP packets. PIC: same value as sigIPaddr. PIC2: different IP address than the sigIPaddr. The sigIPaddr and the rtpIPaddr must be on the same subnet. <netmask> IP network mask. <defaultgateway> IP address of the default gateway or router to the network.

NOTE: The sigIPaddr and the rtpIPaddr must be in a separate IP network than the

OM Server and the PICs management port.

NOTE: The sigIPaddr, rtpIPaddr, netmask, and defaultgateway parameters must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

setFeifIPAddr fe-0-5 192.168.200.40 192.168.200.40 255.255.255.0 192.168.200.1

Dependent Commands
Restore the FEI oid to service, see restore on page 628. Set the FEI options, see setFeifOptions on page 424.

422

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

setRtpPortBase setRtpPortBase <feifoid> <RtpPortBase> <RtpPortNum>

This command assigns the lowest RTP port and number of available RTP port address(es) on an FEI I/O rear card for receiving Real Time Protocol (RTP) media streams.

Prerequisites
FEI connection, see setFeifIPAddr on page 422.
Syntax <feifoid> <RtpPortBase> Description Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface facility. See OID on page 30. The lowest UDP port number used to receive RTP (2-65534, even numbers only). Ports are assigned dynamically at run-time. 49152 is the default. The total number of UDP ports available on the FEI to receive RTP (49152-65535, even numbers only).

<RtpPortNum>

In the following example the lowest RTP port value is 49152. The total number of ports available is 2070. This means the RTP port selected at run-time will be between 49152 and 51222 (49152+2070).

setRtpPortBase fe-0-1 49152 2070

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

423

SIP

setFeifOptions

Tip
Use modifyFacility on page 217 to set the primary and secondary DNS for an FE.

setFeifOptions <feifoid> <sipPort> <mgcpPort> <vlantag> <vlanid> <sig8021pri> <sigDSCP>

This command assigns options to a Fast Ethernet Interface (FEI) on an FEI I/O rear card.

Prerequisites
FEI connection, see setFeifIPAddr on page 422.
Syntax <feifoid> <sipPort> <mgcpPort> <vlantag> Description Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface Facility (FEIF). See OID on page 30. SIP receive port number from 1-7000. 5060 is the default and this value is almost always used. Media Gateway Control Protocol receiving port number, 2727 is the default A virtual LAN allows hosts in the same physical switched infrastructure but in separate virtual broadcast domains to be addressed from the same subnet and share a common default gateway address. 0=DISABLED (default) If vlantagging is disabled, you cannot set the priority of packets sent from the PIC. 1=ENABLED If vlantagging is enabled, you can set the priority of packets sent from the PIC by adding an 802.1Q tag header to each packet. <vlanid> If vlantag is DISABLED, enter 0. If vlantag isENABLED, enter a virtual LAN ID from 1-4095. 1 is the default. <sig8021pri> If vlantagis ENABLED, an 802.1Q tag header is added to each packet the PIC transmits. This header shows the priority of the packets sent by the PIC. range 0 is the lowest priority, 7 is the highest priority (3=signaling default) <sigDSCP> sigDSCP (signaling DSCP) controls the priority at which signaling packets are sent through the network. Background: Diffserv Codepoint (DSCP) controls the priority at which signaling packets are sent through the network. It is a coarse-grained, class-based mechanism for traffic management, defined in RFC 2474. DSCP aware routers implement Per-Hop Behaviors (PHBs), based on DSCP. These PHBs define the packet forwarding properties associated with a given class of traffic. The Expedited Forwarding PHB, defined in RFC 2598, provides a low-loss, low-latency, assured bandwidth service for VoIP applications. The value of this PHB is 184 (hex 0xB8), and is the default value for this attribute. 0-252 (default 184)

setFeifOptions fe-0-1 5060 2727 0 1 3 184

424

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

CodecProfileList
A CodecProfileList is:

a container for Codec Profiles. For more information, see CodecProfile on page 427. associated with one or more IP trunk groups, setting the Codec Profiles used on those groups. For more information, see IP Trunk Groups on page 307.

To properly configure Codec Profiles and the Codec Profile Lists, know the following capabilities of the SIP endpoint with which the T7000 will communicate:

the codec types it supports the different configurations of each codec it supports

NOTE: If the T7000 and SIP endpoint do not agree on a Codec Profile, the T7000 refuses the call during call setup.

A CodecProfileList has the following attributes:

Attribute key codecProfiles Description name of the CodecProfileList The list used to contain the CodecProfiles for this CodecProfileList

The Generic CLI is used for All CodecProfileList commands, see Using Generic CLI
Commands on page 6. NOTE: As a safety precaution, a CodecProfileList must be removed from all IP Trunk Groups that are using it before it can be deleted. The switch will issue a warning message, specifying the name of the IP Trunk Group that is using the codec list.

The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The modify command does not apply to CodecProfileLists. The insertInto and the deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

codecProfiles

See Adding CodecProfiles to a CodecProfileList on page 426 and Removing CodecProfiles from a CodecProfileList on page 426

create CodecProfileList prflist1 destroy CodecProfileList prflist1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

425

SIP

Adding CodecProfiles to a CodecProfileList

Tip
The same Codec Profile may be added to different Codec Profile Lists.

insertInto CodecProfileList <key> codecProfiles <subkey> <CodecProfile>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a CodecProfile to a CodecProfileLists codecProfile list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> CodeProfileList name This is the index in the codecProfile list where you want to enter the CodecProfile. Description

<subkey>

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert a codecProfile the start of the codecProfile list. Use a index of -1 to insert a codecProfile at the end of the codecProfile list.

<CodecProfile>

This attribute specifies which CodecProfile you want to add to the CodecProfileList.

The following command adds CodecProfile CP1 to CodecProfileList prflist1:

insertInto CodecProfileList prflist1 codecProfiles 1 CP1

Removing CodecProfiles from a CodecProfileList deleteFrom CodecProfileList <key> codecProfiles <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a CodecProfile from a CodecProfileLists codecProfile list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> CodeProfileList name This is the index in the codecProfile list where you want to remove the CodecProfile. Description

<subkey>

The following example removes the 1st CodecProfile from CodecProfileList prflist1

deleteFrom CodecProfileList prflist1 codecProfiles 1

426

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

CodecProfile
Use CodecProfiles to create variations of standard codecs. Insert Codec Profiles into a CodecProfileList in the order you want the T7000 to attempt to use them. A CodecProfile has the following attributes:
Attribute key codecTypeAndSize Description name of the CodecProfile Codec type and sample size. See the T7000 Provisioning Guide for a chart detailing sample size and required bandwidth. Values are: G711_5MS G.711 codec, 5 ms sample size. G711_10MS G.711 codec, 10 ms sample size. G711_20MS (default) G.711 codec, 20 ms sample size. G726_5MS G.726 codec, 5 ms sample size. G726_10MS G.726 codec, 10 ms sample size. G726_20MS G.726 codec, 20ms sample size. G729_10MS G.7296 codec, 10 ms sample size. G729_20MS G.7296 codec, 20ms sample size. G729_30MS G.7296 codec, 30ms sample size. vadFlag Voice Activity Detection (VAD) silence suppression flag. Values are: OFF turns Voice Activity Detection silence suppression off. If your SIP phone or ATA does not support VAD, set this parameter to OFF ON turns Voice Activity Detection silence suppression. This allows the switch to send one silence packet (representing multiple packets), which decreases messaging between the endpoints. dtmfToneMode How Dual Tone Multi Frequency Tones (DTMF) are transmitted during a call. INBAND tones are sent as regular packetized voice; tones are sent in the same packets as the voice OUTBAND tones are sent in the same RTP stream, but in separate packets from the voice (see RFC 2833)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

427

SIP

The Generic CLI is used for All CodecProfile commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6.
NOTE: As a safety precaution, a CodecProfile that is in use can not be deleted! The switch will issue a warning message, specifying the name of the CodecProfileList that is using the Codec Profile. The CodecProfile must be removed from all CodecProfileLists that are using it before it can be deleted.

The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The modify command applies only to the following parameters:

codecTypeAndSize vadFlag dtmfToneMode

To properly configure CodecProfiles and the CodecProfileLists, know the following capabilities of the SIP endpoint with which the T7000 will communicate:

the codec types supported the different configurations of each codec supported

NOTE: If the T7000 and SIP endpoint cannot agree on a Codec Profile, the T7000 refuses the call during call setup.

create CodecProfile cp1 modify CodecProfile cp1 vadFlag ON modify CodecProfile cp1 codecTypeAndSize G711_20ms modify CodecProfile cp1 codecTypeAndSize G711_20MS query CodecProfile cp1 <2bfc720> CodecProfile key................"cp1" codecTypeAndSize...G711_20MS vadFlag............ON dtmfToneMode.......OUTBAND

Dependent Commands
Add this CodecProfile to a CodeProfileList, see CodecProfileList on page 425.

428

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Host IP Addr Pair

A Host IP Addr Pair associates a host name with one or two IP Addresses and port Numbers. It is stored in the Host Name table, and is used to resolve a Fully Qualified Domain Name into an IP Address and Port. For more information, see Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names on page 465. A Host IP Addr has the following attributes:
Attributes key priIPAddrPair Description host name and domain of the Host IP Addr Primary IP address and Port number of the host

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195 secIPAddrPair Optional Secondary IP address and Port number of the IP host

The Generic CLI is used for all Host IP Addr Pair commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key sIPAddr Port

The optional parameters for the create command are:

sIPAddr Port

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

priIPAddrPair

secIPAddrPair

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

429

SIP

create HostIPAddrPair Host1@taqua.com 10.1.134.243 6030 modify HostIPAddrPair Host1@taqua.com secIPAddrPair 10.1.134.244 6031 query HostIPAddrPair Host1@taqua.com <2bfc1f0> HostIPAddrPair key............."Host1@taqua.com" priIPAddrPair...<2bfcce0> <2bfcce0> IPAddrPair sIPAddr..."10.1.134.243" Port......178e (6030) secIPAddrPair...<2bfc308> <2bfc308> IPAddrPair sIPAddr..."10.1.134.244" Port......178f (6031)

430

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

MediaParam
A MediaParam is a media stream parameter. Media stream parameters are configurable parameters for the bearer or RTP portion of a VoIP call. Media stream parameters apply to an entire trunk group. A MediaParam has the following attributes:
Attributes key adaptiveVadFlag Description name of the media stream parameter Adaptive Voice Activity Detection (VAD) silence suppression MANUAL Manual Silence Threshold DYNAMIC (default) Dynamic Threshold Detection vadThreshold The decibel threshold where adaptiveVadFlag detection occurs from -20 to -50. -30 is the default.

NOTE: set this only if Manual Silence Threshold is enabled modemFaxHandlingCodec Modem and fax data transport is encoded using G711 upspeed G711 upspeed off G711 upspeed ON (default) jitterBufferMode The jitter buffer conceals variations in RTP packet arrival times FIXED buffer size is fixed ADAPTIVE (default) buffer size changes to deal with varying levels of jitter jitterBufferMaxSize The maximum time data is held in the buffer to conceal jitter. Range 10-100. 100 is the default.

NOTE: This value can be set for either FIXED or ADAPTIVE jitterBufferMode jitterBufferInitialSize The initial size of the jitter buffer from 0-100. 20 is the default.

NOTE: This value is only meaningful for ADAPTIVE jitterBufferMode.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

431

SIP

Attributes echoCancelFlag

Description Controls the Echo Cancellers. Echo cancellation is often required because the process of packetizing voice samples can introduce delay and generate echo. ECHO_CANCEL_OFF disables the echo canceller ECHO_CANCEL_ON (Default) enables the echo canceller

echoTailSize

Sets the maximum amount of echo tail (in milliseconds) that the echo canceller works on. 32 64 (default) 128

rtpDSCPtos

RTP DSCP, controls the priority at which RTP packets are sent through the network. Difserv Codepoint (DSCP) is a coarse-grained, classbased mechanism for traffic management. Diffserv selects the per-hop behavior (PHB) for each signaling packet forwarded through the network.a Expedited Forwarding PHB provides a low-loss, lowlatency, assured bandwidth service for VoIP applications. The DSCP value for this PHB (which is recommend) is 184 (hex 0xB8).

signaling802_1_priority

To set this parameter, ensure vlantag is ENABLED, see setFeifOptions on page 424. When vlantagging is ENABLED, the 802.1Q tag header is added to each bearer packet the PIC transmits. The information set in this parameter controls the priority of packets. range (0 is the lowest priority, 7 is the highest priority) bearer default: 5

payloadType2833

used by the MGCP or SIP protocol to identify the RFC 2833 SDP Payload Type. Default is 101. The range is 96 - 999 used by the MGCP and SIP protocols. If the value is set to ON, the switch will use the values in rxGainControl and txGainControl when it sets up an RTP stream. used by MGCP to set the amount of gain in a remote device (MTA) stream. The same amount of gain is set for both the transmit and receive direction. This happens regardless of the value of enableGainControl. Default is 0 (i.e., no gain). The range is -14 dB to +14 dB the amount of transmit gain to set in the MGCP or SIP media stream. Default is 0 (i.e., no gain). The range is -14 dB to +14 dB

enableGainControl

gainControlDb

rxGainControl

432

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Attributes txGainControl

Description the amount of receive gain to set in the MGCP or SIP media stream. Default is 0 (i.e., no gain). The range is -14 dB to +14 dB

a. DSCP is defined in RFC 2474. Expedited Forwarding PHB is defined in RFC-2598.

The Generic CLI is used for all MediaParam commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

create modify

adaptiveVadFlag vadThreshold modemFaxHandlingCodec jitterBufferMode jitterBufferMaxSize jitterBufferInitialSize echoTailSize rtpDSCPtos signaling802_1_priority payloadType2833 enableGainControl gainControlDb rxGainControl txGainControl

MediaParam mdp1 MediaParam mdp1 adaptiveVadFlag DYNAMIC

Dependent Commands
Apply a media stream parameter to a trunk group, see Trunk Groups on page 233.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

433

SIP

SIP Timers
Each Sip Endpoint Profile contains a SIP timer object. The timers in the SIP timer object control how the endpoint behaves in a SIP network. A SIP Endpoint has the following attributes.
Attribute Timer1 Description The timers A, E, and G; INVITE request retransmit interval (UDP only), non-INVITE request retransmit interval (UDP only), and INVITE response retransmit interval. Range: 100 - 1,000 ms Default: 500 ms Timer2 The maximum retransmit interval for non-INVITE requests and INVITE responses. Range: 800 - 8,000 ms Default: 4,000 ms TimerB The INVITE transaction timeout. Far-end failover occurs when this timer expires. Range: 2,000 - 64,000 ms Default: (64 * timer1) TimerD The wait time for response 0s for TCP/SCTP retransmits. Range: 32,000 - 64,000 ms Default: 32,000 ms TimerF The non-INVITE transaction timeout. Range: 6,400 - 64,000 ms Default: (64 * timer1) TimerH The wait time for ACK receipt. Range: 6,400 - 64,000 ms Default: (64 * timer1) TimerI The wait time for 0s for TCP/SCTP ACK retransmits. Default: 1,000 - 10,000 ms Range: 5,000 ms TimerJ The wait time for 0s for TCP/SCTP non-INVITE request retransmits. Range: 6,400 - 64,000 ms Default: (64 * timer1) TimerK The wait time for 0s for TCP/SCTP response retransmits. Range: 1,000 - 10,000 ms Default: 5,000 ms

434

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Attribute TimerFO

Description Failover timer: the wait time for a response to an INVITE before sending the INVITE to the secondary IP address Range: 800 - 8,000 ms Default: 4,000 ms

create SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1 modify SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1 timers TimerFO 3200

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

435

SIP

SIP Access Gateway Profile

A SIP Access Gateway Profile defines the messaging and expected behavior of a SIP Access Gateway endpoint. The types of endpoints associated with this profile are IP phones, ATAs, or other CPE devices directly controlled by the T7000 and using its SIP registrar functionality Multiple SIP Access Gateway endpoints share a profile; when you modify the profile it updates all SIP Access Gateway endpoints with that profile A SIP Access Gateway Profile has the following attributes:
Attribute key options timers Description name of the SIP Access Gateway endpoint profile The options for this profile. See SIP Access Gateway Options on page 437. The timers for this profile. See SIP Timers on page 434.

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Access Gateway Profile commands, see Using
Generic CLI Commands on page 6

The required parameters for the create command are:

key

There are no optional parameters for the create command. The modify command applies to the following attributes:

options timers

create SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1 modify SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1 timers TimerFO 3200

436

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

SIP Access Gateway Options

A SIP Access Gateway Options object has the following attributes:
Attribute compliantToRFC Description the specification that the far end is compliant to RFC3261 (default) newer set of SIP standards RFC2543 older set of SIP standards maxForwards The initial value in the maxForwards header. This value is decremented by one each time it passes through a proxy as a means of loop detection. The SIP message is discarded when the value in the maxForwards header reaches zero. Range 1-255. 6 is the default.

NOTE: The T7000 is not a proxy. allowHeaderValue This is a bitfield of the types of headers sent in the ALLOW method. By default, all values are set. Values are: INVITE (set by default) Allow INVITE requests REGISTER (set by default) Allow REGISTER requests BYE (set by default) Allow BYE requests CANCEL (set by default) Allow CANCEL requests ACK (set by default) Allow ACK requests NOTIFY Allow NOTIFY requests SUBSCRIBE Allow SUBSCRIBE requests OPTIONS Allow OPTIONS requests UPDATE Allow UPDATE requests INFO (set by default) Allow INFO requests preferredPrivacyMethod NO_PRIVACY_METHOD send calling party name and number in the FROM header. If the calling party presentation is restricted or unavailable, the switch will send From: "Anonymous" <sip:Anonymous@IP_ADDRESS:Port> REMOTE_PARTY_ID (default) send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Remote Party ID header of the SIP message PRIVACY_HEADER send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Privacy header of the SIP message

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

437

SIP

Attribute expiresHeaderValue

Description contents of the EXPIRES header, how long the current message should be honored from Range: 1,000 to 360,000 milliseconds. 180,000 is the default.

NOTE: If the timer expires before the call is set up, the call is cancelled. dnsLookup Specifies how the switch resolves a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) into an IP Address and Port number when a lookup in the Host Names table fails. Note that the switch always first checks the Host Names table to resolve an FQDN, regardless of the setting of the dnsLookup attribute. The choices are: DNS_LOOKUP_DISABLED the switch makes no further attempts to resolve the FQDN. DNS_LOOKUP_ENABLED the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address (for details, consult RFC 1034). DNS_SRV_LOOKUP_ENABLED the switch issues a DNS SRV query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address and a Port number (for details, consult RFC 2782). If the DNS SRV query fails, the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address. For details, see Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names on page 465. dnsRespTimerValue How long the switch will wait for a DNS query before giving up. Range: 500 - 10,000 ms Default: 3,000 ms responseToOPTIONS This attribute controls how the switch responds to an OPTIONs request. Since the switch does not support the OPTIONS method, the normal response should be 405, Method not allowed. However, some endpoints (such as the Audio Codes Session Border Controller), cannot process this response. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can send 200 OK instead. The choices are: Response200ToOptions Send a 200 OK response. Response405ToOptions (default) Send a 405 Method not allowed response.

438

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Attribute sipCallRefMapOption

Description This attribute controls how the switch identifies messages in a SIP dialog. RFC 3261 defines a dialog as the combination of the To tag, the From tag, and the Call-ID. However, some endpoints change the To tag or the From tag after an INVITE message is sent or received. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can identify messages in a dialog by Call-ID only. The choices are: CALLID_FROM_TO_HDR (default) Use Call-ID, To tag, and From tag to identify messages in a dialog, per RFC 3261. CALLID_ONLY Use only Call-ID to identify messages in a dialog.

secondaryDNReqURI

For SIP subscribers with a secondary DN whose alertInfoHdr attribute is INCLUDE_WITH_SPACES or INCLUDE_WITHOUT_SPACES PRIMARY always set the Req URI address of the INVITE Request to the primary DN, regardless of which DN was dialed (default) SECONDARY always set the Req URI address of the INVITE Request to the secondary DN, regardless of which DN was dialed

alertInfoHdr

NOT_INCLUDE do not include an Alert Info Header in the INVITE Request (default) INCLUDE_WITH_SPACES an Alert-Info header is included in the INVITE Request, consisting of the alertInfoStringPrefix assigned to the Subscriber Access Gatewayendpoint profile, followed by the numeric value received in the Alert-Info Header Alert-String received from the home Application Server, with one space before and one space after the string text INCLUDE_WITHOUT_SPACES an Alert-Info header is included in INVITE Request, consisting of the alertInfoStringPrefix assigned to the Subscriber Access Gateway endpoint profile, followed by the numeric value received in the Alert-Info Header received from the home Application Server.

alertInfoStringPrefix

This is a string used by the SIP phone or ATA to deliver a distinctive ring tone. If the value of the alertInfoHdr attribute is INCLUDE_WITH_SPACES or INCLUDE_WITHOUT_SPACES, this string will be delivered, along with the numeric value received in the Alert-Info Header from the home Application Server.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

439

SIP

Attribute regsWithoutChallenge

Description Determines if the Subscriber Access Endpoint can Register without being issued a Challenge. Values are: NO (default) the endpoint cannot Register without answering a Challenge. YES the endpoint can Register without answering a Challenge. NOTE: This attribute was added in Release 6.0.1 to allow interworking with some wireless phones. In most cases however, the default value should be used.

RealmString

Tip
If you are upgrading from Release 5.0, and SIP Registration is failing, try changing this attribute to Tekelec7000.

This is the realm parameter issued in a challenge during the SIP Registration process. You may have to change this value from the default if an Access Gateway requires a custom realm string. Or, you may need to change the realm from the default for security purposes. Otherwise, accept the default value. Default: Taqua-T7000

modify SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1 options maxForwards 4 modify SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1 options responseToOPTIONS 200

Dependent Commands
Associate a SIP Access Gateway endpoint with a SIP Access Gateway Endpoint profile, see Subscriber Access Gateway Endpoint on page 441.

440

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Subscriber Access Gateway Endpoint

Subscriber Access Gateway endpoints are IP phones, ATAs, or other CPE devices directly controlled by the T7000 and using its SIP registrar functionality. This type of SIP subscriber receives the same services from the T7000 as other types of subscribers (TDM, MGCP, etc.). A Subscriber Access Gateway endpoint has the following attributes:.
Attribute key Description 10-digit directory number that acts as a key for the SIP endpoint. The key must match the DN of the subscriber record. see Subscribers on page 530

EndpointName

Optional name of IP End Point used to label the IP End Point. Length: 1 - 48 characters.

profileName bearerGrpKey PriHostIPAddrPair

The SIP Access Gateway Endpoint Profile associated with this endpoint. The BearerGroup associated with this endpoint. See BearerGroup on page 163. The Primary IP address and Port number of the SIP endpoint. Normally this information is supplied by the SIP phone as part of the SIP Register process. A list of alternate IP addresses and Port numbers of the SIP endpoint. This attribute is normally 0 for a Subscriber Access Gateway. HOST_NOT_USED OUTBOUND_PROXY_ACTIVE PRIMARY_ACTIVE SECONDARY_ACTIVE

AltHostIPAddrPairs

actHostIndex

bearerFEs transportType

The Fast Ethernet Interface(s) that handle (RTP). Each PIC card has two FEs. Use multiple FEs for load sharing. This field is read-only. UDP SIP messages are conveyed to this endpoint using User Datagram Protocol

signalingType cmtsName

This field is read-only. SIP This endpoint is served by the SIP protocol. cmtsName - Used to implement the optional DQoS Dynamic Quality of Service) feature. When a CMTS is assigned to an endpoint, a connection is established with the CMTS using the COPS (Common Open Policy Service) protocol. Every call that is made from/ to that endpoint will trigger the DQoS feature to allocate gate's with the CMTS before sending any call processing messages.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

441

SIP

Attribute FQDN

Description Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN). Normally, a Subscriber Access endpoint does not have an FQDN. If used, a Domain Name System (DNS) will be required to translate the FQDN to an IP address. The outbound proxy IP Address Pair is the address of a firewall. When provisioned, this attribute is used for sending outbound SIP messages to the Subscriber Access Gateway endpoint. If there is a firewall between the switch and the Subscriber Access Gateway endpoint, enter the IP address and port of the firewall.

outboundProxyIPAddrPair

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Access Gateway Endpoint commands, see
Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6

The required parameters for the create command are:

key
profileName

The optional parameters for the create command are:

sIPAddr Port

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

endpointName profileName bearerGrpKey priHostIPAddrPair cmtsName FQDN outboundProxyIPAddrPair.

create SipAgwEndpointProfile agwp1 create SipAgwEndpoint 6924800000 agwp1 bg_agw modify SipAgwEndpoint 6924800000 priHostIPAddrPair 202.158.201.38 5060 destroy SipAgwEndpoint 6924800000

442

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Prerequisites
SIP endpoint profile, see SIP Access Gateway Profile on page 436. Codec Profile List, see CodecProfileList on page 425, and Codec Profile, see CodecProfile on page 427, and Adding CodecProfiles to a CodecProfileList on page 426. Media stream parameter, see MediaParam on page 431

Dependent Commands
Create an IP trunk group and modify its attributes, see see IP Trunk Groups on page 307. Add prefixes, see Prefixes on page 403. Create a route list, see with a route over the IP trunk group, see NANP Route List
on page 519.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

443

SIP

SIP Emergency Services Gateway Profile

A SIP Emergency Services Gateway Profile defines the messaging and expected behavior of a SIP Emergency Services Gateway endpoint. This type of endpoint provides 911 service to nomadic IP subscribers. Multiple SIP Emergency Services Gateway endpoints share a profile; when you modify the profile it updates all SIP Emergency Services Gateway endpoints with that profile A SIP Emergency Services Profile has the following attributes:
Attribute key options timers Description name of the SIP Emergency Services endpoint profile The options for this profile. See SIP Emergency Services Gateway Options on page 445. The timers for this profile. See SIP Timers on page 434.

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Emergency Services Gateway Profile commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6 The required parameters for the create command are:

key

There are no optional parameters for the create command. The modify command applies to the following attributes:

options timers

create SipEsgwEndpointProfile esgwProfile1 modify SipEsgwEndpointProfile esgwProfile1 timers TimerD 34000

444

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

SIP Emergency Services Gateway Options

A SIP Emergency Services Gateway Options object has the following attributes:
Attribute compliantToRFC Description the specification that the far end is compliant to RFC3261 (default) newer set of SIP standards RFC2543 older set of SIP standards maxForwards The initial value in the maxForwards header. This value is decremented by one each time it passes through a proxy as a means of loop detection. The SIP message is discarded when the value in the maxForwards header reaches zero. Range 1-255. 6 is the default.

NOTE: The T7000 is not a proxy. allowHeaderValue This is a bitfield of the types of headers sent in the ALLOW method. By default, all values are set. Values are: INVITE (set by default) Allow INVITE requests REGISTER Allow REGISTER requests BYE (set by default) Allow BYE requests CANCEL (set by default) Allow CANCEL requests ACK (set by default) Allow ACK requests NOTIFY Allow NOTIFY requests SUBSCRIBE Allow SUBSCRIBE requests OPTIONS Allow OPTIONS requests UPDATE Allow UPDATE requests INFO Allow INFO requests preferredPrivacyMethod NO_PRIVACY_METHOD send calling party name and number in the FROM header. If the calling party presentation is restricted or unavailable, the switch will send From: "Anonymous" <sip:Anonymous@IP_ADDRESS:Port> REMOTE_PARTY_ID (default) send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Remote Party ID header of the SIP message PRIVACY_HEADER send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Privacy header of the SIP message

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

445

SIP

Attribute expiresHeaderValue

Description contents of the EXPIRES header, how long the current message should be honored from Range: 1,000 to 360,000 milliseconds. 180,000 is the default.

NOTE: If the timer expires before the call is set up, the call is cancelled. dnsLookup Specifies how the switch resolves a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) into an IP Address and Port number when a lookup in the Host Names table fails. Note that the switch always first checks the Host Names table to resolve an FQDN, regardless of the setting of the dnsLookup attribute. The choices are: DNS_LOOKUP_DISABLED the switch makes no further attempts to resolve the FQDN. DNS_LOOKUP_ENABLED the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address (for details, consult RFC 1034). DNS_SRV_LOOKUP_ENABLED the switch issues a DNS SRV query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address and a Port number (for details, consult RFC 2782). If the DNS SRV query fails, the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address. For details, see Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names on page 465. dnsRespTimerValue How long the switch will wait for a DNS query before giving up. Range: 500 - 10,000 ms Default: 3,000 ms responseToOPTIONS This attribute controls how the switch responds to an OPTIONS request. Since the switch does not support the OPTIONS method, the normal response should be 405, Method not allowed. However, some endpoints (such as the Audio Codes Session Border Controller), cannot process this response. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can send 200 OK instead. Response200 Send a 200 OK response. Response405 (default Send a 405 Method not allowed response.

446

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Attribute sipCallRefMapOption

Description This attribute controls how the switch identifies messages in a SIP dialog. RFC 3261 defines a dialog as the combination of the To tag, the From tag, and the Call-ID. However, some endpoints change the To tag or the From tag after an INVITE message is sent or received. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can identify messages in a dialog by Call-ID only. The choices are: CALLID_FROM_TO_HDR (default) Use Call-ID, To tag, and From tag to identify messages in a dialog, per RFC 3261. CALLID_ONLY Use only Call-ID to identify messages in a dialog.

diversionRequired

YES populates the redirectingNumber field in the diversion header of a SIP call NO (default) no redirectingNumber is added See ESAOption on page 464. Specifies how the switch determines the incoming route. CALLING_THEN_BOTTOM_VIA (default) when the switch receives an INVITE request, it first determines the originating Endpoint by inspecting the FROM header. It uses NANP routing to determine the incoming IP trunk group. If it can not find an IP trunk group from the FROM header, it then inspects the bottom VIA, as described in the BOTTOM_VIA_HEADER only option. BOTTOM_VIA_ONLY when the switch receives an INVITE request, it determines the incoming route by looking up the Network Endpoint associated with the IP address in the bottom VIA. It uses the default IP Trunk Group of the SIP Ngw End Point for the incoming IP Trunk Group.

ESAOption incomingRoute

NOTE: The required option for Emergency Services Gateways is BOTTOM_VIA_ONLY. pingRespTimerValue Used with ESAOption ESAforPingRespTimeOut. Specifies how long the switch will wait for a response to a ping. When the timer expires, the switch sends another ping to the unreachable endpoint Range: 500 3,000 milliseconds (default = 1,000)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

447

SIP

Attribute farEndFailoverControl

Description For use with, but not limited to, TaquaWorks. Values are: PreferActiveHost (default) Always sends the 1st INVITE for a call to the active IP address(see actNearEndNiOid on page 312). PreferPrimary Always send the1st INVITE for a call to the primary IP address. If no response is returned, continue sending INVITE requests for the call to the primary IP address, until either a response is received or the failover timer fires (see TimerFO on page 435). After the failover timer expires, send all subsequent INVITE requests to the secondary IP address until either a response is received or timer B fires (see TimerB on page 434). Repeat this process for the next call, regardless of what happened to the current call. NOTE: Set farEndFailoverControl to PreferPrimary for BroadWorks Applications Servers.

send3xxForINVITE

For use with TaquaWorks systems without a Network Server. This attribute controls how the switch responds to an INVITE from a member of one business group on BroadWorks Application Server to a member of a different business group, also on the BroadWorks Application Server. NOTE: If you are not using TaquaWorks, or if your TaquaWorks system has a Network Server, leave this attributes value at the default. Values are: OFF (default) the switch sends an INVITE to the BroadWorks Application Server. 302 the switch sends a 302 Redirect to the BroadWorks Application Server. This 302 allows BroadWorks to properly handle the call without a Network Server.

modify SipEsgwEndpointProfile esgwProfile1 options maxForwards 10

Dependent Commands
Associate a SIP Emergency Services Gateway endpoint with a SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint profile, see SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint on page 449

448

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint

An Emergency Services gateway provides 911 service to nomadic IP subscribers. A SIP Emergency Services Gateway endpoint has the following attributes:.
Attribute key Description 10-digit directory number that acts as a key for the SIP endpoint. For an Emergency Services Gateway endpoint, this is also the defaultDN for the IP trunk group connecting to it from the switch. This DN should be part of your NPANXX and reserved for this configuration. Optional name of IP End Point used to label the IP End Point. Length: 1 - 48 characters. profileName bearerGrpKey PriHostIPAddrPair altHostIPAddrPairs The SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint Profile associated with this endpoint. The BearerGroup associated with this endpoint. See BearerGroup on page 163. The Primary IP address and Port number of the SIP endpoint. A list of back-up IP addresses and ports of the connecting softswitch, to be used when a connection cannot be made to the PriHostIPAddrPair. HOST_NOT_USED OUTBOUND_PROXY_ACTIVE PRIMARY_ACTIVE SECONDARY_ACTIVE transportType This field is read-only. UDP SIP messages are conveyed to this endpoint using User Datagram Protocol signalingType FQDN This field is read-only. SIP This endpoint is served by the SIP protocol. Optional Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) for outbound INVITE requests. The ESGW endpoint may use a FQDN to implement a DNS-based redundancy scheme.

endpointName

actHostIndex

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

449

SIP

Attribute outboundProxyIPAddrPair

Description The outboundProxyIPAddrPair is the IP address of a Session Border Controller (SBC). When provisioned, this attribute is used for sending outbound SIP messages to the Emergency Services Gateway endpoint. If there is a SBC or proxy firewall between the switch and the Emergency Services Gateway endpoint, enter the IP address and port of the firewall.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Emergency Services Gateway commands, see
Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6

The required parameters for the create command are:

key profileName bearerGrpKey sIPAddr Port

There are no optional parameters for the create command. The modify command applies to the following attributes:

endpointName profileName priHostIPAddrPair FQDN outboundProxyIPAddrPair

The insertInto and the deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

See:

altHostIPAddrPairs

Adding IP Addr Pairs to a SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint on page 452 Removing IP Addr Pairs from a SIP Emergency Services Gateway on page 453

450

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

create SipEsgwEndpoint 9724809911 esgwProfile1 bg_esgw 202.158.201.38 5060 query SipEsgwEndpoint 6924801000 destroy SipEsgwEndpoint 6924801000

Prerequisites
SIP endpoint profile, see SIP Emergency Services Gateway Profile on page 444. Codec Profile, see CodecProfile on page 427, and Codec Profile List, see CodecProfileList on page 425. Media stream parameter, see MediaParam on page 431

Dependent Commands
Create an IP trunk group and modify its attributes, see IP Trunk Groups on page 307. Add prefixes, see Prefixes on page 403. Create a route list with a route over the IP trunk group, see LNP Route List on page
517.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

451

SIP

Adding IP Addr Pairs to a SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint insertInto SipEsgwEndpoint <key> altHostIPAddrPairs <subkey> <IPAddrPair>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add an IP Address to a SIP Network Gateway Endpoints altHostIPAddrPairs list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> <subkey> Description

SIP Network Gateway DN

This is the index in the altHostIPAddrPair list where you want to enter the alternate IP Address Pair.

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert an alternate IP Address Pair at the start of the altHostIPAddrPair list. Use a index of -1 to insert an alternate IP Address Pair at the end of the altHostIPAddrPair list.

<IPAddPair>

This attribute specifies which Fast Ethernet you want to add to the SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

The following command adds IP Address 202.158.201.39, Port 506 to SIP Emergency Services Gateway 6924001000s altHostIPAddrPairs list:

insertInto SipEsgwEndpoint 6924801000 altHostIPAddrPairs 1 IPAddrPair 202.158.201.39 5060

452

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Removing IP Addr Pairs from a SIP Emergency Services Gateway deleteFrom SipEsgwEndpoint <key> altHostIPAddrPairs <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove an IP Address from a SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoints altHostIPAddrPairs list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

SIP Network Gateway DN

This is the index in the bearerFE list where you want to remove the Fast Ethernet.

<subkey>

The following example removes the 1st IP Address from SIP Emergency Services Gateway 6924801000s altHostIPAddrPairs list:

deleteFrom SipEsgwEndpoint 6924801000 altHostIPAddrPairs 1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

453

SIP

SIP Network Gateway Profile

A SIP Network Gateway Profile defines the messaging and expected behavior of a SIP Network Gateway endpoint. The types of SIP endpoints are stand-alone IP gateways to an IP access network, or distributed soft switch systems (such as Application Servers connecting IP CENTREX business groups). Multiple SIP Network Gateway endpoints share a profile; when you modify the profile it updates all SIP Network Gateway endpoints with that profile A SIP Network Gateway Profile has the following attributes:
Attribute key options timers Description name of the SIP Network Gateway endpoint profile The options for this profile. See SIP Network Gateway Options on page 455. The timers for this profile. See SIP Timers on page 434.

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Network Gateway Profile commands, see Using
Generic CLI Commands on page 6

The required parameters for the create command are:

key

There are no optional parameters for the create command. The modify command applies to the following attributes:

options timers

create SipNgwEndpointProfile ngwProfile1 modify SipNgwEndpointProfile ngwProfile1 timers TimerD 33800

454

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

SIP Network Gateway Options

A SIP Access Gateway Options object has the following attributes:
Attribute compliantToRFC Description the specification that the far end is compliant to RFC3261 (default) newer set of SIP standards RFC2543 older set of SIP standards maxForwards The initial value in the maxForwards header. This value is decremented by one each time it passes through a proxy as a means of loop detection. The SIP message is discarded when the value in the maxForwards header reaches zero. Range 1-255. 6 is the default.

NOTE: The T7000 is not a proxy. allowHeaderValue This is a bitfield of the types of headers sent in the ALLOW method. By default, all values are set. Values are: INVITE (set by default) Allow INVITE requests REGISTER Allow REGISTER requests BYE (set by default) Allow BYE requests CANCEL (set by default) Allow CANCEL requests ACK (set by default) Allow ACK requests NOTIFY Allow NOTIFY requests SUBSCRIBE Allow SUBSCRIBE requests OPTIONS Allow OPTIONS requests UPDATE Allow UPDATE requests INFO Allow INFO requests preferredPrivacyMethod NO_PRIVACY_METHOD send calling party name and number in the FROM header. If the calling party presentation is restricted or unavailable, the switch will send From: "Anonymous" <sip:Anonymous@IP_ADDRESS:Port> REMOTE_PARTY_ID (default) send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Remote Party ID header of the SIP message PRIVACY_HEADER send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Privacy header of the SIP message

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

455

SIP

Attribute expiresHeaderValue

Description contents of the EXPIRES header, how long the current message should be honored from Range: 1,000 to 360,000 milliseconds. 180,000 is the default.

NOTE: If the timer expires before the call is set up, the call is cancelled. dnsLookup Specifies how the switch resolves a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) into an IP Address and Port number when a lookup in the Host Names table fails. Note that the switch always first checks the Host Names table to resolve an FQDN, regardless of the setting of the dnsLookup attribute. The choices are: DNS_LOOKUP_DISABLED the switch makes no further attempts to resolve the FQDN. DNS_LOOKUP_ENABLED the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address (for details, consult RFC 1034). DNS_SRV_LOOKUP_ENABLED the switch issues a DNS SRV query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address and a Port number (for details, consult RFC 2782). If the DNS SRV query fails, the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address. For details, see Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names on page 465. dnsRespTimerValue How long the switch will wait for a DNS query before giving up. Range: 500 - 10,000 ms Default: 3,000 ms responseToOPTIONS This attribute controls how the switch responds to an OPTIONs request. Since the switch does not support the OPTIONS method, the normal response should be 405, Method not allowed. However, some endpoints (such as the Audio Codes Session Border Controller), cannot process this response. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can send 200 OK instead. Response200ToOptions Send a 200 OK response. Response405ToOptions (default Send a 405 Method not allowed response.

456

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Attribute sipCallRefMapOption

Description This attribute controls how the switch identifies messages in a SIP dialog. RFC 3261 defines a dialog as the combination of the To tag, the From tag, and the Call-ID. However, some endpoints change the To tag or the From tag after an INVITE message is sent or received. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can identify messages in a dialog by Call-ID only. The choices are: CALLID_FROM_TO_HDR (default) Use Call-ID, To tag, and From tag to identify messages in a dialog, per RFC 3261. CALLID_ONLY Use only Call-ID to identify messages in a dialog.

diversionRequired

YES populates the redirectingNumber field in the diversion header of a SIP call NO (default) no redirectingNumber is added See ESAOption on page 464. Specifies how the switch determines the incoming route. BOTTOM_VIA_THEN_CALLING (default) when the switch receives an INVITE request, it first determines the originating Endpoint by inspecting the FROM header. It uses NANP routing to determine the incoming IP trunk group. If it can not find an IP trunk group from the FROM header, it then inspects the bottom VIA, as described in the BOTTOM_VIA_HEADER only option. BOTTOM_VIA_ONLY when the switch receives an INVITE request, it determines the incoming route by looking up the Network Endpoint associated with the IP address in the bottom VIA. It uses the default IP Trunk Group of the SIP Ngw End Point for the incoming IP Trunk Group.

ESAOption incomingRoute

pingRespTimerValue

Used with ESAOption ESAforPingRespTimeOut. Specifies how long the switch will wait for a response to a ping. When the timer expires, the switch sends another ping to the unreachable endpoint Range: 500 3,000 milliseconds (default = 1,000)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

457

SIP

Attribute farEndFailoverControl

Description For use with, but not limited to, TaquaWorks. Values are: PreferActiveHost (default) Always sends the 1st INVITE for a call to the active IP address(see actNearEndNiOid on page 312). PreferPrimary Always send the1st INVITE for a call to the primary IP address. If no response is returned, continue sending INVITE requests for the call to the primary IP address, until either a response is received or the failover timer files (see TimerFO on page 435). After the failover timer expires, send all subsequent INVITE requests to the secondary IP address until either a response is received or timer B fires (see TimerB on page 434). Repeat this process for the next call, regardless of what happened to the current call

modify SipNgwEndpointProfile ngwProfile1 options maxForwards 2

Dependent Commands
Associate a SIP Network Gateway endpoint with a SIP Network Gateway Endpoint profile, see SIP Network Gateway Endpoint on page 459

458

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

SIP Network Gateway Endpoint

SIP Network Gateway endpoints are stand-alone IP gateways. A SIP Network Gateway endpoint has the following attributes:.
Attribute key Description 10-digit directory number that acts as a key for the SIP endpoint. For a Network Gateway endpoint, this is also the defaultDN for the IP trunk group connecting to it from the switch. This DN should be part of your NPA-NXX and reserved for this configuration.

endpointName

Optional name of IP End Point used to label the IP End Point. Length: 1 - 48 characters.

profileName bearerGrpKey priHostIPAddrPair altHostIPAddrPairs

The SIP Network Gateway Endpoint Profile associated with this endpoint. The BearerGroup associated with this endpoint. See BearerGroup on page 163. The Primary IP address and Port number of the SIP endpoint. A list of back-up IP addresses and ports of the connecting softswitch, to be used when a connection cannot be made to the PriHostIPAddrPair. HOST_NOT_USED OUTBOUND_PROXY_ACTIVE PRIMARY_ACTIVE SECONDARY_ACTIVE

actHostIndex

transportType

This field is read-only. UDP SIP messages are conveyed to this endpoint using User Datagram Protocol

signalingType FQDN

This field is read-only. SIP This endpoint is served by the SIP protocol. Optional Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN). The T7000 usually forms SIP messages using the IP address of the Network Gateway endpoint. If the Network Gateway requires a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) instead of an IP address in outbound requests, double-click FQDN and enter the FQDN of the Network Gateway.

NOTE: FQDN may be used to implement a DNS based NGW redundancy scheme.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

459

SIP

Attribute outboundProxyIPAddrPair

Description The outboundProxyIPAddrPair is the IP address of a Session Border Controller (SBC). When provisioned, this attribute is used for sending outbound SIP messages to the Network Gateway endpoint. If there is a SBC or proxy firewall between the switch and the Network Gateway endpoint, enter the IP address and port of the firewall.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Network Gateway commands, see Using
Generic CLI Commands on page 6

The required parameters for the create command are:

key
profileName BearerGrpKey

sIPAddr Port

There are no optional parameters for the create command. The modify command applies to the following attributes:

endpointName profileName priHostIPAddrPair FQDN outboundProxyIPAddrPair

The insertInto and the deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

altHostIPAddrPairs bearerFEs

See Adding IP Addr Pairs to a SIP Network Gateway Endpoint on page 462, and Removing Bearer FEs from a SIP Network Gateway on page 463.
create SipNgwEndpoint 6924801000 ngw_p1 bg_ngw1 query SipNgwEndpoint 6924801000 destroy SipAgwEndpoint 6924801000 202.158.201.38 5060

460

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Prerequisites
SIP endpoint profile, see SIP Network Gateway Profile on page 454. Codec Profile List, see CodecProfileList on page 425, and Codec Profile, see CodecProfile on page 427, and Adding CodecProfiles to a CodecProfileList on page 426. Media stream parameter, see MediaParam on page 431

Dependent Commands
Create an IP trunk group and modify its attributes, see IP Trunk Groups on page 307. Add prefixes, see Prefixes on page 403. Create a route list, see with a route over the IP trunk group, see Tandem ANI Route List on page 521.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

461

SIP

Adding IP Addr Pairs to a SIP Network Gateway Endpoint insertInto SipNgwEndpoint <key> altHostIPAddrPairs <subkey> <IPAddrPair>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add an IP Address to a SIP Network Gateway Endpoints altHostIPAddrPairs list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> <subkey> Description

SIP Network Gateway DN

This is the index in the altHostIPAddrPair list where you want to enter the alternate IP Address Pair.

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert an alternate IP Address Pair at the start of the altHostIPAddrPair list. Use a index of -1 to insert an alternate IP Address Pair at the end of the altHostIPAddrPair list.

<IPAddPair>

This attribute specifies which Fast Ethernet you want to add to the SIP Network Gateway Endpoint.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

The following command adds IP Address 202.158.201.39, Port 506 to SIP Network Gateway 6924001000s altHostIPAddrPairs list:

insertInto SipNgwEndpoint 6924801000 altHostIPAddrPairs 1 IPAddrPair 202.158.201.39 5060

462

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Removing Bearer FEs from a SIP Network Gateway deleteFrom SipNgwEndpoint <key> altHostIPAddrPairs <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove an IP Address from a SIP Network Gateway Endpoints altHostIPAddrPairs list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

SIP Network Gateway DN

This is the index in the bearerFE list where you want to remove the Fast Ethernet.

<subkey>

The following example removes the 1st IP Address from SIP Network Gateway 6924801000s altHostIPAddrPairs list:

deleteFrom SipNgwEndpoint 6924801000 bearerFEs 1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

463

SIP

ESAOption
Both the SIP Emergency Services Gateway Options and the SIP Network Gateway Options use the ESAOption. If the switch does not receive a response to an INVITE request from the Network Gateway, Timer B expires, and the feature is invoked.

Tip
See The T7000 Provisioning Guide for a discussion of Emergency Stand Alone and Enhanced Voice Services subscribers.

The feature performs the following functions:

Emergency Stand Alone (ESA) protection for Enhanced Voice Services (EVS) Subscribers automatic IP trunk group management for all types of SIP calls

The following table shows how different values of the ESAOption affect its behavior.
Value DISABLED (default) ESAonBFired Effect on IP trunk group management None. None. Effect on Enhanced Voice Subscribers None. ESA for the EVS subscriber making the call. ESA for the EVS subscriber making the call. Subsequent calls by EVS subscribers using the same IP Trunk group automatically invoke ESA, until the IP trunk group is back in service.

ESAonBFiredAndPingSep The IP trunk group is automatically taken out of service by marking it unreachable. The IP trunk group is not used for any type of SIP call (not just EVS calls, but regular SIP traffic as well). The switch starts pinging the Network Gateway. When the Network Gateway responds to the switchs ping, the IP trunk group is automatically put back into service by marking it reachable, and the switch reverts to normal routing.

NOTE: The Ping time-out is determined by the pingRespTimerValue. The Ping interval is determined by the pingPeriod.

464

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP

Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names

Sometimes endpoints are addressed via a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), instead of an IP Address and Port Number. Before the switch can send a message to such an endpoint, the switch must resolve the FQDN into an IP Address and a Port Number. For example, an FQDN of www.taqua.com might translate to an IP Address of 65.99.210.231 and a Port Number of 5060. One place where FQDNs are encountered is when the switch receives Anonymous SIP calls from a Network Gateway. In this case, the switch resolves the FQDN when processing the SIP message's bottom Via header. Also, endpoints may be provisioned with an FQDN. For details, see:

FQDN on page 442 (Access Gateways) FQDN on page 449 (Emergency Services Gateways) FQDN on page 459 (Network Gateways.

In such cases:

The switch constructs outgoing INVITE requests to the endpoint using the provisioned FQDN in the Request URI and the To header. However, before sending the INVITE, the switch must resolve the FQDN into an IP Address and Port Number. When the switch receives incoming INVITE requests from the endpoint, it must resolve the FQDN in the Contact header so it knows where to send responses.

Prior to release 6.0, the switch resolved FQDNs via the Host Names table. The Host Names table is a static lookup table indexed by FQDN. New in Release 6.0, the switch can resolve an FQDN by sending a query to a Domain Name System (DNS) Server. A DNS Server is a computer in the network which handles FQDN queries from multiple clients. When the IP Address or Port Number associated with an FQDN changes, there is minimal provisioning impact on the network, because only one computer (the DNS Server) needs to be updated with the new information. When the switch has to resolve an FQDN, it always checks the Host Names table first. If the lookup succeeds, the switch uses the IP Address and Port Number from the Host Names table. However, if the FQDN is not found in the Host Names table, the switch checks the value of the endpoints dnsLookup attribute. The value of this attribute determines how the switch resolves the endpoints FQDN. For details, see:

dnsLookup on page 438 (Access Gateways) dnsLookup on page 446 (Emergency Services Gateways) dnsLookup on page 456 (Network Gateways.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

465

SIP

If no DNS query is made, or if the DNS query fails, the switch uses the last used IPaddr pair for the endpoint. This is the active IPaddr pair for the endpoint, either:

the last address used by the host the last result returned by the DNS server the provisioned the primary / secondary IP Address)

NOTE: To speed processing, the switch caches DNS Server responses. These responses are not kept forever, but are discarded when they have exceeded their Time To Live. This behavior is controlled by the minimumDnsTTL attribute in the Fast Ethernet Interface that made the DNS query.

For more information, see Host IP Addr Pair on page 429 and Provisioning a DNS Server in the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

466

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Shelf

Shelf
A Shelf object contains information about the switch. It has the following attributes:
Attribute Description Note: this field is read-only. The number of the shelf. Range: 1 - 31 netref1OID Network Reference 1 Object ID. Defines the first of two network references from which the shelf may take clock reference. If used, the value is a T1 span OID. See OID on page 30, and tdmConfig (iii) on page 730. netref2OID Network Reference 2Ojbect ID. Defines the second of two network references from which the shelf m may take clock reference. If used, the value is a T1 span OID. See OID on page 30, and tdmConfig (iii) on page 730. tdmSpeed Note: this field is read-only. The speed of the TDM bus. This number varies, depending on the types of card in the shelf. Values are: 8Mhz 10Mhz 12Mhz 14Mhz 16Mhz auditsEnabled Displays the status of the replicated database manager audit function. Values are: ENABLED audits are enabled. This is the normal value for this attribute. All cards will be periodically audited by the Database Manager, which ensures that all cards data is equivalent across the shelf. Any inconsistencies will automatically re-synchronize with the Database Masters copy of the data. DISABLED audits are manually disabled.

key

CAUTION
Database audits should not be disabled during normal operations! AUTO_DISABLED Internal value. PAUSED_FOR_SWACT Internal value.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

467

Shelf

Attribute auditPeriod

Description This timer controls how often the Database Manager conducts a database audit. Minimum audit period: 900,000 milliseconds (every15 minutes) Default audit period: 1,800,000 milliseconds (every 30 minutes)

auxAuditsEnabled This field lets you tune the replicated database audits. If enabled, a regular replicated database audit will be followed with an audit of auxiliary data. For example, when an auxAudit is initiated, extra audits are run on the Substitution and Trunk Group databases. Values are: NO Disable auxiliary audits YES (default) Enable auxiliary audits auditExclusions primaryDNS secondaryDNS keyring A dictionary containing a set of databases to be excluded from the next database audit. The IP address of the primary Domain Name Server for Taqua Mail. The IP address of the secondary Domain Name Server for Taqua Mail. A set of software license keys that allow you to run features such as Telemarketer Screening on your switch. Software license keys are only valid on the switch for which they were issued. For software licensing information, e-mail Taqua Marketing at simplify@taqua.com.

The Generic CLI is used for all Shelf commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6.
NOTE: A Shelf object is automatically created by the system. There is no create command.

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands applies to the following attributes:

auditExclusions keyring

Contact Taqua TAC before using these commands on a Shelf object.

468

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Shelf

query Shelf 27 <5368290> Shelf key...................1b (27) netref1OID............0 netref2OID............0 tdmSpeed..............8Mhz auditsEnabled.........ENABLED auditPeriod...........1b7740 (1800000) auxAuditsEnabled......YES auditExclusions.......<5368b98> <5368b98> RepDbMgrDict (0 items) -> primaryDns............0 secondaryDns..........0 minimumDnsTTL.........5a0 (1440) keyring...............0 (0)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

469

SS7

SS7
SS7 is a protocol suite that communicates and controls network elements for call setup, tear down, and database lookup. In the PSTN, SS7 uses out-of band signaling on a separate signaling network, to find a path for each call and to set up and manage calls. The switch connects to the SS7 network using signaling links.

Point Codes
All nodes in the SS7 network are identified by a Point Code. A Point Code is a unique number are assigned by Telcordia Point codes are in the following format: ###.###.### (where ### is a number between 1-254).

The first set of digits (network) represent the carrier, for example 244 is WorldComm, 254 is AT&T. The second set of digits (cluster) represent the subsystem/region. The third set of digits (member) represent the node in its CO.

ISDN User Part (ISUP)

ISUP defines the messages and protocol for establishing and tearing down of voice and data calls over the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). It also manages the trunk network used for the calls. ISUP is used for both ISDN and non-ISDN calls. ISUP messages rely on MTP to transport messages between nodes.

SCCP
The Signaling Connection Control Part (SCCP) provides two functions that MTP does not. SCCP can address applications within a signaling point. MTP can only receive and deliver messages from a node; it does not deal with software applications within a node. SCCP allows the use of other messages using separate applications (referred to as subsystems) within a node. Examples of subsystems are 800 call processing, Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN), and Custom Local-Area Signaling Service (CLASS) services (for example, call back, call return, and calling name).SCCP allows the addressing of applications (referred to as subsystems) within a node to receive messages. SCCP provides support for TCAP.

470

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

SCCP performs two types of routing to subsystems:

When the originating signaling point knows the location of the node providing the service, it uses a direct routing capability based on point code plus subsystem number (PC + SSN). When the originating signaling point does not know the location of the node providing the service, it uses an incremental routing capability called Global Title Translation (GTT). GTT frees an originating signaling point from needing to know every potential point code to which it might have to route a message.

SCCP Subsystems
An SCCP subsystem is an application within a Service Switching Point (SSP) switch that recognizes Intelligent Network (IN) calls and can route and connect those calls. Examples are:

800 number translation. Local Number Portability (LNP) Call Back and Call Return.

Transaction Capabilities Application Part (TCAP)

TCAP defines the messages and protocol that communicate between applications (subsystems) in nodes. These subsystems implement database services, such as 800 and AIN, and CLASS services, such as call back, call return, and calling name. TCAP messages use the SCCP for transport to deliver to applications within the nodes they address.

AIN
The AIN (Advanced Intelligent Network) is a network architecture developed by Telcordia. AIN triggers in the switch software work in conjunction with service logic in an AIN SCP. This design allows the switch to support new services with existing switch software. The Application Peripheral (AP) system from Innovative Systems is an example of an AIN SCP. The AP box (as it is known), can augment the existing T7000 feature set with AIN services as such as Telemarketer Call Screening, Budget Toll, Account Code Plus, and Calling Card/Prepay.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

471

SS7

SS7 Services
SS7 provides many services, including: Setting up the connection for a call (ISUP)

Managing the connection for a call (ISUP) Tearing down the connection when a call completes (ISUP) Querying calling party name (TCAP/SCCP) Directing 8XX toll-free and 900 toll calls (TCAP/SCCP) Performing Local Number Portability (LNP) queries (TCAP/SCCP)

Multiple Originating Point Code

Multiple Origination Point Code (MOPC) is a link set attribute which is a special feature of the T7000. MOPC is used in two ways:

When the switch is connected to multiple networks, it enables the switch to have a unique point code in each network. It is used in cap and grow applications.

When the switch is connected to multiple networks, different networks may know the switch by different point codes. The MOPC feature allows the switch to have a unique point code in each network.
NOTE: Do not provision MOPC if the second network recognizes the switch by the same point code.

When the switch is used in a cap and grow application, MOPC can be used to minimize the total amount of reprovisioning needed in the network. Provision MOPC on the link sets connected to the STPs with the Point Code of the legacy switch.

Level 3 Multiple Originating Point Code

When the T7000 is provisioned with a Level 3 Multiple Originating Point Code (L3MOPC), all MTP Level 3 management messages sent by the switch will set the Origination Point Code (OPC) in the SS7 message header to the L3MOPC. This feature is used in a cap and grow application, when the switch is 'capping' an SSP that uses one point code for SCCP and ISUP messages, but another point code for MTP Level 3 management messages. For example, when capping a DMS10 with SRP, the L3MOPC is the SRP point code.

472

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

General SS7 Order of Provisioning and Removing Tip

See Appendix D of the T7000 Provisioning Guide for detailed SS7 deployment examples.

Start SS7 provisioning by creating the local network where the switch resides, and the remote network where the STPs, SSPs, and SCPs reside. (see createSS7Network on page 475).

Create the local node that represents the switch in the local network. Create the STPs, SCPs, and SSPs in the remote network. Create an STP Alias for SCCP Global Title Translation routing (see createNode on page
476).

Create a link set for each adjacent node (see createLinkSet on page 478). Add one or more links to each link set (see createLink on page 480). For each node with transfer capability, create a route over the link set to that node (see createSS7Route on page 482). Create an SCCP node to the local node, and an SCCP node for each SCP addressed by PC + SSN routing (see SCCPNode on page 484.). Create an SCCP subsystem in the local node, and an SCCP subsystem for each SCP addressed by PC + SSN routing (see Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode on page 485). Create a TCAP for each service provided by an SCP (see TCAPServiceGTT on page 488 and TCAPServicePCSSN on page 492).

Reverse this process to remove an SS7 object.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

473

SS7

SS7 Order of Provisioning for an Adjacent Node

To add an adjacent node in the local network:

Create a node that represents the adjacent switch in the local network (see createNode on page 476). Create a link set to the adjacent node (see createLinkSet on page 478). Add one or more links to the link set to the adjacent node (see createLink on page 480). Create a route over the link set to the adjacent node. If the node is connected to the STP pair, create additional routes over the link sets to the STP pair (see createSS7Route on page 482). If the adjacent node is an SCP (such as the Innovative Systems AP) addressed by PC + SSN routing):

create an SCCP node in the adjacent node (see SCCPNode on page 484.) create an SCCP subsystem in the adjacent node for each SCP addressed by PC + SSN routing (see Adding SCCP Subsystems to an
SCCPNode on page 485

create a TCAP for each service provided by an SCP (see TCAP Service, see TCAPServiceGTT on page 488 and TCAPServicePCSSN on page 492).

Reverse this process to remove an SS7 object.

474

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

createSS7Network createSS7Network <networkName> <localFlag> <BCCNetworkFlag>

This command creates an SS7 network. The SS7 network is a container for SS7 nodes and their associated SS7 elements.
Syntax Description name of the SS7 network Y if the is a local network N if the network is remote <BCCNetworkFlag> Y if this is a Bell Core (Telcordia) Client company network N if the network is not BCC compliant

<networkName>
<localFlag>

createSS7Network LocalNetwork Y Y

Dependent Commands
By creating an SS7 network, you are creating a container for one or more SS7 nodes, and their associated SS7 elements.

deleteSS7Network deleteSS7Network name

This command deletes an SS7 network.
Syntax Description name of the SS7 network

<networkName>

Prerequisites
SS7 network, see createSS7Network on page 475 Delete SS7 node, see deleteNode on page 477

Dependent Commands
Before deleting an SS7 network you must first delete its associated SS7 elements which include:

all of the nodes contained by the network.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

475

SS7

createNode
createNode <nodeName> <DPC> <networkName> <adjacentFlag> <nodeType> <xferFlag>
This command creates an SS7 node in an SS7 network.
Syntax <nodeName> <DPC> <networkName> <adjacentFlag> <nodeType> Description name of the SS7 node Destination Point Code of the SS7 node. See Point Codes on page 470. Name of the SS7 network created via createSS7Network. Y if the node is adjacent to the local node N if the node is not adjacent to the local node Local the local T7000 Remote a node in the SS7 network with a known point code. Alias a node in the SS7 network with a hidden, private point code. See setPCMap on page 500. <xferFlag> .Y if the node has transfer capability. This includes STPs, T7000s and Legacy Switches that can route messages to other nodes in the SS7 network. N if the node does not have transfer capability.

Prerequisites
SS7 network, see createSS7Network on page 475

createNode Local 229-100-000 Local_net N Local N createNode STP1 229-100-101 Remote_net Y Remote Y

476

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

deleteNode
deleteNode <nodeName>
This command deletes an SS7 node from an SS7 network.
Syntax Description name of the SS7 node

<nodeName>

Prerequisites
SS7 node, see createNode on page 476.

deleteNode STP1

Dependent Commands
Before deleting an SS7 node you must first delete its associated SS7 elements which include:

the SCCP node, SS7 Trunk groups using that node, all routes to the node. link sets to the node (and the links within the link set)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

477

SS7

createLinkSet createLinkSet <name> <pointCode> <type> <kind>

This command creates a link set. A link set is a group of links from a switch to an adjacent node. Each link set can contain up to 16 links. The links in a link set share signaling traffic. If a link in the link set fails, the traffic is routed over the remaining links in the link set.

Prerequisites
SS7 node, see createNode on page 476
Syntax Description name of the SS7 link set point code of the SS7 node that terminates the link set. See Point Codes on page 470. type of link set: A (A-link sets) connects to STPs and provides signaling to the SS7 network

<name> <pointCode> <type>

Tip
See Appendix D of the T7000 Provisioning Guide for examples using Alias link sets.

F (F-link sets) connect to another SSP and provides signaling between the switches but not with the SS7 network L (Alias link sets) The link set connects the local switch to a subtending switch that shares a common connection to the SS7 network through the local switchs A-links. Alias link sets are primarily used for cap-and-grow deployments. kind of link set error correction: T basic error correction used for link sets not using satellite (default) S Preventive cyclic retransmission (PCR) is the error correction method used for link sets using satellite.

<kind>

WARNING
The Preventive cyclic retransmission feature not currently implemented. Do not specify this parameter!

NOTE: All links in a link set must have the same error correction method. Even if only one link is configured via satellite, assign PCR to the entire link set.

createLinkSet LS1 229-100-101 A T

478

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

Dependent Commands
Add links to the link set, see createLink on page 480 Activate the link set, see activateLinkSet on page 639.

deleteLinkSet deleteLinkSet <name>

This command deletes an SS7 link set from an adjacent SS7 node.
Syntax name Description name of link set to delete

Prerequisites
SS7 link set, createLinkSet on page 478 Delete SS7 links, see deleteLink on page 481

deleteLinkSet Linkset1

Dependent Commands
Before deleting an SS7 link set you must first delete its associated SS7 elements which include:

all links in the link set

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

479

SS7

createLink
createLink <linkName> <trunkOID> <linkSetName> <SLC> <type>
This command creates an SS7 link and associates it with an existing SS7 link set. Each link set can hold up to 16 links. A switch supports a total of 40 links.
Syntax Description name of link to create Trunk Object Identifier unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30. name of a link set previously created. Signaling Link Code a unique number within a link set that identifies the link. Range: 0-15.

<linkName> <trunkOID>

<linkSetName> <SLC>

Tip
Coordinate SLC assignments with the adjacent node. SLC assignments typically start with 0 for the first link in a link set

<Type>

Type of link: a A link. Can be placed only in A link sets f F link. Can be placed only in F-link sets and Alias-link sets.

Prerequisites
SS7 link set, see createLinkSet on page 478

createLink Link_1_1 Trunk-23-1-2 Linkset1 5 a

Dependent Commands
Before the link can carry traffic, it must unblocked, see unblockLink on page 640.

480

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

deleteLink
deleteLink <linkName>
This command deletes an SS7 link from an SS7 link set.
Syntax Description name of link to delete

<linkName>

Prerequisites
SS7 link, see createLink on page 480 Block the SS7 link, see blockLink on page 640

deleteLink Link_1_1

Dependent Commands
Before the link can be deleted, it must blocked, see blockLink on page 640

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

481

SS7

createSS7Route createSS7Route <name> <PointCode> <LinkSet> <Priority>

This command creates an SS7 route to a node over an existing SS7 link set.
Syntax <name> <PointCode> <LinkSet> <Priority> SS7 route name the Point Code of the node receiving the route. See Point Codes on page 470. link set with which to associate the route The order in which to use this route. 1 primary route 2 secondary route. Use if primary route is unavailable. 3 tertiary route. Use if both primary and secondary routes are unavailable. Description

Tip
A route to an adjacent node over a link set that terminates at that node should always be provisioned as a primary route. Any other routes to that node should be provisioned as secondary routes.All routes to non-adjacent nodes should always be provisioned as primary routes

Tip
To specify a combined link set, set the same priority for both routes to a node.

Prerequisites
SS7 link set, see createLinkSet on page 478. SS7 node, see createNode on page 476.

createSS7Route route_stp 254-80-70 LinkSet1 1

482

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

deleteSS7Route deleteSS7Route <name>

This command deletes an SS7 route.
Syntax <name> SS7 route name Description

Prerequisites
SS7 route, see createSS7Route on page 482

deleteSS7Route route_stp

CAUTION
Deleting an SS7 route may negatively affect operations!

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

483

SS7

SCCPNode
A Signaling Connection Control Part (SCCP) node has the following attributes:
Attribute Description Point code of the new SCCP node. See Point Codes on page 470. A dictionary containing the SCCP Subsystems within this SCCP Node. Note: this field is read-only. The Accessibility state of SCCP Node. Values are: NOT_ACCESSIBLE ACCESSIBLE

key
subsystems accessible

The Generic CLI is used for all SCCPNode commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

NOTE: The modify command does not apply to SCCPNodes.

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands applies to the following attributes:

See:

subsystems

Prerequisites

Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode on page 485 Removing SCCP Subsystems from an SCCPNode on page 485

SS7 node, see createNode on page 476 SCCP subsystem(s), see Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode on page 485

createNode remote001 229-101-000 net Y n n create SCCPNode 229-101-0

484

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode insertInto SCCPNode <key> subsystems <subkey> SCCPSubsys <ssn>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add an SCCP Subsystem to a SCCPNodes subsystems dictionary. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> <subkey> SCCPNode point code. This is the subsystem number of the SCCP application on the remote switch. It is used as the key to the SCCPNodes subsystems dictionary. Range: 2 - 254. <ssn> This is the subsystem number of the SCCP application on the remote switch. It must be the same as the subkey. Range: 2 - 254. Description

The following command adds an entry for SCCP subsystem 253 to the SCCPNode with a point code of 229-101-0.
insertInto SCCPNode 229-101-0 subsystems 253 SCCPSubsys 253

Removing SCCP Subsystems from an SCCPNode deleteFrom SCCPNode <key> subsystems <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a SCCP Subsystem from a SCCPNodes subsystems dictionary. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> <subkey> SCCPNode point code. This is the subsystem number of the SCCP application on the remote switch. Description

The following example removes the subsystem 253 from the SCCPNode with a point code of 229-101-0.

deleteFrom SCCPNode 229-101-0 subsystems 253

Dependent Commands
Delete the TCAP Service using the SCCP subsystems.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

485

SS7

query SCCPNode query SCCPNode network-cluster-member

This Generic CLI command shows the status for an SCCP node and its subsystems.
Syntax network-cluster-member Description point code of the SCCP node

query SCCPNode 229-101-0 <5b1c030> SCCPNode key..........229-101-0 subsystems...<5b1c4b8> <5b1c4b8> SCCPSubsystemDict (3661851 items) -> f0 (240): <5b41500> SCCPSubsys pc................229-101-0 ssn...............f0 (240) accessible........NOT_ACCESSIBLE fc (252): <5b2efa8> SCCPSubsys pc................229-101-0 ssn...............fc (252) accessible........NOT_ACCESSIBLE fe (254): <5b34380> SCCPSubsys pc................229-101-0 ssn...............fe (254) accessible........NOT_ACCESSIBLE accessible...ACCESSIBLE

486

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

delete SCCPNode delete SCCPNode <pointCode>

This command deletes an SCCPNode.
Syntax Description

<pointCode>

Point code of the SCCPNode. See Point Codes on page 470.

Prerequisites
SCCPNode, see SCCPNode on page 484.

Dependent Commands
Remove all SCCP Subsystems from to the SCCP node, see Removing SCCP
Subsystems from an SCCPNode on page 485

delete SCCPNode 254-80-70

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

487

SS7

TCAPServiceGTT
There are two types of TCAP Service objects: one for Global Title Translation routing, the other for Point Code + Subsystem Number routing. Use the TCAPServiceGTT object for Global Title Translation routing. A TCAPServiceGTT object has the following attributes:
Attribute Description the unique name of the TCAP service Type of TCAP service: CNAMESVC calling party name service SACAINSVC Service Access Code (SAC) Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) based service SACIN800SVC Service Access Code (SAC) Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) based 800 service LNPAINSVC Local Number Portability AIN service AINSVC services allows the switch to communicate with an SCP for AIN information. See AIN on page 471. CBACKSVC call back service, a/k/a CLASS feature Automatic Callback CRETURNSVC call return service TCAPMWISVC TCAP Message Waiting Indicator service

key svcType

routeType

The type of routing that the SCCP will use for this TCAP service. GTT (default) Global Title Translation: directs TCAP queries to the STP for GTT.

localSSN remotePC transType

local SCCP subsystem number for this TCAP service Range: 2 - 254 point code of the remote node for GTT routing GTT routing Global Title Translation Type NOTE: Translation Types are supplied by the provider of the TCAP service.

t1Timer

Time value to wait for response to TCAP query (msec) Range: 1000-3000 Default: 3000

488

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

Attribute

Description Resume Scanning Timer. The time in milliseconds that the originating switch waits to resume scanning after the calling party does not answer special ringing. This timer begins when the application of special ringing has timed out. This timer stops if the Call Back/Call Return attempt is deactivated. Range:180000 - 720000 Default: 3000 Initial Query Response Timer. The time in milliseconds that the originating switch waits for a response to the initial query. Range:1000 - 5000 Default: 3000 Monitoring Timer. The time in milliseconds that the called party of a Call Back/Call Return request is monitored for an idle notification. Range:150000 - 2100000 Default: 1800000 Terminating Scanning Monitoring Timer. The time in milliseconds the originating switch will wait for a response from the terminating switch to any query other than the initial query. Range: 0 - 1800000 Default: 0 Outstanding Notification Timer. The time the terminating switch should wait after sending an Idle status to the originating switch, before rechecking the called lines busy/idle status. Range: 0 - 2100000 Default: 0 Subsequent Query Response Timer. The time in milliseconds the originating switch will wait for a response from the terminating switch to any other query other than the initial query. Range: 1000 5000 Default: 3000 Originating/Terminating Switch Overall Monitoring Timer. The maximum continuous time in milliseconds the particular request can be in effect for a given customer. This limits the number of times a customer may reactivate a Call Back/Call Return request. Range: 7200000 - 14400000 Default: 10800000

t2Timer

t5Timer

t6Timer

t7Timer

t8Timer

t9Timer

t10Timer

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

489

SS7

Attribute t11Timer

Description Inter - Busy/Idle Query Duration Timer. The time in milliseconds for the Inter-Busy/Idle Query Duration Timer. The terminating switch uses this timer to control the status of a queued entry with originating scanning. If the amount of time between queries exceeds this timer, the corresponding queue entry is flagged inactive. T11 is the terminating switch maximum allowed value for the originating scan rate, plus 5 seconds. This timer is initialized when a busy/idle query for a queued Call Return/Call Back request, which does not have outstanding notification, is received by the terminating switch. This timer stops when the Automatic Callback request is marked as having outstanding notification, the Automatic Callback request is completed or the Automatic Callback request is deactivated. Range: 0 - 5700000 Default: 0 Originating Scan Rate. The time in milliseconds to control the active/inactive status of a queued entry with orig scanning. Range: 30000 -600000 Default: 60000

origScanRate

490

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

The Generic CLI is used for all TCAPServiceGTT commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key svcType localSSN remotePC transType

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

Prerequisites

t1Timer t2Timer t5Timer t6Timer t7Timer t8Timer t9Timer t10Timer t11Timer origScanRate

SCCP Nodes, see SCCPNode on page 484. SCCP SSNs on the local node, the STP Alias (GTT routing) or SCP (PCSSN routing), see Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode on page 485
create TCAPServiceGTT sacin800 SACIN800SVC PCSSN 252 229-101-000 4

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

491

SS7

TCAPServicePCSSN
There are two types of TCAP Service objects: one for Global Title Translation routing, the other for Point Code + Subsystem Number routing. Use the TCAPServicePCSSN object for Point Code + Subsystem Number routing. A TCAPServicePCSSN object has the following attributes:
Attribute Description the unique name of the TCAP service Type of TCAP service: CNAMESVC calling party name service SACAINSVC Service Access Code (SAC) Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) based service SACIN800SVC Service Access Code (SAC) Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) based 800 service LNPAINSVC Local Number Portability AIN service AINSVC services allows the switch to communicate with an SCP for AIN information. See AIN on page 471. CBACKSVC call back service, a/k/a CLASS feature Automatic Callback CRETURNSVC call return service TCAPMWISVC TCAP Message Waiting Indicator service

key svcType

routeType

The type of routing that the SCCP will use for this TCAP service. PCSSN (default) Point Code/Subsystem Number: directs TCAP queries directly to the Service Logic Host on a specific SCP or applications server.

localSSN remotePC remoteSSN

local SCCP subsystem number for this TCAP service Range: 2 - 254 point code of the remote node for PCSSN or GTT routing PCSSN routing remote subsystem number NOTE: Remote Subsystem Numbers are supplied by the provider of the TCAP service.

t1Timer

Time value to wait for response to TCAP query (msec) Range: 1000-3000 Default: 3000

492

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

Attribute

Description Resume Scanning Timer. The time in milliseconds that the originating switch waits to resume scanning after the calling party does not answer special ringing. This timer begins when the application of special ringing has timed out. This timer stops if the Call Back/Call Return attempt is deactivated. Range:180000 - 720000 Default: 3000 Initial Query Response Timer. The time in milliseconds that the originating switch waits for a response to the initial query. Range:1000 - 5000 Default: 3000 Monitoring Timer. The time in milliseconds that the called party of a Call Back/Call Return request is monitored for an idle notification. Range:150000 - 2100000 Default: 1800000 Terminating Scanning Monitoring Timer. The time in milliseconds the originating switch will wait for a response from the terminating switch to any query other than the initial query. Range: 0 - 1800000 Default: 0 Outstanding Notification Timer. The time the terminating switch should wait after sending an Idle status to the originating switch, before rechecking the called lines busy/idle status. Range: 0 - 2100000 Default: 0 Subsequent Query Response Timer. The time in milliseconds the originating switch will wait for a response from the terminating switch to any other query other than the initial query. Range: 1000 5000 Default: 3000 Originating/Terminating Switch Overall Monitoring Timer. The maximum continuous time in milliseconds the particular request can be in effect for a given customer. This limits the number of times a customer may reactivate a Call Back/Call Return request. Range: 7200000 - 14400000 Default: 10800000

t2Timer

t5Timer

t6Timer

t7Timer

t8Timer

t9Timer

t10Timer

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

493

SS7

Attribute t11Timer

Description Inter - Busy/Idle Query Duration Timer. The time in milliseconds for the Inter-Busy/Idle Query Duration Timer. The terminating switch uses this timer to control the status of a queued entry with originating scanning. If the amount of time between queries exceeds this timer, the corresponding queue entry is flagged inactive. T11 is the terminating switch maximum allowed value for the originating scan rate, plus 5 seconds. This timer is initialized when a busy/idle query for a queued Call Return/Call Back request, which does not have outstanding notification, is received by the terminating switch. This timer stops when the Automatic Callback request is marked as having outstanding notification, the Automatic Callback request is completed or the Automatic Callback request is deactivated. Range: 0 - 5700000 Default: 0 Originating Scan Rate. The time in milliseconds to control the active/inactive status of a queued entry with orig scanning. Range: 30000 -600000 Default: 60000

origScanRate

494

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

The Generic CLI is used for all TCAPServicePCSSN commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key svcType localSSN remotePC remoteSSN

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

Prerequisites

t1Timer t2Timer t5Timer t6Timer t7Timer t8Timer t9Timer t10Timer t11Timer origScanRate

SCCP Nodes, see SCCPNode on page 484. SCCP SSNs on the local node, the STP Alias (GTT routing) or SCP (PCSSN routing), see Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode on page 485
create TCAPServicePCSSN sacin800 SACIN800SVC 252 229-101-000 252

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

495

SS7

destroy TCAPService destroy TCAPService <keyey>

This command deletes a Transaction Capabilities Application Part (TCAP) service
Syntax Description the unique name of the TCAP service

<key>

Prerequisites
SCCP Node, see SCCPNode on page 484. SCCP SSN on the local node, the STP Alias (GTT routing) or SCP (PCSSN routing), see Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode on page 485 TCAP Service, see TCAPServiceGTT on page 488 and TCAPServicePCSSN on page 492

destroy TCAPService sacin800

496

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

TcapMwiParms
TcapMwiParms enable the switch and an SS7 voice mail system (VMS) to communicate MWI status to one another. The switch connects to a VMS using an SS7 F-link. The subscriber, either directly connected to the switch or connected to a subtending node of the switch, receives a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) notification when there are one or more new voice mail messages at the VMS. A TcapMwiParms object has the following attributes:
Attribute key mSRID Description voice mail subscribers DN TCAP Message Storage and Retrieval Identifier (MSRID). Uniquely identifies each VMS providing TCAP MWI. Must be 10 digits long. Range: 0000000001-9999999999. callingDN mwiType This field is read only. DN of Voice Mail System. This read only field is for internal use. Values are: ACTIVE1 ACTIVE2 ACTIVE3 callingPartyNumber callType This field is read only. DN of the voice mail originator This field is read only. Bearer capability. Values are: ISDN ISDN PRI ANLG Analog timeStamp numberOfMessages This field is read only. Timestamp sent by the Message Storage and Retrieval system This field is read only. Number of voice message in the voice mail box

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

497

SS7

The Generic CLI is used for all TcapMwiParms commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key mSRID create TcapMwiParms 2149049000 1234560001

The modify command applies only to the following attributes:

mSRID

query TcapMwiParms query TcapMwiParms <destinationDN>

This command shows the TCAP Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) information for a subscriber.
Syntax <destinationDN> Description directory number

query TcapMwiParms 8174801022 <33c1be0> TcapMwiParms key.................."8174801022" mSRID................"1234560001" callingDN............<> mwiType..............0 callingPartyNumber...<> callType.............ISDN timestamp............<> displayText..........<> numberOfMessages.....0 (0)

Prerequisites
VMS, see Voice Mail on page 586 F-link connecting to the VMS, see SS7 on page 470

498

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

setMOPC
setMOPC <LinkSetName> <pointCode>
This command assigns an Multiple Originating Point Code to an SS7 link set. See Multiple Originating Point Code on page 472..
Syntax LinkSetName the link set name the alternate originating point code to be used for messages sent over this link set. Description

<pointCode>

Prerequisites
At least two SS7 Networks. See createSS7Network on page 475 Or, an Alias node. See createNode on page 476
NOTE: Only use multiple point codes to connect to two different SS7 networks that have each assigned a different point code to the switch. Do not use this feature if both SS7 networks recognize the same point code

setMOPC LinkSet1 150-120-89

setL3MOPC
setL3MOPC <LinkSetName> <pointCode>

Prerequisites
A link set.
Syntax LinkSetName the link set name L3 Multiple Originating Point Code is the point code that identifies the local node with an alternate point code for MTP Level 3 messages. See Level 3 Multiple Originating Point Code on page 472 Description

<pointCode>

setMOPC LinkSet1 151-120-89 setMOPC LinkSet2 151-120-89

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

499

SS7

setPCMap
setPCMap <aliasNodeName> <destPointCode> <CIC> <range>
This command configures ISDN routes to a subtending node. An alias Point Code (PC) map directs ISUP messages from a remote switch through the local switch to an alias switch. This mapping allows an alias switch to connect to a distant node using voice trunks.t.
Syntax <aliasNodeName> <destPointCode> name of subtending node Distant end node's point code. The point code that the switch provides signaling to, for example, an Access Tandem's point code. See Point Codes on page 470. The circuit identification code of the first SS7 trunk connecting to the subtending node. The number of CICs mapped by the switch to the subtending node. Description

<CIC> <range>

Prerequisites
An subtending switch is provisioned for an alias point (see createNode on page
476).

An Alias-link set subtending switch (see createLinkSet on page 478

NOTE: The destination node must identify the exact range of CICs to which it wants to connect.

setPCMap vswitch 229-123-045 101 500

500

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

deletePCMap deletePCMap <aliasNodeName> <destPointCode> <lowCIC>

This command deletes the Point Code Map routing for a subtending node.

CAUTION
Deleting routing may negatively affect operations.

Prerequisites
A Point Code Map, see setPCMap on page 500
Syntax <aliasNodeName> <destPointCode> subtending node name Distant end node's point code. This is the point code that the switch will provide signaling to: an Access Tandem's point code, for example The lowest numbered circuit identification code in the SS7 trunk group that connects the alias and destination nodes. Description

<lowCIC>

deletePCMap vswitch 229-123-045 24

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

501

SS7

SLTCT1_period SLTCT1_period <new_period> [linkName]

This command sets the link timer value for the SLTCT1_period; this is the time-out period for receiving a Signaling Link Test Message Acknowledgment (SLTA) of a Signaling Link Test Message (SLTM).
Syntax <new_period> Description new timer value in milliseconds Range: 4,000 - 12000 [linkName] link name skip this parameter to apply this the value to all SS7 links

Prerequisites
SS7 link, see createLink on page 480

SLTCT1_period 4500 link_1

SLTCT2_period SLTCT2_period <new_period> [linkName]

This command sets the link timer value for the SLTCT2_period. The frequency that the switch sends the Signaling Link Test Message (SLTM) message.

Prerequisites
SS7 link, see createLink on page 480
Syntax Description new timer value in milliseconds Range: 10,000 to 30,000 0 to disable sending SLTM messages linkName link name skip this parameter to apply this the value to all SS7 links

<new_period>

SLTCT2_period 11000 link_1

502

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

SS7 Timer Commands

CAUTION
Use caution when setting SS7 link timers.

The following commands set the values for MTP Level 2 and MTP Level 3 SS7 timers
Syntax new_period linkName all_pcr all_basic Description new timer value see the limits in the table below for specific values Link name set the timer value for a specific link all_basic basic error correction used for link sets not using satellite (default) all_pcr Preventive cyclic retransmission (PCR) is the error correction method used for link sets using satellite. This feature not currently implemented.

The following table contains the names of all of the commands and their limits.
Command L2Tie_period L2Tin_period L2T1_period L2T2_period L2T3_period L2T4e_period L2T4n_period L2T5_period L2T6_period L2T7_period L3T1_period L3T2_period Description MTP Level 2 timer value for emergency alignment error rate monitor threshold Limits 1 - 10 ms

MTP Level 2 timer value for normal alignment error rate monitor 1 - 10 ms threshold MTP Level 2 timer value for aligned/ready MTP Level 2 timer value for not aligned MTP Level 2 timer value for aligned MTP Level 2 timer 4 emergency value, for the emergency proving period when the link set only contains 1 link 12,900 - 16,000 ms 5,000 - 14,000 ms 5,000 - 14,000 ms 593 ms

MTP Level 2 timer 4 normal value for when the link set contains 2,300 ms more than one link MTP Level 2 timer value for sending Status Indication Busy (SIB) MTP Level 2 timer value for remote congestion MTP Level 2 timer value for excessive delay of acknowledgement MTP Level 3 timer value delay to avoid message missequencing on changeover MTP Level 3 timer value waiting for changeover acknowledgment 80 - 120 ms 1,000 - 6,000 ms 500 - 2,000 ms 500 - 1,200 ms 700 - 2,000 ms

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

503

SS7

Command L3T3_period L3T4_period L3T5_period L3T6_period L3T7_period L3T8_period L3T10_period L3T12_period L3T13_period L3T14_period L3T15_period L3T16_period L3T17_period L3T19_period L3T20_period L3T21_period L3T22_period L3T23_period

Description MTP Level 3 timer value delay to avoid mis-sequencing on changeback MTP Level 3 timer value waiting for changeback acknowledgment (first attempt) MTP Level 3 timer value waiting for changeback acknowledgment (second attempt) MTP Level 3 timer value delay to avoid message missequencing on controlled rerouting MTP Level 3 timer value waiting for signaling data link connection acknowledgment MTP Level 3 timer value transfer-prohibited inhibited timer (transient solution) MTP Level 3 timer value waiting to repeat signaling route set test message MTP Level 3 timer value waiting for uninhibit acknowledgment MTP Level 3 timer value waiting for force uninhibit MTP Level 3 timer value waiting for inhibition acknowledgment MTP Level 3 timer value waiting to repeat signaling route set congestion test

Limits 500 - 1,200 ms 500 - 1,200 ms 500 - 1,200 ms 500 - 1,200 ms 1,000 - 2,000 ms 800 - 1,200 ms 30,000 - 60,000 ms 800 - 1,500 ms 800 - 1,500 ms 2,000 - 3,000 ms 2,000 - 3,000 ms

MTP Level 3 timer value waiting for route set congestion status 1,400 - 2,000 ms update MTP Level 3 timer value delay to avoid oscillation of initial alignment failure and link restart MTP Level 3 failed link craft referral timer value MTP Level 3 timer value waiting to repeat local inhibit test 800 - 1,500 ms 480,000 - 600,000 ms 90,000 - 120,000 ms

MTP Level 3 timer value waiting to repeat remote inhibit test 90,000 - 120,000 ms MTP Level 3 value timer at restarting SP waiting for signaling links to become available MTP Level 3 timer value at restarting SP, started after T22, waiting to receive all Traffic Restart Allowed (TRA) messages (network-dependent) MTP Level 3 timer value at restarting SP with transfer function, started after T23, waiting to broadcast all TRA messages (network-dependent) 0 - 60,000 ms 0 - 60,000 ms

L3T24_period

15,000 ms

L3T25_period L3T26_period L3T27_period

MTP Level 3 timer value at the SP adjacent to the restarting SP, 30,000 - 35,000 ms waiting for Traffic Restart Allowed (TRA) message MTP Level 3 timer value at restarting SP waiting to repeat Traffic Restart Waiting (TRW) MTP Level 3 timer value of the minimum duration of unavailability for full restart 12,000 - 15,000 ms 2,000 5,000 ms

504

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

Command L3T28_period L3T29_period L3T31_period L3T33_period L3T34_period

Description

Limits

MTP Level 3 timer value at SP adjacent to restarting SP, waiting 3,000 - 35,000 ms for Traffic Restart Waiting (TRW) message MTP Level 3 timer value started when TRA message is sent in response to unexpected TRA or TRW message MTP Level 3 false link congestion detection timer value MTP Level 3 probation timer value for link oscillation Procedure B MTP Level 3 suspension timer value for link oscillation Procedure B 60,000 - 65,000 ms 10,000 - 120,000 ms 60,000 - 600,000 ms 5,000 - 120,000 ms

Prerequisites
SS7 link, see createLink on page 480

L2Tie_period 9 link_1 L3T1_period 1000 link_1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

505

SS7

L2TX_onset
L2TX_onset <level> <new_threshold> [linkName]
This command sets the transmission congestion onset limit for levels 1 to 3.
Syntax <level> <new_threshold> Description 1 - 3, onset is the second threshold for detecting the start of congestion (levels 1, 2, and 3) The number of messages before the onset of congestion: 31-49 Level 1 61-79 Level 2 91-109 Level 3 [linkName] Link name skip this parameter to set this value for all SS7 links

CAUTION
Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

Prerequisites
SS7 link, see createLink on page 480

L2TX_onset 1 38 Link_1

506

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

L2TX_abatement L2TX_abatement <level> <new_threshold> [linkName]

This command sets the transmission congestions abatement limit for levels 1 to 3.
Syntax <level> <new_threshold> Description 1 - 3, the threshold for monitoring the reduction of congestion (levels 1, 2, and 3) The number of messages before abatement starts: 0-39 Level 1 41-59 Level 2 71-89 Level 3 [linkName] Link name, or skip this parameter to make this the value for all SS7 links

CAUTION
Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

NOTE: Each congestion abatement must be lower than the corresponding congestion onset level. See L2TX_onset on page 506.

Prerequisites
SS7 link, see createLink on page 480

L2TX_abatement 2 45 Link_1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

507

SS7

L2TX_discard L2TX_discard <level> <new_threshold> [linkName]

This command sets the transmission congestion discard limit for levels 1 to 3.
Syntax <level> <new_threshold> Description 1-3, the threshold for monitoring the reduction of congestion (levels 1, 2, and 3) The number of messages before discard starts: 51-69 Level 1 81-99 Level 2 101-119 Level 3 [linkName] Link name, or skip this parameter to make this the value for all SS7 links

CAUTION
Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

NOTE: Each congestion discard must be lower than the corresponding congestion onset level. See L2TX_onset on page 506.

Prerequisites
SS7 link, see createLink on page 480

L2TX_discard 1 58 Link_1

508

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7

L2RX_congestion L2RX_congestion <new_level>

This command sets the receive congestion limit of messages.
Syntax <new_level> Description The level of messages to reach congestion of received messages, from 60-99 messages.

CAUTION
Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

Prerequisites
SS7 link, see createLink on page 480

L2RX_congestion 80

L2RX_abatement L2RX_abatement <new_level>

This command sets the receive abatement limit of messages.
Syntax <new_level> Description The level of messages to reach abatement of received messages, from 1-60 messages.

CAUTION
Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

Prerequisites
SS7 link, see createLink on page 480

L2RX_abatement 45

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

509

SS7

L2RX_discard L2RX_discard <new_level>

This command sets the receive discard limit of messages.

CAUTION
Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

Prerequisites
SS7 link, see createLink on page 480
Syntax <new_level> Description The threshold for monitoring the reduction of congestion, from 61 messages and above.

L2RX_discard 101

510

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Tandem ANI Subscribers

Tandem ANI Subscribers

The Tandem Ani Subscribers database contains the ANIs of subscribers who do not directly terminate on the switch. This database determines how the switch tandems calls based on the ANI of an incoming call. The switch supports these subscribers when provisioned as a local tandem. The switch uses tandem Ani subscriber database to determine treatment of calls for subscribers in the database. After the switch checks the Tandem Ani Subscribers database, it checks for the ANI in the Tandem ANI RouteList. If the ANI exists, it routes the call to the applicable trunk group, if not then the call is send to treatment. An Ani Subscriber has the following attributes:
attribute key lastName firstName restrict value the ANI of the incoming call the last name of the subscriber the first name of the subscriber Optional set of restrictions on the types of calls that the subscriber can complete. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section. NO_INTRALATA: No intraLATA calls (PIC2) allowed 1 NO_INTERLATA: No interLATA calls (PIC1) allowed 2 NO_WORLDZONE1: No calls to Canada and select Caribbean countries allowed 4 NO_INTERNATIONAL: No international calls allowed 8 NO_OA_INTERNATIONAL: No Operator Assisted (OA) international calls allowed 10 NO_OA_INTRALATA: No Operator Assisted (OA) intraLATA calls allowed 20 NO_OA_INTERLATA: No Operator Assisted (OA) interLATA calls allowed 40 NO_OA_WORLDZONE1: No Operator Assisted (OA) calls to Canada and select Caribbean countries 80 NO_ZEROMINUS: No calls to the operator (0) 100 NO_DA: No Directory Assisted (DA) calls allowed 200 allowedList deniedList suspension key from screen list: Allowed dialing screening prefixes. key from screen list: Denied dialing screening prefixes. Temporary suspension of the subscribers service, calls are sent to treatment: 1 suspends the subscribers service, except 911 calls 0 turns off subscriber service suspension

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

511

Tandem ANI Subscribers

attribute fraudIndicator

value 0 does not trace calls from the subscriber 1 creates a secondary CDR for each call from the subscriber

All ANI Subscriber provisioning is carried out with the Generic CLI, see Using
Generic CLI Commands on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

key lastName firstName

The optional parameter for the create command is:

Prerequisites

restrictions

SS7 trunk groups incoming to the switch that tandem to the PSTN. see Route Lists
on page 514

Tandem Route Lists, Tandem ANI Route List on page 521

create AniSubscriber 9724812222 Liao David modify AniSubscriber 9724812222 deniedList deny modify AniSubscriber 9724812222 restrict NO_INTRALATA 1 modify AniSubscriber 9724812222 restrict NO_INTERLATA 1 query AniSubscriber 9724812222 <4909030> AniSubscriber key.............."9724812222" lastName........."Liao" firstName........"David" restrict.........(BITFIELD) -> 3 .NO_INTRALATA .NO_INTERLATA allowedList......<> deniedList......."deny" suspension.......OFF fraudIndicator...OFF destroy AniSubscriber 9724812222

512

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Tandem ANI Subscribers

query AniSubscriber query AniSubscriber <key>

This Generic CLI command shows the setting of an ANI subscriber.
Syntax <key> Description DN of an ANI subscriber

query AniSubscriber 9724901234 <4909830> AniSubscriber key.............."9724901234" lastName........."Black" firstName........"Andrew" restrict.........(BITFIELD) -> 10 .NO_OA_INTERNATIONAL allowedList......<> deniedList.......<> suspension.......OFF fraudIndicator...OFF

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

513

Route Lists

Route Lists
A route list defines the circuit path for specific numbers. Use a route list to add and remove routes from specific paths. You can create the following types of route lists:

Carrier, see Carrier Route List on page 515 LNP, see LNP Route List on page 517 NANP, see NANP Route List on page 519 Tandem ANI, see Tandem ANI Route List on page 521 Tandem Carrier, see Tandem Carrier RouteList on page 523 Tandem Trunk Group, see Tandem TG Route List on page 525

514

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Route Lists

Carrier Route List

A carrier route list routes on the four-digit Carrier Access Code used to identify a company that provides circuit communications. For example, MCIs Carrier Access Code is 1234 and AT&Ts Carrier Access Code is 4321.
NOTE: The carrier access code is determined two ways: the subscriber chooses a carrier (with a specific carrier access code) or the subscriber dials 101+xxxx+NPA+Nxx+xxxx.

A Carrier Route List has the following attributes:

Attribute key min routes active Description unique name of Carrie route list Carrier Access Code Length: 4 digits a list of routes to the carrier this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are: NO do not use this route list. Yes (default) use this route list. This is normal state for a route list.

Tip
Use this attribute to implement time-of-day alternate routing. To do this, provision two routes. At any time, mark one route active, and mark the other route inactive.

Tip
Use this attribute when pre-provisioning a new set of routes. Mark the new set of routes inactive. You can then effect an immediate cutover to the new route list by deactivating the in-use route list and activating the pre-provisioned route list. An immediate cutover eliminates any downtime for call attempts while the operator is dragging and dropping trunk groups over to the route list. Also, the new routelist can be pre-provisioned during the day, and cutover can take place during off-hours.

selectionMethod

FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) always select the first available route ROUND_ROBIN use the available routes sequentially

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

515

Route Lists

The the Generic CLI is used for all carrier route list commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key min

The optional parameters for the create command are:

active selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

routes

See Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527, and Removing a Route from a Route
List on page 529.

Prerequisites
Carrier, see Carriers on page 196

create CarrierRouteList SWB 0555

516

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Route Lists

LNP Route List

The switch uses LNP routing to route calls to non local subscribers whose telephone numbers have been ported. The switch detects that a telephone number might be ported when the non local subscribers prefix is flagged as ported.

Tip
Flag prefixes as ported. See

ported on page 404.

If a called DN is not a local subscriber and the called prefix is flagged as ported, the switch queries an LNP database to determine the LRN (Local Routing Number) of the ported DN. When the LNP database responds to the query from the switch, it returns either the original dialed number or the LRN. If the database returns the original dialed number, the call routes normally. If, however, the database returns an LRN, the switch uses the LRN and the LNP Route Lists to route the call to the ported subscribers switch.
NOTE: The LNP route list should contain routes for all LRNs in the switchs LATA.

For example, a call is made to 806-689-1234. The switch determines that the prefix 806689 is ported. The switch queries the LNP database, which returns the LRN 806-689-9999. The switch routes the call using the 806-689-9999 LNP route list. An LNP Route List has the following attributes:
Attribute key min max routes active Description unique name of LNP route list the lowest LRN in the remote switch Length: 6 - 10 digits the highest LRN in the remote switch Length: 6 - 10 digits a list of routes to the remote switch this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are: NO do not use this route list (useful when adding or removing routes to the route list). Yes (default) use this route list. This is normal state for a route list. selectionMethod FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) always select the first available route ROUND_ROBIN use the available routes sequentially

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

517

Route Lists

The the Generic CLI is used for all LNP route list commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key min

The optional parameters for the create command are:

max active selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

routes

See Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527, and Removing a Route from a Route
List on page 529.

Prerequisites
Ported prefix, see Prefixes on page 403. LRN, see Rate Centers on page 410.

create LNPRouteList LNP1 214972999 214972999

518

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Route Lists

NANP Route List

An NANP route list determines which calls the switch routes itself. The switch uses NANP routing when the destination is in the same carrier's network as the switch, such as an LEC. An NAMP Route List has the following attributes:
Attribute key min max routes active Description unique name of NANP route list specified phone number start of range Length: 1 - 19 digits specified phone number end of range Length: 1 - 19 digits a list of routes to the remote switch this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are: NO do not use this route list (useful when adding or removing routes to the route list). Yes (default) use this route list. This is normal state for a route list. selectionMethod FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) always select the first available route ROUND_ROBIN use the available routes sequentially

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

519

Route Lists

The the Generic CLI is used for all NANP route list commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key min

The optional parameters for the create command are:

max active selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

routes

See Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527, and Removing a Route from a Route
List on page 529.

Prerequisites
Prefix, see Prefixes on page 403.

create NANPRouteList Plano 9724800000 9724809999

520

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Route Lists

Tandem ANI Route List

A tandem ANI route list is used route calls based on an incoming calls Automatic Number Identification (ANI). Use tandem ANI routes from a subtending switch or another switch to an Access Tandem (AT) or Interexchange Carrier (IXC) provide a way to route a set of calling numbers to a specific IXC. An Tandem ANI Route List has the following attributes:
Attribute key min max routes active Description unique name of Tandem ANI route list specified phone number start of range Length: 1 - 19 digits specified phone number end of range Length: 1 - 19 digits a list of routes to the AT or IXC this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are: NO do not use this route list (useful when adding or removing routes to the route list). Yes (default) use this route list. This is normal state for a route list. selectionMethod FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) always select the first available route ROUND_ROBIN use the available routes sequentially

The the Generic CLI is used for all tandem ANI route list commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key min

The optional parameters for the create command are:

max active selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

routes

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

521

Route Lists

See Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527, and Removing a Route from a Route
List on page 529.

Prerequisites
Trunk groups with matching protocols on the End Office (EO) and the AT, see Route Lists on page 514 and the following table:
Trunk Protocol Feature Group D (FGD) Feature Group C (FGC) SS7 FGD-Access Tandem (FGDAT) None Carrier Identification code Carrier Identification code/route code Special Routing Information to the AT

Dependent Commands
Add outgoing trunk groups for the connecting IXCs, see Route Lists on page 514. Add the outgoing trunk groups to the tandem ANI route list, see Adding a Route to
a Route List on page 527.

Add Tandem ANI Subscribers to screen calls based on the ANI, see query AniSubscriber on page 513

create TandemAniRouteList TandemANI 9724800000 9724809999

522

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Route Lists

Tandem Carrier RouteList

A tandem carrier route list is based on tandem carriers, and enables the switch to act as an Access Tandem (AT). An AT routes calls from a subtending switch to another AT or an IXC: An Tandem Carrier Route List has the following attributes:
Attribute key min Description unique name of Tandem Carrier route list carrier access code, 4-digit code identifying carrier used to route or the 4-digit code plus the routing code for specific call types (e.g. 0333 or 033388) Len: 4 - 6 routes active a list of routes to the AT or IXC this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are: NO do not use this route list (useful when adding or removing routes to the route list). Yes (default) use this route list. This is normal state for a route list. selectionMethod FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) always select the first available route ROUND_ROBIN use the available routes sequentially

The the Generic CLI is used for all tandem carrier route list commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key min

The optional parameters for the create command are:

active selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

routes

See Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527, and Removing a Route from a Route
List on page 529.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

523

Route Lists

Prerequisites
Carrier, see Carriers on page 196. Trunk groups with matching protocols on the End Office (EO) and the AT, see Route Lists on page 514 and the following table:
Trunk Protocol FGD FGC SS7 Allowed Routing by the AT Incoming ANI Incoming trunk group Incoming trunk group Incoming ANI Incoming trunk group Incoming Carrier Identification code FGDAT Incoming ANI Incoming trunk group Incoming Carrier Identification code and route code

Dependent Commands
Add outgoing trunk groups for the connecting ICs, see Route Lists on page 514. Add the outgoing trunk groups to the tandem carrier route list, see Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527.

create TandemCarrierRouteList SWBT 4321

524

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Route Lists

Tandem TG Route List

A tandem trunk group routes from a subtending switch to an Access Tandem (AT) or Interexchange Carrier (IXC) using the specific trunk group. An Tandem TG Route List has the following attributes:
Attribute key routes active Description unique name of Tandem TG route list a list of routes to the AT or IXC this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are: NO do not use this route list (useful when adding or removing routes to the route list). Yes (default) use this route list. This is normal state for a route list. selectionMethod FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) always select the first available route ROUND_ROBIN use the available routes sequentially

The the Generic CLI is used for all tandem trunk group route list commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

active selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

routes

See Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527, and Removing a Route from a Route
List on page 529.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

525

Route Lists

Prerequisites
Trunk groups with matching protocols on the End Office (EO) and the AT, see Route Lists on page 514 and the following table:
Trunk Protocol FGD FGC SS7 Allowed Routing by the AT Incoming ANI Incoming trunk group Incoming trunk group Incoming ANI Incoming trunk group Incoming Carrier Identification code FGDAT Incoming ANI Incoming trunk group Incoming Carrier Identification code and route code

Dependent Commands
Add outgoing trunk groups for the connecting ICs, see Route Lists on page 514. Add the outgoing trunk groups to the tandem carrier route list, see Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527.

create TandemTGRouteList incmSWB

526

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Route Lists

Adding a Route to a Route List

Tip
When entering ranges for route lists, use X as a wild card. For example, instead of entering two parameters for a new route list (972480000 9724809999), enter 972480XXXX for the same results.

insertInto <routeListType> <key> routes <subkey> <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a route to a Route List. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

Syntax <key>

Description

Route List name

CarrierRouteList LNPRouteList NANPRouteList TandemANIRouteList TandemCarrierRouteList TandemTGRouteList

<routeListType> Type of Route List:

<subkey>

This is the index in the routes list where you want to enter the route.

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert a route at the start of a Route List. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of a Route List.

<subvalue>

This attribute specifies the route that you are adding to the routes list. You may add: A line OID A trunk OID A span OID A trunk group key Digits a service, such as TestTone100, or TestTone102 (see Test Tone Maintenance on page 663.) Changed Number Announcement ("CNASvc", see Change Number Announcement on page 211.) Automatic Number Announcement ("ANASvc", see Automatic Number Announcement on page 665.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

527

Route Lists

insertInto insertInto insertInto insertInto

CarrierRouteList IXC routes 1 SSP1 LNPRouteList LNP1 routes 1 trunk-0 NANPRouteList Test1 routes 1 9724800031 NANPRouteList TestTone102 routes 1 Test102

528

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Route Lists

Removing a Route from a Route List deleteFrom <routeListType> <key> routes <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to add a route from a Route List. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> <routeListType> Description

Route List name

Type of Route List: CarrierRouteList LNPRouteList NANPRouteList TandemANIRouteList TandemCarrierRouteList TandemTGRouteList

<subkey>

This is the index in the route list of the route you want to remove.

deleteFrom deleteFrom deleteFrom

CarrierRouteList IXC routes 1 LNPRouteList LNP1 routes 1 NANPRouteList Test1 routes 1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

529

Subscribers

Subscribers
A subscriber is a person or a company receiving service from the switch. A subscriber is distinguished by its connecting facility, so we often speak of POTS subscribers, GR-303 subscribers, IP subscribers, and so on. A Subscriber has the following attributes:
attribute key value subscribers DN, a 10-digit DN even if the subscriber has 7-digit dialing

NOTE: To provision a voice mail system (VMS), use the provisioned routing number or the pilotLDN in this field. pin lastName firstName restrict 4-digit personal identification number. Internal value, not available in current release subscribers last name subscribers first name This attribute defines the restrictions on a subscriber. For a single restriction, enter its hexadecimal value (listed below). For multiple restrictions, add the hexadecimal values together and enter the total. See Using Hexadecimal on page 741. Extended Area The subscriber can place calls to nearby exchanges, but these calls are routed using PIC2 (the intraLATA carrier) and billed as intraLATA, hexadecimal value 2 IntraLATA Toll The subscriber cannot place calls to intraLATA exchanges that require a toll, hexadecimal value 4 InterLATA Toll The subscriber cannot place calls to interLATA exchanges that require a toll, hexadecimal value 8 International The subscriber cannot place calls to international exchanges, hexadecimal value 10

530

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

attribute restrict (continued)

value NPA 900 The subscriber cannot place 1-900 pay-per-call calls, hexadecimal value 20 NXX 976 The subscriber cannot place 1-976 pay-per-call calls, hexadecimal value 40 NPA 500 The subscriber cannot place 1-500 pay-per-call calls, hexadecimal value 80 NPA 700 The subscriber cannot place 1-700 pay-per-call calls, hexadecimal value 100 NO PIC2 The subscriber must dial the CAC (101XXXX) to place calls to intraLATA exchanges that require a toll, hexadecimal value 200 NO SCREEN The originator screening is bypassed and the call is processed on dialed digits and CAC, hexadecimal value 400 Soft DialTone The subscriber can only dial 911 and 611 calls, hexadecimal value 800 DA TO PIC2 The subscribers DA calls (411 only) go to PIC2, the intraLATA carrier, hexadecimal value. 1000 Collect or Third Party Calls The subscriber cannot make collect or third party calls, hexadecimal value 2000

NOTE: Only one of NO Qos, QoS If COPS Up, or Qos Must can be set for a given subscriber.

QoS Must For IP subscribers (SIP and MGCP) provisioned as Access Subscriber: the subscriber needs successful gate negotiation for their call to proceed, which implies that COPS needs to be up. hexadecimal value 4000 No QoS For IP subscribers (SIP and MGCP) provisioned as Access Subscriber: the subscriber does not need gate negotiation for their call processing. hexadecimal value 10000 QoS If COPS Up For IP subscribers (SIP and MGCP) provisioned as Access Subscriber: gate negotiation will only occur if COPS is up (if gate negotiation fails, the call will not proceed). The call will proceed if COPS is down. hexadecimal value 8000

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

531

Subscribers

attribute subscribedServices

value This attribute defines the services for a subscriber. For a single service, enter its hexadecimal value (listed below). For multiple services, add the hexadecimal values together and enter the total. See Using Hexadecimal on page 741. NOTE: The following services are inherited by OPX Subscribers from the Primary Subscriber: Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Busy Call Forwarding Do Not Answer Call Forwarding Fixed Caller ID Blocking Caller ID Delivery Caller ID Unblocking Calling Name Delivery Enhanced Call Forwarding Do No Answer MWI Options Remote Call Forwarding Activation Revertive call Selective Call Forwarding NOTE: The following services can not be assigned to a Primary Subscriber with an OPX facility: Call Back Call Block Call Reject Call Return Call Transfer Call Waiting Call Waiting Caller ID Priority Call Secondary DN Selective Call Acceptance Speed Dial Three-Way Warm Line

532

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

Service Name CALLER_ID CALLER_ID_BLOCK

Hex Value 4 2

Definition Displays the telephone number of an incoming call and posts the date and time of the call. Blocks the subscribers number (Caller ID) delivery on outgoing calls. Also allows the subscriber to use Caller ID Unblock.

NOTE: A similar feature can be used on a per-call-basis. CALLER_ID_UNBLOCK CALLING_NAME CALL_BACK 100 200 Allows the subscriber to remove the restriction of CALLER_ID_BLOCK for one call. Displays the name of an incoming caller. Call Back is an outgoing call management feature that allows the subscriber to make a call to the last DN called. To activate Call Back, the subscriber, after reaching a DN, hangs up, and enters feature access code *66. Once Call Back activates, the busy/idle status of the called and calling lines is checked periodically until call setup is attempted or a timeout occurs. When both lines are idle, the calling party hears a special ring. When the caller picks up the set, the called partys line rings. If the called DN is busy, the subscriber does not hear a busy signal, but is notified by a tone, after which automatic processing of the call continues for up to 30 minutes or until the DN is idle. CALL_BLOCK 20000 Call Block allows the subscriber to create a reject list of directory numbers (DNs). Calls from these DNs receive a fast busy signal and the subscribers telephone does not ring. Subscribers are billed for Call Block on a subscription basis; a flat, monthly rate. Allows the subscriber to forward all incoming calls to another number. This feature is also known as CLASS feature Call Forwarding Variable. Allows the subscriber to forward incoming calls when their number is busy.

CALL_FORWARDING

40

CALL_FORWARD_BUSY

400

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

533

Subscribers

Service Name CALL_FORWARD_FIXED

Hex Value 100000

Definition Provisions a fixed call forwarding number for a subscriber. A fixed call forwarding number allows the subscriber to activate and deactivate call forwarding, but does not allow changing number without calling the service provider.

NOTE: Call Forwarding Fixed can not be provisioned with Call Forwarding. CALL_FORWARD_LOCAL 4000 For subscribers provisioned as Subscriber Access endpoints: Allows subscribers to forward calls on a per-call basis, depending on the access devices settings. The T7000 does not store a call forwarding number. CALL_FORWARD_NOANS 800 Allows subscribers to forward incoming calls when they are not available to answer. To set the number of rings before forwarding, see numberOfCFDRings on page 542 Allows subscribers to reject calls from people who have Caller ID Blocking on their telephone. This service is an incoming call management feature that allows the subscriber to place a call to the number of the last call that was received. To turn on Call Return the subscriber presses *69 and the switch plays back the last incoming calls DN. The subscriber presses 1 to complete the call. This feature includes Recall Block to Private, it does not return calls on calling numbers with blocked Caller ID. If the called DN is busy, the subscriber does not hear a busy signal, but is notified by an announcement, after which automatic processing of the call continues for up to 30 minutes or until the DN is idle. CALL_TRANSFER CALL_WAITING 20 1 Allows the subscriber to transfer a call to another number. Alerts the subscriber to a second incoming call and allows the subscriber to switch between the calls. Also, allows the subscriber to use cancel call waiting. Displays the name and number of a second incoming call.

CALL_REJECT CALL_RETURN

80 8000

CALL_WAITING_CALLER_ID

1000

534

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

Service Name ENHANCED_CF_NOANS

Hex Value 2000

Definition Allows the subscriber to set following: the number of rings (2-9) before call forwarding activates the forward-to destination number Enhanced Call Forwarding No Answer and Call Forwarding No Answer are exclusive, only assign one of these services. For instance, if the Enhanced Call Forwarding No Answer Service is enabled, then disable Call Forwarding No Answer.

PRIORITY_CALL

200000

This service allows the subscriber to create and edit a screening list and assign a distinctive ring to the DNs in the list. Incoming calls from calling parties in the screening list are identified to the subscriber by the distinctive ring. Or, if a subscriber is engaged in conversation and a call from one of the designated DNs arrives, a distinctive tone accompanies the incoming call. Calls from all other DNs ring normally. Subscribers who subscribe to any or all of the call forwarding services may add Remote Activation. This feature provides a dedicated DN on the switch that can be used for remote activation. Subscriber directly call to this remote activation DN from any location. Calls to this number are answered with a tone. The subscriber then dials the home DN and a security code from the remActCFSecurityCode field. If the security code matches the provisioned code in the Subscriber window, a confirmation tone is returned. The subscriber proceeds through the call forwarding activation/deactivation procedure as if dialing from home.

REMOTE_CALL_FWD_ACTIVATION

40000

REVERTIVE_CALL

400000 0

This feature allows the subscriber to set up a talk path with other telephones on a single line. The subscriber dials their own DN, listens for a confirmation tone and hangs up to allow all telephones on the line to ring. Multiple telephones can go off hook and talk until all telephones hang up. This feature is also called Barn Service or Home Intercom. This service allows the subscriber to receive incoming calls only from a specified list of up to 10 numbers. An incoming call from a DN that is not on the Selective Call Acceptance (SCA) list routes to an announcement stating that the called party will not receive the call. For example, subscribers who do not want to be interrupted by unwanted calls but want to receive important calls. The SCA subscriber does not receive notification when a call is rejected.

SELECTIVE_CALL_ACCEPTANCE

80000

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

535

Subscribers

Service Name SELECTIVE_CALL_FORWARDING

Hex Value 10000

Definition This service allows subscribers to forward calls from telephone numbers identified on their Selective Call Forwarding list (up to 10 DNs) to another DN. When the Selective Call Forwarding feature has been activated, only incoming calls that appear on the Selective Call Forwarding List are forwarded to the remote location. Allows the subscriber to dial frequently-called DNs using a two-digit code (speed dial number). The subscriber has a list of 30 speed dial numbers. The subscriber can have both SPEED_DIAL8 and SPEED_DIAL30 for a total of 38 speed dial numbers.

SPEED_DIAL30

800000

SPEED_DIAL8

400000

Allows the subscriber to dial frequently-called DNs using a one-digit code (speed dial number). The subscriber has a list of 8 speed dial numbers. Routes all calls to the subscriber with a presentation of Unavailable, Unknown or Out of Area to an announcement prior to termination. The Central Office TRIGGER_ON_RESTRICTED option allows the service to be triggered for calls with a presentation of restricted, private or anonymous (see tmsOptions on page 385). After the announcement is played, the caller must dial the digit mentioned in the announcement in order for the call to proceed. Otherwise, the call is terminated after a timer expires. See tmsDigit on page 385 and tmsOptions on page 385.

TELEMARKETER_SCREENING

10

Tip
The Telemarketer Screening feature requires a software license from Taqua. For software licensing information, e-mail Taqua Marketing at simplify@taqua.com.

THREE_WAY WARM_LINE

8 100000 0

Allows a third person to join in a two-party call. The switch dials a pre-determined DN from a subscribers line automatically if the receiver is left off-hook for 0 to 30 seconds. The automatically dialed number can be any telephone number or digits routed by the switch, (911 is allowed, but not recommended). Warm Line becomes Hot Line service when you set the Warm Line timer to 0. You can use Hot Line with a Customer Service DN to have a new resident call your company for telephone service. See warmLineDigitTimeout on page 541 and warmLineForwardDN on page 541.

timezoneOffset

An optional attribute used when the subscriber resides in a different time zone than the switch. The switch applies the value in the timezoneOffset to calculate the local time at the subscribers phone when displaying Caller ID and time. The carrier that handles the subscribers interLATA calls (PIC1) if no interLATA carrier is desired, enter NOPIC.

interLATACarrier

536

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

intraLATACarrier homeNPA allowedList deniedList serviceInUse

The carrier that handles the subscribers intraLATA calls (PIC2), if no intraLATA carrier is desired, enter NOPIC. Home Numbering Plan Area. The subscribers area code. key from screen list: Allowed dialing screening prefixes. key from screen list: Denied dialing screening prefixes. Note: this field is read only. A dynamic bitfield detailing which services are currently being used by the subscriber. If the value of the corresponding bit is set, the service is in use.

CAUTION
Do not modify this attribute unless directed to by Taqua TAC! CALL_WAITING CALLER_ID_BLOCK CALLER_ID THREE_WAY TELEMARKETER_SCREEN CALL_TRANSFER CALL_FORWARDING CALL_REJECT CALLER_ID_UNBLOCK CALLING_NAME CALL_FORWARD_BUSY CALL_FORWARD_NOANS CALL_WAITING_CALLER_ID ENHANCED_CF_NOANS CALL_RETURN SELECTIVE_CALL_FORWARDINGCALL_BLOCK REMOTE_CALL_FWD_ACTIVATION SELECTIVE_CALL_ACCEPTANCE CALL_FORWARD_FIXED PRIORITY_CALL SPEED_DIAL8 SPEED_DIAL30 WARM_LINE CALL_BACK REVERTIVE_CALL OPX_FIRST_OFFHK_DIAL OPX_FIRST_OFFHK_ANS OPX_FIRST_SEC_OFFHK

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

537

Subscribers

rateCenter

name of the rate center this subscriber belongs to, this shows up as the originating rate center for all subscriber calls in the CDRs. Enter NONE for no rate center. Subscribers porting status. Values are: In the beingPorted field, select the appropriate porting status for this subscriber. For details as to how the switch routes ported subscribers, see Routing to a Ported Subscriber on page 715. NOT_BEING_PORTED for all subscribers that are not being ported to another switch and for all subscribers that not being ported from other switches to the switch. The call is terminated to subscribers facility. BEING_PORTED_IN For all subscribers that are being ported into the T7000 from other switches. Flags the switch that it may have to do an LNP dip to find the new number for the subscriber. Calls to the subscriber continue to terminate on the subscribers old switch until the LRN database is updated with the LRN of the local switch. Use this when adding a ported subscriber to the switch or before removing a ported subscriber off of the old switch. BEING_PORTED_OUT For all subscribers that are being ported to another switch. Flags the switch that it may have to do an LNP dip to find the new Location Routing Number for the subscriber. Calls to the subscriber continue to terminate on the local switch until the LRN database is updated with the LRN of the subscribers new switch. If the new switchs LRN is returned, LRN routing is used to forward the call to the subscribers new switch. Prevents Outgoing Signal Customization, and later changes to the facility OID, RDT Name, CRV, or IPTrunkGroup.

beingPorted

Tip
Verify that the LNP database has been updated before deleting subscribers from the switch. See testLnpQuery on page 642.

voiceMailIndicator

Subscribers voice mail status. Values are: NO_MAIL YOU_HAVE_MAIL

serviceProfile

This is the name of the Service Profile for Subscribed AIN Services and/or Account Codes. See Service Profile on page 152, and AcctCodePatternProfile on page 157. If populated, used as the billing number field in CDRs.

billingNumber

538

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

secondaryDNs

List of Distinctive Ringing numbers and associated alerting profiles. Distinctive Ringing service, also called teen service, allows up to six DNs to be assigned to the same customers line. The subscriber has one outgoing line and the party identification of six incoming lines. The switch creates a route list for each secondary DN with the same route as the primary DN

NOTE: A secondaryDN can not be a Hunt Group Pilot DN or a Start Hunt number

The alerting tone is the tone the switch sends when the secondaryDN is dialed: ALERTING_DEFAULT The default ringing tone on the switch, this tone is always applied to the primary DN. The tone is 2 seconds on and 4 seconds off. (also the default if the parameter is omitted) ALERTING_1 1second on, 1 second off, 1 second on ALERTING_2 0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on ALERTING_3 0.25 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 2.25 seconds on ALERTING_4 0.25 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 1.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on ALERTING_5 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on ALERTING_3GR506 0.4 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off, 0.4 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off, 0.8 seconds on, 4.0 seconds off remActCFSecurityCode originatingLineType Security Code to remotely activate Call Forward service. Length: 4 - 9 digits Flex ANI - originatingLineType. See Flex ANI Out-Pulsed Information Digits on page 394.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

539

Subscribers

lineLoadClass

Line Load Class of Subscriber. Line load control divides subscribers into three separate groups: A the highest priority B secondary priority C tertiary priority The highest priority A group requires communications in emergencies. Subscribers in this group include law enforcement, fire, and rescue personnel. The B and C groups contain the remaining subscribers (businesses and individuals). Typically, group A contains 10% of the subscribers with B and C containing the remaining 90%. During an emergency, use line load control on the C class, or on B and C classes to reduce congestion and allow group A to communicate. See LLControl on page 383,.

540

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

mwiOptionsvoiceMailSyste mID

Message Waiting Indicator. Controls how the subscriber is alerted to new voice mail messages. Values are" Stutter Provides a stutter tone on the subscribers telephone when the subscriber has new voice mail messages. Stutter_VMWI Provides a stutter tone and Visual Message Waiting Indicator (VMWI) when the subscriber has new voice mail messages. VMWI is a flashing LED or message on a CPE that has VMWI capability. Stutter_VMWI_Ring Provides a stutter tone, VMWI, and an abbreviated ring on the subscribers telephone when the subscriber has new voice mail messages. An abbreviated ring applies if a subscriber is off-hook and receives a message, after the subscriber goes on-hook, then the switch partially rings the telephone before sending stutter and VMWI. VMWI Provides VMWI when the subscriber has new voice mail messages. VMWI is a flashing LED or message on a CPE that has VMWI capability.

NOTE: VMWI is the only valid MWI option for SIP AGW Subscribers.

VMWI_Ring Provides VMWI and an abbreviated ring on the subscribers telephone when the subscriber has new voice mail messages. An abbreviated ring applies if a subscriber is off-hook and receives a message, after the subscriber goes on-hook, then the switch partially rings the telephone before sending stutter and VMWI. Permanent_Stutter Provides a stutter tone on the subscribers telephone when the subscriber has new voice mail messages. It is different from regular stutter because the dial tone stutters until the subscriber enters a digit, goes onhook, or does not enter a digit and the First Digit Timer expires. Permanent_Stutter_VMWI Permanent Stutter and Stutter and VMWI Permanent_Stutter_VMWI_Ring Permanent Stutter and Stutter and VMWI and Abbreviated Ring warmLineDigitTimeout warmLineForwardDN Range: 0 30000 (0 for Hot Line, 1000 to 30000 for Warm Line). The DN called if the receiver is left off-hook for the length of time specified in the warmLineDigitTimeout field.

Tip
You can use Hot Line with a Customer Service DN to have a new resident automatically call your company for telephone service.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

541

Subscribers

ftrsProfile

The FTRS profile associated with this subscriber. The switch applies FTRS if the pattern associated with the profile matches the dialed digits. See FTRS on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a hunt group, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide. maximumCFVCalls The maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously active for the Call Forwarding Variable service. Default: 1 maximumCFDCalls The maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously active for the Call Forwarding No Answer service. Default: 1 maximumCFBCalls The maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously active for the Call Forwarding Busy service. Default: 1 numberOfCFDRings The number of rings (2-9) to allow before the Call Forwarding No Answer service or Voice Mail service forwards the call. Range: 2 9 Default: 3 appServerTG For Enhanced Voice Services or Hosted SIP Gateway Subscribers, this is the name of the SIP Application Server trunk group The 3- or 10-digit ID of SIP Voice Mail System serving the subscriber.

voiceMailSystemID

542

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

TaquaMailProvisioned

Note: this field is read only. Status of Voice Mail System provisioning for the subscriber. Values are: NOT_APPLICABLE (default) subscriber is not a member of TaquaMail SIP VMS. NO subscriber is a member of TaquaMail SIP VMS, but the server has not yet confirmed the provisioning. YES subscriber is a member of TaquaMail SIP VMS, and the server has confirmed the provisioning. NOTE: When a subscriber is a member of TaquaMail SIP VMS, provisioning is automatically handled by the T7000. The switch sends a request to the TaquaMail VMS to provision a subscriber. When the TaquaMail server succeeds in fulfilling that request, it updates the subscriber record to reflect that provisioning was successful. If the TaquaMailProvisioned field is still 'NO' when a database audit triggers, the switch resends the request to the TaquaMail VMS to provision the subscriber.

opxDN opxPrimaryDN options

The DN associated with an OPX facility. The phone number a caller dials that rings both the primary and the Off-Premises Extension (OPX) phone Type is Bitfield. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example. FORCE_CALLWAIT_CALLERID set this option if the subscriber has the Call Waiting Caller ID service, and his CPE device does not respond properly with an acknowledgement. USE_DIAL_PULSE set this option for subscribers with dial pulse telephones (also called rotary telephones). The default is to use DTMF dialing

facility

The facility object holds subscriber facility data. See: TDM Facility on page 547 GR303Facility on page 548 MGCP Facility on page 549 SIP Facility on page 550

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

543

Subscribers

The Generic CLI is used for all Subscriber commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key lastName firstName

The optional parameters for the create command are:

restrict subscribedServices interLATACarrier intraLATACarrier rateCenter facility facility is one of:

TDMFacility

facilityOID RDTName crv MGTermination IPTrunkGroup username password

GR303Facility

MGCPFacility SIPFacility

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

pin lastName firstName restrict subscribedServices timeZoneOffset interLATACarrier intraLATACarrier

544

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

allowedList deniedList rateCenter beingPorted voiceMailIndicator serviceProfile billingNumber remActCFSecurityCode originatingLineType lineLoadClass mwiOptions warmLineDigitTimeout warmLineForwardDN ftrsProfile maximumCFVCalls maximumCFDCalls maximumCFBCalls numberOfCFDRings appServerTG voiceMailSystemID TaquaMailProvisioned opxPrimaryDN options

Tip
See TDM Facility on page 547, GR303Facility on page 548, MGCP Facility on page 549, and SIP Facility on page 550 for modify facility examples.

facility

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

545

Subscribers

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

secondaryDNs

See Adding Secondary DNs to Subscribers on page 557 and Removing Secondary DNs from Subscribers on page 559. Also, seequery Subscriber on page 552, query CFVInfo on page 553, query SCFInfo on page 553, query CFBInfo on page 554, query CFBInfo on page 554, query CFDInfo on page 554, and query CFFInfo on page 555.

create Subscriber 9724800001 Miller Craig 0 201204 WorldComm LuckyDog rc1 TDMFacility Line-01 create Subscriber 9724800037 James Stephen 0 204 WorldComm LuckyDog rc1 GR303Facility AFCUMC1 4 create Subscriber 8174801011 Anderson Paul 0 0 . . . SIPFacility ipgrp1 8174801011 Pa55W0rd modify Subscriber 9724800001 restrict NXX_976 1 destroy Subscriber 9724800001

Prerequisites
Carrier, see Carriers on page 196. Rate center, see Adding a RateCenter on page 412 For GR-303 subscribers, RDT, see createRDT on page 351 For pseudo IP subscribers, see IP Trunk Groups on page 307 For MGCP subscribers, MGCP termination, see MGTermination on page 376.

546

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

TDM Facility
The TDMfacility object holds subscriber data for TDM facilities.

attribute facilityOID

value Object Identifier of the Line for this TDM facility. Only applies to LTC. Range: 1 - 32 Example: Line-01

The following example creates a subscriber with a TDM facility on the current (LTC) card.
create Subscriber 9724800001 Miller Craig 0 201204 WorldComm LuckyDog rc1 TDMFacility Line-01

The following example modifies a subscribers TDM facility on the current (LTC) card.
query Subscriber 9724800000 facility <5c5b33c> facility...............<5c68fd8> <5c68fd8> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-0-2-2 modify Subscriber 9724800000 facility TDMFacility Line-0-2-21

query Subscriber 9724800000 facility <5c5b33c> facility...............<6034f88> <6034f88> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-0-2-21

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

547

Subscribers

GR303Facility
The GR303facility object holds subscriber data for GR-303 facilities.

attribute RDTName crv

value Name of a previously defined Remote Data Terminal.See GR-303 on page 351. The number of the physical analog line hanging off of the RDT. Range: 0- 2048.

The following example creates a subscriber with a GR303 facility. The ACFUMC1 RDT was previously defined.
create Subscriber 9724800037 James Stephen 0 204 WorldComm LuckyDog rc1 GR303Facility AFCUMC1 4

The following example modifies a subscribers GR303 facility.

query Subscriber 9724800009 facility <5f8513c> facility...............<5f8a750> <5f8a750> GR303Facility RDTName..."AFCUMC1" crv.......6 (6) modify Subscriber 9724800009 facility GR303Facility AFCUMC1 101 query Subscriber 9724800009 facility <5f8513c> facility...............<5fa3170> <5fa3170> GR303Facility RDTName..."AFCUMC1" crv.......65 (101)

548

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

MGCP Facility
The MGCPFacility object holds subscriber data for MGCP facilities.

attribute MGTermination

value Name of a previously defined MG Termination.See MGTermination on page 376.

The following example creates a subscriber with a MGCP facility. The term-1-2 MGTermination was previously defined.
create Subscriber 8174801012 Leaking Rufus . ffd . . . MGCPFacility term-1-2

The following example modifies a subscribers MGCPFacility.

query Subscriber 8174801012 facility <6a69a74> facility...............<6a6ef78> <6a6ef78> MGCPFacility MGTermination..."term-1-2" modify Subscriber 8174801012 facility MGCPFacility query Subscriber 8174801012 facility <6a69a74> facility...............<6ac8948> <6ac8948> MGCPFacility MGTermination..."term-2-2" term-2-2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

549

Subscribers

SIP Facility
The SIPFacility object holds subscriber data for SIP facilities.

attribute IPTrkGrpName username password

value For IP subscribers, the name of the IP trunk group For IP subscribers configured as SubscriberAccess SIP endpoints, the username is the subscribers DN For IP subscribers configured as SubscriberAccess SIP endpoints, the password is 0-16-character password The username and password are combined, encrypted, and shared between the switch and the CPE device; and used in the Registration process between the CPE device and the switch. The only time the password visible is when you enter it in the command line!

The following example creates a subscriber with a SIP facility. The IP trunk group and SIP Access Gateway were previously defined.
create Subscriber 9726921839 Paradise Sal . . . . . SIPFacility gw1_ipgrp 9726921839 OnTheRoad

550

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

The following example modifies a SIPFacility. Note that switch encrypts the password.
query Subscriber 8174802345 facility <609d234> facility...............<60a2638> <60a2638> SIPFacility IPTrunkGroup..."ipgrp1" username......."8174802345" password......."53036b2aafe896a1f8a59654e0f3094e" modify Subscriber 8174802345 facility SIPFacility Usage: modify Subscriber 8174802345 facility SIPFacility [username] [password] <IPTrunkGroup> : Available keys in tIPTrunkGroupDbMgr: ipgrp1 ipgrp10 ipgrp11 modify Subscriber 8174802345 facility SIPFacility ipgrp11 8174802345 Pa55W0rd query Subscriber 8174802345 facility <609d234> facility...............<60f5010> <60f5010> SIPFacility IPTrunkGroup..."ipgrp11" username......."8174802345" password......."2d63fc8b1d3cd85d272e58ef90ec80d3"

<IPTrunkGroup>

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

551

Subscribers

query Subscriber query Subscriber <key>

This Generic CLI command displays the data for a specific subscriber.
Syntax <key> Description subscribers directory number

query Subscriber 9724800002 <5f51560> Subscriber key...................."9724800002" pin....................0 lastName..............."Pennington" firstName.............."Bill" restrict...............(BITFIELD) -> 0 subscribedServices.....(BITFIELD) -> 204 .CALLER_ID .CALLING_NAME timezoneOffset.........0 (0) interLATACarrier......."WorldComm" intraLATACarrier......."WorldComm" homeNPA................"972" allowedList............0 deniedList.............0 serviceInUse...........(BITFIELD) -> 0 rateCenter............."rc1" beingPorted............NOT_BEING_PORTED voiceMailIndicator.....NO_MAIL serviceProfile.........0 billingNumber..........0 secondaryDNs...........0 (0) remActCFSecurityCode...0 originatingLineType....0 (0) lineLoadClass..........C mwiOptions.............Stutter warmLineDigitTimeout...2710 (10000) warmLineForwardDN......0 ftrsProfile............0 maximumCFVCalls........1 (1) maximumCFDCalls........1 (1) maximumCFBCalls........1 (1) numberOfCFDRings.......3 appServerTG............0 voiceMailSystemID......0 TaquaMailProvisioned...NOT_APPLICABLE opxDN..................0

552

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

opxPrimaryDN...........0 options................(BITFIELD) -> 0 facility...............<5f56bb8> <5f56bb8> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-2-1-27

query CFVInfo query CFVInfo <baseDN>

This Generic CLI command shows call forward variable information for a subscriber.
Syntax <baseDN> Description directory number

query CFVInfo 9724800002 <6d933c0> CFVInfo key.............."9724800002" remoteDN........."9724800010" maxActiveCalls...2 (2) serviceActive....TRUE fwdToVoiceMail...0 (0)

query SCFInfo query SCFInfo <baseDN>

This Generic CLI command shows selective call forwarding information for a subscriber.
Syntax <baseDN> Description directory number

query SCFInfo 9724800002 <6ef4280> SCFInfo key.............."9724800002" remoteDN........."9724800008" maxActiveCalls...1 (1) serviceActive....FALSE fwdToVoiceMail...0 (0)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

553

Subscribers

query CFBInfo query CFBInfo <baseDN>

This Generic CLI command shows call forward busy information for a subscriber.
Syntax <baseDN> Description directory number

query CFBInfo 9724800002 <6dc2f50> CFBInfo key.............."9724800002" remoteDN........."9724800011" maxActiveCalls...2 (2) serviceActive....TRUE fwdToVoiceMail...0 (0)

query CFDInfo query CFDInfo <baseDN>

This Generic CLI command shows call forwarding do not answer or enhanced call forwarding do not answer information, depending on which service the subscriber has.
Syntax baseDN Description directory number

query CFDInfo 9724800002 <6ec3cc0> CFDInfo key.............."9724800002" remoteDN........."8724800014" maxActiveCalls...2 (2) serviceActive....TRUE fwdToVoiceMail...0 (0) numberOfRings....4

554

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

query CFFInfo query CFFInfo <baseDN>

This Generic CLI command shows call forward fixed information for a subscriber.
Syntax <baseDN> Description directory number

query CFFInfo 9724800002 <6df0eb0> CFFInfo key.............."9724800002" remoteDN........."9724800012" maxActiveCalls...2 (2) serviceActive....TRUE fwdToVoiceMail...0 (0)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

555

Subscribers

query SdInfo query SdInfo <key>

Tip
Use this command to see which subscribers have speed dial lists provisioned on the switch: queryDbKeys tSpeedDialDbMgr

This command displays the information for an object in the speed dial database.
Syntax <key> Description subscribers directory number

query SdInfo 9724800007 <5f374c0> SdInfo key.................."9724800007" sharingAllowedFlag...(BITFIELD) -> 0 entryList8...........0 (0) sd8Owner............."9724800003" entryList30..........0 (0) sd30Owner............0 query SdInfo 9724800003 <5b53850> SdInfo key.................."9724800003" sharingAllowedFlag...(BITFIELD) -> 1 .SpeedDial8SharingAllowed entryList8...........<5f0e818> <5f0e818> Sd8Array entry_2..."9724800020" entry_3...0 entry_4..."9724800022" entry_5...0 entry_6...0 entry_7...0 entry_8...0 entry_9...0 sd8Owner.............0 entryList30..........0 (0) sd30Owner............0

556

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

Adding Secondary DNs to Subscribers

insertInto Subscriber <key> secondaryDNs <subKey> DirectoryNumberEntry <secondaryDN> [alertingPattern]
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a secondary DN to a Subscribers secondaryDn list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description subscribers DN, a 10-digit DN even if the subscriber has 7digit dialing The secondaryDNs list in a subscriber a sorted list. The key to this list is the secondary DN. This attribute specifies the secondary DN.

<subkey> <secondaryDN>

[alertingPattern] Optional Alerting Pattern. Values are: ALERTING_DEFAULT (default) The default ringing tone on the switch, this tone is always applied to the primary DN. The tone is 2 seconds on and 4 seconds off. ALERTING_1 1second on, 1 second off, 1 second on. ALERTING_2 0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on. ALERTING_3 0.25 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 2.25 seconds on. ALERTING_4 0.25 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 1.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on ALERTING_5 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on ALERTING_3GR506 0.4 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off, 0.4 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off, 0.8 seconds on, 4.0 seconds off

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

557

Subscribers

The following example adds two secondary DNs to the same subscriber. Note that the 1st command does not specify an alerting pattern. After the two secondaryDNs have been added, the subscriber is queried to confirm the changes.

insertInto Subscriber 9724800010 secondaryDNs 9724801010 DirectoryNumberEntry 9724801010 <done> insertInto Subscriber 9724800010 secondaryDNs 9724801011 DirectoryNumberEntry 9724801011 ALERTING_3 <done> query Subscriber 9724800010 secondaryDNs <5bf19e8> secondaryDNs...........<5ec4810> <5ec4810> SecondDNList (2 items) -> <5ec35a0> DirectoryNumberEntry numberString....."9724801010" cadenceProfile...ALERTING_DEFAULT <5ee23f8> DirectoryNumberEntry numberString....."9724801011" cadenceProfile...ALERTING_3
See Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6

558

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

Removing Secondary DNs from Subscribers

deleteFrom Subscriber <key> secondaryDNs <subKey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a secondary DN from a Subscribers secondaryDn list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> <subkey> Description subscribers DN, a 10-digit DN even if the subscriber has 7-digit dialing The secondaryDNs list in a subscriber is a sorted list. The key to this list is the secondary DN that you want to remove.

The following example builds on the example in Adding Secondary DNs to Subscribers, and removes the second entry from the secondaryDNs list. After the secondaryDN has been removed, the subscriber is queried to confirm the changes.

deleteFrom Subscriber 9724800010 secondaryDNs 9724801011 <done> query Subscriber 9724800010 secondaryDNs <5bf19e8> secondaryDNs...........<5ec4810> <5ec4810> SecondDNList (1 items) -> <5ec35a0> DirectoryNumberEntry numberString....."9724801010" cadenceProfile...ALERTING_DEFAULT
See Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

559

Subscribers

assignSubVM assignSubVM <key> <remoteDN>

This command assigns voice mail to a subscriber.
Syntax <key> <remoteDN> subscribers DN The DN of the trunk group that connects to the voice mail system (VMS). Assign the trunk group to a route list with the numbers that subscribers use to remotely access voice mail. Description

Prerequisites for a Standard Voice Mail Subscriber

CAS trunk group (see CAS Trunk Groups on page 235) or Hunt Group (see Hunt Groups on page 273) to connect to the voice mail system (VMS). Ensure that the trunk group is:

FXO protocol Bi-directional Loopstart signaling type Assigned a pilotLDN (for Hunt Groups only).

The service code (for example *83) that subscribers use to access voice mail from their telephone (see serviceCodes on page 382). Route list to the VMS and add the trunk group to the route list (see Route Lists on page 514). Add a subscriber, identifying the subscriber as the VMS, and use a provisioned routing number or the pilotLDN in the subscriber phone number field (see Subscribers on page 530). Provision the voice mail interface (see SMDIParms on page 587).

assignSubVM 9724800000 9723455555

560

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

deactivateSubVM deactivateSubVM <key>

This command deactivates a subscribers voice mail service.
Syntax key subscribers DN Description

Prerequisites
Subscriber with voice mail, see Subscribers on page 530

deactivateSubVM 9724800000

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

561

Subscribers

activateCfv
activateCfv <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls>
This command activates call forwarding variable. Call forwarding variable redirects calls intended for the subscribers number to another number allows the subscriber to change the number.
NOTE: Call forward variable can not be activated when call forward fixed is active

Syntax <baseDN> subscribers DN

Description

NOTE: Call forward variable can not be activated on Network Gateway or Access Gateway subscribers. <remoteDN> directory number where call will forward.

NOTE: the switch does not support call forwarding variable to OPX subscribers <maxActiveCalls> maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time Range: 1 - 99

Prerequisites
Subscriber with call forwarding, see Subscribers on page 530

activateCfv 9726785397 9726920983 5

deactivateCfv deactivateCfv <baseDN>

This command deactivates call forwarding variable from a subscriber.

Prerequisites
Subscriber with call forwarding variable, see activateCfv on page 562
Syntax <baseDN> subscribers DN Description

deactivateCfv 9726785397

562

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

activateCfb
activateCfb <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls>
This command activates call forwarding busy. Call forwarding busy allows the subscriber to forward calls to another number when the subscriber is using the telephone.
Syntax <baseDN> subscribers DN Description

NOTE: Call forward busy can not be activated on Network Gateway or Access Gateway subscribers. <remoteDN> directory number where call will forward

NOTE: the switch does not support call forwarding busy to OPX subscribers <maxActiveCalls> maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time Range: 1 - 99

Prerequisites
Subscriber with call forwarding busy, see Subscribers on page 530

activateCfb 9726785397 9726920983 5

deactivateCfb deactivateCfb <baseDN>

This command deactivates call forwarding busy on a subscriber.
Syntax <baseDN> Description subscribers DN

Prerequisites
Subscriber with call forwarding busy, see activateCfb on page 563

deactivateCfb 9726785397

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

563

Subscribers

activateCfd
activateCfd <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls> [numberOfRings]
This command activates call forwarding dont answer. Call forward dont answer redirects calls intended for the subscribers number to another number when the telephone rings and is not answered.
Syntax <baseDN> subscribers DN Description

NOTE: Call forward dont answer can not be activated on Network Gateway or Access Gateway subscribers. <remoteDN> directory number where call will forward

NOTE: the switch does not support call forwarding to OPX subscribers <maxActiveCalls> maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time Range: 1 - 99 [<numberOfRings] Optional maximum number of rings before call is not answered Range: 2 - 9 Default: 3

Prerequisites
Subscriber with call forwarding dont answer, see Subscribers on page 530

activateCfd 9726785397 9726920983 5 7

deactivateCfd deactivateCfd <baseDN>

This command deactivates call forwarding dont answer on a subscriber.
Syntax <baseDN> Description subscribers DN

Prerequisites
Subscriber with call forwarding dont answer, see activateCfd on page 564

deactivateCfd 9726785397

564

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

activateCff
activateCff <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls>
This command activates call forwarding fixed on a subscriber. Call forwarding fixed allows the subscriber to activate and deactivate call forwarding, but does not allow changing number without calling the service provider.
NOTE: Call forward fixed can not be activated when call forward variable is active

Syntax <baseDN> subscribers DN

Description

NOTE: Call forward fixed can not be activated on Network Gateway or Access Gateway subscribers. <remoteDN> directory DN where call will forward

NOTE: the switch does not support call forwarding to OPX subscribers/ <maxActiveCalls> maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time Range: 1 - 99

Prerequisites
Subscriber with call forwarding, see Subscribers on page 530

activateCff 9726785000 9726920900 4

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

565

Subscribers

deactivateCff deactivateCff <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls>

This command deactivates call forwarding fixed on a subscriber.and updates the remoteDN and maxActiveCalls if they are different
Syntax <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls> subscribers DN directory number where call will forward, Use an empty string () to clear the remoteDN maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time. A value of 1 resets the attribute to its initial state. Description

Prerequisites
Subscriber with call forwarding, see Subscribers on page 530

deactivateCff 9726785000 "" 1

566

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

assignCff
assignCff <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls>
This command modifies the remote DN and/or maxActuveCalls to a subscriber with call forwarding fixed.
NOTE: This command does not active call forward fixed on a subscriber. See activateCff on page 565.

Syntax <baseDN> <remoteDN> subscribers DN

Description new directory number where call will forward

NOTE: the switch does not support call forwarding to OPX subscribers/ <maxActiveCalls> new maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time

Prerequisites
Subscriber with call forwarding fixed, see Subscribers on page 530 assignCff 9726785000 9726920900 4

removeCff
removeCff <baseDN>
This command removes call forwarding fixed from a subscriber. If call forward fixed was active, it deactivates the service, and removes the call forward fixed information from the call forward fixed database.
Syntax <baseDN> subscribers DN Description

Prerequisites
Subscriber with call forwarding, see Subscribers on page 530

removeCff 9726785000

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

567

Subscribers

activateSCF
activateSCF <baseDN> <remoteDN>
This command activates selective call forwarding on a subscriber and sets the state to ON if there is at least one screen list entry; otherwise the state is set to OFF.
See Screen Lists on page 415. Syntax <baseDN> subscribers DN Description

NOTE: OPX subscribers can not activate selective call forwarding. <remoteDN> directory number where call will forward

Prerequisites
Subscriber with selective call forwarding, see Subscribers on page 530, or setSubCOS on page 576 Subscriber with an SCFscreen list, see assignSCF on page 569.

activateSCF 9723201000 9727871310

deactivateSCF deactivateSCF <baseDN>

This command deactivates selective call forwarding on a subscriber.
Syntax <baseDN> subscribers DN Description

Prerequisites
Subscriber with selective call forwarding, see activateSCF on page 568 Subscriber with a screen list, See Screen Lists on page 415.

deactivateSCF 9723201000

568

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

assignSCF
assignSCF <baseDN> <remoteDN>
This command assigns selective call forwarding on a subscriber and sets the state to OFF.
Syntax <baseDN> <remoteDN> subscribers DN directory number where call will forward Description

Prerequisites
Subscriber with selective call forwarding, see Subscribers on page 530, or setSubCOS on page 576

assignSCF 9723201000 9727871310

removeSCF
removeSCF <baseDN
This command removes selective call forwarding from a subscriber.
Syntax <baseDN> Description subscribers number

Prerequisites
Subscriber with selective call forwarding, see Subscribers on page 530, or setSubCOS on page 576

removeSCF 9723201000

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

569

Subscribers

RcfInfo
RcfInfo objects are used to provision Remote Call Forwarding. Remote Call Forwarding allows all calls to a subscribers number to be permanently forwarded, through the Direct Distance Dialing network, to a remote number. Remote Call Forwarding is similar to call forwarding variable, but differs in the following ways:

The forwarding is always activated. No physical telephone is associated with the remote call forwarding base DN. The subscriber Base DN provides billing information and routes the forwarded call over the correct carrier. CLASS and custom calling services are not assigned to the subscriber. Simultaneous calls may be active between the base switching office and the remote call forwarding remote DN. The remote DN should be associated with a type of hunting arrangement, if more than one simultaneous call is allowed. The forwarded-to number cannot be changed by the subscriber.

An RcfInfo object has the following attributes:

Attribute key subscribers DN. Description

NOTE: Subscriber must be a pseudo-subscriber (i.e., the subscriber can not have a facility associated with it) remoteDN numActiveCalls numAllowedCalls directory number where call will forward Note: this field is read only. The number of currently active calls to this DN number of calls simultaneously active (1-N) in decimal format Range: 1 - 99 Default: 1 rcfActivated Values are: True (default) Remote Call Forwarding Service is active. False Remote Call Forwarding Service is not active.

570

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

The the Generic CLI is used for all RcfInfo commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key
remoteDN

The optional parameters for the create command are:

numAllowedCalls

The modify command applies to the following parameter:

remoteDN numAllowedCalls rcfActivated

NOTE: An RcfInfo object cannot be deleted while calls are still active.

Prerequisites
Carrier, see Carriers on page 196. Subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530

create RcfInfo 8174801011 4089731000 2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

571

Subscribers

setSdEntry
setSdEntry <DN> <entry> [digits]
This command allows adding, replacing, and clearing single entries in a subscribers speed list database. To clear an entry, omit the digits parameter.
Syntax <DN> <entry> subscribers DN speed dial code Range: 2 - 9, or 20 - 49 [digits] the directory number assigned to the speed dial code. Description

Prerequisites
Subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530 Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see setSubCOS on page 576.

setSdEntry 9724800000 7 9725552000 setSdEntry 9724800000 7

deleteSdInfo
deleteSdInfo DN
This command deletes all information in the speed dial database for the specified DN. This includes both Speed Dial 8 and Speed Dial 30 lists.
Syntax DN Description DN associated with speed dial code

Prerequisites
Subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530 Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see setSubCOS on page 576. Speed Dial entry, see setSdEntry on page 572.

deleteSdInfo 9724800000

572

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

clearSdList
clearSdList DN Type
This command deletes all entries from a speed dial list, but not the list itself.
Syntax DN Type subscribers DN 8 or 30, depending on whether the speed dial code is a one(8) or two-digit code (30) Description

Prerequisites
Subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530 Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see setSubCOS on page 576. Speed Dial entry, see setSdEntry on page 572.

clearSdList 9724800001 30

setSdSharingAllowedFlag setSdSharingAllowedFlag DN Type Status

This command allows or disallows speed dial list sharing between subscribers.

Prerequisites
Subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530 Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see setSubCOS on page 576. Speed Dial entry, see setSdEntry on page 572.and see setSdSharingAllowedFlag on
page 573. Syntax DN Type status subscribers DN 8 or 30, depending on whether the speed dial code is a one- (8) or two-digit code (30) ON sharing OFF no sharing Description

setSDSharingAllowedFlag 9724800001 8 ON

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

573

Subscribers

shareSdList
shareSdList ownerDN readerDN Type
This command enables speed dial list sharing within a subscribers list.
NOTE: A subscriber may only share a speed dial list with one subscriber at a time. If a subscriber is already sharing a list with one person and begins sharing with another, the first sharing partner will be automatically removed from the subscribers sharing list.

Syntax ownerDN readerDN Type owner of the speed dial list

Description sharer of the speed dial list who is not the owner 8 or 30, depending on whether the speed dial code is a one- (8) or two-digit code (30)

Prerequisites
Subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530 Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see setSubCOS on page 576. Speed Dial entry, see setSdEntry on page 572.and see setSdSharingAllowedFlag on
page 573.

shareSdList 9724800002 9724800004 8

574

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Subscribers

removeSdListShare removeSdListShare readerDN Type

This command removes speed dial list sharing from a subscriber.

Prerequisites
Subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530 Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see setSubCOS on page 576. Speed dial entry, see setSdEntry on page 572. Shared speed dial list, see setSdSharingAllowedFlag on page 573.
Syntax readerDN Type Description sharer of the speed dial list who is not the owner 8 or 30, depending on whether the speed dial code is a one- (8) or two-digit code (30)

removeSdListShare 9724800004 8

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

575

Subscribers

setSubCOS
setSubCOS <key> <services>

Tip
To view a subscribers current services, use the Generic CLI query command on the Subscriber object.

This command changes a subscribers services. For a single service, enter its hexadecimal value. For multiple services, add the hexadecimal values together and enter the total. See Using Hexadecimal on page 741.
Syntax <key> <service> subscribers DN (number) see subscribedServices on page 532 for a list of services Service

See Subscribers
on page 530.

Prerequisites
Subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530

setSubCOS 9724408800 800

setSubRestrict

Tip
To view a subscribers current restrictions, use the

setSubRestrict <key> <restrictions>

This command changes a subscribers restrictions.

Generic CLI query command on the Subscriber object. See Subscribers

on page 530.

Syntax <key> <restrictions> subscribers DN

Description see subscribedServices on page 532 for a list of services.

Prerequisites
Subscriber, see Subscribers on page 530

setSubRestrict 9724800000 80

576

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Substitution

Substitution
A substitution group is a set of the same type of front cards with one substitution manager. A PIC or PIC2 card does not require any special hardware to be a substitution manager. Other types of cards require a rear substitution card: Front Card
LTC TIC TIC TIC TIC2 TIC2 BIC PIC PIC2

Rear Card
LTS TIIS TIIS2 TIIS2-Test TIIS2 TIIS2-Test DIIS
FEI, FEI2a FEIb, FEI2

a. A PIC can only use two of a FEI2s three Fast Ethernet Interfaces. b. Taqua recommends only pairing the PIC2-400 with an FEI. Also, the substitution manager in a PIC2 substitution group cannot have fewer FE Interfaces than any service card in that group.

The LTS is a specialized rear card that can only function as a substitution card. The TIIS, TIIS2, TIIS2-Test and DIIS rear cards are dual purpose cards that can function either as input/output cards, or as substitution cards. Configure these cards by inserting a jumper card into the Dual In-line Memory Module slot on the card. The substitution manager provides redundancy for the substitution group. If a card in a substitution group fails, then the substitution manager substitutes for the failed card. See the T7000 Provisioning Guide for rules regarding substitution.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

577

Substitution

A substitution group has the following attributes:

attribute key serviceCards sparedCard value the card number of the substitution manager card a list of the service cards in the substitution group the card number of the card currently being substituted for. 0 if substitution is not taking place.

All substitution provisioning is carried out with the Generic CLI, see Using Generic
CLI Commands on page 6.

578

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Substitution

Creating a Substitution Group

In order for a card to be designated as a substitution card, it must be booted, running, and have the proper type of rear card. The required parameter for the create command is:

key

NOTE: Unlike many other objects, in a substitution group, the key is not a name, but the card number of the substituting manager card.

create SubstitutionGroup 5

Modifying a Substitution Group

The modify command does not apply to substitution groups.

Destroying a Substitution Group

The destroy command will not succeed until all service cards have been removed from the substitution group. See Removing a Card From a Substitution Group on page 582. The following example creates a substitution group with card 2 as the substitution manager, queries the group, and destroys it. See Adding a Card To a Substitution Group on page 580.

create SubstitutionGroup 2 query SubstitutionGroup 2 <52d2b40> SubstitutionGroup key............2 (2) serviceCards...<52d2ae0> <52d2ae0> ServiceCardList valType......Unknown collection...List (0 items) -> sparedCard.....0 (0) destroy SubstitutionGroup 2 query SubstitutionGroup 2 Database item not found Existing keys:

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

579

Substitution

Adding a Card To a Substitution Group insertInto SubstitutionGroup <key> serviceCards <subkey> ServiceCardItem <serviceCard>
The Generic CLI insertInto command adds a card to a SubstitutionGroups serviceCards list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description The name of the substitution group. Remember, unlike other objects, the name of the substitution group is the card number of the substitution manager. <subkey> This is the index in the service card list where you want to enter the new card.

Tip
Use a index of 1 to insert a service card at the start of a serviceCards List. Use a index of -1 to insert a service card at the end of the serviceCards List.

<serviceCard>

The slot number of the card being added to substitution group Range: 1-20

Prerequisites
Substitution group, see Creating a Substitution Group on page 579.

580

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Substitution

The following example:

create

creates a Substitution Group with card 1 as the substitution manager, adds card 2 as the 1st service card in the Substituting Group, checks the status of the substitution group.

SubstitutionGroup 1

insertInto SubstitutionGroup 1 serviceCards 1 ServiceCardItem 2 query SubstitutionGroup 1 <50c9e40> SubstitutionGroup key............1 (1) serviceCards...<50c9b30> <50c9b30> ServiceCardList valType......Unknown collection...List (1 items) -> (1) <50c9c40> ServiceCardItem card.....................2 (2) maxSwitchbackCount.......0 (0) currentSwitchbackCount...0 (0) sparedCard.....0 (0)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

581

Substitution

Removing a Card From a Substitution Group deleteFrom SubstitutionGroup <key> serviceCards <SubKey>
The Generic CLI deleteFrom command removes a card from a SubstitutionGroups serviceCards list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description The name of the substation group. Range: 1-20 <subKey> The index in the Service Card List oft the card being removed from the substitution group Range: 1-20

The following example:

checks the status of the substitution group. There are two service cards in this substitution group: card 2 (the 1st entry in the Service Card List) and card 6 (the 2nd entry in the Service Card List). removes card 2 from the substitution group. Note that the card to be removed is specified by its position in the Service Card List, not by its card number! checks the status of the substitution group to confirm that only card 6 remains in the substitution group. Note that after removing card 2, card 6 has moved up to position 1 in the Service Card List.

582

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Substitution

query SubstitutionGroup 1 <32b1fc0> SubstitutionGroup key............1 (1) serviceCards...<32b1f60> <32b1f60> ServiceCardList valType......Unknown collection...List (2 items) -> (1) <51c85a0> ServiceCardItem card.....................2 (2) maxSwitchbackCount.......0 (0) currentSwitchbackCount...0 (0) (2) <51ccc30> ServiceCardItem card.....................6 (6) maxSwitchbackCount.......0 (0) currentSwitchbackCount...0 (0) sparedCard.....0 (0) deleteFrom SubstitutionGroup 1 serviceCards 1 query SubstitutionGroup 1 <32b1fc0> SubstitutionGroup key............1 (1) serviceCards...<32b1f60> <32b1f60> ServiceCardList valType......Unknown collection...List (1 items) -> (1) <51ccc30> ServiceCardItem card.....................6 (6) maxSwitchbackCount.......0 (0) currentSwitchbackCount...0 (0) sparedCard.....0 (0)

Prerequisites
Substitution card in a group, see Adding a Card To a Substitution Group on page 580.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

583

Substitution

enableRevertiveSwact enableRevertiveSwact <cardNumber>

Tip
Many users prefer to manually switch back cards during the maintenance window. See swact on page 626.

This command enables one revertive switchback of a service card. Revertive switchback occurs when the formerly-failed service card reboots: the substitution manager automatically switches its activity back to the service card

Syntax <cardNumber> card being enabled Range: 1-20

Description

NOTE: Once a card has switched back you must manually reset the switchback count. See disableRevertiveSwact on page 584, or resetSwitchbackCount on page 585

enableRevertiveSwact 3

disableRevertiveSwact disableRevertiveSwact <cardNumber>

This command disables revertive switchback for a service card and resets the switchback count.
Syntax <cardNumber> card being disabled Range: 1-20 Description

NOTE: Revertive switchback is disabled by default.

disableRevertiveSwact 3

584

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Substitution

resetSwitchbackCount resetSwitchbackCount <cardNumber>

This command resets the switchback count for a service card without having to disable and enable the card.
Syntax <cardNumber> card being disabled Range: 1-20 Description

resetSwitchbackCount 3

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

585

Voice Mail

Voice Mail
The switch communicates with one or more Voice Mail Systems (VMSs) using:

TCAP over an SS7 F-link. Subscribers and callers connect to the VMS over an F-link from the switch to the call answering points on the VMS, TcapMwiParms on page 497 the Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) over an RS-232 serial port. Subscribers and callers connect to the VMS over voice trunks from the switch to the call answering points on the VMS, SMDIParms on page
587

a SIP interface. Subscribers and callers connect to the SIP VMS over a SIP interface from the switch to the SIP VMS, sipVMS on page 593

NOTE: The switch does not support Generic Data Message Transport (GDMT).

586

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Voice Mail

SMDIParms
SMDIParms objects are used to connect to a Voice Mail System (VMS) using the Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) protocol over RS-232. Subscribers and callers connect to the VMS over voice trunks from the switch to the call answering points on the VMS. An SMDIParms object has the following attributes:
Attribute key forwardNumberChoice Description Name of the Message Storage and Retrieval (MRS) system FIRST_FORWARDING_NUMBER the original called number is sent over the SMDI link in the call history data LAST_FORWARDING_NUMBER (default) the last forwarding number is sent over the SMDI link in the call history data MessageWaitingIndicator Control Yes (default) the SMDI link controls the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) to identify that a message is awaiting the subscriber No the SMDI link does not control the MWI and an error message is returned to the VMS tcapMSRID TCAP Message Storage and Retrieval Identifier (MSRID) uniquely identifies each VMS providing TCAP MWI Must be 10 digits long Range: 0000000001-9999999999. callHistoryDelayLimit number of seconds the switch waits before deleting/not sending a call history record Range: 2-6 Default: 4 servingGroups cardNumberOfRS232Port name of the CAS trunk group or hunt group interfacing with the VMS rear card number to which the SMDI connects using the RS232 port Range: 1 - 20

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

587

Voice Mail

Attribute baudRate

Description The speed of the connection between the voice mail system and the switch. This must match the baud rate set on the VMS itself. NOTE: The switch uses 1 start bit, 7data bits, an even parity bit, and 1 stop bit.

CAUTION
Software flow control tends to cause problems above 9600 baud, so limit communications speed to 9600 baud. 1200 2400 4800 9600 (default) 14400 19200 28800 38400 56000 softwareFlowControl Yes (default) to control the rate of message transmission between the switch and the VMS using XON/XOFF control characters No no software flow control modemDialNumber Optional DN of the VMS. Used to contact the VMS via modem. Length: 7 - 11 digits standard GR283_ISSUE_1 (Default) for a VMS that meets General Requirements (GR)-283, Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI), Issue 1 TR283_ISSUE_2 for a VMS that meets Technical Requirements (TR)-283, Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI), Generic Performance Requirements, Issue 2 MWIT1Timer The number of seconds that the switch maintains a copy of information in the original request and associate it with the transaction until the MWI control attempt is completed or the mwiT1Timer expires. Range: 2-6 Default: 4

588

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Voice Mail

Attribute defaultMailboxNPA

Description Optional NPA added to 7-digit calls or that replaces the existing NPA in 10-digit calls. Length: 3 digits The number of digits used by the switch to complete the call to the VMS. Value: 7 - 10 digits Default: 7

numMailboxDigits

The the Generic CLI is used for all SMDIParms commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key tcapMSRID cardNumberOfRS232Port

The optional parameters for the create command are:

forwardNumberChoice MessageWaitingIndicatorControl callHistoryDelayLimit baudRate softwareFlowControl modemDialNumber MWIT1Timer standard

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

servingGroups

See Adding a Trunk Group to servingGroups on page 592, and Removing a Trunk
Group from servingGroups on page 592.
create SMDIParms VMS01 0000000001 19 create SMDIParms VMS02 0000012345 1 LAST_FORWARDING_NUMBER YES

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

589

Voice Mail

query SMDIParms query SMDIParms <MSRName>

This Generic CLI command shows the parameters of a Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) between the switch and a Message Storage and Retrieval (MRS).
Syntax <MSRName> Description Message Storage and Retrieval name (the name of the voice mail system)

query SMDIParms Zeus ******* SMDI Parms ******* MSR Name: Zeus forwardingNumberChoice: 1 messageWaitingIndicatorControl: 1 MSRID: 001 tcapMSRID: 1234567001 callHistoryDelayLimit: 4 servingGroup: 0 cardNumberOfRS232Port: 1 baudRate: 9600 softwareFlowControl: 1 modemDialNumber: (null) mwiT1Timer: 4 standard is GR283_ISSUE_1

590

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Voice Mail

Prerequisites if connecting to VMS using SMDI

CAS trunk group or Hunt Group to connect to the VMS, see Route Lists on page 514 Trunks for the trunk/ hunt group, see Adding Facilities to a CAS Trunk Group on page
251.

Set the trunk groups attributes: FXO protocol, bi-directional, loopstart signaling type, assigned a pilotLDN (for Hunt Groups only), see Route Lists on page 514. Service code that subscribers use to access voice mail from their telephone, see
serviceCodes on page 382

Route list to the VMS, see Route Lists on page 514 Trunk group to the route list, see Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527 Subscriber, identifying the subscriber as the VMS, and use a provisioned routing number or the pilotLDN in the subscriber phone number field, see Subscribers on
page 530

Prerequisites if connecting to VMS using an SS7 F-link

To provision voice mail for a subscriber use the following process:
Step
1

Action Provision an SS7 trunk group to connect to the VMS and add trunks to the trunk group, see Route Lists on page 514 Provision the service code, for example *83, that subscribers use to access voice mail from their telephone, see serviceCodes on page 382 Provision a route list to the VMS and add the trunk group to the route list, see Route Lists on page 514 Add the subsystem number to the SCCP on the local node, see Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode on page 485 Add a TCAP service with MWI, see TCAPServiceGTT on page 488 and TCAPServicePCSSN on page 492. Assign subscribers voice mail service, see assignSubVM on page 560.

Dependent Commands
By adding VMS, you are making voice mail available to be associated with subscribers, see Subscribers on page 530.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

591

Voice Mail

Adding a Trunk Group to servingGroups insertInto SMDIParms <key> servingGroups <subkey> <subvalue>
Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a Trunk Group to the servingGroups list. See the insertInto Example on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

SMDIParms name
This attribute specifies the Trunk Group that you are adding to the servingGroups list. The MSRID for the trunk group in the servingGroups list.

<subkey> <subvalue>

insertInto SMDIParms VMS001 servingGroups SWB1 1234

Removing a Trunk Group from servingGroups deleteFrom SMDIParms <key> servingGroups <subkey>
Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to add a Trunk Group from the servingGroups list. See the deleteFrom example on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.
Syntax <key> Description

SMDIParms name
This is the MSRID of the trunk group in the servingGroups list of the Trunk Group you want to remove.

<subkey>

deleteFrom SMDIParms VMS001 servingGroups 1234

592

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Voice Mail

sipVMS
A sipVMS object connects to the T7000 using IP trunk groups. An sipVMS object has the following attributes:
Attribute key vmsName voiceMailDNOption Description 10-digit DN used to access the SIP VMS name of the SIP voice mail system connected to the switch Choice for RemoteDN or "leave-to number" for calls forwarded to Voice Mail. Values are: SubscriberDN remoteDN servingIpTrkGrp accessDN Name of the serving IP trunk group. DN for retrieving voice messages. Length: 3 - 10 digits. subscriptionOption Option to turn on/off sending SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail. Values: No (default) Yes subscriptionInterval Refresh interval for sending SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail. Range: 30 minutes - 4320 minutes (3 days) Default: 60 minutes. subscriptionAudit Run the MWI Subscription Audit on this Voice Mail System. Values are: Disabled Do not run an audit on this subscriber. Enabled Run an audit on this subscriber. Send SUBSCRIB or UNSUBSCRIBE messages as needed. pendingSubscriptionC The number of subscribers checked each audit period. ount Range: 10 - 1000 Default: 100 tcapMSRID TaquaMailAddress MSRID for sending TCAP VM-related messages to subtending nodes. The IP address or name of the TaquaMail server.

TaquaMailPilotProvis Note: this field is read only. ioned Status of provisioning for the voicemail system.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

593

Voice Mail

The the Generic CLI is used for all sipVMS commands, see Using Generic CLI Commands on page 6. The required parameters for the create command are:

key vmsName servingIPTrkGrp

Adding SIP Voice Mail Process

To provision voice mail for a subscriber, use the process detailed in the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

create sipVMS 9726809999 sipVM1 ngw_iptg10

Dependent Commands
By creating a Voice Mail System, you are making voice mail service available to subscribers.

query sipVMS query sipVMS <key>

This is the generic CLI command, showing the attributes configured on the VMS that connects to the switch using IP trunk groups.
Syntax <key> Description 10-digit DN used to access the VMS

query sipVMS 9726921910 <2d3c068> sipVMS key........................"9726921910" vmsName...................."sipVMS1" voiceMailDNOption..........SubscriberDN servingIpTrkGrp............"ipgrpVM" accessDN..................."*09" subscriptionOption.........No subscriptionInterval.......3c (60) subscriptionAudit..........Enabled pendingSubscriptionCount...64 (100) tcapMSRID.................."1234567001" TaquaMailAddress...........0

594

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Voice Mail

setSubVMI

Tip
The Generic CLU query command shows the status of a subscribers voiceMailIndicator as 0-no mail or 1new mail. See

setSubVMI <key> <value>

This command changes a subscriber's Message Waiting Indicator manually. You can clear the VMWI and stutter tone or set VMWI, stutter tone, and abbreviated ring.

query Subscriber on page 552.

CAUTION
This command overrides the connecting voice mail systems messaging.

Syntax <key> <value>

Description the subscribers telephone number ON sets the subscribers CPE to indicate there is new voice mail, including: stutter dial tone, VMWI, and an abbreviated ring. OFF resets the subscribers CPE by removing stutter dial tone and the Voice Mail Waiting Indicator (VMWI).

Prerequisites
VMS attached to the switch, see SMDIParms on page 587 Subscriber with voice mail, see Subscribers on page 530

setSubVMI 9724800001 ON

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

595

Voice Mail

sendVMWI
sendVMWI <key> <value> [updateFlag]
This command sends a VMWI on or VMWI off message to a subscriber CPE. This command only controls the VMWI and abbreviated ring, and does not affect stutter tone. You can also use it to send a refresh message or immediately send the VMWI message.
Syntax <key> <value> Description the subscribers telephone number ON sends the VMWI on message to the subscribers CPE. OFF sends the VMWI off message to the subscribers CPE. This command does not affect the status of the voiceMailIndicator attribute in the Subscribers object. [updateFlag] R the refresh message updates the subscribers CPEs with the VMWI. This ensures the correct status of a CPE, if the VMWI is lost for any reason. I sends the immediate VMWI on message to the CPE.(default)

Prerequisites
VMS attached to the switch, see SMDIParms on page 587 Subscriber with voice mail, see Subscribers on page 530

sendVMWI 9724800001 ON R

596

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

Maintenance commands make changes to the T7000 database, its components, or functions of the T7000.

General Maintenance
The following commands are general utility commands:

addTask

Tip
To view all the tasks currently scheduled on the switch, see querySchedule on page 81

addTask <task name> <mo:dd:hh:mm> <"command param_1...param_n"> <card number> [period]

This command adds a task to the schedule. The maximum tasks you can add is 32.

Syntax task name mo:dd:hh:mm

Description uniquely identifies a task, may be any string Specify the time a task should start. The start time can be: mo:dd:hh:mm month, day, hour, and minute all specified hh:mm month and day assumed current system month and day, hour and minute are specified. now start time is immediate

<"command param_1...param_n">

Specify the action executed by the scheduler at the start time. This is a CLI command in double quotes. Entered the command as on the command line. Operating system commands, CLI commands, and scripts are valid values.

NOTE: No validation is done for commands. <card number> number of the card on which to perform the task or ALL to perform the task on all cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

597

General Maintenance

Syntax [period]

Description Select period, or default to one time. once The default if no period is entered, task will run once. xxxx User-specified where xxxx is some decimal number of minutes hourly Task runs hourly from the start time. daily Task runs daily from the start time. weekly Task runs weekly from the start time. monthly Task runs monthly from the start time. yearly Task runs yearly from the start time.

addTask noFlags 03:28:10:00 allFlags 4 once

598

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Maintenance

removeTask

Tip
To view all of the tasks currently scheduled on the switch, see querySchedule on page 81

removeTask <taskName>
This command removes a task from the scheduler.
Syntax <taskName> Description . The task name of one of the tasks in the scheduler.

Prerequisites
Task, see addTask on page 597

removeTask dbflash

dbFlash
dbFlash [<cardNumber> | <ALL>]
This command saves the provisioned database to flash memory.
Syntax [<cardNumber> | <ALL>] Description without an additional parameter, the command saves the database of the current card to flash memory. cardNumber(1 - 20) Saves the databases of the specified card to flash memory. ALL Saves the databases of all cards to flash memory.

dbFlash 1 dbFlash ALL

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

599

General Maintenance

dbFlashSize
dbFlashSize
This command details the flash memory size for each database.
NOTE: The output from the following example has been edited to fit on a single page.

dbFlashSize Flashname: TCAPServices PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160 Flashname: SCCPDb PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160 Flashname: FTRSPrfileDb PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160 Flashname: FTRSPTransDb PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160 Flashname: AlarmDefs PackedSize: 2f35 TravSize: 99f0 NoTravSize: 99f0 Flashname: MemoryAuditDb PackedSize: 144 TravSize: 2c0 NoTravSize: 2c0 Total appDb: PackedSize = 7a91 RealSize(references traversed) = 12460 RealSize(references not traversed) = 12460 Flashname: CFVINFO PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160 Flashname: CFFINFO PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160 Flashname: SPDLINFO PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160 Total servDb: PackedSize = 540 RealSize(references traversed) = 840 RealSize(references not traversed) = 840

setDbFlashPadSize setDbFlashPadSize <padInBytes>

This command configures the availableMemoryPad variable. By default, the availableMemoryPad is 1000000 bytes. Before a DB flash is attempted, this variable is used to compute the amount of available free memory, to ensure that the switch has enough free memory to complete the DB flash, as well as any other requests for memory during the DB flash. If sufficient memory is not available, the DB flash operation is aborted.
Syntax <padInBytes> Description The new value of the availableMemoryPad variable Range: 1000 - 5000000

setDbFlashPadSize 1002000

600

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Maintenance

setServiceSaveInterval setServiceSaveInterval <periodInMilliseconds>

This command sets the db Flash interval.
Syntax Description The number of milliseconds that the archiver waits before checking for changes in the database. The default is 10 minutes.

periodInMilliseconds

NOTE: Databases are not flashed unless a change is detected.

setServiceSaveInterval 180000000 Service Database flash interval changed

rmFlash rmFlash [cardNumber | ALL]

This command removes the appDatabase and srvDatabase from flash memory.
Syntax [cardNumber | ALL] Description without an additional parameter, the command removes the database of the current card from flash memory. cardNumber(1 - 20) Removes the databases of a specific card from flash memory. ALL Removes the databases of all cards from flash memory.

rmFlash 1 rmFlash ALL

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

601

General Maintenance

utime

Tip
Enter the utime command twice in succession: once to clear the current counts, and again to show the most recent CPU usage.

utime
This command displays a snapshot of the amount of CPU time each process has used since the last time the utime command was executed.

72547873ms (sysclicks=1193) 811819957 [isr] 0 251240871 [maddog] 1 0 initd 2 628062 rpcd 5 0 testd 6 1022369332 memd 7 0 smregd 8 0 xsh 9 0 getty a 12422110 net_datalink b 0 eigwd c 2032648 net_status d 43460 bootp_client e 0 ttyMon f 3340576 telnetd 10 437 environd 11 0 traced 12 0 cat 13 41223 smSubd 14 9008449 Mgmt_Daemon

loadAudio

Tip
Audio files are not replicated databases: be sure to load the audio file on all of the cards in the shelf.

loadAudio <name> <fileName>

This command adds an announcement file to a card on the switch.
Syntax <name> <filename> Description name of audio file file name of audio file

loadAudio allCircuitsBusy 6/allCktsBusy

602

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Maintenance

unloadAudio

Tip
Audio files are not replicated databases: be sure to remove the audio file from all of the cards in the shelf.

unloadAudio <name>
This command removes an announcement file from a card on the switch.

CAUTION
Removing announcements may negatively affect operations!

unloadAudio allCircuitsBusy

ls

Tip
Valid devices are 6 (RAM), E (Execute), and F (flash)

ls <dev>
This command lists the contents of the specified device.
Syntax <dev> Description device name, for example: e device e (code versions) f flash 6 device 6
ls f 4420000 4440000 4460000 4480000 4500000

16a 7 0 7 1ea

1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1

f/platform f/noboot f/isu.a f/crash f/srvDatabase

2/28/2007 2/15/2007 4/25/2006 2/15/2007 3/26/2007

16:53:44 12:33:41 12:25:17 12:35:11 18:51:10

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

603

General Maintenance

ping
ping <host> [interface]
This command verifies the IP connection to a card or to a computer using the cards or the computers IP address. It sends one ICMP ECHO request packet and waits for a reply.
Syntax <host> Description The IP address of the card or the computer to be verified, in dotted quad form. Optional interface parameter, one of eth0 voip0 voip1 eth0 is valid for all card types, voip0 and voip1 are only valid for a PIC card. Default is eth0.

[interface]

ping 10.1.140.127 Host 10.1.140.127 is alive, roundtrip delay = 4ms

604

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Maintenance

ipconfig
ipconfig
This command shows the IP connections of the switch to other devices and to the OM Server.

IP Configuration Device eth0 BOOTP reply received: True Vendor options = 1 My IP = 10.1.135.250 Host IP = 10.1.135.50 Default Gateway IP = 10.1.135.1 DNS IP = 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0 Root Path = Lubbock\tic3

ps
This command lists the processes currently running. For each process, the command displays the Process ID (PID), the parent process PID, the process priority, state (numeric), state (symbolic), stack base, stack length, stack margin, timestamp (last time the Pid became RDY), utime (number of ticks the Pid has consumed), and Pid Name).
ps 77:59:57.952 (280797952) <10bca300> 3/70/25% hi(<=3)/lo/sISR (2 hISR) state sbase slen mrgn timstmp utime name 0 0 f 1 Rdy d25ce0 e2c af0 0 39cd05ea [maddog] 1 0 1 d3e818 Rcv d3e7e0 de4 790 184a3a7 1cbed78 initd 2 0 1 d3fc28 Rcv d3fbf0 dcc c04 10bc9215 2242b4 rpcd 5 0 2 da4138 Rcv da4100 d50 c90 a46 19c testd 6 0 e 1 Rdy d509f0 d84 a48 174 58152b4f memd 7 20 0 e69e9c Syn ea4670 b30 ad0 183840b f9 smregd 8 9 3 d27670 Syn 26e97b0 c48 848 b2538dc 7b42 xsh 9 0 2 d6c2c4 Sus d6c290 bb8 7d8 18e4a7b 6f0a getty a 0 0 d8e8f8 Rcv d8e8c0 3de8 39e0 10bca2ff 1d205a4 net_datalink

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

605

General Maintenance

forceDbMaster forceDbMaster <cardNumber | "best">

This command forces a card to become the dbMaster card.

CAUTION
The forceDbMaster command will briefly disrupt SS7 traffic.

Syntax cardNumber | "best"

Description cardNumber the number of the card you want to be the dbMaster best uses system criteria to select the best DB Master (non-substitution, fastest, first, lowest card number)

forceDbMaster 2

restoreDb

Tip
Use queryDb on page 83 to list the names of the databases.

restoreDb <all |dbmgr>

This command forces the dbMaster to restore a single database or the appDatabase and srvDatabase files (the configuration) to all cards on the switch. Use this command when restoring a database.
Syntax <all | dbmgr> Description all restores the appDatabase configuration from the dbMaster dbmgr the name of the database to be restored.

restoreDb all restoreDb tSubscriberDbMgr

606

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Maintenance

resetHostdProxyDb resetHostdProxyDb <type>

This command resets the switch connections in the HostD Proxy table. The HOSTD process will re-establish the connection(s) automatically. See queryHostdProxyDb on page 81.
Syntax Description the type of reset to perform local resets the switch connections only on the card where the command was entered. all resets the switch connections on all cards

<type>

resetHostdProxyDb local hostd proxy db reset for local card only resetHostdProxyDb all hostd proxy db reset for all cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

607

General Maintenance

computeSipPassword computeSipPassword <UserName> <Password>

This command computes the SIP password from a given User Name and Password. The switch does not store passwords in clear text. Instead, the switch stores the result of an MD5 encryption algorithm in the subscriber record. This command re-computes the MD5 encryption and prints the result. If a SIP subscriber is having difficulty completing the Registration process, this command can be used to verify that the password provisioned in the subscribers SIP phone is the same as the password provisioned in the switch.
Syntax Description User Name the 10 digit Directory Number of the subscriber. Password the same string the subscriber entered into his SIP phone. Enclose a multi-word string within quotes.

<UserName> <Password>

computeSipPassword 9726921864 "Pa55W0rd" User = 9726921864, Password = Pa55W0rd, A1 = ea47349d11c03158db17682cb3f8b049

displaySubscriberPw displaySubscriberPw <DN>

This command displays a encrypted password of a SIP subscriber. Use this command in conjunction with computeSipPassword on page 608 to debug SIP Registration problems.
Syntax Description Directory Number the 10 digit Directory Number of the IP subscriber.

<DN>

displaySubscriberPw 9725552001 Password for 9725552001 is [ 65bca0dd95368f046365c4851888ee54 ]

608

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

General Maintenance

banner
banner <word> [word...]

Tip
Use banner to denote different phases of a script. See Using Scripts on page 31.

This commands prints messages to the console in large block letters. The command supports word wrap, and it converts alphabetic characters to lower case before printing them. Any character not understood is replaced by a blank
NOTE: The command shell intercept various characters before executing any command. See Command Syntax on page 26.

Syntax

Description A word to be printed. [a-z] | [0-9] | [!#*-_+=,.?";]

<word>

banner start mtp3 config X X X X XXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXXX X X X X XX X XXX X XXXX XX X X X X X X X X XXXX XXX XXXX X XXX X XXXXX X X XXXXX X X XXXX XXX X X X X X X X X XXX XXXX XXXXX X X

XX XX X X X X X X X X

XXX X X XXXXX X X X X X XXX XXXXX X XXX XX X X X X X

XXX X XXXX X X X X

X XX X XXX X X XXXX X X XXXX X XXX

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

609

Call Processing Maintenance

Call Processing Maintenance

traceCpStates traceCpStates [<startChannel | oid> [idle | exception]] | [<startChannel | oid > <endChannel | oid> [idle | exception]]
This command without parameters shows all devices on a card not idle. Use this command to see how many calls are active on a card or facility.
Syntax Description Optional start channel of span/DS3/FE IF OID. See OID on page 30. Optional end channel of trunk/span/FE IF OID. See OID on page 30. Default is last channel of the span/DS3/FE IF. If present, must be higher than the start channel [state] Optional state. Can be one of: idle only display idle channels exception only display channels in the exception state
traceCpStates -Chnl-Type-------Sig State---CallModel State--CpState (Cnts)--OtherLegOid 048 lpStartADa offHook O_ACTIVE ACTIVE Line-2-1-27 050 lpStartADa offHook T_ACTIVE ACTIVE Line-0-1-27

<startChannel | oid> <endchannel | oid>

610

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Call Processing Maintenance

traceCalledPty traceCalledPty <CalledParty | off>

This command enables message tracing for ISUP on a called partys number. Because tracing uses processor cycles, enabling it could affect run-time performance.
NOTE: This command enables ISUP tracing only on the card where the command is entered

Syntax

Description off disables the trace

<CalledParty | off> called party number

traceCalledPty Invalid Number of arguments (0) supplied. Usage: traceCalledPty <CalledParty | off> off Reset the CalledParty Current CalledParty Being traced : None traceCalledPty 9724804001

traceCallingPty traceCallingPty <CallingParty | off>

This command enables message tracing for ISUP on a calling partys number. Because tracing uses processor cycles, enabling it could affect run-time performance.
NOTE: This command enables ISUP tracing only on the card where the command is entered.

Syntax <CallingParty | off>

Description calling party number off disables the trace

traceCallingPty 2147658891

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

611

Call Processing Maintenance

rover
rover <OriginatingSubscriber> <DialedDigits> [NODIP]
This command implements Taquas Routing Translations Verification (RoVer) feature. RoVer allows a crafts person to place a virtual call between a calling party and a called party and to observe the switch translations used to place the call.
Syntax <OriginatingSubscriber> Description DN of the calling party. RoVer supports any Subscriber DNs assigned to a Line, an FXO trunk group, a SIP Access Gateway trunk group, a G303 RDT and CRV, or an MGCP Termination in the subscriber record. Note that the subscriber DN may or may not be assigned an Application Server trunk group. You can also trace the routing from an incoming Trunk Group. Rover supports subscriber Trunk Groups that use the PRI, DID or FXO protocol. Use the Trunk Group key in place of the Originating Subscriber (see Incoming Trunk Group Call on page 615).

<DialedDigits>

The digits dialed to place the call. Use a comma to separate a service code from the destination digits, or to separate the destination digits from the account code (see Account Code on page 624). RoVer supports seven and ten digit dialing, international dialing, and most services, such as speed dialing (see Speed Dial on page 617), and Account Codes (see Account Code on page 624, Missing Account Code on page 625, and Wrong Account Code on page 625). NOTE, however, Rover is primarily a route verification tool. It does not work with the following originating services: CALEA CID Block Revertive Call

[NODIP]

Optional parameter to handle database dips for 800 calls or Local Number Portability enquiries. Values are: nodip the appropriate database will not be accessed dip (default) the appropriate database will be accessed.

612

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Call Processing Maintenance

RoVer reports the results of the virtual call using the following categories:

Preliminary Information

Collected Digits interDigitTimeout (if applicable) FTRS Translation results (if applicable) See Office Pattern FTRS Translation on page 619 and FTRS Translation, Multiple Routing Attempts on page 620 type of digits collected (if applicable) Origination Address Carrier Destination Address OLI ISUP Originating Line Information Parameter (if applicable) CSI Carrier Selection Information Nature of Address (if applicable) call Type screening results for originator screening results for destination Originating Rate Center (if applicable) routing result (line and trunk or the reason for failure to route)

INFORMATION COLLECTED

SCREENING

ROUTING

NOTE: Rover can not make a virtual call if the subscribers facility is out of service. This applies to physical facilities as well as virtual facilities, such as GR-303, MGCP, or SIP. NOTE: Rover runs until a facility is selected that would normally complete the call. No terminating services (such as Telemarketer Screening, Selective Call Reject or Anonymous Call Reject) are ever triggered by rover.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

613

Call Processing Maintenance

Example RoVer Output

The following examples are meant to be illustrative, not exhaustive

Successful Line to Line Call rover 9724800000 9724800001 nodip

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 9724800001 without dip ) Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 9724800001, type tenDigitDial INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724800001 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (9724800001) Originating Rate Center: rc1 Terminating Rate Center: rc1 Skipping LNP dip Screening passed: call type: local (0) ROUTING 9724800001 ... Routing on digits: (9724800001) Routing on subscriber 9724800001 Routing result = Line-1-1-27 (0x5b18001), trunk group/ media/subscriber = 972480 0001 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for originating facility Line0-1-27

614

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Call Processing Maintenance

Incoming Trunk Group Call rover SWB 9724800000

Route Verification (SWB dialing 9724800000) Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Clear Channel Translation for Trunk-14-1-2: switchProfile is '(null)', subscriber/trunkGrp profileKey is '(null)' INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724805000 Destination Address: 9724800000 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724805000) Screening on destination: (9724800000) Terminating Rate Center: rc1 Screening passed: call type: local (0) ROUTING 9724800000 ... Routing on digits: (9724800000) Routing on subscriber 9724800000 Routing result = Line-0-1-2 (0x4218000), trunk group/ media/subscriber = 9724800000 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for originating facility Trunk-14-1-2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

615

Call Processing Maintenance

Line to Line Call, Not Enough Destination Digits

In this example, only 9 destination digits are input.

rover 9724800000 972480001 nodip Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 972480001 - without dip ) Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Inter-digit timeout : collected digits-> 972480001 INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 972480001 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0xfe () SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (972480001) Originating Rate Center: rc1 Screening passed: call type: Unknown (15) ROUTING 972480001 ... Routing on digits: (972480001) CM Route Failed, reason: UNABLE_TO_ROUTE (-1), digits: 972480001 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for originating facility Line0-1-27

616

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Call Processing Maintenance

Speed Dial setSubCOS 9724800010 400000 <done>

setSdEntry 9724800010 2 9724800003 <done> querySdInfo 9724800010 key......................9724800010 sharingAllowedFlag.......0 speedDial8Sharing....OFF speedDial30Sharing...OFF entryList8...............0x80cd5c22 2....9724800003 4.... 6.... 8.... entryList30..............0x0 rover 9724800010 2 Route Verification (9724800010 dialing 2) Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Inter-digit timeout : collected digits-> 2 INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800010 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724800003 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800010) Screening on destination: (9724800003) Originating Rate Center: rc1 Terminating Rate Center: rc1 Screening passed: call type: local (0) ROUTING 9724800003 ... Routing on digits: (9724800003) Routing on subscriber 9724800003 Routing result = Line-3-1-27 (0x5b18003), trunk group/ media/subscriber = 9724800003 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for originating facility Line10-1-27

3.... 5.... 7.... 9....

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

617

Call Processing Maintenance

Line to Line Call, No Route to Destination

In this example, the switch does not have a route to the destination digits.

rover 9724800000 4089731234 nodip Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 4089731234 without dip ) Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 4089731234, type tenDigitDial INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 4089731234 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (4089731234) Originating Rate Center: rc1 Screening passed: call type: interLata (2), Carrier: 0333, Screening PCAC from carrier = (null) ROUTING 4089731234 ... Routing on carrier: (0333) CM Route Failed, reason: UNABLE_TO_ROUTE (-1), digits: 4089731234 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for originating facility Line0-1-27

Successful SIP to SIP Call rover 8174802345 8174802346

Route Verification Begins: INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 8174802345 Destination Address: 8174802346 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3 SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (8174802345) Screening on destination: (8174802346) Screening passed: call type: local ROUTING 8174802346 ... Routing result = IPTrunk-26-1-20 (0x544801a), trunk group/ media/subscriber = ipgrp4 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for IPTrunk-25-1-20

618

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Call Processing Maintenance

Inter LATA Call With No Carrier Assignment rover 8174802346 2145551212

Route Verification Begins: INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 8174802346 Destination Address: 2145551212 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (8174802346) Screening on destination: (2145551212) Screening Failed, Carrier required for Inter LATA Calls. Error during screening. Abandoned. Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for IPTrunk-26-1-20

Office Pattern FTRS Translation rover 8174801000 8174802346

Route Verification Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Start Pattern Match Trunk-0-3-20 -> Office FTRS profile '(null)', subscriber/trunk group FTRS profile 'IAD_Basic_Res' Dialed digits -> 8174802346 -> matched digits pattern > NXXNXXXXXX Digits collected -> 8174802346 - type tenDigitDial INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 8174801000 Destination Address: 8174802346 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x91 (IAD call) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (8174801000) Screening on destination: (8174802346) ROUTING 8174802346 ... Routing result = IPTrunk-2-1-20 (0x5448002), trunk group/ media/subscriber = ipgrp4 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for Trunk-0-3-20

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

619

Call Processing Maintenance

FTRS Translation, Multiple Routing Attempts rover 9724800000 8174800000

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 8174800000) Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Start Pattern Match, originating on Line-0-1-10 Office FTRS profile '(null)', Subscriber/Trunk group FTRS profile 'testClgdb' Dialed digits (8174800000) matched this pattern: 817480XXXX /CLGDB pre1 /REM 1, 10 /INS 1,9724809999 = R817480 /ANI XXXXXXX Destination digits (9724809999) after FTRS Digits collected 9724809999, type tenDigitDial INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724809999 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (9724809999) Screening passed: call type: local (0) ROUTING 9724809999 ... Routing on route list ipR972 ... Routing on FTRS route list R817480 Routing on Tandem Carrier/TrkGrp/Ani (FTRS) R817480 Routing on NANP/LNP/CARRIER (FTRS) R817480 Routing on digits: (9724809999) Using route list ipR972 CM Route Failed, reason: UNABLE_TO_ROUTE (-1), digits: 9724809999 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for originating facility Line0-1-10

620

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Call Processing Maintenance

800 Call With No Carrier Assignment rover 9724800000 18006921864

Route Verification Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected -> 18006921864 - type longDistance INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 8006921864 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x103 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (8006921864) Screening passed: call type: SAC, Carrier: 0110, Carrier Identification Code is not in Carrier database. ROUTING 8006921864 ... CM Route Failed, reason: UNABLE_TO_ROUTE (-1), digits: 8006921864 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for Line-0-2-5

Carrier Routing Restrictions modify PRITrunkGroup SWB restrictions OS_ONLY 1 <done>

rover 9724800000 2144800000 Route Verification Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected -> 2144800000 - type tenDigitDial INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Destination Address: 2144800000 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (2144800000) Screening passed: call type: local ROUTING 2144800000 ... Routing on route list Test1 ... Trunk Group 'SWB' restricted from use (0x80). Continuing... CM Route Failed, reason: UNABLE_TO_ROUTE (-1), digits: 2144800000 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for Line-0-1-2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

621

Call Processing Maintenance

Multiple Routing Attempts - 1 rover 9724800000 2144800000

Route Verification Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected -> 2144800000 - type tenDigitDial INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Destination Address: 2144800000 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (2144800000) Screening passed: call type: local ROUTING 2144800000 ... Routing on route list Test1 ... Routing result = NETWORK_CONGESTION, trunk group/media/ subscriber = SWB Route Selection returned : 0, route result = -2, for (2144800000) Routing result = Trunk-40-1-2 (0x4214028), trunk group/ media/subscriber = SWB2 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for Line-0-1-2

622

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Call Processing Maintenance

Multiple Routing Attempts - 2 rover 9724800000 2144800005

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 2144800005) Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 2144800005, type tenDigitDial INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Destination Address: 2144800005 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (2144800005) Screening passed: call type: local (0) ROUTING 2144800005 ... Routing on route list Test1 ... Routing on digits: (2144800005) Trunk Group 'SWB' restricted from use (0x80). Continuing... Routing result = Trunk-2-1-2 (0x4214002), trunk group/ media/subscriber = SWB2 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for originating facility Line0-1-2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

623

Call Processing Maintenance

Account Code rover 9724800000 9724800007,123

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 9724800007,123) Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 9724800007, type tenDigitDial INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724800007 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (9724800007) Screening passed: call type: local (0) DIGIT COLLECTION... Account code found for Collected Digits : '123' ROUTING 9724800007 ... Routing on route list StephenJames ... Routing on digits: (9724800007) Routing on subscriber 9724800007 Routing result = Trunk-0-2-5 (0x8514000), trunk group/ media/subscriber = AFCUMC1 Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for originating facility Line0-2-5

624

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Call Processing Maintenance

Missing Account Code rover 9724800000 9724800007

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 9724800007) Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 9724800007, type tenDigitDial INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724800007 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (9724800007) Screening passed: call type: local (0) DIGIT COLLECTION... Error (ACCT_CODE_FAILURE) during screening. Call abandoned. Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for originating facility Line0-2-5

Wrong Account Code rover 9724800000 9724800007,234

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 9724800007,234) Begins: DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 9724800007, type tenDigitDial INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724800007 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number) SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (9724800007) Screening passed: call type: local (0) DIGIT COLLECTION... Account code not found for Collected Digits : '234' Error (ACCT_CODE_FAILURE) during screening. Call abandoned. Route Verification Complete Route Verification complete for originating facility Line0-2-5

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

625

Substitution Maintenance

Substitution Maintenance
swact
swact <fromCard> <toCard>
Swact stands for Switch Activity. This command switches call processing:

from a service card to the substitution manager from the substitution manager back to the service card.

NOTE: Only switch back to the service card after all issues are resolved and the card is restored.

Syntax <fromCard> <toCard>

Description the card from which you want to switch the card to which you want to switch

Assume that cards 1 - 3 are in a substitution group and that card 1 is the substitution manager. To manually switch to the substitution manager from card 3 (switchover):

swact 3 1
To manually switch from the substitution manager to 3 (switchback):

swact 1 3

626

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Group Maintenance

Trunk Group Maintenance

The following commands perform maintenance on trunk groups.

restartPRI
restartPRI <TrunkGroupName> <restartClass> [ChannelID]
This command sends a restart command to the trunk(s) in a PRI trunk group.
Syntax <TrunkGroupName> <restartClass> Description name of PRI trunk group "trunk" individual trunk "span" span "all" all trunks in the trunk group [ChannelID] optional trunk/span Object Identifier used when restartClass is either "trunk" or "span". See OID on page 30.

restartPRI NRAS_1 all

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

627

Device Maintenance

Device Maintenance
The following commands perform maintenance on cards, spans, trunks, or lines.

remove
remove <oid>
This command causes the facility to be operationally disabled and administratively locked See lock on page 7, and also see disable on page 630.
Syntax <oid> Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.

remove Trunk-23-1-3

restore
restore <oid>
This command causes the facility to be operationally able and administratively unlocked. See unlock on page 7, and also see enable on page 630.
Syntax <oid> Description Object Identifier unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See OID on page 30.

restore Trunk-23-1-3

628

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Device Maintenance

busy
busy <oid>
This command causes the facility to be available but not accept additional service requests. Busy is an operational state

CAUTION
This command should only be used by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances for testing or debugging.

Syntax <oid>

Description The object Identifier of a line, span, or DS-3. See OID on page 30.

Prerequisites
Facility in service.

busy Trunk-23-1-3

unbusy
unbusy oid
This command causes the facility to be available and accept additional service requests. Unbusy is an operational state.

CAUTION
This command should only be used by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances for testing or debugging.

Syntax <oid>

Description The object Identifier of a line, span, or DS-3. See OID on page 30.

Prerequisites
Facility in busy state, see busy on page 629

unbusy Trunk-23-1-3

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

629

Device Maintenance

disable
disable oid
This command causes the facility to be unavailable for processing service requests. Disabled is an operational state.

CAUTION
This command should only be used by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances for testing or debugging.

Prerequisites
Facility in service.
Syntax <oid> Description The object Identifier of a line, span, or DS-3. See OID on page 30.

disable Trunk-23-1-3

enable
enable <oid>
This command causes the facility to be operational and available, but unavailable to process service requests. Enabled is an operational state.

CAUTION
This command should only be used by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances for testing or debugging.

Syntax <oid>

Description The object Identifier of a line, span, or DS-3. See OID on page 30.

Prerequisites
Facility in service.

enable Trunk-23-1-3

630

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Device Maintenance

regMaintConsole regMaintConsole
This command sets the local card as the destination for ISUP circuit maintenance message output. When an ISUP alert is received, the maintenance console prints it.

***** T7000 ISUP Maintenace Alert ***** CIC 1020 -> T18 Expired

deregMaintConsole regMaintConsole
This command disables the local card as the destination for ISUP circuit maintenance command output.

resetLineTimers resetLineTimers <oid>

This command resets line timers for the selected line to their default values

CAUTION
Use caution when resetting line timers.

Syntax <oid>

Description Line Object Identifier. See OID on page 30.

resetLineTimers Line-1-1-1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

631

Device Maintenance

setAutoMode setAutoMode [cardNumber]

This command sets a cards Fault Manager to automatic. In this mode, the Fault Manager automatically disables a span when it detects one of the following alarms:

Loss of Signal (LOS) An LOS alarm indicates a loss of T1 signal and transmits what is commonly called a red alarm. Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) An AIS alarm indicates that the near-end T1 framing is lost. This is usually generated by multiplexers or equipment at intermediate cross-connect points on the circuit. An AIS transmits what is commonly called a blue alarm. Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) An RAI is sent by far-end equipment to report that it is not receiving a T1 signal. An RAI transmits what is commonly called a yellow alarm.

The Fault Manager restores the service on the span once the fault condition is remedied.
Syntax [cardNumber] Description Optional card number. If no card number is supplied, the command defaults to the local card.

setManualMode setManualMode [cardNumber]

This command sets the switchs Fault Manager to manual. In this mode, the Fault Manager does not automatically disable a span if it detects an alarm on it.

CAUTION
Disabling Fault Managers automatic response to span alarms can negatively affect operations.

Syntax [cardNumber]

Description Optional card number. If no card number is supplied, the command defaults to the local card.

632

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Device Maintenance

test
test <oid>
This command tests an individual span or line. These tests are called DS3 diagnostics, T1 diagnostics or Subscriber Line Interface Card (SLIC) diagnostics, depending on the type of span or line under test.
Test DS3 Diagnostic Description Run the test on a DS-3 span OID. Provides active diagnostic capabilities for the DS3 framerthat determines if the framer chip and associated firmware work properly. Result: [PASSED/FAILED] Report: DS3 Comm Path Test [PASSED/ FAILED] for span X indicates if the communication paths to/from the DS3 framer are open. Run the test on a T-1 span OID. Provides active diagnostic capabilities for the T1 framer that determines if the framer chip and associated firmware work properly. Result: [PASSED/FAILED] Report: T1 Comm Path Test [PASSED/ FAILED] for span X indicates if the communication paths to/from the T1 framer are open. Result: [PASSED/FAILED] Report: T1 Data Path Test [PASSED/ FAILED] for span X (New I/O=False) indicates whether the T1 data path is open. If the external loopback fails, the internal loopback runs to isolate any data path problem. SLIC Diagnostics Run the test on a line OID. The SLIC diagnostic test verifies the proper operation of each of the 32 SLICs by testing each SLIC operating state. Results

Results

T1 Diagnostic

Results

Result: [PASSED/FAILED] Report: SLIC Off-Hook Test [PASSED/ FAILED] for Line X indicates if the SLIC off-hook test passed or failed for the line. Result: [PASSED/FAILED] Report: SLIC Ring and Ring Trip Tests [PASSED/FAILED] for Line X indicates if the SLIC Ring and Ring Trip Tests passed or failed for the line.

Prerequisites
Remove the facility (span or line) from service before running a test, see remove on page 628.
Syntax <oid> Description Line or Span OID. See OID on page 30.

test span-23-1-3

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

633

Device Maintenance

txSpanSignal txSpanSignal <spanNumber> <timeslot> <signalType> [digit]

This command transmits a specified signal across a trunk.

Tip
See Using Hexadecimal on page 741 to convert decimal to hexadecimal

NOTE: The explanation of this command appears on the next several pages.

Syntax <spanNumber>

Description The zero-based number in hexadecimal of the span to send the signal. The number of spans on a card depends on the card type: Nr. of Spans Card Type LTC TIC ETIC2 BIC PIC 2 16 20 28 0 1 - based decimal 0 - based hexadecimal 2 f 13 1b 0

<timeslot>

The one-based timeslot (trunk) in hexadecimal on the span to send the signal. The number of timeslots on a card depends on the card type: Nr. of Timeslots Card Type LTC TIC ETIC2 BIC PIC 1 - based decimal 48 384 480 672 0 1 - based hexadecimal 30 180 1E0 2A0 0

634

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Device Maintenance

Syntax <signalType>

Description The signaling type of the trunk group determines what type of signal to send. The following categorizes the signals within each signaling type. NOTE: The 403 after EANDMS, LST and GST represent the T1-403 specification. E & M signaling (EANDMS) ONHOOK or EANDMS_ONHOOK on-hook signal OFFHOOK or EANDMS_OFFHOOK off-hook signal DIGIT or EANDMS_DIGIT internal value, do not use WINK or EANDMS_WINK wink signal FLASH or EANDMS_FLASH flash signal DS0AIS or EANDMS_DS0AIS DS0 blue alarm, Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) DS0RAI or EANDMS_DS0RAI DSO yellow alarm, remote alarm indicator Loopstart (LST403) LST403_LO loop open signal (on-hook) LST403_LC loop closed signal (off-hook) LST403_DIGIT internal value, do not use LST403_WINK wink signal LST403_FLASH flash signal LST403_LCF loop current feed signal LST403_LCFO loop current feed open signal (forward disconnect) LST403_RING ring signal LST403_DS0AIS DS0 blue alarm, Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) LST403_DS0RAI DSO yellow alarm, remote alarm indicator Groundstart (GST403) GST403_LO loop open signal (on-hook) GST403_LC loop closed signal (off-hook) GST403_DIGIT internal value, do not use GST403_WINK wink signal GST403_FLASH flash signal GST403_LCF loop current feed signal GST403_LCFO loop current feed open signal (forward disconnect) GST403_RING ring signal GST403_RNGND ring ground signal GST403_DS0AIS DS0 blue alarm, Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) GST403_DS0RAI DSO yellow alarm, remote alarm indicator

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

635

Device Maintenance

Syntax [digit]

Description Optional parameter when type is DIGIT, EANDMS_DIGIT, LST403_DIGIT, or GST403_DIGIT. Range: 0 - 9

Ring ground signal on a groundstart trunk.

txSpanSignal f 10 WINK 108> EANDMS_WINK sent on span (15) timeslot (16)

Prerequisites
Trunk group, see Trunk Groups on page 233

636

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Device Maintenance

queryGain
queryGain <oid>
This command displays the transmit and receive gain on a trunk.
NOTE: queryGain does not work on the trunks of an LTC card.

Syntax <oid>

Description Trunk Object Identifier. See OID on page 30.

queryGain Trunk-28 Gain settings for Trunk-28 Tx Gain -0 db Rx Gain -0 db

setGain
setGain <oid> <txGain> <rxGain>
This command changes the transmit and receive gain on a trunk.
NOTE: setGain does not work on the trunks of an LTC card.

Syntax <oid> <txGain> <rxGain>

Description Trunk Object Identifier. See OID on page 30. Amount of transmit gain in dB. 0 is the initial value. Range: 0 - 7 Amount of receive gain in dB. 0 is the initial value. Range: 0 - 7

queryGain Trunk-28 Gain settings for Trunk-28 Tx Gain -0 db Rx Gain -0 db setGain Trunk-28 2 7 queryGain Trunk-28 Gain settings for Trunk-28 Tx Gain -2 db Rx Gain -7 db

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

637

SS7 Maintenance

SS7 Maintenance
The following commands are SS7 operations commands.

SS7Restart
SS7Restart [networkName]
This command restarts an SS7 network. This could become necessary when you need to synchronize routing information with the STPs. Since restart is a disruptive procedure, you would typically not use this command. The network is unavailable for the duration of the restart. The restart time depends on the L3T27 timer, see L3T27_period on page 504.

CAUTION
Restarting an SS7 network briefly disrupts SS7 messaging.

Syntax [networkName]

Description Network name. Omit this parameter to force an SS7 restart for all networks

SS7Restart MCI

638

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7 Maintenance

activateLinkSet

Tip
Use

activateLinkset <linkSetName>
This command activates an inactive link set. When a link set is provisioned, it defaults to an inactive state. Activate a link set after you add the links and are ready for the link set to send and receive signaling messages.
Syntax <linkSetName> Description name of the link set to activate

linkSetStatus on page 107 to find

the status of a link set.

activateLinkset Linkset1

deactivateLinkSet deactivateLinkset <linkSetName>

This command deactivates an active link set
Syntax Description name of link set to deactivate

<linkSetName>

deactivateLinkSet Linkset1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

639

SS7 Maintenance

blockLink
blockLink <linkName>
This command takes an SS7 signaling link out of service. The link is marked management blocked
Syntax <linkName> Description
name of the link to block

blockLink Link_1_1

unblockLink

Tip
Before unblocking a link, be sure that the link set is active. See activateLinkSet on page 639.

unblockLink <linkName>
This command allows a formerly blocked link to start carrying signaling information.
Syntax <linkName> Description
name of the link to unblock

unblockLink Link_1_1

640

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SS7 Maintenance

inhibitLink

Tip
The last link in a link set can not be inhibited. The switch automatically uninhibits previously inhibited links when the last noninhibited link in a link set fails.

inhibitLink <linkName>
This command inhibits an SS7 signaling link. Inhibiting a signaling link restricts it from send signaling traffic, allowing only test and maintenance traffic. Inhibiting a link does not cause any link status changes at MTP Level 2. The switch on either or both sides of the signaling link can request link inhibition, and either switch can refuse inhibiting if it would impact routing.
Syntax <linkName> Description
name of link to inhibit

inhibitLink SWBT

uninhibitLink

Tip
Use linkStatus on page 107 to find the status of a link.

uninhibitLink <linkName>
This command uninhibits a locally inhibited SS7 signaling link.Since the switch on either side of the signaling link can request link inhibition, locally uninhibiting the link may not return it to a traffic bearing state.
Syntax <linkName> Description
name of link to inhibit

uninhibitLink SWBT

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

641

SS7 Maintenance

testLnpQuery

Tip
Use this command to validate SS7 routing from the switch to the SCP.

testLnpQuery <callingNumber> <calledNumber>

This command tests the ported status of a subscriber by making an LNP query. If the LNP query is successful, and the DN has been ported, the LNP SCP will return an LRN. If the DN has not been ported, the LCP SCP will return the dialed number.
Syntax <callingNumber> <calledNumber> Description 10 digit DN of the calling number. This required parameter can be any subscriber on any switch. 10 digit DN of the called number to be queried. An LRN database dip is preformed on this number, and the returned results are printed to the console.

testLnpQuery 3042962645 2145290269 Raw TCAP Component dump: 0xe9 0x13 0xcf 0x02 0x14 0x00 0xd1 0x02 0x65 0x01 0x30 0x09 0x8f 0x07 0x03 0x10 0x49 0x20 0x13 0x99 0x99 Analyze Route response: Calling party address: 9402319999

642

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

ISUP Maintenance

ISUP Maintenance
Integrated Services User Part (ISUP) defines the protocol for setting-up, managing, and releasing trunk circuits (terminating line exchanges) that carry voice and data between a calling party and a called party.

circuitCCR
circuitCCR <PC> <CIC>
This command performs a continuity check. The circuitCCR command generates a COT (continuity check test) tone and sends it over the voice path to ensure total signaling and voice connectivity with SS7. This test is necessary because SS7 does use the actual voice circuit for messaging.
Syntax <PC> <CIC> Description designates the point code of a circuit designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

circuitCCR 229-123-045 101

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

643

ISUP Maintenance

circuitGReset circuitGReset <PC> <CIC> <Range>

This command sends a reset message for a group of circuits. See circuitReset on page 646.
Syntax <PC> <CIC> <Range> Description designates the point code of a circuit designates the circuit identification code of a circuit designate range of CICs to reset

circuitGReset 229-123-045 101 10

circuitGBlock circuitGBlock <PC> <CIC> <Range> [StatusBitMask] <Release>

This command permits the switch to remove traffic from the distant terminals of a group of circuits because of a fault, or to perform testing.
Syntax <PC> <CIC> <Range> [StatusBitMask] Description designates the point code of a circuit designates the circuit identification code of a circuit designate range of CICs to block. A range of 0 indicates the absence of a Status Bit Mask optional decimal representation of 24 circuit identification codes which the command pertains to those bits set high (1). If this parameter is omitted, all CICs in the range will be blocked. Refer to the circuitGBlock Example on page 645 to understand how this parameter is calculate. <Release> 0 do not release the call prior to performing command 1 release the call

644

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

ISUP Maintenance

circuitGBlock Example
This command features a parameter that only a programmer could love. Suppose we want to reset CICs 101, 102, 110, 113, 115 and 122 for a particular point code. Here is how we would go about calculating the StatusBitMask:
CIC in msg: 101

CICs affected by msg:

Range: StatusBits set: 32 bit Binary representation Hex representation (1) Hex representation (2) Hex representation (3) Hex representation (4) Decimal representation:

101, 102, 110, 113, 115, 122

21 0,1,9,12,14,21 0000 0000 0010 0000 0101 0010 0000 0011 0020 5203 5203 0020 03 52 20 00 03 52 20 217632

Once the binary representation is converted to hex (1), it must be manipulated to account for Intel Little Endan memory addressing. 1. 2. 3. In hex representation (2), the upper and lower 2 byte blocks are swapped. In hex representation (3), the upper and lower bytes of each 2 byte block are swapped. In hex representation (4),the least significant byte (which used to be the most significant byte in hex representation (1)) is dropped, since this parameter expects only 24 significant bits.

The final result from hex representation (4) is converted to decimal and entered in the command:

circuitGBlock 229-123-045 101 21 217632 1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

645

ISUP Maintenance

circuitGUnblock

Tip
See circuitGBlock Example on page 645 to see how to calculate the StatusBitMask value.

circuitGUnblock <PC> <CIC> <Range> [StatusBitMask] <Release>

This command makes the distant terminals of a group of circuits available to carry traffic.
Syntax <PC> <CIC> <Range> [StatusBitMask] Description designates the point code of a circuit designates the circuit identification code of a circuit range optional decimal representation of 24 circuit identification codes where the command pertains to those bits set high (1) 0 do not release the call prior to performing command 1 release the call

<Release>

circuitUnblock 229-123-045 101 21 217632 1

circuitReset
circuitReset <PC> <CIC>
This command sends a reset message.
NOTE: In systems that maintain circuit status in memory, there may be occasions when the memory is damaged. In such a case, reset the circuits to the idle condition in both exchanges to make them available for new traffic. Since the exchange with the damaged memory does not know whether the circuits are idle, busy outgoing, busy incoming, blocked, etc., the Reset Circuit messages and Group Reset Circuit (for a group of circuits) messages are applicable for the affected circuit(s).

Syntax <PC> <CIC>

Description designates the point code of a circuit designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

circuitReset 229-123-045 101

646

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

ISUP Maintenance

circuitQuery

Tip
Use this command when coordinating a circuit turn-up procedure.

circuitQuery <PC> <CIC> <Range>

This command sends a message on a routine or demand basis to request the switch at the other end of a group of circuits to give the state of circuits in a particular range. See regMaintConsole on page 631.
NOTE: This command ensures that the circuits are not incorrectly put into maintenance states thereby denying them from service.

Syntax <PC> <CIC> <Range>

Description designates the point code of a circuit designates the circuit identification code of a circuit designate range

circuitQuery 229-123-045 101 10

circuitQueryL circuitQueryL <PC> <CIC> <Range>

This command requests the local switch to give the state of circuits in a particular range.
Syntax <PC> <CIC> <Range> Description designates the point code of a circuit designates the circuit identification code of a circuit designate range

circuitQueryL 229-123-045 101 10

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

647

ISUP Maintenance

circuitTest
circuitTest <PC> <CIC>
This command functions in systems that maintain circuit status in memory. The command sends a message on a routine or demand basis to request circuit translation information from the exchange at the other end of a circuit.
Syntax <PC> <CIC> Description designates the point code of a circuit designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

circuitTest 229-123-045 101

circuitBlock
circuitBlock <PC> <CIC>
This command permits the switch to remove traffic from the distant terminal of a circuit due to a fault, or to perform testing.
Syntax <PC> <CIC> Description designates the point code of a circuit designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

circuitBlock 229-123-045 101

circuitUnblock circuitUnblock <PC> <CIC>

This command permits the switch to return to traffic from the distant terminal of a circuit after blocking this traffic because of a fault, or to perform testing.
Syntax <PC> <CIC> Description designates the point code of a circuit designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

circuitUnblock 229-123-045 101

648

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

GR-303 Maintenance

GR-303 Maintenance
These commands are GR-303 operations commands.

inhibitPath
inhibitPath <name> <pathType> <pathPriority>
This command inhibits a GR-303 path.
Syntax Description RDT name a GR-303 path, either EOC Embedded Operations Channel TMC Timeslot Management Channel <pathPriority> Path priority, either PRIM primary SEC secondary

<name> <pathType>

inhibitPath Ridell EOC PRIM

uninhibitPath uninhibitPath <name> <pathType> <pathPriority>

This command uninhibits a GR-303 path.
Syntax Description RDT name a GR-303 path, either EOC Embedded Operations Channel TMC Timeslot Management Channel <pathPriority> Path priority, either PRIM primary SEC secondary

<name> <pathType>

uninhibitPath Ridell EOC PRIM

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

649

GR-303 Maintenance

cancelRDTCmd cancelRDTCmd <name> [all]

This command stops a currently executing a command, or all commands, on an RDT.
Syntax <name> [all]
RDT name optional parameter to stop executing the current command and all queued commands on the RDT.

Description

cancelRDTCmd RDT1

protectionSwitch protectionSwitch <name> <pathType> [FORCED]

This command executes a path protection switchover from the span containing the primary EOC and TMC to the span containing the secondary EOC and TMC. It takes 500 ms to switch from the primary EOC or TMC to the secondary EOC or TMC.
Syntax Description RDT name EOC Embedded Operations Channel TMC Timeslot Management Channel [FORCED] optional paramert to force a protection switch.

<name> <pathType>

NOTE: Although active calls are normally maintained during path protection switch-over, if you specify the FORCED parameter, active calls are dropped.

protectionSwitch RDT1 EOC FORCED

Dependent Commands
To switch back to the primary spans, repeat the protectionSwitch command.

650

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

GR-303 Maintenance

resync921
resync921 inst
This command reconnects the GR-303 EOC or TMC link connections on links that use Link Access Protocol-D (LAPD).
Syntax inst Description he instance of the link. Range: 1 - maximum number. The maximum number varies by card type: BIC 338 ETIC 32 LTC 32 TIC 32 PIC 0

resync921 1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

651

GR-303 Maintenance

setInhibitState setInhibitState <name> <state>

This command inhibits user commands by preventing provisioning commands from being sent to the RDT. Commands reside in an outstanding request queue until the inhibit state clears.
Syntax Description RDT name notInhibited to allow user commands to be sent to the RDT inhibited to queue user commands to the RDT

<name>
<state>

setInhibitState AFC_NW_TARRANT inhibited

setLoopbackMode setLoopbackMode <name> <ds1TermId> <setInLoopback]>

This command either sets a DS1 in loopback mode or releases a DS1 already set in loopback. DS1 loopback tests a DS1 circuit between the switch and a RDT. Place a DS1 in loopback mode to test the following:

The DS1 is working properly. The DS1 is provisioned correctly (settings on the switch and RDT match).

Syntax

Description RDT name terminal ID number of the span on the RDT you want to place in loopback 0 release 1 set

<name>
<ds1TermId> <setInLoopback>

setLoopbackMode RDT1 15 1

CAUTION
When a DS1 is in loopback mode, it cannot carry information between the switch and the RDT.

652

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

GR-303 Maintenance

resetCRVs (i) resetCRVs <name> <CRV> [CRV...]

This command resets a hung CRV by resetting one or more CRVs in the Call Reference Map.
Syntax <name> RDT name the crv value 1 - 2,048, either in decimal or hexadecimal form. NOTE: Specify Hexadecimal form by prefixing 0x in front of the CRV Description

<CRV>

[CRV...] resetCRVs RDT1 101 resetCRVs RDT1 0x65

optional additional crv

resetCRVs (ii) resetCRVs <name> <flag>

This command resets a hung CRV by resetting the reserved map, allocation map, or PERMANENT_SIGNAL state in the Call Reference Map.
Syntax <name> <flag> RDT name R reset Reserve Map A reset Allocation Map P reset permanent signal ALL reset all maps Description

resetCRVs RDT1 P

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

653

AIN Maintenance

AIN Maintenance
These commands are AIN operations commands.

testCNameQuery testCNameQuery <callingNumber>

This command sends a test Calling Name TCAP query from the switch to the provisioned SCP. Use this command to validate SS7 routing from the switch to the SCP. The Calling Name query is a request to an SCP. The request contains a directory number (10-digit telephone number). The response, if successful, contains the name associated with the number. This name then appears on the caller ID device attached to the subscribers telephone.
Syntax <callingNumber> Description 10-digit telephone number of the originator

testCNameQuery 8174032222

testSacAinQuery testSacAinQuery <callingNumber> <calledNumber> [Carrier]

This command sends a test Special Access Code (SAC) query from the switch to the provisioned SCP. Use this command to validate SS7 routing from the switch to the SCP. The SAC query is a request to a database for call routing information for a special set of numbers. The set of supported numbers are the various 800 toll free numbers including: 800, 888, and 877. The response to the SAC query is typically a:

Telephone number where the call can be routed Carrier name that handles calls for that toll free number
Syntax callingNumber calledNumber [Carrier] Description 10-digit telephone number of the originator 10-digit telephone number dialed 4 digit carrier code

testSacAinQuery 8174032222 9724800000 1234

654

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

AIN Maintenance

testSacInQuery testSacInQuery ani calledNumber lata [noHexDump]

This command sends a test Special Access Code (SAC) query from the switch to the provisioned SCP. Use this command to validate SS7 routing from the switch to the SCP. The SAC query is a request to a database for call routing information for a special set of numbers. The set of supported numbers are the various 800 toll free numbers including: 800, 888, and 877. The response to the SAC query is typically a:

Telephone number where the call can be routed Carrier name that handles calls for that toll free number
Syntax ani calledNumber lata noHexDump Description The 10 digit Automatic Number Identification (ANI) of the telephone number of the calling party 10-digit telephone number dialed 3 digit Local Access and Transport Area disables the hexadecimal dump

testSacInQuery 8174032222 9724800000 123

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

655

Test Panel Maintenance

Test Panel Maintenance

The switch test panel, called the TAP10, provides access within and outside the switch for testing and monitoring circuits. The test panel connects to the test bus on the switch and allows communication between the switch and test gear. Connections for up to three switches are available on the rear of the test panel. The rear also has connections for DS1 test equipment and a Transmission Impairment Measuring Set (TIMS). The front of the test panel has additional Bantam jack connections for accessing DS1 test equipment or a TIMS. Although you can open the DS1 or POTS circuits using the OpenManager, you cannot view which hardware is in test mode using the OpenManager. Select the DS1 and/or POTS circuits using the test panel commands.

splitFacility
splitFacility <OID | DN> [time]
This command splits the span or the subscribers facility and allows it to be accessed from the test panel.
NOTE: Entering the splitFacility without parameters shows if a facility is currently split. You can only split one facility at a time.

Syntax <oid | DN>

Description Object Identifier of subscribers facility, see OID on page 30. DN is the number of the subscriber. The time (in seconds) to split the facility. Use decimal for this command. Default is 600 seconds = 10 minutes.

[time]

splitFacility Span-0 600 splitFacility 9724800001 600

656

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Test Panel Maintenance

unsplitFacility unsplitFacility <OID | DN>

This command unsplits the span or subscribers facility and disconnects test panel access
NOTE: If the facility specified in the command in not currently split, the facility currently split displays and no action is taken.

Prerequisites
Split the span or subscriber, see splitFacility on page 656
Syntax <OID | DN> Description Object Identifier of subscribers facility, see OID on page 30. DN is the number of the subscriber.

unsplitFacility Span-0 unsplitFacility 9724800001

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

657

In Service Upgrades

In Service Upgrades
Tip
Each card in the switch has a 7/ patchLog file. To troubleshoot, dump this file with 'cat < 7/ patchLog' and save the results.

To modify T7000 software while it is carrying call traffic, TAC uses in-service upgrades (ISUs). ISUs can either be applied to a single card or to all of the cards on a T7000. Once an ISU is applied, it installs and re-applies itself automatically on every successive reboot of the cards. If you unapply the ISU, but do not also unload it, it returns on successive reboots. ISUs should be applied on a T7000-wide basis unless directed by Taqua TAC. ISUs applied to a single-card should only be performed by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances. If misused, they can cause the T7000 state to get out of sync and negatively affect call processing.

ISU process for a single card

To apply an ISU to one of the cards on a switch:
Step
1 2

Action Connect to a card on the T7000. Copy the ISU archive file into the directory from which the card is booting or tftping. Load the ISU archive file from the directory to the specified card. Apply the ISU to the card. Verify that the ISU has been applied to the card.

3 4 5

ISU process for all cards on a T700

To apply an ISU to all of the cards on the switch:
Step
1 2

Action Connect to the system manager card on the T7000. Copy the ISU archive file into the directory from which the system manager card is booting or tftping. Load the ISU archive file from the directory to the system manager card. The ISU tftps over and is distributed to all of the cards on the switch. Apply the ISU to all cards on the switch. Verify that the ISU has applied to each card on the T7000.

4 5

658

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

In Service Upgrades

sysLoadPatchArchive
Each card in the switch has a 7/patchLog file. To troubleshoot, dump this file with 'cat < 7/patchLog' and save the results.

sysLoadPatchArchive <filename>

This command is executed on the active system manager card. The system manager distributes and loads the ISU archive on all cards in a switch.
NOTE: If the file specified does not exist locally, the card attempts to find it in its TFTP home directory on ISEhouse. If it is there, the card TFTPs it over into the local file system (as specified in the filename itself). If the file is not found on the local file system or in the TFTP home directory, the operation fails.

This command does not apply the ISU to the software. To apply the ISU to all the cards on the switch, see sysApplyPatch on page 660. To apply the ISU to a single card, see applyPatch on page 660.
Syntax <filename> Description name of ISU archive file. Only file devices 7 and f may be specified.

sysLoadPatchArchive 7/OCX4.0.0-0002.a

loadPatchArchive loadPatchArchive <filename>

This command is executed from any card and loads an ISU archive into that card only.
NOTE: If the file specified does not exist locally, the card attempts to find it in its TFTP home directory on ISEhouse. If it is there, the card TFTPs it over into the local file system (as specified in the filename itself). If the file is not found on the local file system or in the TFTP home directory, the operation fails.

This command does not apply the ISU to the software. To apply the ISU to a single card, see applyPatch on page 660.
Syntax <filename> Description name of file on ISU archive. Only file devices 7 and f may be specified.

loadPatchArchive 7/OCX4.0.0-0002.a

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

659

In Service Upgrades

sysApplyPatch sysApplyPatch <patchID>

This command is executed only on the active system manager card. The system manager instructs all of the cards in the switch to apply a patch. The system manager card collects the application results from all of the cards and reports them back.

Prerequisites
Load the patch on all of the cards, see sysLoadPatchArchive on page 659.
Syntax Description name of file

<patchID>

sysApplyPatch OCX4.0.0-0002

applyPatch
applyPatch <patchID>
This command instructs the card on which it is executed to apply the patch.

Prerequisites
Load the patch on one of the cards, see loadPatchArchive on page 659
Syntax Description name of file

<patchID>

applyPatch OCX4.0.0-0002

660

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

In Service Upgrades

sysUnapplyPatch sysUnapplyPatch <patchID>

This command is executed from the system manager card. The system manager unapplies the specified patch from all cards on the switch. The system manager card collects the application results from all of the cards and reports them back.

Prerequisites
Apply the patch on all of the cards, see sysApplyPatch on page 660
Syntax Description name of file

<patchID>

sysUnApplyPatch OCX4.0.0-0002

unapplyPatch unapplyPatch <patchID>

This command instructs the card on which it is executed to unapply the patch.

Prerequisites
Apply the patch on one of the cards, see applyPatch on page 660
Syntax Description name of file

<patchID>

unapplyPatch OCX4.0.0-0002

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

661

In Service Upgrades

sysUnloadPatch sysUnloadPatch <patchID>

This command is executed from the active system manager card. The system manager unloads the patch from all of the cards on the switch. The system manager card collects the application results from all of the cards and reports them back.
NOTE: All patches in an archive are loaded, but patches are unloaded individually.

Syntax

Description name of file

<patchID>

sysUnloadPatch OCX1.4.2-0002

unloadPatch
unloadPatch <patchID>
This command instructs the card on which it is executed to unload the patch.
NOTE: Patches are loaded in entire archives. Patches are unloaded individually.

Syntax

Description name of file

<patchID>

unloadPatch OCX1.4.2-0002

662

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Test Tone Maintenance

Test Tone Maintenance

Use test lines for basic line maintenance and testing. The switch provides test line types 100 and 102. These test lines can be accessed from manual test positions by dialing a 7 or 10-digit subscriber number provisioned as the test line. The switch uses the received digits to connect to the correct type of test line. Calls to the carrier to report a service problem can be a result of one or all of the following issues:

Subscriber hears noise on the line during a conversation Subscriber is unable to clearly hear the called party Subscriber's data connection is not working properly

The carrier technician can connect a test box close to the subscriber's location, usually at the point where the line enters the subscriber's home or office, to test the line. The test box (usually a SAGE) is capable of dialing up the switch test line, measuring the returned tone, and detecting noise on the line. 100 - Type Test Lines The 100-type line provides the following items:

Returns off-hook (answer) supervision upon seizure of the test line. Provides a quiet interval of 300 ms 10% Provides 1004 Hz at 0dBm0 for 5.5 0.5 seconds. Applies a quiet termination to the caller for 60 minutes or until the caller hangs up. This allows the user to confirm the test line has been connected and measure the level of the circuit. The level can be used to determine signal-to-noise ratio measurements. If the caller does not hang up within 60 minutes, the line produces howler tone.

102-Type Test Lines The 102-type line provides the following items:

Returns off-hook (answer) supervision upon seizure of the test line. Provides a quiet interval of 300-ms -10%. Provides a 1004 Hz at 0 dBm0 tone for 9 seconds 10% followed by 1 second of quiet termination (silence). Continues the 10-second sequence is repeated continuously for 60 minutes or until the caller hangs up. If the caller does not hang up within 60 minutes, the line produces howler tone.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

663

Test Tone Maintenance

To provision test tones:

Step
1

Action Add a prefix for the test tone numbers (see Prefixes on page 403 for more information about adding a prefix.) For example, to use prefix 972555 for Test Tone calls create Prefix 972555 Note that the choice of the prefix is completly arbitrary, and will probably be different for your office.

Create a route list that will contain the number to dial for each test (see NANP Route List on page 519 for more information about route lists). The following two examples create a route list for Test Tone 100 and Test Tone 102 calls. We will call the Test Tone 100 route list TestTone100. We have decided it can be accessed by calling 0100 in the 972555 prefix that was set up in step 1. create NANPRouteList TestTone100 9725550100 In a similar fashion, we have decided to call the Test Tone 102 route list TestTone102, and access it by calling 0102 in the 972555 prefix. create NANPRouteList TestTone102 9725550102 Note that once again, the choice of the route list names and the DN were completely arbitrary. However, services such as Test Tone must use NANP routing, so there was no choice about the type of route list to create.

Add the services to the route list (see Route Lists on page 514, and Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527 for more information). insertInto NANPRouteList TestTone100 routes 1 Test100 insertInto NANPRouteList TestTone102 routes 1 Test102 For these steps, there is no choice: The type of route list and the name of the route list were determined in step 2. Futhermore, routes is a keyword that must be used when inserting route into a route list. Finally, Test100 and Test102 are keywords that identify the Test Tone 100 and Test Tone 102 services, respectively.

664

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Automatic Number Announcement

Automatic Number Announcement

Tip
ANA_announceme ntPause on page 384 determines the length of the pause between ANA announcements.

Automatic Number Announcement (ANA) helps a carrier technician identify the phone number of a particular line. One or more special ANA numbers can be provisioned on the switch. When the special ANA number is dialed, the switch speaks the calling number in a customized announcement. After a brief pause, the switch repeats the calling number announcement. If the carrier technician does not hang up after the second announcement, the switch presents howler tone. To provision Automatic Number Announcement:
Step
1

Action (Optional) add a prefix for the ANA numbers (see Prefixes on page 403 for more information about adding a prefix.). Standard industry practice in North America is to use the 958 or 959 exchanges for local and long distance test numbers, but you are free to choose any exchnage for Automatic Number Announcements. For example, to use prefix 972958 for ANA calls create Prefix 972958

Create a route list that will contain the number to dial for the Automatic Number Announcement (see NANP Route List on page 519 for more information about route lists). The following example creates a route list for ANA calls. We will call the Automatic Number Announcement route list ANA_1. We have decided it can be accessed by calling 1234 in the 972958 prefix that was set up in step 1. create NANPRouteList ANA_1 9729581234 Note that once again, the choice of the route list name and the DN were completely arbitrary. However, services such as ANA must use NANP routing, so there was no choice about the type of route list to create.

Add the service to the route list (see Route Lists on page 514, and Adding a Route to a Route List on page 527 for more information). insertInto NANPRouteList ANA_1 routes 1 ANASvc For these steps, there is no choice: The type of route list and the name of the route list were determined in step 2. Futhermore, routes is a keyword that must be used when inserting route into a route list. Finally, ANASvc is a keyword that identifies the Anutomatic Number Announcement service.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

665

SIP/MGCP/VoIP Maintenance

SIP/MGCP/VoIP Maintenance
pingVoip
pingVoip <device_num> <ip_addr>
Issue this command on a PIC card to test the communications path to a given IP address over the specified Ethernet port. The switch issues an ICMP ping (sometimes referred to a a Packet Internet Groper command, as per RFC 1739), to determine if the remote host is active and to determine the round-trip communicating delay between the switch and the host.
Syntax Description Number of the device to issue the ping command from. 0 Fast Ethernet Port 0 1 Fast Ethernet Port 1 2 Fast Ethernet Port 2 (PIC 2 only)

<device_num>

<ip_addr>

Internet Protocol address to ping, in dotted decimal form.

666

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

SIP/MGCP/VoIP Maintenance

nslookup
nslookup <FQDN> <Interface> [dnsSRV(0|1)]
Issue this command on a PIC card to debug queries and responses from a DNS (Domain Name System).
Syntax <FQDN> <Interface> Description Fully Qualified Domain Name for the query. The number of the device which will issue the DNS lookup. 0 Fast Ethernet Port 0 1 Fast Ethernet Port 1 2 Fast Ethernet Port 2 (PIC 2 only)

[dnsSRV(0|1)]

Optional parameter which specifies the type of DNS lookup. Values are: 0 DNS_A lookup. Returns an IP Address. 1 DNS_SRV lookup. Returns an IP Address and Port Number.

Prerequisites
DNS server configured on the Fast Ethernet Interface. See modifyFacility on page
217.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Maintenance

667

SIP/MGCP/VoIP Maintenance

nslookup as.taqua.local 1 Header information: ID: 777 Operation Code: QUERY Query/Response Flag: Response Authoritative Answer Flag: true Truncation Flag: false Recursion Desired: true Recursion Available: true Response Code: NO_ERROR Question Count: 1 Answer Record Count: 2 Authority Record Count: 0 Additional Record Count: 0 Question section: Name: as.taqua.local Type: A Class: INTERNET Answer section: 2 Name: as.taqua.local Type: A Class: INTERNET TTL: 0 seconds IP Addr: 172.19.160.193 Name: as.taqua.local Type: A Class: INTERNET TTL: 0 seconds IP Addr: 172.19.160.191 Authority section: 0 Additional section: 0

668

Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

The commands in this chapter relate to T7000 Performance Monitoring. Performance Monitoring on the T7000 measures the following:

Active Call Measurements (ACMs) DS1 Monitoring DS3 Performance Monitoring Peg Counts Usage Intervals

Active Call Measurements

Active Call Measurements (ACMs) determine call traffic patterns on the T7000. An ACM is a snapshot of facility usage at a specific interval. Facility activity that occurs between ACM intervals are not included in ACM results. This statistical data supports configuration decisions involving facility assignment. The ACMs:

View a snapshot of active facilities on a T7000 at a point in time. Accumulate snapshots of facility activity. View and reset the accumulated data.

You determine the interval in seconds to take snap shots of activity on the T7000. You can view activity or a log of accumulated data on the following:

A card A trunk group A span All of the cards in a T7000 All of the spans in a T7000 All of the trunk groups on a T7000

NOTE: Using ACMs from the command line is independent from ACMs on the OM. They are separate processes and they do not affect each other.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

669

Active Call Measurements

logActiveCalls logActiveCalls [interval]

This command logs active facility snap shots on the T7000 in a log. This log is an indicator of call activity, not a log of all calls on the T7000.
Syntax [interval] Description The interval in seconds on which the active call snapshot is recorded. The minimum interval is 10 seconds. Use an interval that matches your average call time, for example, three minutes.

logActiveCalls 30

Dependent Commands
The following ACM commands are dependant on logActiveCalls:

resetCallHist on page 670 queryActiveCalls on page 66 queryCallHist on page 67

stopActiveCallLog stopActiveCallLog
This command stops the active facility snap shots.
NOTE: Use resetCallHist on page 670 to reset the call log statictics.

stopActiveCallLog

resetCallHist resetCallHist
This command resets the active facility snap shot log and stops the logActiveCalls command. All of the ACM counters are set to zero.

Prerequisites
Log the active calls, see logActiveCalls on page 670

670

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Active Call Measurements

DS1 Monitoring
DS1 monitoring tracks the status of spans by collecting data from the spans drivers per ANSI T1.231. The T7000 gathers, reports, and thresholds performance data from the spans. A line is a DS1 that connects the T7000 to another network element. A path is a DS1 that passes through at least one other network element and connects the T7000 to another switch. The following types of performance date are collected
Table 1: DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters fc cvl Failure Count, the number of the occurrences of near- and far-end path failure events Code Violation - Line, the number of both bipolar violations (BPVs) and excessive zeros (EXZs) occurring over the period. An EXZ increments the CVL by one regardless of the length of the zero string. For a B8ZS signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded from the count. This counter is subject to inhibiting. Inhibiting is when there is an overriding condition that prevents events from being counted. Errored Second-Line, the number of one-second intervals with one or more BPVs, EXZs, or LOS defects. For a B8ZS-coded signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded. Severely Errored Second Line, the number of one-second intervals with 1544 or more BPVs plus EXZs, or one or more LOS defects. For a B8ZS-coded signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded Loss Second Line: The number of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects. Severely Errored Frame/Alarm Indication Signal (SEF/AIS) Second-Path, the number of one-second intervals containing one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects. This counter is subject to inhibiting. Alarm Indicator Signals Second-Path, the number of one-second intervals containing one or more AIS defects. An AIS defect is a signal that indicates serious impairments, such as upstream failure events. This counter is subject to inhibiting.

esl sesl

lossl sasp

aissp

sefsp or Severely Errored Framing Seconds, the number of one-second performance report message (PRM) sefs intervals containing an severely errored frame (SE) = 1. This counter is subject to inhibiting. cvp Code Violation: The number of frame synchronization bit errors in the SF format or the count of cyclic redundancy check (CRC-6) errors in the ESF format occurring during the accumulation period. This counter is subject to inhibiting. Errored Second Type B: this counter only applies to DS1 ESF paths. It is a count of one-second intervals between 2 and 319 CRC-6 errors, no SEF defects, and no AIS defects. This counter is subject to inhibiting Controlled Slip Second-Path: The number of one-second intervals containing one or more controlled slips. Counts of controlled slips are accurately made in the path terminating network element of the DS1 signal, where the controlled slip takes place. A controlled slip indicates a synchronization problem in DS1 paths. A controlled slip does not cause an out-of-frame event. This counter is subject to inhibiting. Unavailable Second: The number of one-second intervals for which the DS1 path is unavailable. The DS1 path becomes unavailable at the onset of 10 contiguous severely errored seconds (SESs). The 10 SESs are included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS1 path becomes available at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SESs. The 10 seconds with no SESs are excluded from unavailable time. Some counts are inhibited during unavailability All of the above counters

esbp

cssp

uasp

all

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

671

Active Call Measurements

To provision DS1 performance monitoring use the following process:

Step
1

Action Set up the DS1 performance monitoring using the following: setPMTime on page 673 to set the DS1 monitoring time suppressTCA15 on page 674 or unsuppressTCA15 on page 674 to configure the frequency of Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) setTCA15 on page 675 and setTCA24 on page 676 to configure the 15minute and 24-hour threshold levels.

Enable TCA reporting for a span using startTCA15 on page 677 and startTCA24 on page 678. Turn on the DS1 monitoring display using setPMDisplayOn on page 679. Start DS1 performance monitoring on an oid using startPM on page 680. Wait for TCA alarms/events or refer to the status of an oid. getPMStatus on page 681 to view general status getPMCurrent on page 682 to view all intervals getPMInterval on page 683 to view a specific interval

3 4 5

NOTE: The Threshold15Min and Threshold24Hour alarms create a current alarm when a threshold is passed.

Performance Monitoring Maintenance

Use the following commands for DS1 performance monitoring maintenance:

To turn off the TCA use stopTCA15 on page 677 and stopTCA24 on page
678.

To turn off the DS1 performance monitoring use stopPM on page 680 and
setPMDisplayOff on page 679

To restart DS1 performance monitoring use:

resetPMCurrent on page 687 resetPMSummary on page 688 resetPMIntervals on page 687

672

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Active Call Measurements

setPMTime
setPMTime <oid> <timeval>
This command sets the DS1 performance monitoring line time for a span. Use this command to set the performance monitoring time on a span to a value that matches the T7000s time.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. <timeval> The line time in seconds, from 0 to 86,399 (zero-based). This value is the timestamp on the DS1 monitoring output. There are 3,600 seconds for each hour period. For example, 2:00 am is 7200 and 11:00 pm is 82000. Note: Enter the value in parenthesis to use a decimal value.

To set the line time on Span-1 to 3:00 AM enter:

setPMTime Span-1 (10800)

NOTE: If the PM time is not set, the T7000 collects the data as normal, but the 15-minute interval does not match the T7000 time.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

673

Active Call Measurements

suppressTCA15 suppressTCA15 <oid> [nefe]

This command suppresses multiple 15-minute Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) by span. This restricts the T7000 to delivering only one TCA when the threshold is passed per 15-minute period. The default setting is unsuppressed.
NOTE: There is no command to suppress TCAs for a 24-hour period.

Syntax <oid>

Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

[nefe]

Enter one of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). NOTE: If omitted, the default is ne.

suppressTCA15 Span-1

unsuppressTCA15 unsuppressTCA15 <oid> [nefe]

This command allows multiple 15-minute TCAs by span. This allows the T7000 to deliver a TCA when the threshold is passed and for each count above the threshold, per 15-minute period. The default setting is unsuppressed.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. [nefe] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). NOTE: If omitted, the default is ne.

unsuppressTCA15 Span-1

674

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Active Call Measurements

setTCA15
setTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> <value> [nefe]
This command sets 15-minute threshold values for a span and DS1 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. <pmtype> <value> See DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 671. Decimal value of the threshold: fc 1 cvl 13340 esl 65 sesl 10 lossl 1 sasp 2 aissp 1 sefsp or sefs 1 cvp 72 esp 65 esap 13296 esbp 1 sesp 10 cssp 1 usap 10 [nefe] Enter one of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

setTCA15 Span-1 cvl 13000

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

675

Active Call Measurements

setTCA24
setTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> <value> [nefe]
This command sets 24-hour threshold values for a span and DS1 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. <pmtype> <value> See DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 671. Decimal value of the threshold: fc 1 cvl 133400 esl 648 sesl 100 lossl 1 sasp 17 aissp 1 sefsp or sefs 1 cvp 691 esp 648 esap 132960 esbp 1 sesp 100 cssp 4 usap 10 [nefe] Enter one of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

setTCA24 Span-1 cvl 130000

676

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Active Call Measurements

startTCA15
startTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]
This command enables the T7000 to send the 15-minute TCAs for a specific span and DS1 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. <pmtype> [nefe] See DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 671. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

startTCA15 Span-1 cvl

stopTCA15
stopTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]
This command disables 15-minute TCAs for a specific span and DS1 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. <pmtype> [nefe] See DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 671. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

stopTCA15 Span-1 cvl

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

677

Active Call Measurements

startTCA24
startTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]
This command enables the T7000 to send the 24-hour TCAs for a specific span and DS1 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. <pmtype> [nefe] See DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 671. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

startTCA24 Span-1 all

stopTCA24
stopTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]
This command disables 24-hour TCAs for a specific span and DS1 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. <pmtype> [nefe] See DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 671. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

stopTCA24 Span-1 all

678

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Active Call Measurements

setPMDisplayOn setPMDisplayOn
This command enables event display for DS1 (and DS3) performance monitoring. Use this command to view DS1 performance monitoring events for all spans. The events include:

Indication that a 15-minute interval completes on an span. A 15-minute TCA is issued. A 24-hour TCA was issued.

setPMDisplayOff setPMDisplayOff
This command disables event display for DS1 (and DS3) performance monitoring.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

679

Active Call Measurements

startPM
startPM <oid | allspans>
This command starts DS1 performance monitoring for a span, or for all spans on the card.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

allspans

This parameter is used to start Performance Monitoring on all DS1s on all spans on the card.

startPM Span-0

stopPM
stopPM <oid | allspans>
This command stops DS1 performance monitoring for a span, or for all spans on the card.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

allspans

This parameter is used to start Performance Monitoring on all DS1s on all spans on the card.

stopPM Span-0

680

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Active Call Measurements

getPMStatus getPMStatus <oid> [nefe>]

This command shows the DS1 performance monitoring status for a span.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. [<nefe>] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

This command displays the following:

LINE the span number on the card INIT the DS1 performance monitoring availability, 1=available 0=not

available
ENAB the state of performance monitoring, 1=enabled 0=disabled INTVLS the number of 15-minute intervals collected, from 0 to 196 or

48 hours of intervals
PMTIME the current line time in seconds SUP15 the status of for TCA suppression, 0=not surpressed,

1=surpressed

getPMStatus getPMStatus: T1.231 Performance Monitor Status: LINE INIT ENAB INTVLS PMTIME SUP15 0 1 0 0 8452 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 4 1 0 0 0 0

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

681

Active Call Measurements

getPMCurrent getPMCurrent [<oid> [<nefe>]]

This command shows the current DS1 monitoring statistics. If no parameters are entered, all DS1 span status is displayed

Prerequisites

Set the DS1 monitoring time, see setPMTime on page 673 Enable TCA reporting for a span using startTCA15 on page 677 and
startTCA24 on page 678.

Start DS1 performance monitoring on an oid using startPM on page 680.

Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. [nefe] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

getPMCurrent Span-1
The following defines the output for this command. Values that are not available show -----:

cur15 current 15-minute interval results lastInt last 15-minute interval results Sum24 summary of the most recent 24-hour period last24 summary of the previous 24-hour period before sum24 Today counts since the 00 time or midnight Yesterday counts from the last period of 24-hours timeSt the time stamp of line time in seconds vsecs valid seconds invData the invalid data flag that identifies any >10 second gap in data, 1 = invaild data and 0 = valid data dsecs same as valid seconds

NOTE: The time for determining today and yesterday is based on line time, not the system time. Line time ranges from 0 to 86,399. To synchronize the line time with the T7000s time see setPMTime on page 673.

682

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Active Call Measurements

getPMInterval getPMInterval <oid> <intervalN> [nefe]

This command shows the current interval, the previous interval, the requested interval, and the next interval after the requested interval. Use this command to view a specific interval in the past.

Prerequisites

Set the DS1 monitoring time, see setPMTime on page 673 Enable TCA reporting for a span using startTCA15 on page 677 and
startTCA24 on page 678.

Turn on the DS1 monitoring display using setPMDisplayOn on page 679. Start DS1 performance monitoring on an oid using startPM on page 680.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. <intervalN> The number of the interval that you want to view. There are 192 intervals in 48 hours, one for every 15-minutes. Interval 0 is the current interval and interval 1 is the last completed interval. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

[nefe]

The following defines the output for this command. Values that are not available show -----.

cur15 current 15-minute interval results Prev # the previous interval and number of the interval before the

requested interval
Int # the requested interval and its number Next # the next interval after the requested interval timeSt the time stamp of line time in seconds vsecs valid seconds invData the invalid data flag that identifies any >10 second gap in data,

1 = invaild data and 0 = valid data

dsecs same as valid seconds getPMInterval Span-0 1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

683

Active Call Measurements

T1.231 DS1 Performance Monitor Interval Data Near End: Line 0 Valid Intervals 1 currentLineTime 52721 timeSt vsecs invDat dsec fc esl sesl lossl sasp aissp sefsp cvp esp esap esbp sesp cssp uasp cur15 52200 521 0 521 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Prev 0 52200 521 0 521 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Int 1 52132 68 1 68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Next ------------------------------------------------------------------------2 sum24 52132 68 3 68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 last24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Counters

684

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Active Call Measurements

getPMTCA
getPMTCA <oid> [<nefe]
This command shows the current intervals, thresholds, and TCAs.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. [nefe] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

The following results show the current TCA count (cur15), the threshold level for 15-minutes (thresh15), the count of TCAs sent (notify15), and the corresponding information for 24-hours.

getPMTCA Span-1 T1.231 DS1 Performance Monitor Interval Data Near End: Line 1 Valid Intervals 0 currentLineTime 0 TCA15 not suppressed cur15 thresh15 notify15 sum24 thresh24 notify24 timeSt ----0 0 ----0 0 vsecs ----0 0 ----0 0 invDat ----0 0 ----0 0 dsec ----0 0 ----0 0 fc -----1 0 -----1 0 cvl -----13340 0 ----- -133400 0 esl -----65 0 -----648 0 sesl -----10 0 -----100 0 lossl -----1 0 -----1 0 sasp -----2 0 -----17 0 aissp -----1 0 -----1 0 sefsp -----1 0 -----1 0 cvp -----72 0 -----691 0 esp -----65 0 -----648 0 esap -----1 0 -----1 0 esbp -----1 0 -----1 0 sesp -----10 0 -----100 0 cssp -----1 0 -----4 0
uasp -----10 0 -----10 0

Counters

NOTE: Threshold values appear as negative values, if TCA is not enable for a counter.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

685

Active Call Measurements

setTCADefaults setTCADefaults <oid> [nefe]

This command sets all the thresholds to their default values by span. The default threshold levels are industry standards.
Counter ffc cvl esl sesl lossl sasp aissp sefsp cvp esp esap esbp sesp cssp usap Failure Count Code Violation-Line Errored Second-Line Severely Errored Second Line Loss Second SEF/AIS Second-Path AIS Second-Path Severely Errored Framing Seconds Code Violation Errored Second Errored Second Type A Errored Second Type B Severely Errored Second Controlled Slip Second-Path Unavailable Second Syntax <oid> Name 1 13,340 65 10 1 2 1 1 SF=72 ESF=13,296 65 13,296 1 10 1 10 Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. [nefe] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne. 15-minute Threshold 1 133,400 648 100 1 17 1 1 SF=691 ESF132,960 648 132,960 1 100 4 10 24-hour Threshold

setTCADefaults Span-1

686

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Active Call Measurements

resetPMIntervals resetPMIntervals <oid> [nefe]

This command resets all intervals for an oid, including the following intervals:

cur15 current 15-minute interval results lastInt last 15-minute interval results Sum24 summary of the most recent 24-hour period last24 summary of the previous 24-hour period before sum24 Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. [nefe] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

resetPMIntervals Span-1

resetPMCurrent resetPMCurrent <oid> [<pmtype> [nefe]]

This command resets the current 15-minute interval to zero. If pmtype and nefe are not entered, pmtype defaults to all and nefe defaults to ne.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. <pmtype> [nefe] See DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 671. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

resetPMCurrent Span-1 all

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

687

Active Call Measurements

resetPMSummary resetPMSummary <oid> [<pmtype>] [nefe]]

This command resets the Sum24 interval of the DS1 performance monitoring display. If pmtype and nefe are not entered, pmtype defaults to all and nefe defaults to ne.
Syntax <oid> Description Span Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span. <pmtype> [<nefe>] See DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 671. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

resetPMSummary Span-1 all resetPMSummary Span-1 cvl

688

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

DS3 Monitoring

DS3 Monitoring
DS3 monitoring consists of counters that monitor the condition of in-service DS3s processing call traffic, per ANSI T1.231. DS3 counters determine the local status of DS3 lines and paths by collecting data from the spans driver. A line is a DS3 that connects the T7000 to another network element. A path is a DS3 that passes through at least one other network element and connects the T7000 to another switch. The following types of performance date are collected:
Table 2: DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters fc cvl Failure Count, the number of the occurrences of near- and far-end path failure events. Code Violation-Line, the number of both bipolar violations (BPVs) and excessive zeros (EXZs) occurring over the period. An EXZ increments the CVL by one regardless of the length of the zero string. For a B8ZS signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded from the count. This counter is subject to inhibiting. Inhibiting is when there is an overriding condition that prevents events from being counted. Errored Second-Line, the number of one-second intervals with one or more BPVs, EXZs, or LOS defects. For a B8ZS-coded signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded. Severely Errored Second Line, the number of one-second intervals with 1544 or more BPVs plus EXZs, or one or more LOS defects. For a B8ZS-coded signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded Loss Second Line The number of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects. Severely Errored Frame/Alarm Indication Signal (SEF/AIS) Second-Path, the number of onesecond intervals containing one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects. This counter is subject to inhibiting. Alarm Indicator Signals Second-Path, the number of one-second intervals containing one or more AIS defects. An AIS defect is a signal that indicates serious impairments, such as upstream failure events. This counter is subject to inhibiting. Severely Errored Framing Seconds, the number of one-second performance report message (PRM) intervals containing an severely errored frame (SE) = 1. This counter is subject to inhibiting. Code Violation The number of frame synchronization bit errors in the SF format or the count of cyclic redundancy check (CRC-6) errors in the ESF format occurring during the accumulation period. This counter is subject to inhibiting. All of the above counters

esl sesl

lossl sasp

aissp

sefsp

cvp

all

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

689

DS3 Monitoring

Table 2: DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters esp Errored Second The number of one-second intervals, for DS3 ESF, containing any of the following: CRC-6 errors CS events SEF defects AIS defects The number of one-second intervals, DS3 SF, containing any of the following: FE errors CS events SEF defects AIS defects This counter is subject to inhibiting esap Errored Second Type A: this counter only applies to DS3 ESF paths. The number of one-second intervals with exactly one Cycle Redundancy Check (CRC)-6 error, and no severely errored frame (SEF) or AIS defects. This counter is subject to inhibiting Errored Second Type B: this counter only applies to DS3 ESF paths. It is a count of one-second intervals between 2 and 319 CRC-6 errors, no SEF defects, and no AIS defects. This counter is subject to inhibiting Severely Errored Second: this counter applies to both SF and ESF frame formats of DS3. ESF the number of one-second intervals with 320 or more CRC-6 errors, or one or more SEF or AIS defects. SF the number of one-second intervals with eight or more FE events, an SEF defect, or AIS defect. This counter is subject to inhibiting cssp Controlled Slip Second-Path: The number of one-second intervals containing one or more controlled slips. Counts of controlled slips are accurately made in the path terminating network element of the DS3 signal, where the controlled slip takes place. A controlled slip indicates a synchronization problem in DS3 paths. A controlled slip does not cause an out-of-frame event. This counter is subject to inhibiting Unavailable Second: The number of one-second intervals for which the DS3 path is unavailable. The DS3 path becomes unavailable at the onset of 10 contiguous severely errored seconds (SESs). The 10 SESs are included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS3 path becomes available at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SESs. The 10 seconds with no SESs are excluded from unavailable time. Some counts are inhibited during unavailability

esbp

sesp

uasp

690

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

DS3 Monitoring

To provision DS3 performance monitoring use the following process:

Step
1

Action Set up the DS3 performance monitoring using the following: setPMTime on page 692 to set the DS3 monitoring time suppressTCA15 on page 693 or unsuppressTCA15 on page 693 to configure the frequency of Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) setTCA15 on page 694 and setTCA24 on page 695 to configure the 15-minute and 24-hour threshold levels.

Enable TCA reporting for a span using startTCA15 on page 695 and startTCA24 on page 696. Turn on the DS3 monitoring display using setPMDisplayOn on page 697. Start DS3 performance monitoring on an oid using startPM on page 698. Wait for TCA alarms/events or refer to the status of an oid. getPMStatus on page 699 to view general status getPMCurrent on page 700 to view all intervals getPMInterval on page 701 to view a specific interval

NOTE: NOTE: The Threshold15MinDS3 and Threshold24HourDS3 alarms create a alarm when a threshold is passed.

Performance Monitoring Maintenance

Use the following commands for DS3 performance monitoring maintenance:

To turn off the stopTCA15 on page 696 and stopTCA24 on page 697. To turn off the DS3 performance monitoring use stopPM on page 698 and
setPMDisplayOff on page 679

To restart DS3 performance monitoring use:

resetPMCurrent on page 687 resetPMSummary on page 688 resetPMIntervals on page 705

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

691

DS3 Monitoring

setPMTime
setPMTime <oid> <timeval>
This command sets the DS3 performance monitoring line time for a DS3. Use this command to set the performance monitoring time on a DS3 to a value that matches the T7000s time.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. <timeval> The line time in seconds, from 0 to 86,399 (zero-based). This value is the timestamp on the DS3 monitoring output. There are 3,600 seconds for each hour period. For example, 2:00 am is 7200 and 11:00 pm is 82000. Note: Enter the value in parenthesis to use a decimal value.

To set the line time on DS3 line 1 to 3:00 AM enter:

setPMTime DS3-1 (10800)

NOTE: If the PM time is not set, the T7000 collects the data as normal, but the 15-minute interval does not match the T7000 time.

692

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

DS3 Monitoring

suppressTCA15 suppressTCA15 <oid> [nefe]

This command suppresses multiple 15-minute Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) by DS3. This restricts the T7000 to delivering only one TCA when the threshold is passed per 15-minute period. The default setting is unsuppressed.
NOTE: There is not a command to suppress TCAs for a 24-hour period.

Syntax <oid>

Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

[nefe]

Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

suppressTCA15 DS3-1

unsuppressTCA15 unsuppressTCA15 <oid> [nefe]

This command allows multiple 15-minute TCAs by DS3. This allows the T7000 to deliver a TCA when the threshold is passed and for each count above the threshold, per 15-minute period. The default setting is unsuppressed.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. [nefe] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

unsuppressTCA15 DS3Line-1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

693

DS3 Monitoring

setTCA15
setTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> <value> [<nefe>]
This command sets 15-minute threshold values for a DS3 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. <pmtype> <value> See DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 689. Decimal value of the threshold: fc 1 cvl 13340 esl 65 sesl 10 lossl 1 sasp 2 aissp 1 sefs 1 cvp 72 esp 65 esap 13296 esbp 1 sesp 10 cssp 1 usap 10 [<nefe>] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

setTCA15 DS3-1 cvl 13000

694

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

DS3 Monitoring

setTCA24
setTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> <value> [nefe]
This command sets 24-hour threshold values for a DS3 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. <pmtype> [nefe] See DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 689. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

setTCA24 DS3-1 cvl 130000

startTCA15
startTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]
This command enables the T7000 to send the 15-minute TCAs for a DS3 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. <pmtype> [nefe] See DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 689. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

startTCA15 DS3-1 cvl

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

695

DS3 Monitoring

stopTCA15
stopTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]
This command disables 15-minute TCAs for a DS3 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. <pmtype> [nefe] See DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 689. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

stopTCA15 DS3-1 cvl

startTCA24
startTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]
This command enables the T7000 to send the 24-hour TCAs for a DS3 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. <pmtype> [nefe] See DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 689. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

startTCA24 DS3-1 all

696

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

DS3 Monitoring

stopTCA24
stopTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]
This command disables 24-hour TCAs for a DS3 monitoring counter.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. <pmtype> [<nefe>] See DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 689. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

stopTCA24 DS3-1 all

setPMDisplayOn setPMDisplayOn
This command enables event display for DS3 (and DS1) performance monitoring. Use this command to view DS3 performance monitoring events for all DS3s. The events include:

Indication that a 15-minute interval completes on a DS3. A 15-minute TCA is issued. A 24-hour TCA was issued.

setPMDisplayOff setPMDisplayOff
This command disables event display for DS3 (and DS1) performance monitoring.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

697

DS3 Monitoring

startPM
startPM <oid>
This command starts DS3 performance monitoring.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

startPM DS3-0

stopPM
stopPM <oid>
This command stops DS3 performance monitoring.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

stopPM DS3-0

698

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

DS3 Monitoring

getPMStatus getPMStatus <oid> [nefe]

This command shows the DS3 performance monitoring status.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. [nefe] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

This command displays the following:

LINE the DS3 number on the card INIT the DS3 performance monitoring availability, 1=available 0=not

available
ENAB the state of performance monitoring, 1=enabled 0=disabled INTVLS the number of 15-minute intervals collected, from 0 to 196 or

48 hours of intervals
PMTIME the current line time in seconds SUP15 the status of for TCA suppression, 0=not surpressed,

1=surpressed

getPMStatus getPMStatus: T1.231 Performance Monitor Status: LINE INIT ENAB INTVLS PMTIME 0 1 0 0 8452 1 1 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 4 1 0 0 0

SUP15 0 0 0 0 0

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

699

DS3 Monitoring

getPMCurrent getPMCurrent <oid> [nefe]

This command shows the current DS3 monitoring statistics. The time for determining today and yesterday is based on line time, not the system time. Line time ranges from 0 to 86,399. To synchronize the line time with the T7000s time
see setPMTime on page 673.

Prerequisites

Set the DS3 monitoring time, see setPMTime on page 673 Enable TCA reporting for a DS3 using startTCA15 on page 677 and startTCA24 on page 678. Start DS3 performance monitoring on an oid using startPM on page 680.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. [nefe] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

getPMCurrent DS3-1
The following defines the output for this command. Values that are not available show -----:

cur15 current 15-minute interval results lastInt last 15-minute interval results Sum24 summary of the most recent 24-hour period last24 summary of the previous 24-hour period before sum24 Today counts since the 00 time or midnight Yesterday counts from the last period of 24-hours timeSt the time stamp of line time in seconds vsecs valid seconds invData the invalid data flag that identifies any >10 second gap in data,

1 = invaild data and 0 = valid data

dsecs same as valid seconds

700

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

DS3 Monitoring

getPMInterval getPMInterval <oid> <intervalN> [nefe]

This command shows the current interval, the previous interval, the requested interval, and the next interval after the requested interval. Use this command to view a specific interval in the past.

Prerequisites

Set the DS3 monitoring time, see setPMTime on page 673 Enable TCA reporting for a DS3 using startTCA15 on page 677 and
startTCA24 on page 678.

Turn on the DS3 monitoring display using setPMDisplayOn on page 679. Start DS3 performance monitoring on an oid using startPM on page 680.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. <intervalN> The number of the interval that you want to view. There are 192 intervals in 48 hours, one for every 15-minutes. Interval 0 is the current interval and interval 1 is the last completed interval. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

[nefe]

The following defines the output for this command. Values that are not available show -----.

cur15 current 15-minute interval results Prev # the previous interval and number of the interval before the

requested interval
Int # the requested interval and its number Next # the next interval after the requested interval timeSt the time stamp of line time in seconds vsecs valid seconds invData the invalid data flag that identifies any >10 second gap in data,

1 = invaild data and 0 = valid data

dsecs same as valid seconds

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

701

DS3 Monitoring

getPMInterval DS3-0 1 T1.231 DS3 Performance Monitor Interval Data Near End: Line 0 Valid Intervals 1 currentLineTime 52721 timeSt vsecs invDat dsec fc esl sesl lossl sasp aissp sefsp cvp esp esap esbp sesp cssp uasp cur15 52200 521 0 521 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Prev 0 52200 521 0 521 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Int 1 52132 68 1 68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Next ------------------------------------------------------------------------2 sum24 52132 68 3 68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 last24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Counters

702

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

DS3 Monitoring

getPMTCA
getPMTCA <oid> [nefe]
This command shows the current intervals, thresholds, and TCAs.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. [nefe] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

The following results show the current TCA count (cur15), the threshold level for 15-minutes (thresh15), the count of TCAs sent (notify15), and the corresponding information for 24-hours.

getPMTCA DS3-1 T1.231 DS3 Performance Monitor Interval Data Near End: Line 1 Valid Intervals 0 currentLineTime 0 TCA15 not suppressed timeSt vsecs invDat dsec fc cvl esl sesl lossl sasp aissp sefsp cvp esp esap esbp sesp cssp uasp cur15 thresh15 notify15 sum24 thresh24 notify24 ----0 0 ----0 0 ----0 0 ----0 0 ----0 0 ----0 0 ----0 0 ----0 0 -----1 0 -----1 0 -----13340 0 ----- -133400 0 -----65 0 -----648 0 -----10 0 -----100 0 -----1 0 -----1 0 -----2 0 -----17 0 -----1 0 -----1 0 -----1 0 -----1 0 -----72 0 -----691 0 -----65 0 -----648 0 -----1 0 -----1 0 -----1 0 -----1 0 -----10 0 -----100 0 -----1 0 -----4 0 -----10 0 -----10 0

Counters

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

703

DS3 Monitoring

NOTE: Threshold values appear as negative values, if TCA is not enable for a counter.

setTCADefaults setTCADefaults <oid> [nefe]

This command sets all the thresholds to their default values by DS3. The default threshold levels are industry standards.
Counter fc cvl esl sesl lossl sasp aissp sefsp cvp esp esap esbp sesp cssp usap Failure Count Code Violation-Line Errored Second-Line Severely Errored Second Line Loss Second SEF/AIS Second-Path AIS Second-Path Severely Errored Framing Seconds Code Violation Errored Second Errored Second Type A Errored Second Type B Severely Errored Second Controlled Slip Second-Path Unavailable Second Syntax <oid> Name 1 13,340 65 10 1 2 1 1 SF=72 ESF=13,296 65 13,296 1 10 1 10 Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. [nefe] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne. 15-minute Threshold 1 133,400 648 100 1 17 1 1 SF=691 ESF132,960 648 132,960 1 100 4 10 24-hour Threshold

setTCADefaults DS3-1

704

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

DS3 Monitoring

resetPMIntervals resetPMIntervals <oid> [nefe]

This command resets all intervals for an oid, including the following intervals:

cur15 current 15-minute interval results lastInt last 15-minute interval results Sum24 summary of the most recent 24-hour period last24 summary of the previous 24-hour period before sum24 Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30. NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. [nefe] Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

resetPMIntervals DS3-1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

705

DS3 Monitoring

resetPMCurrent resetPMCurrent <oid> [<pmtype>] [nefe>]

This command resets the current 15-minute interval to zero. If pmtype and nefe are not entered, pmtype defaults to all and nefe defaults to ne
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. <pmtype> [nefe] See DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 689. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

resetPMCurrent DS3-1 all resetPMCurrent DS3-1 cvp

706

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

DS3 Monitoring

resetPMSummary resetPMSummary <oid> [<pmtype>] [nefe]]

This command resets the Sum24 interval of the DS3 performance monitoring display.
Syntax <oid> Description DS3 Object Identifier see OID on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line. <pmtype> [nefe] See DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters on page 689. Enter either of the following: ne near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000 fe far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

resetPMSummary DS3-1 all resetPMSummary DS3-1 cvl

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

707

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

Description
Peg counts and usage intervals use the same set of commands for provisioning.

Peg Counts
Peg counts count facility events relative to the following:

T7000 Call Model Usage of SS7 links or link sets by MTP levels 1 - 3, per SS7 route, per SCCP, or per PC and SSN combination. Message Signal Units (MSUs) received/transmitted

These measurements are a subset of the measurements defined in Section 4 of Telcordias GR-478 that are applicable to an SSP.

Usage Intervals
Usage Intervals track usage of SS7 links or link sets by MTP level 2, level 3, and SCCP TCAP. These measurements are a subset of the SS7 Measurements defined in Section 4 of Telcordias GR-478 that are applicable to an SSP.

Using Counters
Counters manage peg counts or usage intervals.

Identify the counter you want to provision using queryCounterDefs on

page 714.

Enable and disable the counter using enableCounter on page 715 and
disableCounter on page 716

View the output of the counter using queryCounters on page 718 or

queryCounter on page 719.

708

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

Well Known Peg and Usage Counter Process IDs

The following table lists the well known Process IDs (PIDs) on the T7000 that use peg and usage counters.
Table 3: Peg and Usage Counter PIDs Process ID 38 3a 3b 3e 3f MTP Level 1 MTP Level 2 MTP Level 3 SCCP TCAP Call Processing Process Name

MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters Tip

Always enter a Peg or Usage counters name enclosed in quotes.

The following table lists the MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters.

Table 4: MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters Name Data Transmitted on a link SNMP Description total MSUs MSUOctets LSSUs transmitted on an outgoing link Counter Type Peg

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

709

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters Tip

Always enter a Peg or Usage counters name enclosed in quotes.

The following table lists the MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters.

Table 5: MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters Name Congestion Discard Events by Discard Level Congestion MSUs Discarded by priority Data Received on a link Data Retransmitted on a link Duration of Receipt of SIB Duration of Signaling Link Congestion by congestion level Duration of Transmitting of SIB Signaling Link Congestion Events by congestion level Signaling Link RX Congestion Events RX Congestion Discard Events SNMP Description Total Congestion Discard Events by Discard Level Total Congestion MSUs Discarded by priority Total MSUs MSUOctets or LSSUs received on an incoming link Total MSUs MSUOctets retransmitted on an outgoing link Duration of the Receipt of Busy Link Status Unit Duration of Signaling Link Congestion by congestion level Duration of the Transmitting of Busy Link Status Unit Total Signaling Link Congestion Events by congestion level Total Signaling Link RX Congestion Events Total RX Congestion Discard Events Counter Type Peg Peg Peg Peg Usage Usage

Usage Peg Peg Peg

710

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters Tip

Always enter a Peg or Usage counters name enclosed in quotes.

The following table lists the MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters.

Table 6: MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters Name MSUs Discarded of invalid DPC MSUs Discarded of invalid SIO MSUs Discarded due to congestion by priority Duration of Linkset Active Duration of Link unAvailable Duration of Link in Service Duration of Remote Processor Outage SRCT MSUs Transmitted per route RSR MSUs Transmitted per route RSP MSUs Transmitted per route TFA MSUs Received per route TFC MSUs Received per route TFP MSUs Received per route TFR MSUs Received per route' SLTM Received on a link SLTA Received on a link UPU MSUs Received SNMP Description total MSUs Discarded of invalid DPC total MSUs Discarded of invalid SIO total MSUs Discard due to congestion by priority 0,1,2 and 3 Duration of Link set Active (at least on link is in operation) Duration of Link unAvailable Duration of Link Service in L2 Duration of Remote Processor Outage total Signalling Route Set Congestion Test MSUs Transmitted per route total Restricted Signalling Route Set test MSUs Transmitted per route total Prohibited Signalling Route Set test MSUs Transmitted per route total Transfer Allowed MSUs Received per route total Transfer Controlled MSUs Received per route total Transfer Prohibited MSUs Received per route total Transfer Restricted MSUs Received per route total SLTM Received on an incoming link total SLTA Received on an incoming link total User Part Unavailable MSUs Received Counter Type Peg Peg Peg Usage Usage Usage Usage Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

711

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters Tip

Always enter a Peg or Usage counters name enclosed in quotes.

The following table lists the SCCP and TCAP Peg and Usage Counters.

Table 7: SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters Name SSA MSUs Received SSP MSUs Received ST MSUs Received SSA MSUs Transmitted SSP MSUs Transmitted MSUs Rejected with invalid APC/SSN SST MSUs Transmitted SNMP Description total Subsystem Allowed MSUs Received total Subsystem Prohibited MSUs Received total Subsystem Test MSUs Received total Subsystem Allowed MSUs Transmitted total Subsystem Prohibited MSUs Transmitted total invalid affected PC/SSN received total Subsystem Test MSUs Transmitted Counter Type Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg

712

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters Tip

Always enter a Peg or Usage counters name enclosed in quotes.

The following table lists the Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters.

Table 8: Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters Name Call Attempts Collect Digits Attempts Call Completion Attempts Terminating Calls Answered Routing Failures Line Busy Originating Calls Abandoned Terminating Calls Ring No Answer Protocol errors not associated with a call SNMP Description Call Attempts Collect Digits Attempts Call Completion Attempts Total Terminating Calls Answered Routing Failures Line Busy Total Originating Calls Abandoned Terminating Calls Ring No Answer Protocol errors not associated with a call Counter Type Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg Peg

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

713

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

queryCounterDefs

Tip
To view the PIDs currently running on the T7000, see ps on page 605.

queryCounterDefs <pid>
This command shows the counter definitions for a given PID.
Syntax <pid> Description Process ID. See Peg and Usage Counter PIDs on page 709.

queryCounterDefs 38
NOTE: Output trimmed to conserve space

**** Counter Definition Named (Data Transmitted on a link) ***** Type: (PEG COUNTER) Message: (Mtp1Transmit) Category: (0x1) Default State: (ENABLED) Current State: (ENABLED) Dimension: (3) Threshold (Low): (0) Threshold EventID (Low): (0x0) Threshold (Med): (0) Threshold EventID (Med): (0x0) Threshold (High): (0) Threshold EventID (High): (0x0) Dimensioned Counter Names: (MSUs) (MSUOctets) (LSSUs) Internal Peg Index: (0) Counter ID: (0) Peg Function: (_Mtp1Sm+0x74) FSM definition: (_Mtp1SmDef+0x0) Instance Type: (0x4)

714

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

enableCounter enableCounter <name> <pid> [card]

This command enables an individual counter. If card is omitted, the counter is enabled on all cards in the shelf
Syntax <name> name of counter For Call Processing counter names, see Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters on page 713. For MTP Level 1 counter names, see MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters on page 709. For MTP Level 2 counter names, see MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters on page 710. For MTP Level 3 counter names, see MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters on page 711. For SCCP/TCAP counter names, see SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters on page 712. <pid> <card> Process ID. See Peg and Usage Counter PIDs on page 709. card number. Range: 1 20 Description

enableCounter SSP MSUs Transmitted 3e 12

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

715

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

disableCounter disableCounter <name> <pid> [card]

This command disables an individual counter. If card is omitted, the counter is disabled on all cards in the shelf
Syntax <name> name of counter For Call Processing counter names, see Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters on page 713. For MTP Level 1 counter names, see MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters on page 709. For MTP Level 2 counter names, see MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters on page 710. For MTP Level 3 counter names, see MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters on page 711. For SCCP/TCAP counter names, see SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters on page 712. <pid> <card> Process ID. See Peg and Usage Counter PIDs on page 709. card number. Range: 1 20 Description

disableCounter SSP MSUs Transmitted 3e 12

716

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

queryCounterDef queryCounterDef <name> <pid> [usageState]

This command shows the definition of a single counter in a pid.
Syntax <name> name of counter For Call Processing counter names, see Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters on page 713. For MTP Level 1 counter names, see MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters on page 709. For MTP Level 2 counter names, see MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters on page 710. For MTP Level 3 counter names, see MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters on page 711. For SCCP/TCAP counter names, see SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters on page 712. <pid> [usageState] Process ID. See Peg and Usage Counter PIDs on page 709. Optional. For usage counters, the type of counter. START STOP Default is STOP. Description

queryCounterDef "SSP MSUs Transmitted" 3e **Counter Definition Named (SSP MSUs Transmitted** Type: (PEG COUNTER) Message: (Subsystem_Prohibited_Transmitted) Category: (0x6) Default State: (ENABLED) Current State: (ENABLED) Dimension: (1) Threshold (Low): (0) Threshold EventID (Low): (0x0) Threshold (Med): (0) Threshold EventID (Med): (0x0) Threshold (High): (0) Threshold EventID (High): (0x0) Internal Peg Index: (4) Counter ID: (4) Peg Function: (_defaultPeg+0x0) FSM definition: (_SCMGSmDef+0x0) Instance Type: (0x2)

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

717

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

queryCounters queryCounters <pid> [card] [NONZERO]

This command shows the current values of all the counters in the pid.
Syntax <pid> [card] Description Process ID. See Peg and Usage Counter PIDs on page 709. optional card number. Range: 1 20 Default is the slot number of the card where the command is input [NONZERO] optional, only shows counters that have a count that is not zero

queryCounters 3f 1 NONZERO Peg: (Originating Calls Abandoned) SM Instance (48). 1 Peg: (Total Registered Categories) SM Instance (0). 44 Peg: (Call Completion Attempts) SM Instance (48). 1 Peg: (Call Completion Attempts) SM Instance (77). 1 Peg: (Call Attempts) SM Instance (48). 1 Peg: (Call Attempts) SM Instance (58). 1 Peg: (Terminating Calls Ring No Answer) SM Instance (77). 1 Peg: (Collect Digits Attempts) SM Instance (48). 1 Peg: (Collect Digits Attempts) SM Instance (58). 1 Peg: (Total SM Instances In PID) SM Instance (0). 2259 Peg: (Terminating Calls Answered) SM Instance (48). 1

718

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

queryCounter queryCounter <name> <pid> [card] [instance]

This command shows the current values of a specific counter in the pid.
Syntax <name> name of counter For Call Processing counter names, see Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters on page 713. For MTP Level 1 counter names, see MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters on page 709. For MTP Level 2 counter names, see MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters on page 710. For MTP Level 3 counter names, see MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters on page 711. For SCCP/TCAP counter names, see SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters on page 712. <pid> [card] Process ID. See Peg and Usage Counter PIDs on page 709. optional card number. Range: 1 20 Default is the slot number of the card where the command is input [instance] optional, the number of the facility or device associated with the counter Description

queryCounter "SSA MSUs Received" 3e No counts for (SSA MSUs Received). Counter disabled or counts = 0.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Performance Monitoring

719

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

resetCounter resetCounter <name> <pid> [card] [instance]

This command resets a counter to zero.
Syntax <name> name of counter For Call Processing counter names, see Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters on page 713. For MTP Level 1 counter names, see MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters on page 709. For MTP Level 2 counter names, see MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters on page 710. For MTP Level 3 counter names, see MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters on page 711. For SCCP/TCAP counter names, see SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters on page 712. <pid> [card] Process ID. See Peg and Usage Counter PIDs on page 709. optional card number. Range: 1 20 Default is the slot number of the card where the command is input [instance] optional, the number of the facility or device associated with the counter Description

NOTE: For usage counters all of the instances are reset.

resetCounter "SSA MSUs Received" 3e

720

Performance Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Clock Cards
The commands in this chapter relate to T7000 timing.

8
Entering the command without any parameters defaults to a query. For example, the commands timeConfig and timeConfig query are equivalent Entering the command with a parameter of help displays the help string for the command For required parameters, enter the name of the parameter, =, and the value. For example, the date parameter requires a value, enter date=10/10/ 2007.

CC2
Use the commands in this section when directly connected to a CC2. Most CC2 commands follow a common syntax pattern;

NOTE: Options may be entered in any order.

If an optional parameter is omitted from a command, CC2 maintains the value currently associated with the parameter. For example, you may change the time without changing the date using the timeConfig command.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Clock Cards

721

CC2

mbusConfig (i) mbusConfig <help>

This command controls the functions of the CC2 and message bus.
Syntax <help> Description Shows the usage string for the command.

mbusConfig help Usage: mbusConfig [help] [query] [active=<a|b|ab>] [master=<a|b>] [autoadd = <a|b|ab|none>]

mbusConfig (ii) mbusConfig [query]

This command controls the functions of the CC2 and message bus.
Syntax [query] Description Shows the current status of each CC2 with its corresponding message bus. The query option is the default.

NOTE: In the query <*> identifies the master card and [] indicate to which you are connected.

mbusConfig Card/Msgbus ----------<*> [A] B

InSv ---Y Y

Auto-add -------Y Y

722

Clock Cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CC2

mbusConfig (iii) mbusConfig [active=<a | b | ab>] [master=<a | b>] [autoadd = <a | b | ab | none>]
This command controls the functions of the CC2 and message bus.
Syntax [active = <a | b | ab>] Description Controls which CC2s and message buses are in service. The purpose of this command is to prepare to remove or reboot a CC2. Both CC2s can not be out of service at the same time. a activates CC2 A b activates CC2 B ab activates both CC2s [master = <a | b>] Controls which CC2 is the master. Both cards can not be the master at the same time. a makes CC2 A the master. b makes CC2 B the master. [autoadd = <a | b | ab | none>] Configures auto-add state of a message bus. At least one message bus will be in service at all times, even if both are configured not to auto-add. Y the message bus is automatically activated when its CC2 is booted. N the message bus stays out of service when the associated CC2 boots.

mbusConfig active=a master=a autoadd=ab [Removing clock card B] --> shutting down message bus B [Removal complete] Settings updated. mbusConfig active=ab master=a autoadd=ab [Adding clock card B] --> starting up message bus B [Clock card addition complete] Settings updated.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Clock Cards

723

CC2

timeConfig (i) timeConfig <help>

This command is used to set the time and time zone on the master CC2 on the T7000.
Syntax <help> Description Shows the usage string for the command.

timeConfig help Usage: timeConfig [help] [query] [time=<hh:mm:ss>] [date=<mm/dd/yyyy>] [tz=<minutes vs. GMT>] [isdst=<y|n>]

timeConfig (ii) timeConfig [query]

This command is used to set the time and time zone on the master CC2 on the T7000.
Syntax [query] Description Shows the current time, date, and DST parameters provisioned on the T7000. The query option is assumed if no other option is specified.

timeConfig Current GMT time is 12:59:21 Tuesday, October 09, 2007. Current LOCAL time is 13:59:21 Tuesday, October 09, 2007. Local timezone is 0 minutes relative to GMT. DST is in effect. DST is enabled for the southern hemisphere using an absolute algorithm. Local time is moved back 1 hour at 21:00 on 1 February. Local time is moved ahead 1 hour at 05:00 on 1 July.

724

Clock Cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CC2

timeConfig (iii) timeConfig [time=<hh:mm:ss>] [date=<mm/dd/yyyy>] [tz=<minutes vs. GMT>] [isdst=<y | n>]
This command sets the time and time zone on the master CC2 on the T7000. Use local time in the 24-hour format, show whether DST is in effect.
Syntax [time=<hh:mm:ss>] Description Enter the time is in a 24 hour clock format with colons between entries: 00-24 hours 00-60 minutes 00-60 seconds [date=<mm/dd/ yyyy>] Enter the date value separated by forward slashes and in North American date format: 01-12 month (mm) 01-31 day (dd) #### year (yyyy) [tz=<minutes vs. GMT>] the difference (-720) to (840) between Greenwich Mean Time and the time zone of the T7000s location, for example -300 Eastern U.S. timezone -360 Central U.S. timezone -420 Mountain U.S. timezone -480 Pacific U.S. timezone NOTE: Use values based on the difference of local standard time versus GMT, do not adjust for DST. [isdst=<y | n>] Use one of the following: n Daylight saving time is not in effect y Daylight saving time is in effect

timeConfig time=17:37:00 date=6/19/2001 tz=-300 isdst=y Time set to 21:37:00 06/19/2001 GMT Settings updated. Current GMT time is 21:37:00 Tuesday, June 19, 2001. Current LOCAL time is 17:37:00 Tuesday, June 19, 2001. Local timezone is -300 minutes relative to GMT. DST is in effect. DST is enabled for the northern hemisphere using a relative algorithm. Local time is moved ahead 1 hour at 02:00 on the first Sunday in April. Local time is moved back 1 hour at 02:00 on the last Sunday in October.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Clock Cards

725

CC2

dstConfig (i)
dstConfig <help>
This command is used to set the rules for and enable daylight saving time (DST).
Syntax <help> Description Shows the usage string for the command.

dstConfig help Usage: dstConfig [help] [query] [enable|disable] [hemisphere=<n|s>] [h1hr=<hour>] [h2hr=<hour>] [h1date=<mm/dd>|<mm,weekno,weekday>] [h2date=<mm/dd>|<mm,weekno,weekday>]

dstConfig (ii) dstConfig [query]

This command is used to set the rules for and enable daylight saving time (DST).
Syntax [query] Description Shows the current time, date, and DST parameters provisioned on the T7000. The query option is assumed if no other option is specified.

dstConfig Current GMT time is 13:15:09 Tuesday, October 09, 2007. Current LOCAL time is 14:15:09 Tuesday, October 09, 2007. Local timezone is 0 minutes relative to GMT. DST is in effect. DST is enabled for the southern hemisphere using an absolute algorithm. Local time is moved back 1 hour at 21:00 on 1 February. Local time is moved ahead 1 hour at 05:00 on 1 July.

726

Clock Cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CC2

dstConfig (iii) dstConfig [enable | disable] [hemisphere=<n | s>] [h1hr=<hour>] [h2hr=<hour>] [h1date=<mm/dd> | <mm,weekno,weekday>] [h2date=<mm/dd> | <mm,weekno,weekday>]
This command sets the rules for and enable daylight saving time (DST). You can enabled or disabled DST apart from provisioning the rules or you can do it at once. There are two types of DST:

Absolute DST means you set the specific days and times at which the one-hour jumps forward and backward occur. Relative DST means you set the nth occurrences of weekdays in a month to be the days at which the one-hour forward and backward jumps occur. Absolute DST and relative DST are mutually exclusive and provisioning one will overwrite the other.
Syntax Description enable activates the DST rules disable deactivates the DST rules DST rules are disabled by default until provisioned and enabled. You can use the enable option in the same dstConfig command as the rules.

[enable | disable]

[hemisphere=<n | s>]

n Northern s Southern When northern hemisphere is specified, the first half date (h1date) is the spring forward date, and the second half date (h2date) as a fall back. For the southern hemisphere, these are reversed.

[h1hr=<hour>]

h1hr 0 - 23, the hour that the DST change occurs in first half of the year (January-June). NOTE: For U.S. DST rules this value should be 2, because the changeover occurs at 2:00 AM in the Spring.

[h2hr=<hour>]

h2hr 0 - 23, the hour that the DST change occurs in second half of the year (July-December). NOTE: For U.S. DST rules this value should be 2, because the changeover occurs at 2:00 AM in the Fall.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Clock Cards

727

CC2

Syntax [h1date=<mm/dd> | <mm,weekno,weekday>] [h2date=<mm/dd> | <mm,weekno,weekday>]

Description The dates have two options absolute and relative formats, for the first half of the year h1date and the second h2date. The formats for h1date and h2date must be the same. The absolute format is the absolute date: mm 1-6 for h1date and 7-12 for h2date dd 1-31 The relative format has three comma-separated entries: First entry the number of the month in which the change takes place. Second entry the week number of the month in which the change occurs (1 4 or 0 for the last week). Third entry the day of the week 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday

dstConfig enable hemisphere=s h1hr=3 h2hr=3 h1date=4/10 h2date=10/10

Relative for the first Sunday in April and last Sunday in October:
dstConfig enable hemisphere=n h1hr=2 h2hr=2 h1date=4,1,0 h2date=10,0,0 Settings updated. Current GMT time is 13:19:41 Tuesday, October 09, 2007. Current LOCAL time is 13:19:41 Tuesday, October 09, 2007. Local timezone is 0 minutes relative to GMT. DST is not in effect. DST is enabled for the northern hemisphere using a relative algorithm. Local time is moved ahead 1 hour at 02:00 on the first Sunday in April. Local time is moved back 1 hour at 02:00 on the last Sunday in October.

728

Clock Cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CC2

tdmConfig (i) tdmConfig <help>

This command is used to set the CC2 to generate timing from which the other cards on the T7000 synchronize.
Syntax <help> Description Shows the usage string for the command.

tdmConfig help Usage: tdmConfig [help] [query] [mode=<sonet|sdh>] [revertive=<y|n>] [src1=<null|net1|net2|bits1|bits2|sync1|sync2|comp1|comp2|10mhz>] [src2=<null|net1|net2|bits1|bits2|sync1|sync2|comp1|comp2|10mhz>] [src3=<null|net1|net2|bits1|bits2|sync1|sync2|comp1|comp2|10mhz>] [src4=<null|net1|net2|bits1|bits2|sync1|sync2|comp1|comp2|10mhz>] [output1=<off|regen|net1|net2>] [output2=<off|regen|net1|net2>] [net1freq=<t1e1|8khz>] [net2freq=<t1e1|8khz>] [freerun=<y|n>]

tdmConfig (ii) tdmConfig [query]

This command is used to set the CC2 to generate timing from which the other cards on the T7000 synchronize.
Syntax [query] Description Shows the current TDM status and configuration. The query option is assumed if no other option is specified.

NOTE: In the query <*> represents the reference currently selected and T identifies that an input is terminating.

tdmConfig query State = LOCKED Mode = SONET Src Selection = REVERTIVE <*> Primary Source Ref = NETREF 1 [GOOD] Secondary Source Ref = COMPOSITE 1 [GOOD] Tertiary Source Ref = BITS 2 [BAD] Network Ref 1 Freq = 1.544/2.048 MHz Network Ref 2 Freq = 1.544/2.048 MHz Clock Output 1: OFF Clock Output 2: OFF Forced Freerun (master only) = N ClkGood Enable = reflects clocks

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Clock Cards

729

CC2

tdmConfig (iii) tdmConfig [mode=<sonet | sdh>] [revertive=<y | n>] [src1=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>] [src2=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>] [src3=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>][src4=<null | net1 | net2 | | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>] [output1=<off | regen | net1 | net2>] [output2=<off | | net1 | net2>] [bits1term=<none | a | b | ab>] [bits2term=<none | a ab>] [sync1term=<none | a | b | ab>] [sync2term=<none | a ab>] [comp1term=<none | a | b | ab>] [comp2term=<none | a ab>] [net1freq=<t1e1 | 8khz>] [net2freq=<t1e1 | 8khz>] [freerun=<y | n>]

sync2 sync2 sync2 bits1 regen | b | | b | | b |

This command sets the CC2 to generate timing from which the other cards on the T7000 synchronize. This timing drives the cards Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) output on T1, DS3, and OC3 (future) trunks and across the midplane voice bus.

Tip
Put network timing references on two separate cards. If one card goes down, timing is derived from the reference on the alternate card.

This command allows for up to four source references for T7000 alignment and the two clock outputs. The source references are the following:

Primary Secondary Tertiary Quaternary

Set the clock reference after the OpenManager is installed and configured.
Syntax [mode=<sonet | sdh>] Description Specifies the timing mode of the T7000: sonet Synchronous Optical Network for North American networks sdh Synchronous Digital Hierarchy for European/international networks The T7000 cannot have a timing mode that is incompatible with any of the selected source references.

730

Clock Cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CC2

Syntax [revertive=<y | n>

Description 1 yes, causes the CC2 to always prefer the highest priority available timing reference, even if it has to switch away from another valid reference. 2 no or non-revertive mode makes the CC2 stay on a valid reference until it fails, regardless of priority.

[src1=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>] [src2=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>] [src3=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>] [src4=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>]

These are the four timing references (src1 - 4) of the T7000. Provision references in order from primary to quaternary. Provision the sources out of sequence is not allowed, for example if the primary (src1) source is null, the remaining sources can not be provisioned. null disables the source net1 a derived network reference provided to the CC2 by front cards in T7000 (1.544 MHz SONET/ 2.048 MHz SDH / 8 KHz) net2 another derived network reference, see net1 bits1 Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS) clocks are 1.544 MHz signals and use the timing from North America on T1s. A BITS clock connects to the mini DB9 connector. bits2 another BITs reference, see bits1 sync1 in SDH mode, BITS inputs are disallowed, and E1 sync pulse inputs are available. An E1 sync pulse clock is a 2.048 MHz signal on an E1 trunk. An E1 sync pulse clock connects to the mini DB9 connector. sync2 another E1 sync pulse clock, see sync1 comp1 a composite clock signal that is a bipolar clock signal that runs at 64 KHz. Embedded within the signal is a bipolar violation every 8 clocks or 64+8 KHz. Composite clocks connect to the CC2 though the mini DB9 connector, typically from a Global Positioning System (GPS) unit. comp2 another composite clock signal, see comp1 10mhz the 10 MHz sine wave that connects through the BNC connector

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Clock Cards

731

CC2

Syntax [output1 = <off | regen | net1 | net2>] [output2 = <off | regen | net1 | net2>]

Description Configures clock outputs on CLK I/O ports 1 and 2. off disables clock output, this is currently the only supported configuration regen uses DS1 BITS or E1 sync pulse clock when netref1 and netref2 are not available, this configuration is not supported net1 routes network reference 1 to the specified CLK I/O output (clock card 1 or clock card 2), this configuration is not supported net2 routes network reference 2 to the specified CLK I/O output (clock card 1 or clock card 2), this configuration is not supported

[bits1term = <none | a | b | ab>] [bits2term = <none | a | b | ab>]

Configures termination of the bits input on the CLK I/O port 1 (bits1term) or 2 (bits2term). none neither CC2 should terminate the bits input a terminate the bits input on CC2 A b terminate the bits input on CC2 B ab terminate the bits1 on both CC2s

[sync1term = <none | a | b | ab>] [sync2term = <none | a | b | ab>]

Configures termination of the sync input on the CLK I/O port 1 (sync1term) or 2 (sync2term). none neither CC2 should terminate the bits input a terminate the bits input on CC2 A b terminate the bits input on CC2 B ab terminate the bits1 on both CC2s

[comp1term = <none | a | b | ab>] [comp2term = <none | a | b | ab>]

Configures termination of the comp input on the CLK I/O port 1 (comp1term) or 2 (comp2term). none neither CC2 should terminate the bits input a terminate the bits input on CC2 A b terminate the bits input on CC2 B ab terminate the bits1 on both CC2s

[net1freq = <t1e1 | 8khz>] Configures the frequencies of network references 1 (net1freq) and 2 (net2freq). [net2freq = <t1e1 | 8khz>] t1e1 translates to 1.544 MHz in SONET mode and 2.048 MHz in SDH mode. 8khz tells the CC2 to expect network reference timing at a frequency of 8 KHz. Assumes that the front card is converting the rate before providing the reference to the CC2s.

732

Clock Cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CC2

Syntax [freerun = <y | n>]

Description Forces the master CC2 into freerun mode, this puts the T7000 into local timing mode. y puts the T7000 into freerun mode n the T7000 returns to timing from valid source references

tdmConfig freerun=y

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Clock Cards

733

CC2

bitsConfig (i) bitsConfig [help]

This command configures the BITS of the T1 framers that physically connect to the CC2 BITS1 and BITS2 connectors. Provision the BITS configuration when using a bits1 or bits2 as a TDM reference.
Syntax <help> Description Shows the usage string for the command.

bitsConfig help Usage: bitsConfig [help] [query] [bits1frame=<esf|d4>] [bits1line=<b8zs|ami>] [bits1lbo=<0|133|266|399|533|-7.5|-15|-22.5>] [bits2frame=<esf|d4>] [bits2line=<b8zs|ami>] [bits2lbo=<0|133|266|399|533|-7.5|-15|-22.5>]

bitsConfig (ii) bitsConfig [query]

This command configures the BITS of the T1 framers that physically connect to the CC2 BITS1 and BITS2 connectors. Provision the BITS configuration when using a bits1 or bits2 as a TDM reference.
Syntax [query] Description Shows the BITS configuration and alarm status.

bitsConfig query Frame format Line coding Line build out Alarm Status LOS LOF AIS BITS 1 ESF B8ZS 0-133 1 1 0 BITS 2 ESF B8ZS 0-133 1 1 0

734

Clock Cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CC2

bitsConfig (iii) bitsConfig [bits1frame=<esf | d4>] [bits1line=<b8zs | ami>] [bits1lbo=<0 | 133 | 266 | 399 | 533 | -7.5 | -15 | -22.5>] [bits2frame=<esf | d4>] [bits2line=<b8zs | ami>] [bits2lbo=<0 | 133 | 266 | 399 | 533 | -7.5 | -15 | -22.5>]
This command configures the BITS of the T1 framers that physically connect to the CC2 BITS1 and BITS2 connectors. Provision the BITS configuration when using a bits1 or bits2 as a TDM reference.
NOTE: The BITS configuration applies to the master and slave CC2.

Syntax [bits1frame=<esf | d4>] [bits2frame=<esf | d4>]

Description Configures the frame format for BITS 1 (bits1frame) or BITS 2 (bits2frame). esf Extended-Superframe format, default setting d4 Superframe format Configures the line coding format for BITS 1 (bits1line) or BITS 2 (bits2line). b8zs Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution, default setting ami Alternate Mark Inversion Configures the line build out for BITS 1 (bits1lbo) or BITS 2 (bits2lbo). 0 0-133 ft. or 0 dB 133 133-266 ft. 266 266-399 ft. 399 399-533 ft. 533 533-655 ft. -7.5 -7.5 dB -15 -15 dB -22.5 -22.5 dB

[bits1line=<b8zs | ami>] [bits2line=<b8zs | ami>]

[bits1lbo=<0 | 133 | 266 | 399 | 533 | -7.5 | -15 | -22.5>] [bits2lbo=<0 | 133 | 266 | 399 | 533 | -7.5 | -15 | -22.5>]

bitsConfig bits1frame=esf bits1line=b8zs bits1lbo=0 bits2frame=esf bits2line=b8zs bits2lbo=0

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Clock Cards

735

CC2

sysStatus
sysStatus
The command shows the state of all devices monitored by system audits. This command does not have parameters
sysStatus OCX Chassis Data -P/N: 893-0002-001 Rev: B00 S/N: S200150

Fuse status: OK Power board A status: OK Power board B status: OK Local Clock Good: Y Partner Clock Good: Y Current battery voltages: Va = 53.632v Vb = 0.000v Current board temperatures: Ta = 31.5 deg. C. Tb = 23.5 deg. C. Current fan speeds, temps, and states: Fan Speed(RPM) Fault? 1 2533 N 2 2607 N 3 2333 N 4 2440 N Override state: normal Inlet temp : 23.50 deg. C. Outlet temp 1: 27.02 deg. C. Outlet temp 2: 15.21 deg. C. status bit 1: 0 status bit 0: 0 overtemp?: N tray failure?: N

736

Clock Cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

CC2

testLEDs
testLEDs <1 | 0>
This command tests all LEDs and relays in the T7000. The LED test only tests the LEDs on the CC2 running the test and on the T7000 chassis.
Syntax <1 | 0> Description 1 to begin the LED test 0 to end the LED test

testLEDs 1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Clock Cards

737

CC2

738

Clock Cards

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering

Span and Trunk Numbering (Decimal)

A
sp 12/ 13 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 sp 13/ 14 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 sp 14/ 15 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 sp 15/ 16 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 369 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 sp 16/ 17 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 sp 17/ 18 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 sp 18/ 19 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 sp 19/ 20 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479

The following table lists which trunks (timeslots) belong to which spans. This table presents the information in decimal format.
sp 0/ 1 trunk 0 trunk 1 trunk 2 trunk 3 trunk 4 trunk 5 trunk 6 trunk 7 trunk 8 trunk 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 sp 1/ 2 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 sp 2/ 3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 sp 3/ 4 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 sp 4/ 5 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 sp 5/ 6 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 sp 6/ 7 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 sp 7/ 8 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 sp 8/ 9 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 sp 9/ 10 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 sp 10/ 11 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 sp 11/ 12 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287

trunk 10 10 trunk 11 11 trunk 12 12 trunk 13 13 trunk 14 14 trunk 15 15 trunk 16 16 trunk 17 17 trunk 18 18 trunk 19 19 trunk 20 20 trunk 21 21 trunk 22 22 trunk 23 23

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering

739

Span and Trunk Numbering (Hexadecimal)

Span and Trunk Numbering (Hexadecimal)

The following table lists which trunks (timeslots) belong to which spans. This table presents the information in hexadecimal format.
sp 0/ 1 trunk 0 trunk 1 trunk 2 trunk 3 trunk 4 trunk 5 trunk 6 trunk 7 trunk 8 trunk 9 trunk 10 trunk 11 trunk 12 trunk 13 trunk 14 trunk 15 trunk 16 trunk 17 trunk 18 trunk 19 trunk 20 trunk 21 trunk 22 trunk 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 sp 1/ 2 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F sp 2/ 3 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 sp 3/ 4 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F sp 4/ 5 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 sp 5/ 6 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F sp 6/ 7 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 sp 7/ 8 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF sp 8/ 9 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 sp 9/ 10 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF sp 10/ 11 F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 sp 11/ 12 108 109 10A 10B 10C 10D 10E 10F 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 11A 11B 11C 11D 11E 11F sp 12/ 13 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 12A 12B 12C 12D 12E 12F 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 sp 13 /14 138 139 13A 13B 13C 13D 13E 13F 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 14A 14B 14C 14D 14E 14F sp 14/ 15 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 15A 15B 15C 15D 15E 15F 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 sp 15 /16 168 169 16A 16B 16C 16D 16E 16F 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 17A 17B 17C 17D 17E 17F sp 16/ 17 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 18A 18B sp 17/ 18 198 199 19A 19B 19C 19D 19E 19F 1A0 1A1 1A2 1A3 sp 18/ 19 1B0 1B1 1B2 1B3 1B4 1B5 1B6 1B7 1B8 1B9 sp 19/ 20 1C8 1C9 1CA 1CB 1CC 1CD 1CE 1CF 1D0 1D1

1BA 1D2 1BB 1D3 1BC 1D4 1BD 1D5 1BE 1D6 1BF 1C0 1C1 1D7 1D8 1D9 1DA 1DB 1DC 1DD 1DE 1DF

18C 1A4 18D 1A5 18E 18F 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 1A6 1A7 1A8 1A9

1AA 1C2 1AB 1C3 1AC 1C4 1AD 1C5 1AE 1C6 1AF 1C7

740

Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Hexadecimal

Using Hexadecimal
Certain CLI parameters are entered in hexadecimal format. Use the hexadecimal charts or Hexadecimal Calculator on page 744 to convert decimal values to hexadecimal values and vice versa.

Hexadecimal Conversion Chart

Hexadecimal or hex is a number representation using the following:

0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
000 016 032 048 064 080 096 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240

Digits 0-9 with their usual meaning Letters A-F (or a-f) represent hexadecimal digits with values of (decimal) 10 to 15
3
003 019 035 051 067 083 099 115 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 243

1
001 017 033 049 065 081 097 113 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 241

2
002 018 034 050 066 082 098 114 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 242

4
004 020 036 052 068 084 100 116 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244

5
005 021 037 053 069 085 101 117 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245

6
006 022 038 054 070 086 102 118 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246

7
007 023 039 055 071 087 103 119 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247

8
008 024 040 056 072 088 104 120 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 248

9
009 025 041 057 073 089 105 121 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 249

A
010 026 042 058 074 090 106 122 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250

B
011 027 043 059 075 091 107 123 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251

C
012 028 044 060 076 092 108 124 140 156 172 188 204 220 236 252

D
013 029 045 061 077 093 109 125 141 157 173 189 205 221 237 253

E
014 030 046 062 078 094 110 126 142 158 174 190 206 222 238 254

F
015 031 047 063 079 095 111 127 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering

741

Using Hexadecimal

Hexadecimal ASCII Conversion Chart

0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI 1 DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN v CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US ( ) * + , _ . / ! " # $ % & 2 SP 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? 3 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 4 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ 5 ' a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o 6 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ DEL 7

742

Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Using Hexadecimal

Hexadecimal Line Numbering (for an LTC)

Line
Line-0 Line-1 Line-2 Line-3 Line-4 Line-5 Line-6 Line-7 Line-8 Line-9 Line-10 Line-11 Line-12 Line-13 Line-14 Line-15 Line-16 Line-17 Line-18 Line-19 Line-20 Line-21 Line-22 Line-23 Line-24 Line-25 Line-26 Line-27 Line-28 Line-29 Line-30 Line-31 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50

Hexadecimal Number

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering

743

Using Hexadecimal

Hexadecimal Calculator
Most Windows operating systems come with a calculator application. To use the calculator to determine hexadecimal values:
Step
1

Action From the Start button, select Programs > Accessories > Calculator. The calculator appears.

2 3 4 5

Select View>Scientific. Select Dec. Enter the decimal value to convert. For example, 154. Select Hex. The hexadecimal value appears. For example, 9A.

744

Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Appendix B: Protocols

This appendix gives a brief overview of various protocols supported by the switch.

Trunk Protocols
For complete details, see Appendix A of the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

FGC
The Feature Group C (FGC) Bell I protocol supports direct-dialed traffic, uses 1 digit for ANI information, 3/10 digits for called party, and 2-stage outpulsing; for example: 911/NPA-Nxx-XXXX and 7 digit ANI.

FGCB2
The Feature Group C Bell II (FGCB2) protocol supports direct-dialed traffic, 2 digits for ANI information and 3/10 digit called number

FGCOS
The Feature Group C Operator Services (FGCOS) protocol supports intraLATA OS calls. This protocol is used for intraLATA toll and assistance calls to a BCC. FGCOS uses the same signaling sequence as FGC.

FGCOF
The Feature Group C Operator Flexible (FGCOF) protocol is based on FGCOS, but has the ability to customize the Stage 1 and Stage 2 outpulsing for any call type.

FGCVZOS
The Feature Group C Verizon Operator Services (FGCVZOS) supports Verizon operator group customization for FGC on top of FGCOS.

FGD
The Feature Group D (FGD) protocol supports 1+ long distance dialing (equal access) and 10 digit ANI.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Appendix B: Protocols

745

FGDAT
The Feature Group D Access Tandem (FGDAT) protocol supports the switch connecting to an AT with 1+ long distance dialing (equal access) and 10 digit ANI on CAS trunks.

FGDATOS
Feature Group D Access Tandem Operator Services (FGDATOS) supports interLATA OS calls. This protocol is used for interLATA operator services and/or directory assistance call types for domestic Interexchange Carriers. FGCOS uses the same singling sequence as FGDAT.

FGDATEO
The Feature Group D Access Tandem to End Office (FGDATEO) protocol supports the switch in the role of an AT and the far end in the role of an EO using FGD.

FGDEOAT
The Feature Group D End Office to Access Tandem (FGDEOAT) protocol supports the switch in the role of an EO and the far end in the role of an AT using FGD.

FGDEOIC
The Feature Group D End Office to Interexchange Carrier (FGDEOIC) protocol supports the switch in the role of an EO and the far end in the role of an IC using FGD.

FGDICEO
The Feature Group D Interexchange Carrier to End Office (FGDICEO) protocol supports the switch in the role of an IC and the far end in the role of an EO using FGD. The FGDICEO protocol is not symmetrical, rather the terminating sequence is FGD.

FGDINC
Feature Group D for International and Carriersupports connecting to a legacy/ tandem switch. This protocol expects: two stage on international (wink-outpulsewink-outpulse), single stage domestic (wink-outpulse-wink).

FXO
Foreign Exchange Officefor trunks that connect to an FXO and provide dial tone to a subscriber or trunks in a multi-line hunt group.

746

Appendix B: Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Trunk Protocols

WSMF2WAY
The Wink Start Multi-Frequency Two Way (WSMF2WAY) protocol supports the following calls on inter-exchange trunks: 1+10D, 101XXX+10D, 0+10D, 0, 011+Country Code (CC)+international number, 01+CC+international number operator assisted.

DS
The Digital Signal (DS) protocol supports PRI connections on the network and user side.

SS7
The SS7 protocol supports signaling for SS7 trunk groups.

FXO
The Foreign Exchange Office (FXO) protocol supports trunks that connect to an FXO and provide dial tone to a subscriber or trunks in a multi-line hunt group.

DIDMF
The Direct Inward Dialing, Multi-Frequency (DIDMF) protocol supports CAS trunks that connect to a PBX.

DIDDTMF
The Direct Inward Dialing, Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DIDDTMF) protocol supports CAS trunks that connect to a PBX.

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Appendix B: Protocols

747

Other Protocols
IDT
The Integrated Digital Terminal (IDT) protocol supports Interface Groups that connect the switch to an RDT and use GR-303 protocol.

MGCP
Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) supports multimedia conferences over IP (Internet Protocol). MGCP is an ASCII-based, application-layer control protocol that establishes, maintains, and ends calls between two or more

terminations. SIP
The Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) supports calls using Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP).

748

Appendix B: Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

You can execute CLI commands locally from your switch room, or you can log on to the switch remotely. Local access requires a PC running a terminal emulation program and a physical connection to the craft port on a T700 card. Remote access requires an Internet connection, and a PC running either a terminal emulation program with a telnet client, or the Open Manager Client. In this chapter:

Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch Terra Term Professional Procomm Plus Open Manager Telnet HyperTerminal

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

749

Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch

Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch

In order to establish a remote connection to a card, you will need that cards IP address. The following sections illustrate several ways to discover a cards IP address.

ISEHouse BOOTP Table

If you have access to the PC that is running ISEHouse, you can find the IP address of every card on the switch from the BOOTP table.

The BOOTP table shows the IP address of every card that boots from ISEHouse. The cards are listed under the DeviceName column and the IP address of that card is listed under the IP Address column. For example, the first line of the above figure shows that Baltimore CCB (Clock Card B) has an IP address of 179.19.164.25.

750

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

OM Client Switch Properties

OM Client Switch Properties

If you have an OM Client running on your PC, you can discover the IP address of the card that connects to the OM Client.
Step
1 2

Action From the Network View of the OM click Network View. Right-click the switch graphic to which you want to connect. A pop-up menu appears.

Select Properties.

The primaryIP attribute contains the IP address of the card that connects to the OM.

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

751

Terra Term Professional

Terra Term Professional

Tip
The Terra Term Professional FAQ can be found at: http:// ttssh2.sourceforge.j p/manual/en/about/ qanda.html

Terra Term Professional is an open source Windows terminal emulator and telnet client that can be used for local or remote switch access. Taqua distributes Terra Term Professional with new software releases.

Local Access
To use Terra Term Professional for local access, connect a serial cable from the COM port of a PC to the craft port of a BIC, LTC, PIC, PIC II, TIC,TICII or clock card. Next, connect to that card using the Terra Term Professional software.

Terra Term Professional Local Access Prerequisites Either a DB-9 male to DB-9 female serial cable, or a DB-25 male to DB9 female serial cable, depending on the COM port connection on the PC.

A PC running Windows 9x/NT/2000/XP with:

at least one serial port an installed copy of Terra Term Professional

Local Connection to the Switch

To make a local connection to the Switch using Terra Term Professional:
Step
1

Action Connect the male end of the serial cable to an unused COM port on the PC. Connect the female end of the serial cable to a craft port on the card with which you want to communicate.

752

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Local Access

Step
3

Action In Windows: Start > Programs > Accessories > Terra Term Pro The New Connection dialog appears.

Click the Serial radio button and select the same COM port you chose in step 1.

Click OK.

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

753

Terra Term Professional

Step
5

Action Next, configure the serial port settings. Select Setup > Serial port...

The Serial Port Setup dialog appears.

6

From the Port drop-list, select the same COM port you chose in step 1.

7 8 9 10 11 12

From the Baud rate drop-list select 38,400. From the Data drop-list select 8. From the Parity drop-list select None. From the Stop drop-list select 1. From the Flow control drop-list select None. Leave the Transmit delay msec/char and msec/line at 0.

754

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Local Access

Step
13

Action Click OK. A blank Terra Term Pro window appears.

Note that the Com port and the baud rate are now part of the window title.
14

Select Setup > Terminal.

The Terminal setup dialog appears.

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

755

Terra Term Professional

Step
15

Action From Terminal ID, select VT100.

Click OK
16

A blank Terra Term Pro window appears.

Note that the COM port, baud rate, and terminal type are part of the window title.
17

Press the <Enter> key several times to get the login prompt. Enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user.

756

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Remote Access

Remote Access
To use Terra Term Professional for remote access, connect the PC to the Internet. Next, connect to a card on the switch using the Terra Term Professional software.

Terra Term Professional Remote Access Prerequisites A PC running Windows 9x/NT/2000/XP with: a connection to the Internet an installed copy of Terra Term Professional Remote Connection to the Switch
To make a remote connection to the Switch using Terra Term Professional:
Step
1

Action In Windows: Start > Programs > Accessories > Terra Term Pro The New Connection dialog appears.

The TCP/IP radio button is selected by default. In the Host field, enter the IP address of the card you want to connect to. To determine this address, see Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch on page 750. In the Service field, select Telnet. Leave the other fields to their default values. Click OK.

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

757

Terra Term Professional

Step
2

Action A Terra Term Pro connects to the switch.

Note that the IP Address is now part of the window title. Before logging on, make sure the terminal type is configured properly
3

Select Setup > Terminal.

The Terminal setup dialog appears.

758

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Remote Access

Step
4

Action From Terminal ID, select VT100.

Click OK
5

Terra Term is still connected to the switch.

You may need to press the <Enter> key several times to get the login prompt. Enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user.

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

759

Procomm Plus

Procomm Plus
Procomm Plus is a Windows terminal emulator and telnet client that can be used for local or remote switch access. Taqua distributed this program with earlier versions of the switch software.

Local Access
To use Procomm Plus for local access, connect a serial cable from the COM port of a PC to the craft port of a BIC, LTC, PIC, PIC II, TIC, TICII or clock card. Next, connect to that card using the Procomm Plus software

Procomm Plus Local Access Prerequisites Either a DB-9 male to DB-9 female serial cable, or a DB-25 male to DB9 female serial cable, depending on the COM port connection on the PC.

A PC running Windows 9x/NT/2000/XP with:

at least one serial port an installed copy of Procomm Plus

Local Connection to the Switch

To make a local connection to the Switch using Procomm Plus:
Step
1 2

Action Connect the male end of the serial cable to an unused COM port on the PC. Connect the female end of the serial cable to a craft port on the card with which you want to communicate. In Windows: Start > Programs > Procomm Plus > Data Terminal.

760

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Local Access

Step
4

Action The Procomm Plus Data Terminal window appears.

Ensure the quick status line has the following settings: Terminal type = VT100 port selection = direct connect-ComX (where X corresponds to the COM port you chose in step 1.) speed = 38400 port settings = N81 If not, click on the appropriate part of the quick status line and change.
5

Follow steps 6 through 9 on page 762 to set up a capture file, otherwise skip to step 10 on page 762 to log in.

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

761

Procomm Plus

Step
6

Action Select >Options>Data Options>Setup Files. The Setup dialog appears

Click the Setup... button

7

The Capture Options dialog appears.

Check the box Query for the file name when capture is started. After the change is made the screen Capture File appears.
8 9

To open the capture file go to Data > Capture File. Type a name to specify the Capture file Click OK

10

You may need to press the <Enter> key several times to get the login prompt. Enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user. The login screen appears.

762

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Remote Access

Remote Access
To use Procomm Plus for remote access, connect the PC to the Internet. Next, connect to a card on the switch using the Procomm Plus software.

Procomm Plus Remote Access Prerequisites A PC running Windows 9x/NT/2000/XP with: a connection to the Internet an installed copy of Procomm Plus Remote Connection to the Switch
To make a remote connection to the Switch using Procomm Plus:
Step
1 2

Action In Windows: Start > Programs > Procomm Plus > Telnet. The Procomm Plus telnet window appears.

Ensure the quick status line has the following settings: Terminal type = VT100 port selection = direct connect-Telnet If not, click on the appropriate part of the quick status line and change.

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

763

Procomm Plus

Step
3

Action Select >Options>Data Options>Setup Files> Setup button for capture. Check the box Query for the file name when capture is started. After the change is made the screen Capture File appears.

Type a name to specify the Capture file Click OK

Follow steps 6 through 9 on page 765 to set up a capture file, otherwise skip to step 10 on page 765 to log in. Select >Options>Data Options>Setup Files. The Setup dialog appears

Click the Setup... button

764

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Remote Access

Step
7

Action The Capture Options dialog appears.

Check the box Query for the file name when capture is started. After the change is made the screen Capture File appears.
8 9

To open the capture file go to Data > Capture File. Type a name to specify the Capture file Click OK

10 11

To Telnet to a T7000 card use the Direct Connect Option. Go to Data > Manual Connect. The manual connect dialog appears.

Enter the IP address of the switch you want to connect to. To determine this address, see Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch on page 750.

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

765

Procomm Plus

Step
12

Action Click OK The login screen appears.

You may need to press the <Enter> key several times to get the login prompt. Enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user.

766

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Remote Access

Open Manager Telnet

Open Manger Telnet is a Windows telnet client available within Open Manager. It can be used for remote switch access. The Open Manager Telnet program is available from every Open Manager Client. The Open Manager Telnet sends commands directly to the Primary Management Interface (PMI) card of the switch you select.

Remote Access
Open Manager Telnet Remote Access Prerequisites A PC running Windows 9x/NT/2000/XP with a connection to the Internet an installed copy of the Open Manager Client Remote Connection to the Switch
To make a remote connection to the Switch using Open Manger Telnet:
Step
1 2

Action From the Network View of the OM click Network View. Right-click a switch graphic to which you want to connect. A pop-up menu appears.

Select Telnet. The Telnet program appears.

NOTE: The method always connects to the same card the OM connects to.
4

After the login prompt appears, enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user.

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

767

HyperTerminal

HyperTerminal
HyperTerminal is a Windows terminal emulator that can be used for local switch access. Microsoft bundled HyperTerminal with all versions of Windows from Windows 95 through WIndows XP.

Local Access
To use Hyper-Terminal for local access, connect a serial cable from the COM port of a PC to the craft port of a BIC, LTC, PIC, PIC II, TIC,TICII or clock card. Next, connect to that card using the Hyper-Terminal software.

Hyper-Terminal Local Access Prerequisites Either a DB-9 male to DB-9 female serial cable, or a DB-25 male to DB9 female serial cable, depending on the COM port connection on the PC.

A PC Windows 9x/NT/2000 with:

at least one COM port an installed copy of HyperTerminal

Local Connection to the Switch

To make a local connection to the switch using HyperTerminal:
Step
1

Action Connect the male end of the serial cable to an unused COM port on the PC. Connect the female end of the serial cable to a craft port on the card with which you want to communicate.

768

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Local Access

Step
3

Action In Windows: Start > Programs > Accessories > HyperTerminal > HyperTerminal (ensure it is the Hyper-Terminal entry without the .ht extension). The Connection Description dialog appears.

4 5

In the Name field enter OCXdirect or the desired name. Click OK. The Connect To dialog appears.

From the Connect using drop-list, select the same COM port you chose in step 1.

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

769

HyperTerminal

Step
7

Action Click OK. A Properties dialog appears.

8 9 10 11 12 13

From the Bits per second drop-list select 38,400. From the Data bits drop-list select 8. From the Parity drop-list select None. From the Stop bits drop-list select 1. Set flow control to None. Click OK. A blank Hyper-Terminal window appears.

770

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Local Access

Step
14

Action Select File > Properties. The Properties dialog appears.

15 16 17

Click the Settings tab. From the Emulation drop-list, select VT100. Click OK. A blank Hyper-Terminal window appears.

18

Press the <Enter> key several times to get the login prompt. Enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user.

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

771

HyperTerminal

772

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

T7000 Getting Started Guide 990-1036-001

Index

Numerics
7-Digit Dialing Across NPA Boundaries 408 911 over CAS 136

A
Access Tandem 525 Account Codes 154 activateCfb 563 activateCfd 564 activateCff 565 activateCfv 562 activateLinkSet 639 activating call forwarding busy 563 call forwarding dont answer 564 call forwarding fixed 565 call forwarding variable 562 EOC 357 link set 639 adding codec lists 425 hosts 429 RDTs 351 SCCP node 484 SS7 link set 478 SS7 links 480 SS7 networks 475 SS7 routes 482 tasks 597 Adding Escape Code Pattern Profiles 144, 157 addLea 181 addLeaCase 187 addLeaSpan 183 addPretranslation 224 Address 35 addTask 597 adduser 48 addVoiceChnl 189

Advanced Intelligent Network 138 AIN 138, 144, 157 Adding Service Patterns 142 Creating AIN Service Pattern Profiles 140 Creating AIN Trigger Profiles 147 Deleting AIN Trigger Profiles 151 Deleting Service Profiles 153 Provisioning AIN 139, 155 aissp 686, 704 alarm history querying 54 alarmHistory 54 alarms editing 53 provisioning 53 querying 54, 56 querying definitions 55 Allowed list 415 allowNX64 297 alternate routing schedules querying 81 ANI Replacement 347 announcements querying 94 Application Domain Object 29 applying patch 660 applying patch 660 applyPatch 660 assign call forwarding fixed 567 assignCff 567 assignSubVM 560 AT 525 attributes querying 86 querying all 85 audio loading on the switch 602 unloading from the switch 603 auditTimers 35

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Index

773

autoRestartOnBoot 297 autoRestartOnLinkBounce 297 available facility quereying 68

B
backwardProgressIndication 301 bChannelAvailabilityProcedure 298 BearerGroup 163 Bearergroup bearerGrpKey 371, 441, 449 beingPorted BEING_PORTED 538 BEING_PORTED_OUT 538 NOT_BEING_PORTED 538 bitsConfig 734, 735 BLI 339 blockCPN 300 blocking 640 circuits 648 links 640 blockLink 640 BLV 339 busy 629

C
CAC_FROM_CARRIER 389 CALEA addLea 181 addLeaCase 187 addLeaSpan 183 addVoiceChnl 189 changePenPW 179 createPenGrp 176 deletePenGrp 177 order of provisioning 175 purgePenLog 195 queryLea 131 queryLeaCase 132 queryPenCommands 127 queryPenData 130 queryPenGrp 128 queryPenLog 133 queryPenTarget 129 removeLea 182 removeLeaCase 188 removeLeaSpan 184 removeVoiceChnl 190 resizePenLog 195

setCaseAttr 194 setLeaAttr 186 setPenAttr 178 setPenGroupTimer 180 startCaseMonitor 192 startLeaMonitor 185 startPenMonitor 191 stopCaseMonitor 193 stopLeaMonitor 185 stopPenMonitor 191 CALL 36 Call Content (CC) Surveillance 174 Call Data (CD) Surveillance 174 call forwarding 553 call forwarding block querying 554 call forwarding busy activating 563 deactivating 563 call forwarding dont answer activating 564 deactivating 564 call forwarding fixed activating 565 assigning 567 deactivating 566 querying 555 removing 567 call forwarding variable activating 562 deactivating 562 querying 553 CALL_BACK 533 CALL_FORWARD_BUSY 533 CALL_FORWARD_FIXED 534 CALL_FORWARD_LOCAL 534 CALL_FORWARD_NOANS 534 CALL_FORWARDING 533 CALL_REJECT 534 CALL_RETURN 534 CALL_TRANSFER 534 CALL_WAITING 534 CALL_WAITING_CALLER_ID 534 CALLER_ID 533 CALLER_ID_BLOCK 533 CALLER_ID_UNBLOCK 533 calling name TCAP querying 654 CALLING_NAME 533 CALLING_NAME_QUERY_REQUIRED 389 callingNameDisplay 296 calls

774

Index

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

logging active 670 querying active 66 querying history 67 resetting simulated calls on a line 38 resetting history 670 simulating 739, 740 starting simulated 39 stopping simulated 40 stopping simulated calls on a line 38 cancelRDTCmd 650 card description 29 card number 41 card type 41 CardConfiguration 163, 165 cards checking connections 604 querying status 77 carrier access codes querying 94 Carriers 196 carriers querying 208 CAS 911 136 E911 136 CAS Options networkServices 248 numOfDIDDigits 247 CAS trunk groups 235 CAS trunks modifying protocols 222 Case Monitoring 175 CDRs querying status 89 viewing amount in buffer 91 changeAlarmDefAttr 53 changePenPW 179 Channel Associated Signaling trunk groups 235 ChargeDelay 244, 332 chargingOffice 336 checking card connections 604 circuit continuity check generating 643 circuitBlock 648 circuitCCR 643 circuitGBlock 644 circuitGReset 644 circuitGUnblock 646 circuitQuery 647

circuitReset 646 circuits blocking 648 querying 647 resetting 646 resetting (group) 644 testing 648 unblocking 648 unblocking (group) 646 circuitTest 648 circuitUnblock 648 Clear Channel trunk groups 252 clearSdList 573 cmdfileEchoOff 36 cmdfileEchoOn 36, 37 codec lists adding 425 creating 425 querying 99 CodecProfile 427 CodecProfileList 425 configuring simulated lines 37 connecting simulated cards 42 simulated spans 42 connections checking card 604 querying 76 contiguousNX6 297 continuityProcedure SS7 Options continuityProcedure 338 continuityTestFrequency 336 Controlled Slip Second 671, 686, 690, 704 COT generating 643 country codes deleting 396 removing 396 craft connections querying 78 create sipVMS 593 createHostIPAddr 429 createLink 480 createLinkSet 478 createPenGrp 176 createPretranslation 223 createProfile 231 createRDT 351 createSS7Network 475 createSS7Route 482

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Index

775

creating codec lists 425 hosts 429 RDTs 351 SCCP node 484 SS7 link set 478 SS7 links 480 SS7 networks 475 SS7 routes 482 Creating Escape Code Pattern Profiles 144, 157 CriticalDigitTimeout 391 cs_config 37 cs_dispstats 38 cs_finish 38 cs_reset 38 cs_settimer 39 cs_start 39 cs_stop 40 CSSP 671, 686, 690, 704 cssp 686, 704 Ctrl + D 46 current processes querying 605 CUSTOM_REPLACE_AIN 389 cvl 686, 704 cvp 686, 704

D
DA_ONLY 271, 305, 322, 343 database querying by manager 83 saving 599 database master querying 83 databases removing 599 dbFlash 599 dbFlashSize 600 d-channels querying 113, 114 deactivateCfd 564 deactivateCff 566 deactivateLinkSet 639 deactivateSCF 568 deactivateSubVM 561 deactivating call forwarding busy 563 call forwarding dont answer 564 call forwarding fixed 566 call forwarding variable 562

deactiveCfb 563 deactiveCfv 562 decommission 52 defaultDN 318 delCountryCodes 396 deleteLink 481 deleteLinkset 479 deleteNode 477 deletePCMap 501 deletePenGrp 177 deletePretranslation 230 deleteSdInfo 572 deleteSS7Network 475, 476 deleteSS7Route 483 deleting country codes 396 international codes 395, 396 point code mapping 501 SCCPNode 487 SS7 link set 479 SS7 links 481 SS7 networks 475, 476 SS7 node 477 SS7 routes 483 tasks 599 Deleting Escape Code Pattern Profiles 144 Denied list 415 deprovisioning RDT lines 354 deprovisionRD 354 devices contents 603 dial 40 Digital Signal Processor description 29 disable 630 displaySubBusGrps 93 dispLocTS 40 querying locked lines 631 dispMidTS 41 DS1 setting loopback 652 DS1 lines syncing 356 DS3 29 DSP description 29 dstConfig 726, 727 dumpTDM 41

776

Index

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

E
E911 over SS7 136 Process 136 EAS 408 echoing starting script 36, 37 stopping script 36 editing alarms 53 enable 630 ENABLE_822_SAC 389 ENABLE_833_SAC 389 ENABLE_844_SAC 389 ENABLE_855_SAC 389 ENABLE_866_SAC 389 ENABLE_877_SAC 389 enableEvent 57 enabling events 57 ENHANCED_CF_NOANS 535 env 41 environment 41 EOC activating 357 EOC and TMC 650 inhibiting 649 querying 113 reconnecting 651 releasing 45 resyncing 651 uninhibiting 649 Equipment 213 esap 686, 704 esbp 686, 704 esl 686, 704 esp 686, 704 event log purging 58 querying 60 setting size 58 stopping 59 eventLogSize 58 events enabling 57 managing 57 posting 58 purging event log 58 querying event log 60 setting log size 58 ExceptionRecoveryTime 391 Extended Area Service 408

F
facility querying 69 FAIL_UNKNOWN_DIGIT_PATTERN 389 fault manager querying 76 setting to automatic 632 setting to manual 632 fc 686, 704 FEI setting IP address 422 FEI options setting 424 fgc911MakeFirstSecond 248 FirstDigitTimeout 391 flash memory size setting 600 FlashDuration 245 FlashInterval 244 forceDbMaster 606 ForwardDisconnectTime 244 FTRS addPretranslation 224 createPretranslation 223 createProfile 231 deletePretranslation 230 queryPretransByDigitPtn 121 queryPretranslation 120 removePretranslation 229

G
generating circuit continuity check 643 COT 643 getMaxEventTransmit 57 getPMCurrent 700 getPMInterval 701 getPMStatus 699 getPMTCA 703 getSLSMap 106 glareControl 247, 336 GR-303 649 GR-303 Interfaces trunk groups 258 GuardTime 244, 332

H
HDLC description 29

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Index

777

Hexadecimal lines 743 hexadecimal 741 High-level Data Link Control description 29 hosts adding 429 creating 429 hu 42 Hunt Groups Circular Hunting 273 Regular hunting 273 Uniform Call Distribution 273 Hunt groups 273 hunt groups querying 73 HyperTerminal 768

L2T3_period 503 L2T4e_period 503 L2T4n_period 503 L2T5_period 503 L2T6_period 503 L2T7_period 503 L2Tie_period 503 L2Tin_period 503 L2TX_abatement 507 L2TX_discard 508 L2TX_onset 506 L3T1_period 503 L3T10_period 504 L3T12_period 504 L3T13_period 504 L3T14_period 504 L3T15_period 504 L3T16_period 504 L3T17_period 504 I L3T19_period 504 L3T2_period 503 implicitChannelId 299 L3T20_period 504 INBOUND_ANI_REQUIRED 389 L3T21_period 504 inhibiting L3T22_period 504 EOC and TMC 649 L3T23_period 504 links 641 L3T24_period 504 inhibitlink 641 L3T25_period 504 inhibitPath 649 L3T26_period 504 InterDigitTimeout 391 L3T27_period 504 Interexchange Carrier 525 L3T28_period 505 Interface trunk groups 258 L3T29_period 505 INTERLATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC L3T3_period 504 389 L3T31_period 505 international codes L3T33_period 505 deleting 395, 396 L3T34_period 505 removing 396 INTERNATIONAL_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_C L3T4_period 504 L3T5_period 504 AC 389 L3T6_period 504 INTRALATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC L3T7_period 504 389 L3T8_period 504 IP trunk groups 307 LCFO_Duration 246 ipConfig 605 LEA Monitoring 175 IXC 525 LEDs querying 78 K line description 29 keepIncoming7dNOA 340 Line Numbering hexadecimal 743 L lines modifying protocols 222 L2T1_period 503 removing from service 628 L2T2_period 503 restoring to service 628

778

Index

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

link sets activating 639 links 640 inhibiting 641 linkSetStatus 107 linkSpan 42 linkStatus querying SS7 links 107 LNP Route List 517 loadAudio 602 loading scripts 31 loading, patch 659 loadPatchArchive 659 Local Access HyperTerminal 768 Procomm Plus 760 Terra Term Professional 752 locked lines querying 631 locked trunks 631 logActiveCalls 670 logging active calls 670 login 46 LongDurationCdrTimeout 391 loopback setting DS1s 652 lossl 686, 704 ls 603

MOPC setting 499 mplicitInterfaceIdi 301 multiple point codes setting 499

N
NANP Route List 519 Network Gateway Endpoint 459 networkServices 248, 339 PRI Options networkServices 297 SS7 Options sendACTNS 340 TNS 339 Transit Network Selection 339 NO_DA 271, 305, 322, 343 NO_DA_INTERLATA 271, 305, 322, 343 NO_DA_INTRALATA 271, 305, 322, 343 NO_INBOUND_PAYSTATION 343 NO_INBOUND_WITHOUT_ANI 305, 322, 343 NO_INTERLATA 322, 343 NO_INTERNATIONAL 271, 322, 343 NO_INTRALATA 271, 305, 322, 343 NO_OS_INTERLATA 271, 305, 322, 343 NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL 271, 305, 322, 343 NO_OS_INTRALATA 271, 305, 322, 343 NO_OSDIALED 271, 305, 322, 343 NO_OSSTATION 271, 305, 322, 343 nodeStatus 108 numOfDIDDigits 247, 299

M
managing events 57 manualClear 52 MaxWinkDuration 245 mbusConfig 722 media stream parameters 431 MediaParam 431 memberOrigination 276 MGCP 358 MGCP trunk groups 359 MinFlashHookTime 244 MinWinkDuration 245 modifying CAS trunk protocols 222 line protocols 222 modifyPretranslation 229 modifyProtocol 222

O
Object Identifier description 30 off-hook 43 OffHookDigMax 245 OffHookDigMin 245 office parameters querying 388 Office Parms country codes 396 OSS Information Digits 393, 395 oh 43 OID 30 OIDs description 30 OLIRequired 338 on-hook 42

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Index

779

OnHookDigMax 245 OnHookDigMin 245 Open Manger Telnet 767 originalNumberOption 301 OS_ONLY 271, 305, 322, 343 Outgoing Signal Customization Provisioning Process 348 Outgoing Signaling Customization 530 outPulseAsDialed 298 outpulseAsDialed 247

contiguousNX6 297 implicitChannelId 299 mplicitInterfaceIdi 301 numOfDIDDigits 299 originalNumberOption 301 outPulseAsDialed 298 redirectingNumberOption 299 rejectOption 296 releaseCompleteAtSetup 300 releaseOption 296 releaseTreatment 301 responseToStatusEnquiry 296 P screenDN 300 sendCalledNumberAsPBX 298 PartialCdrTimeout 391 sendCarrierId 297 passwd 47 sendChargeNumber 300 password 47 sendCPN 300 patch sendLocalCallasSubscriber 301 applying 660 statusEnqOption 269, 296 querying 125, 126 toneOption 296 unapply 661 transferSubadressAllowOption 296 unloading 662 useImplicitChannelIdForPPS 299 patch, loading 659 PRI trunk groups 286 PCAC_FROM_CARRIER 389 Primary Rate Interface trunk groups 286 pcall 43, 739, 740 Priority Call 415 PEED_DIAL8 536 PRIORITY_CALL 535 Peg Counts 708 Process Pen Monitoring 175 911 over CAS 136 PIC2_REQUIRED_FOR_INTRALATA 389 E911 over SS7 136 ping 604 Procomm Plus 760 pingT1 44 protectionSwitch 650 point code mapping provisioning deleting 501 RDT lines 353 removing 501 provisioning alarms 53 setting 500 provisionRDTLine 353 Point Codes 470 ps 605 postEvent 58 Pseudo ANI 345 posting Pseudo Carrier Access Code 345 events 58 PREFIX_RATE_CENTER_OVERRIDES_SUBSCRI Pseudo Carrier Selection Information 345 purgeEventLog 58 BER_RATE_CENTER 389 purgePenLog 195 prefixes querying 407 PreTransKey 224, 230 Q PRI 297 PRI Options query available facility 68 query Carrier 208 allowNX64 297 autoRestartOnBoot 297 query CfvInfo 553 backwardProgressIndication 301 query facility 69 bChannelAvailabilityProcedure 298 query OfficeParms 388 blockCPN 300 query Prefix 407 callingNameDisplay 296 query ScfInfo 553

780

Index

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

query sipVMS 594 query SMDIParms 590 query921Status 113 queryActiveCalls 66 queryAlarmDef 55 queryAlarms 56 queryAttrDefClass 86 queryAttrDefs 85 queryAudio 94 queryCAC 94 queryCallHist 67 queryCard 167 queryCardStatus 77 queryCdrStatus 89 queryCfbInfo 554 queryCfdInfo 554, 555 queryCIC 109 queryConnections 76 queryCounter 719 queryCounterDef 717 queryCounterDefs 714 queryCounters 718 queryDb 83 queryDbKeys 84 queryDbMaster 83 queryDchStatus 114 queryDS1s 113 queryEventLog 60 queryEventRegs 61 queryFaultStatus 76 queryGrp 73 queryIG 87 querying 553, 631 active calls 66 active simulated timers 35 alarm definitions 55 alarm history 54 alarms 54, 56 all attributes 85 alternate routing schedules 81 announcements 94 attributes 86 available facility 68 call forwarding block 554 call forwarding do not answer querying 554 call forwarding fixed 555 call forwarding variable 553 call history 67 calling name TCAP 654 card status 77 carrier access codes 94

carriers 208 CDR status 89 circuits 647 codec lists 99 connections 76 craft connections 78 current processes 605 database by manager 83 database master 83 d-channels 113, 114 EOC and TMC 113 event log 60 facility 69 fault manager 76 hunt groups 73 LEDs 78 office parameters 388 patch 125, 126 prefixes 407 Rate Centers 414 RDT classes 115 RDT commands 119 RDT DS1s 113 RDT interface group 87 RDT lines 116 RDT objects 117 SAC AIN 654 SAC IN 655 SCCP nodes 486 SCCP subsystem 486 selective call forwarding 553 setting wait time 76 simulated line statistics 38 SIP endpoints 100, 101, 102 SM 75 spans 43 SS7 counters 714, 717, 718, 719 SS7 link sets 107 SS7 link timers 110 SS7 network timers 111 SS7 networks 108 SS7 node 108 SS7 node timers 111 SS7 point codes CICs 109 SS7 route timers 112 SS7 Routes 105 SS7 signaling links 106 status 98 substitution 92 system manager 75 Trunk Groups 73 voice mail connections 590

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Index

781

queryIPTrunkReservation 99 queryLea 131 queryLeaCase 132 queryLinkTimers 110 queryListByCodecProfile 99 queryModifiedAttrs 87 queryNodeTimers 111 queryNWTimers 111 queryPatch 125 queryPenCommands 127 queryPenData 130 queryPenGrp 128 queryPenLog 133 queryPenTarget 129 queryPretransByDigitPtn 121 queryPretranslation 120 queryRDTClasses 115 queryRDTLines 116 queryRDTObject 117 queryRouteTimers 112 queryRouting 122 querySchedule 81 queryShelfLEDs 78 querySipEndpoint 101 querySipEndpointByAddr 102 querySipEndpointByName 100 querySpans 43 querySubBus 92 querySubCRVs 118 querySubstitution 92 querySysMgr 75

R
Rate Center 414 Rate Centers 410 RDT classes querying 115 RDT commands querying 119 RDT DS1s querying 113 RDT interface group querying 87 RDT lines deprovisioning 354 provisioning 353 querying 116 removing 355 restoring 355 syncing 356

RDT objects querying 117 RDTs adding 351 creating 351 reprovisioning 352 setting line and trunk timers 221 reconnecting EOC and TMC 651 redirectingNumberOption 299 regMaintConsole 631 rejectOption 296 release921 45 releaseCompleteAtSetup 300 releaseOption 296, 340 releaseTreatment 301 releasing EOC and TMC 45 remActCFSecurityCode 535 Remote Access Open Manger Telnet 767 Procomm Plus 763 Terra Term Professional 757 Remote Call Forwarding Activation 535 REMOTE_CALL_FWD_ACTIVATION 535 remove 628 Remove user 49 removeCff 567 removeLea 182 removeLeaCase 188 removeLeaSpan 184 removePretranslation 229 removeRDTLine 355 removeSCF 569 removeSdListShare 575 removeTask 599 removeVoiceChnl 190 removing call forwarding fixed 567 country codes 396 databases 599 international codes 396 line from service 628 point code mapping 501 RDT lines 355 span from service 628 SS7 link set 479 SS7 links 481 SS7 networks 475, 476 SS7 node 477 SS7 routes 483

782

Index

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

tasks 599 trunk from service 628 reprovisioning RDTs 352 reprovisionRDT 352 resetCallHist 670 resetCRVs 653 resetPMCurrent 706 resetPMIntervals 705 resetPMSummary 707 resetting circuits 646 circuits (group) 644 simulated calls on a line 38 resizePenLog 195 responseToStatusEnquiry 296 restarting SS7 network 638 restartPRI 627 restore 628 restoreDb 606 restoreRTDLine 355 restoring line to service 628 RDT lines 355 span to service 628 trunk to service 628 resync921 651 resyncing EOC and TMC 651 Revertive switchback 584 REVERTIVE_CALL 535 rmFlash 599, 601 rmuser 49 ROHToneDuration 391 Route Lists LNP 517 NANP 519 Tandem ANI 521 Tandem Carrier 523 tandem TG 525 ROUTE_ZERO_MINUS_TO_PIC2 389 routeAdvance 340 routeOnRcvdCarrier 249 Routing Translations Verification (RoVer) 612 rover 612 rrun 44 RTP port base setting 423 run 44 running scripts 44 scripts remotely 44

S
SAC AIN querying 654 SAC IN querying 655 sasp 686, 704 saving database 599 SCCP node creating 484 SCCP nodes querying 486 SCCP subsystem querying 486 SCCPNode 484, 486, 487 SCCPSubsys 486 scheduling tasks 597, 599 Screen Lists allowed list 415 denied list 415 Priority Call 415 Selective Call Acceptance 415 Selective Call Forwarding 415 Selective Call Rejection 415 screenDN 300 scripts 31 loading 31 running 44 running remotely 44 starting echoing 36, 37 stopping echoing 36 Security adduser 48 login 46 passwd 47 rmuser 49 users 49 whoami 48 Security Code Remote Call Forwarding Activation 535 sefs 686, 704 Selective Call Acceptance 415 Selective Call Forwarding 415 Selective Call Rejection 415 SELECTIVE_CALL_ACCEPTANCE 535 SELECTIVE_CALL_FORWARDING 536 send00asOLI 340 sendACTNS NEVER 340

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Index

783

SAC_CARRIER_0110 340 STANDARD 340 sendCalledNumberAsPBX 298 sendCallingName 337 sendCallingNumber 337 sendCallProgress 338 sendCarrierId 297 SS7 Options sendCarrierId 337 sendChargeNumber 300, 337 sendCPN 300 sendGenericDigits 338 sendHopCounter 338 sendImmediateVMWI 596 sendJurisdictionInformation 337 sendLocalCallasSubscriber 301 sendTNS ALWAYS 339 CARRIER_0110 339 CARRIER_NOT_0110 339 NEVER 339 STANDARD 339 Service Profile 152 sesl 686, 704 sesp 686, 704 setAutoMode 632 setCaseAttr 194 setEOCTasks 357 setFeifIPAddr 422 setFeifOptions 424 setL3MOPC 499 setLeaAttr 186 setLineTimer 221 setLoopbackMode 652 setManualMode 632 setMOPC 499 setPCMap 500 setPenAttr 178 setPenGroupTimer 180 setPMDisplayOff 697 setPMDisplayOn 697 setPMTime 692 setQueryWait 76 setRtpPortBase 423 setSubCOS 576 setSubRestrict 576 setSubVoiceMailIndicator 595 setTCA15 694 setTCA24 695 setTCADefaults 704 setting event log size 58

fault manager to automatic 632 fault manager to manual 632 FEI IP address 422 FEI options 424 flash memory size 600 link timers for SLTCT1 502 MOPC 499 multiple point codes 499 point code mapping 500 RTP port base 423 subscriber restrictions 576 subscriber services 576 timers on a RDT trunks 221 timers on RDT lines 221 setting loopback DS1 652 shareSdList 574 shelf number 41 shelf_inv 78 showCDR 91 Signaling System 7 trunk groups 324 simulated cards connecting 42 simulated line statistics querying 38 simulated spans connecting 42 simulating 42, 43 SIP Endpoints Netwowrk Gateway 459 Subscriber Access Gateway 441 SIP endpoints querying 100, 101, 102 sipAllowToUseTopVia 385 sipVMS 594 skipMinDigitsRestriction 248 sleep 45 SLIC driver 45 slicd 45 SLTCT1 setting link timers 502 SLTCT1_period 502 SLTCT2_period 502 SM querying 75 span description 29 transmit signal signal spans

transmit on span 634

784

Index

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

querying 43 removing from service 628 spanStatus 81 SPEED_DIAL30 536 SpeedDialTimeout 391 SS7 911 136 E911 136 SS7 counters querying 714, 717, 718, 719 SS7 link set adding 478 creating 478 deleting 479 removing 479 SS7 link sets querying 107 SS7 link timers querying 110 SS7 links adding 480 creating 480 deleting 481 querying 107 removing 481 SS7 network timers querying 111 SS7 networks adding 475 creating 475 deleting 475, 476 querying 108 removing 475, 476 SS7 node 477 deleting 477 querying 108 removing 477 SS7 node timers querying 111 SS7 Options chargingOffice 336 continuityTestFrequency 336 glareControl 336 OLIRequired 338 sendCallingName 337 sendCallingNumber 337 sendCallProgress 338 sendChargeNumber 337 sendGenericDigits 338 sendJurisdictionInformation 337 terminationType 338 SS7 point codes CICs

querying 109 SS7 route timers querying 112 SS7 routes adding 482 creating 482 deleting 483 removing 483 SS7 signaling links querying 106 SS7 Trunk Groups 324 SS7NetworkStatus 108 SS7Restart SS7 network restarting 638 SS7RouteStatus 105 startCaseMonitor 192 starting script echoing 36, 37 simulated calls 39 simulated SLIC driver 45 simulated TDM controller 45 starting simulated 45 startLeaMonitor 185 startPenMonitor 191 startPM 698 startTCA15 695 startTCA24 696 status 80, 98 statusEnqOption 269, 296 statusFacility 80 stopCaseMonitor 193 stopEventLog 59 stopLeaMonitor 185 stopPenMonitor 191 stopping event log 59 script echoing 36 simulated calls 40 simulated calls on a line 38 stopPM 698 stopTCA15 696 stopTCA24 697 Subscriber Access Gateway Endpoint 441 Subscribers 530 subscribers assigning voice mail 560 deactivating voice mail 561 setting restrictions 576 setting services 576 substitution querying 92

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Index

785

suppressTCA15 693 Surveillance call content 174 call data 174 swact 626 switchback 626 Switchback, revertive 584 switching EOC and TMC 650 switching between 650 switchover 626 syncDS1Line 356 syncing DS1 lines 356 RDT lines 356 syncRDTLine 356 sysApplyPatch 660 sysLoadPatchArchive 659 sysQueryPatch 126 sysStatus 736 system manager querying 75 sysUnapplyPatch 661 sysUnloadPatch 662

T
T1 332 T12 333 T13 333 T14 333 T15 333 T16 333 T17 333 T18 333 T19 333 T20 334 T21 334 T22 334 T23 334 T24 334 T25 334 T26 334 T27 334 T28 334 T34 335 T5 332 T6 332 T7 332 T8 332 TACC 335

Tandem ANI Route List 521 Tandem Carrier 523 Tandem Carrier Route List 523 Tandem TG Route List 525 tasks adding 597 deleting 599 removing 599 scheduling 597, 599 TCAP Service Global Title Translation routing 488 Point Code + Subsystem routing 492 TCAP service 496 destroying 496 TCAPServiceGTT 488 TCAPServicePCSSN 492 TCCR 335 TCGB 335 TCRA/SS7 Timers 335 TCVT 335 TDM description 29 TDM connections viewing simulated 41 TDM controller starting simulated 45 tdmd 45 TELEMARKETER_SCREENING 536 terminationType 338 TerminatorDisconnectDelay 245 TermScanningDuration 391 Terra Term Professiona 752 test 633 testCNameQuery 654 testing circuits 648 testLEDs 737 testSacAinQuery 654 testSacInQuery 655 TGRS 335 THGA 335 THREE_WAY 536 Threshold15Min 672 Threshold24Hour 672 Time Division Multiplex description 29 timers querying active simulated 35 toneOption 296 traceCalledPty 611 traceCallingPty 611 traceCPStates 610

786

Index

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

transferSubadressAllowOption 296 Trunk description 29 Trunk Groups querying 73 restartPRI 627 Trunk groups Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) 235 Clear Channel 252 GR-303 258 IP 307 MGCP 359 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) 286 Signaling System 7 (SS7) 324 SS7 324 trunks removing from service 628 restoring to service 628 txSpanSignal transmit signal on span 634

patch 662 unloadPatch 662 unsuppressTCA15 693 Usage Intervals 708 usap 686, 704 USE_AIN_CALLING_NAME 390 useANIDNIS 248 useImplicitChannelIdForPPS 299 User adding 48 User list 49 User name 48 users 49 using 31, 741 Using dryISE 33 Using Hexadecimal 741 utime 602

V
viewing CDRs in buffer 91 current simulated TDM connections 41 viewing 31 viewRDTCmds 119 VMWIOSITimeout 391 voice mail assigning to subscribers 560 querying connections 590 removing from subscribers 561

U
unapply patch 661 unapplyPatch 661 unblocking 640 circuits 648 circuits (group) 646 links 640 unblockLink 640 unbusy 629 uninhibiting EOC and TMC 649 uninhibitPath 649 unloadAudio 603 unloading

W
WARM_LINE 536 whoami 48 WinkDuration 245

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 990-1012-001

Index

787